Voltage Profile

BIHAR STATE POWER TRANSMISSION COMPANY LTD.
PATNA
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF132/33 KV GRID SUB-STATION
132/33 KV (2x50MVA) GSS at Palasi
VOLUME - II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 1

SECTION-II

VOLUME-II
INDEX
1. Section Project
2. GTR
3. LT Switchgear
4. LT Transformer
5. Surge Arrestor
6. Power & Control Cables
7. Control & Protection Panels
8. PLCC
9. Circuit Breaker
10. Isolator
11. 33 KV Equipment Specification/ System Parameters
12. Air Conditioning System
13. Diesel Generator Set
14. Lighting System
15. Battery & Battery Charger
16. Switch Yard Erection
17. Instrument Transformers
18. Sub-station Structures
19. Clamps and Connectors
20. Hardware Fittings
21. Post Insulator
22. 132/33 KV, 50 MVA Power Transformer
23. 220/132/33 160 MVA / 200 MVA Auto Transformer
24. Civil Work
25. Fire fighting system
26. Tender drawings.
27. Sub Station Automtion System(SAS)

1.0 Section Project
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
Construction of 132/33KV Grid sub-station at Palasi (District Araria) of capacity 2x50
MVA at 132/33 KV level.
1.1 Connectivity :
The Proposed 132/33 KV Grid Sub-Station, at Palasi (District Araria) will have
connectivity as detailed below :-
(A) At 220 KV Level – N/A
(B) At 132 KV level- LILO of One circuit of 132 KV D/C Kishanganj (Old)- Forbisganj
transmission Line at Palasi GSS
2.1 1 132/33kV New sub-station, Palasi (District Araria)

(a) 132/33kV, 3x50MVA Power Transformers
(b) 132kV Circuit breakers, Isolators, Current transformers, Surge arresters,
Capacitor voltage transformers 132kV portable discharge rods and 33kV
Circuit breakers, Isolators, Current transformers, Surge arresters, Potential
transformers and Horn gap fuses
(c) 2 nos. 33/0.433kV, 630kVA Auxiliary LT transformer
(d) Complete control, relay and protection system with BCU for SAS.
(e) Wave traps
(f) PLCC System for the following lines:
The Proposed 132/33 KV Grid Sub-Station, at Palasi (District Araria) will have
connectivity as detailed below :-
(A) At 220 KV Level :- N/A
(B) At 132 KV level - LILO of One circuit of 132 KV D/C Kishanganj (Old)-
Forbisganj transmission Line at Palasi GSS
(g) Fire protection system.

Hydrant system shall be provided for Control room building, DG Set, LT
Transformers area, Fire fighting pump house, Stores and Auto-transformers.
HVW spray system shall be provided for 220/132kV transformers.
Addressable Fire detection system shall be provided for entire control room
building including corridor and toilets.
Portable fire extinguishers for control room building, Fire fighting pump house
and DG Set.
(h) Air conditioning system with all accessories for connectivity with 5 years
guarantee.
(i) LT switchgear (AC/DC Distribution boards)
(j) 100kVA capacity DG Set (silent type) with additional 5 years AMC.
(k) 220V VRLA battery (500AH) & battery charger(60A/50A), 48V VRLA
battery (300AH) and battery charger(45A/30A)
(l) 1.1 kV grade FRLS Power & Control cables along with complete accessories.
(m) Lattice and pipe structures(galvanised) for towers, beams, LM and
equipment support structures (excluding CB support structure which will be as
per manufacturer’s design). LM, 132kV Towers, Beams and equipment
support structures shall be as per BSPTCL Standard drawings.
(n) Bus post Insulators(including requirement for wave traps), insulator (Antifog)
strings and hardware, clamps & connectors suitable for Bus and Bays,
Aluminium tube, conductor, Bus bar and earthing materials, Bay marshalling
box, cable supporting angles/channels, Cable trays, Junction box, buried cable
trenches for lighting, PVC pipes for cabling etc.
(o) Complete lighting and illumination of the switchyard area, Control Room
building,Fire fighting pump house and street lighting including lighting for
approach road outside switchyard fencing and boundary wall etc.
(p) Complete earthmat including all associated works.
(q) Complete Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) for complete

switchyard with control room, auxiliary building and peripherial roads of
GSS.
(r) Mandatory Spares.
(s) Sub-Station Automation System.
(t) All civil works including Earth filling, foundations, boundary wall, Entry gate,
Control Room building, Water storage tank for fire fighting, Pump house,
landscaping, plantation, sanitation etc. covered under civil price schedule.
(u) The Security Check post and separate dorimatory for Security guards with 6
bed is covered in Scope of work.
(v) All works covered under price schedules for supply and erection including civil
works as well as any other item required for completion of the project.
3.0 Before proceeding with the construction work of the new substations the Contractor
shall fully familiarize himself with the site conditions and General arrangements &
scheme etc. Though the Employer shall assist the contractor to the extent possible in
obtaining the required information, it shall not be binding for the Employer to provide
the same. The bidders are advised to visit the substation sites to acquaint themselves
with the topography, infrastructure, design philosophy and to collect required inputs
so as to assess the total requirement for completion of specified scope. The bidder
shall be fully responsible for providing all equipment, materials, system and services
specified or otherwise which are required to complete the construction and successful
commissioning, operation & maintenance of the specified scope in all respects.
All materials required for the Civil and construction/installation works shall be
supplied by the Contractor. The cement and steel shall also be supplied by the
Contractor.
The complete design (unless specified otherwise in specification elsewhere) and
detailed engineering shall be done by the contractor based on conceptual tender
drawings.
4.0 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with
internal/external agencies, project management, training of Employer’s manpower,
loading, unloading, handling, moving to final destination including Employer
supplied material for successful erection, testing and commissioning of the
substation/switchyard.
5.0 Design of substation and its associated electrical & mechanical auxiliaries systems
includes preparation of single line diagrams and electrical layouts, erection key
diagrams, electrical and physical clearance diagrams, design calculations for Earth
mat, Direct Stroke Lighting Protection (DSLP), Bus Bar & Spacers, control and
protection schematics, wiring and termination schedules, design of firefighting
system, designs and drawings of civil works and structures including proto corrected
drawings for structures, indoor and outdoor lighting/illumination and all other
relevant drawings & documents required for engineering of all facilities to be
provided under this contract, are covered in the scope of the Contractor.
6.0 Specific exclusions.

The following items of work are specifically excluded from the scope of the
specifications:
(a) Employer’s site office and stores.
(b) Cable for colony feeder.
6.1 Any other item not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required
for erection, testing and commissioning of the specified scope and satisfactory
operation of the substations are deemed to be included in the scope of the
specification unless specifically excluded.
7.0 Employer has standardised its technical specification for various equipments and
works for different voltage levels. Items which are not applicable for the scope of
these packages, the technical specification for such items shall not be referred to.
8.0 PHYSICAL AND OTHER PARAMETERS

8.1 Meteorological data
For design purposes, ambient temperature should be considered as 500 C.
8.2 Soil Data
To be surveyed by the Agency. The soil testing with regard to bearing capacity and
earh resistivity shall be arranged by BSPTCL/Employer and to be provided to the
contractor. In case the same is not provided by BSPTCL/Employer the same shall be
done by the contractor in presence of Civil Wing of BSPTCL and the expenditure
towards such soil testing shall be reimbursed to the contractor by BSPTCL/Employer
on actual basis.
However, all other relevant data shall be arranged by the contractor.
9.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

The requirement of various items/equipments and civil works are indicated in Bid
proposal sheets.All equipments/items and civil works for which bill of quantity has
been indicated in PRICE SCHEDULE shall be payable on unit rate basis. During
actual execution, any varation in such quantities shall be paid based on the unit rate
under each item incorporated in the Letter of award.
Wherever the quantities of items/works are not indicated, the bidder is required to
estimate the quantity required for entire execution and completion of works and
incorporate their price in respective Bids . For erection hardware items, Bidders
shall estimate the total requirement of the works and indicate module-wise lump
sum price bay wise and include the same in relevant Bids. For module identification,
Bidder may refer typical drawings enclosed with the specifications. Any
material/works for the modules not specifically mentioned in the description in
PRICE SCHEDULE, as may be required shall be deemed to be included in the
module itself.
10.0 BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGS

10.1 For 220kV Substations double main and transfer bus arrangement and for 132kV &
33 kV Substations single main and transfer bus arrangement shall be followed. The
standard lay out and arrangement shown in CBIP sub-station manual/reference
drawing and the practices adopted by BSPTCL are to be followed.
10.2 The reference drawings which form a part of the specifications is provided. The
bidder shall maintain the overall dimensions of the substation, buildings, bay length,
bay width, phase to earth clearance, phase to phase clearance and sectional
clearances, clearances between buses, bus heights but may alter the locations of
equipment to obtain the statutory electrical clearances required for the substation.The
enclosed drawings give the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation buildings,
associated services etc. In case of any discrepancy between the drawings and text of
specification, the requirements of text shall prevail in general. However, the Bidder
is advised to get these clarified from Employer before submission of their bids.
11.0 DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

For the purpose of present scope of work, technical specification (Vol II and Vol III)
shall consist of following sections and they should be read in conjunction with each
other.
In case of any discrepancy between Section-PROJECT and Section-GTR / other
technical specifications on scope of works, Section-PROJECT shall prevail over
all other sections.In case of any discrepancy between Section-GTR and
individual sections for various equipments, requirement of individual equipment
section shall prevail.
12.0 SPARES
12.1 Mandatory Spares
Details of mandatory spares of major items has already been mentioned in Price
Schedule. The additional mandatory spares shall be included in the bid proposal by
the bidder. The prices of these additional mandatory spares shall be given by the
Bidder in the relevant schedule of PRICE SCHEDULE (Vol. I) and shall not be
considered for evaluation of bid. It shall not be binding on the Employer to procure
all of these additional mandatory spares.The bidder is clarified that no mandatory
spares shall be used during the commissioning of the equipment. Any spares required
for commissioning purpose shall be arranged by the Contractor. The un-utilized
spares if any brought for commissioning purpose shall be taken back by the contract.
13.0 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
The bidder shall include in his proposal the deployment of all special tools and
tackles required for erection, testing, commissioning and maintenance of equipment.
In addition to this, the Contractor shall also furnish a list of special tools and tackles
for the various equipment in a manner to be referred by the Owner during the
operation of these equipment.
14.0 Facilities to be provided by the Employer
14.1 Contractor has to obtain Auxiliary HT (33 or 11 KV) power supply from concerned
Discom at new sub-stations and LT supply (415 V) at existing sub-stations will be
made available on chargeable basis at a single point in the sub-station. The prevailing
energy rates of the state shall be applicable. All further distribution from the same for
construction supply shall be made by the contractor. However, in case of non
availability or failure of power due to any unavoidable circumstances, the contractor
shall make his own necessary arrangements like diesel generator sets etc. at his own
cost so that progress of work is not affected and Employer shall in no case be
responsible for any delay in works because of non-availability of power.

14.2 Construction water supply will be made available at a single point in the substation (if
available). All further distribution for the same shall be made by the Contractor. In
case of non availability or inadequate availability of water for construction work, the
contractor shall make his own arrangement at his own cost and the Employer shall in
no case be responsible for any delay in works because of non-availability or
inadequate availability of water.
15.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT

15.1 The contractor shall be responsible and ensure for safety of human and equipment
during the working. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-ordinate and
obtain, Electrical Inspector's clearance before commissioning. Any additional items,
modification due to observation of such statutory authorities shall be provided by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.
15.2 In case of any accident major or minor, mishappening, casualty, injuries etc. the
required immediate compensation has to be paid exclusively by the contractor.
a) Bidders shall note that 220V D.C. auxiliary supply shall be considered at all sub-
stations.
b) Painting details for 220/132kV and 132/33kV Transformers:
The painting details for transformer main tank, pipes, conservator tank, radiator, control
cabinet/ marshalling box etc. shall be as given below. The detailed painting procedure
shall also be submitted along with the bid which shall be finalized before award of the
contract.
Surface Primer coat Intermediate Finish Total dry Colour shade

preparation undercoat coat film thick-
ness (DFT)
Main tank, Blast Epoxy base Epoxy high Aliphatic Minimum 697 shade as per
pipes, cleaning Sa 2 Zinc primer build polyureth IS-5
conservator ½* (30-40 m) Micaceous ane (PU)
tank etc. iron oxide (HB (Minimu
(external m 50 m)
surfaces)
Main tank, Blast Hot oil -- -- Minimum Glossy white for
pipes (above cleaning Sa 2 resistant, paint
80 NB), ½* non-
conservator corrosive
tank etc. varnish or
(Internal paint or
surfaces) epoxy
Radiator Chemical / Epoxy base Epoxy base PU paint Minimum Matching shade of
(external Blast Zinc primer Zinc primer (Minimu tank/ different
surfaces) cleaning Sa 2 (30-40 m) (30-40 m) shade
½* aesthetically
matching to tank
Radiator and Chemical Hot oil proof, -- -- -- --
pipes upto 80 cleaning, if low viscosity
NB (Internal required varnish and
surfaces) flushing with
transformer
oil
Control Seven tank Zinc -- EPOXY Minimum RAL 7035 shade
cabinet / process as chromate paint with for exterior and
marshalling per IS:3618 primer (two PU top interior
box (outdoor & IS:6005 coats) coat
panels)
Note: 1. * indicates Sa 2 ½ as per Swedish Standard SIS 055900 of ISO 8501 Part-1.
2. Painting details of RTCC panels shall match with control and relay panels.

c) In all 220/132/33 kV & 132/33 kV new substations 220V & 48 V DC batteries
shall be VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) type. Batteries & Battery chargers
shall be as per Technical specification.
d) The quantity requirement of portable and wheel/trolley mounted extinguishers has
been given in PRICE SCHEDULE.
e) The quantity requirement of High wall type split AC units of 2 TR capacity has
been given in the PRICE SCHEDULE. The quantity of AC system including
exhaust fan shall be based on heat load calculations.
f) Section:Control & relay panels, Part-I (Applicable for sub-station) shall be
applicable.
i) Control, relay and protection panels for 220kV shall be Simplex type; Control,
relay and protection panels for 132kV shall be Simplex / Duplex type as
indicated in the PRICE SCHEDULE; Control, relay and protection panels for
33kV shall be accommodated in a single panel.
ii) 1 no. Under frequency relay (range: 47.5Hz to 52.5Hz) with df/dt feature shall
be provided for each line protection panel for 220kV, 132kV and 33kV. (If
under frequency relay function is provided in the E/F & O/C relay, then
separate U/f relay is not required.)
iii) One no. ABT type DLMS compliant Energy meter (suitable to operate as
non ABT or ABT mode at the descretion of BSPTCL/Employer) for each line
feeder, HV side & LV side of each Power transformer. The active energy (Wh)
measurement shall be carried out on a 3-phase, 4-wire principle with an
accuracy as per class 0.2 S of IEC-62053-22:2003. For reactive power(VAR)
and reactive energy(VARh) measurement, IEC-62053-23:2003 shall be
complied with. The accuracy of measurement of reactive energy shall be as per
class 2.
1 no. data collection device alongwith necessary software suitable for
commonly available PC shall be provided for each Sub-station.
g) 132kV Wave traps shall be suspension mounting type. 220kV Wave traps shall
be pedestal mounting type. However, this will be decided during final
engineering.
h) In case of LILO lines, the scope includes shifting of existing PLCC equipment
from one end to the new sub-station as per requirement for one section of the
LILO line and provision of additional carrier terminal and protection coupler as
required for other section.
i) All HPSV/HPMV/Metal halide lamp fixtures shall be provided with wire-wound
ballasts. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with high frequency electronic
ballasts. The Ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance
with relevant standard and function satisfactorily under site condition specified.
The ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and power loss.High
frequency electronic ballasts shall be capable of satisfactory performance in
adverse environment like that of EHV substation. Ballasts shall cosist of AC/DC
convertor, high frequency power oscillator and low pass filter. The ballasts shall
be suitable for use of nominal voltage of 240V +/- 10%, 50 Hz supply. The filter
circuit shall suppress the feedback of high frequency signals to the mains. The
ballast shall be rated for 36/40W fluorescent fixtures. The ballasts shall confirm to
IEC 68-2-6FC, IEC 929 for performance, IEC 928 for safety and EN 55015, EN
55022A for RFI and EN 61003.
i. Power factor of fluorescent lamp fixtures with HF electronic ballast shall
not be less than 0.90 and that of High pressure Sodium Vapour, Mercury
Vapour and Metal Halide lamp fixtures shall not be less than 0.85.
ii. The lighting fixtures for switchyard lighting shall be mounted on LMs
wherever LMs are provided. Where LMs are not available, the fixture may
be mounted on Gantry structures.
j) 2 nos. LT transformer of rating 315KVA, 33/0.433kV shall be used to feed the
substation auxiliaries These LT transformers should not be used for construction
purpose.
k) At 132/33kV(new) sub-stations, the Lightning mast height shall be 40m (Lattice
structure: 37.5m; Spike:2.5m) irrespective of the height indicated in the model
specification.
l) Plinth height of gantry and equipment structures in case of extension of existing
sub-stations shall match with the existing foundations.
m) At existing sub-stations which are being extended under present scope, earthmat
design shall be based on measurement of soil resistivity to be taken in the
adjoining / nearby vacant area since correct soil resistivity value cannot be
obtained in the existing switchyard. In case of existing sub-stations, earthmat
design shall be done for entire switchyard area. However, earthmat shall be laid
only in the present bay area based on the design for entire switchyard and should
be connected to the existing earthing system.
n) In case of existing sub-stations, cutting in the floor, provision of channel/angle
frame for installation of C&R and PLCC panels including making good the floor
after the works shall also be in the scope of the contract.
o) Dismantling of existing structures and equipment including
interconnection/stringing wherever required are deemed to be included in the
scope of the contractor without any additional cost implication to BSPTCL even
though the same is not specifically mentioned in the bid document.
p) Wherever quantity and unit are indicated, the actual quantity erected shall be
considered for payment purpose; Wastage shall not be considered.
i) Civil construction drawings for the following shall be as per BSPTCL
ii) 220kV tower, LM and equipment foundations
iii) Fire fighting pump house except Fire water tank
iv) Concrete and Bitumen roads, road culverts
v) Cable trench section and cable trench crossings
vi) Cable trench sump pit
vii) Details of drain
viii) Fence and Gate (Structure & foundation)
ix) Rain water harvesting
x) Control room building for 132/33kV new sub-stations.
xi) Control room building for 220/132kV new sub-station .
All the civil design and drawings are in the scope of contractor.
q) One no. Marshalling kiosk shall be provided for two nos. of 33kV bays and one no.
marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each 220KV and 132KV Bays separately.
r) 50x6mm GS Flat shall be used in case of 33kV column, equipment & auxiliary
structures in place of 75x12mm GS flat specified at clause no. 8.4(b) & (c), Section-
Switchyard erection of model technical specification.
s) 4” IPS (EH type) Aluminium tubular bus conductor shall be used for equipment
interconnection wherever required as per layout drawing.
t) The HVW spray system shall be designed to have a pressure of 5.5 kg/sq.cm at 180
cu.m/hour (instead of 350 cu.m/hour indicated in the model technical specification) at
the farthest transformer location as per tender drawings. The total storage capacity of
two nos. water storage tanks shall be 320 cu.m above the pump casing instead of 420
cu.m indicated in the model technical specification. Only 4 nos. (instead of 10 nos.
indicated in the model technical specification) spare annunciations shall be provided
for annunciation panels both in control room and pump house.The HVW spray pump
capacity required shall be 273 cu.m per hour instead of 410 cu.m per hour indicated
in the data sheet for Horizontal Centrifugal pumps under Section-Fire protection of
technical specification.
u) Soak pit capacity for transformers shall be 130% of volume of oil in the transformer.
Further, one 0.5 H.P. pump shall be supplied and installed by the contractor for each
transformer (220/132kV & 132/33kV) soak pit to evacuate firefighting/rain water
and oil from the sump pit to the nearest drain.
v) One 3 H.P. pump for cable trench sump pit and drain sump pit shall be supplied
and installed by the contractor.
w) The contractor shall submit LT switchgear single line diagrams ,scheme and GA
drawings fulfilling the same and other requirements as per Section-LT Switchgear
for Employer’s approval during detailed Engineering.
x) Supervision of erection, testing and commissioning of Transformers, Circuit
Breakers, Isolators, Control, relay & protection, PLCC, Battery Charger, and
SAS shall be done by service engineer of respective manufacturers.
y) Floor details for ACDB, DCDB, toilet and pantry shall be as per details in the
relevant clauses of Technical Specification.
Sub Station Automation:

The technical specification of SAS is enclosed in the tender specification. There will not be KIOSK
located in switch yard. All signals from Sub-Station bays will come to C&R panels housed in the
control room. The bay control unit and other components of automation system will be housed in
C&R panel. Necessary networking and interfacing through electrical and optical network will be
done thereafter. The human machine interface (HMI), server, monitor etc shall be located in separate
cubical to be created inside the control room by glass separation. The air conditioning system of
control room is to be designed with ample adequacy sufficient redundancy to ensure proper
functioning of automation system in all weather condition with outage of many air conditioning
units. The computers and server to be used for SAS shall be of industrial duty. The monitor shall be
of LED type of higher resolution Guarantee period of SAS shall be 5 Years (Including service
assistance part replacement during O&M). Mandatory spare shall not be used during Guarantee
period. The items and quantity of mandatory spares are to be specified by bidder and their price
should be included in the offer on lump sum basis. The addition spare for successful operation of
SAS for 5 years beyond guarantee period should also be indicated. This shall include Cards and
other electronic components which undergoes design change quite frequently due to up gradation.
However, price of such addition spares shall not be considered for evaluation purpose.
It is mandatory on part of bidder to indicate quantity & rate for mandatory spare, additional
spare & other electronics items for replacement. The bid may be rejected on ground of non
submission. The auxiliary supply voltage will be 250V DC and 415V 3phase A.C.
Computer and laptop mentioned in tender specification and shall be supplied in additional of SAS
system. The laptop shall be of business class with latest configuration and industrial use. The
desktop shall also be of same duty cycle and latest configuration.
The upgradation of software during the guarantee period shall be done by the contractor
without any cost implication. If any additional Hardware is required for implementation of upgraded
software the same shall also be provided without any cost implication.
 The SAS network shall be designed with sufficient redundancy in the network to
avoid any problem in operation or data communication in case of outage of any
component of the SAS network viz. Ethernet switch / any element / component etc. or
due to malfunctioning. Although the SAS will not be affected due to outage of any of
the component as sufficient redundancy is being provided, the defective component/
segment shall be rectified / replaced within a week of the intimation.
 The Ethernet switch shall be managed type /Level-2 type with at-least 20% extra port.
 The gateway shall be suitable for communication with multiple protocol i.e. Modbus,
IEC-61850 Edition-2, 101, 104, GPRS etc.
 Auxilliary BCU shall be provided for other items viz. Battery Charger, ACDB,
DCDB etc.
 Provision shall be made for cyber security of the complete system as per the
standards and the prevailing rules/ directives. Any other item (including VPN server
etc.) required for making provision of cyber security shall be provided by the
contractor without any extra cost.
 All Software installed for SAS shall be tested as per the IEC/ Standards.
CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each type
of panel.
CONTROL PANEL (33kV)
Various types of control panels shall consist of the following.
a. Ammeter with Selector switch 1 set for each line, TBC and Transformer
b. Wattmeter with transducer 1 set for each line, transformer
c. Varmeter with transducer 1 set for each line, transformer
d. CB Control switch 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
e. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
f. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
g. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
h. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
i. White indicating lamp 2 nos for each feeder
(DC healthy lamp)
j. Annunciation windows with 6 nos for each feeder
associated annunciation relays
k. Puch button for alarm Accept/ 3 nos for each control panel
reset/lamp test
l. Protection transfer 1 no. for each breaker(Except TBC breaker)
m. Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panels
n. Voltmeter with selector switch 1 no for each line, transformer
o. Cut out, mounting and wiring Lot for transformers
for RWTI and selector switch
p. One Bay control and Protection unit (BCPU) along with bay mimic to be provided for each bay
separately in Control panel
Note :
1. For transformer feeders, all equipments of control panel shall be provided separately for HV
and MV sides.
2. The above list of equipments mentioned for control panel is generally applicable unless it is
defined elsewhere and in case of bay extension in existing substations, necessary equipments
for matching the existing control panel shall be supplied.
3. Each line/HV side of transformer/LV side of transformer/TBC shall be considered as one
feeder for above purpose.
LINE PROTECTION PANEL
The Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following relays and protection
schemes
Sl.No. Description 33KV
1. 3 phase trip relays(Hand reset) 1 no.
2. Flag relays, carrier receive relays, aux. relays Lot
Timers etc. as per scheme requirements.
3. 0.2s class ABT energy meters (with Modem) 1 no.
4. Non-Directional back up Over current and 1 set
E/F protection scheme.
5. Under Frequency relay (with df/dt feature – Separate relay) 1 No.
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL

I. The protection panel for 132/33kV Transformer shall consist of the following
equipments.
132kV side 33kV side
1. Transformer Differential protection scheme 1 no. Nil
2. Restricted Earth fault protection scheme 1 no. 1 no.
3. Directional back up over current and E/F Relay 1 set Nil
With non directional high set feature
4. Non-Directional back up over current and E/F Nil 1 set
Relay with non-directional high set feature
5. Over fluxing protection scheme Nil 1 no.
6. Over load protection scheme 1 no. Nil
7. Three phase trip relays 2 no. 2 no.
8. Flag relays, aux. relays, timers etc. as per Lot Lot
Scheme requirements including transformer
Alarms and trip function
8. 0.2s class ABT energy meters (with Modem) 1 no. 1 no.
BREAKER RELAY PANEL

The breaker relay panel for 33kV shall comprise of the following :
Without A/R
1. DC supply supervision relay 2 no.

2.Trip circuit supervision relays 2 nos.
3. Flag relays, aux. relays, timers, trip relays etc. Lot
As per scheme requirements.
COMMON EQUIPMENTS (for 33kV)
The following common equipments shall be provided for each new substation. These
equipments shall be mounted and wired in the C&R panel offered.
1. Common Annunciation Scheme 1 set
2. Bus voltmeter (Digital) 1 no. for each main bus
3. Bus frequency meter (Digital) 1 no. for each main bus
4. Bus healthy indication lamps 3 nos. for each bus.
Technical Parameters for 50 MVA and 20 MVA, 132/33 kV,3-Phase Two-winding

transformers:
1.1 Rating - HV/LV 50MVA/50MVA 20MVA/20MVA
(for 50 MVA) (for 20 MVA)
1.2 Cooling ONAN/ONAF ONAN/ONAF

1.3 Rating at different cooling 80% / 100% 80% / 100%
1.4 Type of transformer Two winding Two winding

transformer transformer
1.5 Voltage Ratio 132/33 kV 132/33 kV
1.6 Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
1.7 Phases Three Three
1.8 Impedance
i)
HV/LV impedance at 750 C :
- Principal Tap 12.5% 10%
1.9 Service Outdoor Outdoor
1.10 Duty Continuous Continuous

1.11 Vector Group YNyn0 YNyn0
1.12 Overload capacity As per IS:6600/1972 As per IS:6600/1972
/ IEC - 354 / IEC – 354
1.13 Temperature rise over

500 C ambient temp.:
Of top oil measured by 500 C 500 C
Thermometer
Of winding measured by 550 C 550 C
Resistance method
1.14 Max. design ambient 500 C 500 C
Temperature
1.15 Windings HV LV HV LV
i) System Fault level(kA) 31.5 31.5 25 (for 3 sec) 31.5 25
for 1 sec. (for 1 sec)
ii) 1.2/50 micro sec. impulse 550 170 550 170
withstand voltage kVp
iii) One minute power freq. 230 70 230 70
withstand voltage kV(rms)
iv) Winding connection Star Star Star Star
v) Neutral Solidily grounded Solidily grounded
vi) Insulation Graded Uniform Graded Uniform
1.15 Tap Changer
i) Tap range Tap changer shall be
located at the neutral end
of 132 kV winding for
------- achieving +5% to -15% of ------------
HV variation in the step of
1.25%.
It shall be of constant flux
Voltage variation type as per
Cl. 3.2 of IS:2026 Pt-IV/1977
ii) Tap control Full capacity – on load tap changer
suitable for group/independent,
------- remote/local electrical and local ----------
manual operation and bi-directional
power flow.
1.16 Bushing HV LV Neutral HV LV Neutral
i) Rated Voltage(kV) 145 36 36 145 36 36
ii) Rated Current(Amp) 400 1600 1600 250 630 630
iii) 1.2/50 micro sec. 650 170 170 650 170 170
impulse withstand
voltage kVp
iv) One minute power 275 70 70 275 70 70
withstand voltage
kV(rms)
v) Minimum total 3625 900 900 3625 900 900
creepage distance
(mm)
vi) Mounting Tank Tank Tank Tank Tank Tank
cover cover side cover cover side
1.17 Tank type Conventional Conventional

1.18 Partial discharge 500 pico-coulomb 500 pico-coulomb
Level
1.19 Noise level As per NEMA TR-1 As per NEMA TR-1

Note: 1. In case of parallel operation with existing transformer,the impedance,OLTC connection &
range and the winding configuration (if necessary) is to be matched with the existing.
1.20 Bushing Current transformer Parameters :
1.20.1 Current transformers shall comply with IS : 2705 / IEC-185.
1.20.2 It shall be possible to remove the turret mounted current transformers from the tank without
removing the tank cover. Necessary precautions shall be taken to minimize eddy currents and
local heat generated in the turret.
1.20.3 Current transformer secondary leads shall be brought out to a weatherproof terminal box near
each bushing. These terminals shall be wired out to cooler control cabinet/marshalling box
using separate cables for each core.
1.20.4 Bushing current transformer parameters indicated in this specification are tentative and liable
to change within reasonable limits. The contractor shall obtain Employer’s approval before
proceeding with the design of bushing current transformers.
A) 50 MVA,132 /33 kV Two –winding Transformer :
(on each phase connection)
HV Side HV Neutral LV Side LV Neutral
a) Ratio (A)
Core-1 400/1 400/1 1000/1 1000/1
Core-2 300/1 - 1000/1 -
b) Min. knee point

Voltage and accuracy
Class:
Core-1 800V 800V 1000V 1000V

Class PS Class PS Class PS Class PS
Core-2 0.5 Class - 0.5 Class -

30 VA 30 VA
c) Max. CT resistance
Core-1 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms
Core-2 - - - -
d) Application
Core-1 REF REF REF REF

(near the wdg)
Core-2 Metering - Metering -
e) Max. magnetization
Current (at knee point
Voltage)
Core-1 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA
Core-2 - - - -
B) 20 MVA,132 /33 kV Two –winding Transformer :

(on each phase connection)
HV Side HV Neutral LV Side LV Neutral

a) Ratio (A)
Core-1 200/1 200/1 600/1 600/1
Core-2 150/1 - 400/1 -
b) Min. knee point

Voltage and accuracy
Class:
Core-1 300V 300V 600V 600V

Class PS Class PS Class PS Class PS
Core-2 0.5 Class - 0.5 Class -

15 VA 15 VA
c) Max. CT resistance
Core-1 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms
Core-2 - - - -
d) Application
Core-1 REF REF REF REF
(near the wdg)
Core-2 Metering - Metering -
e) Max. magnetization
Current (at knee point
Voltage)
Core-1 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA
Core-2 - - - -
Note: 1. Accuracy class PX as per IS.
2. Class (for the relevant protection and duties) as per IEC 185.
3. Parameters of WTI CT for each winding shall be provided by the contractor.
Annexure-VI
1.0 AUTOTRANSFORMER / REACTOR FOUNDATION, RAIL TRACK/ ROAD

CUM RAIL TRACK
The Contractor shall provide a RCC Rail cum road system suitable to cater the load of
respective Transformer integrated with the Autotransformer / Reactor foundation to enable
installation and the replacement of any failed unit . The transfer track system shall be suitable to
permit the movement of any failed unit fully assembled (including OLTC, bushings) with oil.
This system shall enable the removal of any failed unit from its foundation to the nearest road. If
trench/drain crossings are required then suitable R.C.C. culverts shall be provided in accordance
with I.R.C. standard / relevant IS.
The Contractor shall provide a pylon support system for supporting the fire fighting
system.
Each Autotransformer/Reactor including oil conservator tank and cooler banks etc.
shall be placed in a self-sufficient pit surrounded by retaining walls (Pit walls). The
clear distance of the retaining wall of the pit from the Autotransformer/Reactor shall
be 20% of the Autotransformer/Reactor height or 0.8m whichever is more. The oil
collection pit thus formed shall have a void volume equal to 130% volume of total oil
in the Autotransformer/Reactor. The minimum height of the retaining walls shall be
150 mm above the finished level of the ground to avoid outside water pouring inside
the pit. The bottom of the pit shall have an uniform slope towards the sump pit. While
designing the oil collection pit, the movement of the autotransformer must be taken
into account.
The grating shall be made of MS flat of size 40mmx 5mm placed at 30mm center to
center and 25mmx5mm MS flat at an spacing of 150mm at right angle to each other.
Maximum length of grating shall be 2000mm and width shall not be more than
500mm. The gratings, supported on ISMB 150mm, shall be placed at the formation
level and will be covered with 100mm thick layer of broken/crushed/non-crushed
stone having size 40mm to 60mm which acts as an extinguisher for flaming oil.
Each oil collection pit shall be drained towards a sump pit within the collection pit
whose role is to drain water and oil due to leakage within the collection pit so that
collection pit remains dry.
1.1 FOUNDATION
Complete foundation shall be made of reinforced cement concrete and shall be
designed as per guidelines for design of foundations given in the specification.
1.2 DRAINAGE
Complete foundation shall be made of reinforced cement concrete and shall be

designed as per guidelines for design of foundations given in the specification
considering factor of safety not less than 1.5.
2.0 FIRE PROTECTION WALLS

2.1 GENERAL
Fire protection walls shall be provided, if required, in accordance to the Standards

and CBIP recommendations.
2.2 FIRE RESISTANCE
The firewall shall have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. The partitions, which
are made to reduce the noise level, shall have the same fire resistance. The walls of
the building, which are used as firewalls, shall also have a minimum fire resistance of
3 hours.
The firewall shall be designed to protect against the effect of radiant heat and flying
debris from an adjacent fire.
2.3 DIMENSIONS
The firewall shall extend 600 mm on each side of the Autotransformer/Reactors and
600 mm above the conservator tank or safety vent.
These dimensions might be reduced in special cases, as per the approval of owner
where there is lack of space. A minimum of 2.0meter clearance shall be provided
between the equipments e.g. Autotransformer/Reactors and firewalls.
The building walls, which act as firewalls, shall extend at least 1 m above the roof in
order to protect it.
2.4 MATERIALS
The firewall will be made of reinforced concrete (M-20 grade), as per the system
requirements.

Annexure-IX
A. Points counts for the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

(Applicable for each 132/33 kV new sub-station)
Sl. No. Type of Telemetry point Qty. Remarks

1 Analogue Input 21 (a) P,Q for each feeder/transformer.
(b) Bus V, F for each bus.
( c) OLTC position for each transformer
2 Digital Input 56 (a) Dual status contacts : (1 No & 1 NC) for
each breaker.
(b) Single status contact : Protection contact 1
per feeder/transformer/BUS.
( c) Single status contact : 1 per isolator.
3 Digital control output 74 (a) TRIP/CLOSE of circuit breakers.
(with interposing relays) (b) OPEN/CLOSE of Isolators.
Note : 1. Cabling with control and relay panels shall be carried out for current bays(132kV) as per
single line diagram of the substation, however all analogue and digital points shall be wired
to terminal blocks in the RTU for external interface.
2. Except isolator contact all other contacts shall be initially defined as SOE.
B. Points counts for the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

(Applicable for 220/132/33 kV sub-station):
Sl. No. Type of Telemetry point Qty. Remarks

1 Analogue Input 53 (a) P,Q for each feeder/transformer.
(b) Bus V, F for each bus.
( c) OLTC position for each transformer
2 Digital Input 148 (a) Dual status contacts : (1 No & 1 NC) for
each breaker.
(b) Single status contact : Protection contact 1
per feeder/transformer/BUS.
( c) Single status contact : 1 per isolator.
3 Digital control output 198 (a) TRIP/CLOSE of circuit breakers.
(with interposing relays) (b) OPEN/CLOSE of Isolators.
Note : 1. Cabling with control and relay panels shall be carried out for current bays(220kV and
132kV) as per single line diagram of the substation, however all analogue and digital points
shall be wired to terminal blocks in the RTU for external interface.
2. Except isolator contact all other contacts shall be initially defined as SOE.
3. The total point counts shall be minimum 512 nos.

LT SWITCHGEAR
LT switchgear shall essentially consist of following distribution boards conforming to technical

specifications :
415V, Main Switchboard (1 no.) :
This board shall consist of two (2) nos. – ACB Incomers, one (1) no. – ACB Bus –coupler and
required number of MCCB outgoing feeders. Both incomers and bus coupler shall have same
current rating. The board shall receive two incoming supplies through 630 KVA 33/0.433 KV LT
Transformers .The board shall have 2 sections and all major loads e.g. indoor lighting, outdoor
switchyard lighting including receptacles,Street lighting,Air Conditioning units,HVW motor for fire
fighting,exhaust fans,oil filtration, supply to ACDBs etc. shall be fed from each section(feeds to be
duplicated)through MCCB units of appropriate rating. Both Incomers and bus-coupler shall have
mechanical (castle key) as well as electrical interlock to prevent paralleling of incomers. The
switchboard shall have all necessary metering, indications and protections (U/V, E/F, Instantaneous
O/C relays). The contractor shall furnish details of no. of feeders and calculations for feeder ratings
during detailed engineering for Employer’s approval.
415V, AC distribution board (1 no.) :
This board shall have three MCCB incomers, two through Main Switchboard and one through DG
set/alternate source with all necessary mechanical/electrical interlocks for preventing parallel
operation. This board shall have 2 sections and bus coupler of adequate rating. All essential loads of
substations including all MB’s supply, Chargers supply,Fire Fighting,ACDB and Annunciation
panels,Jockey Pump,DG set AMF panel,all control supplies, emergency lighting etc. shall be fed
from each section (feeds to be duplicated) through MCCBs of adequate rating.The board shall have
all necessary metering, indications and protections. The contractor shall furnish details of no. of
feeders and calculations for feeder ratings during detailed engineering for Employer’s approval.
415V, AMF panel (1 no.) :
Details of AMF (Automatic Main’s Failure) panel are mentioned in technical specification. This
panel shall be supplied to start DG set in case of AC failure.
250/220V DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD (1 NO.):

250/220 V DCDB shall be suitable for connection with two sets of battery & two sets chargers in
case of new substations & 1 set battery & 1 set charger in case of extension substations. 250V/220V
DCDB shall feed all loads for control and protection purposes including emergency DC lighting
RTCC supply etc.through 2 Pole MCB feeders of appropriate rating. The board shall have all
necessary, metering, indications & protections (U/V, O/V, E/F).
48V DCDB (1 no.) :
48V DCDB shall be suitable for connection with two sets of battery & two sets chargers in case of
Saharsa/Madhepura(new) 220/132/33 kV new substation and one sets of battery & two sets chargers
in case of all 132/33 kV new substations & 220/132 kV extension substatons and 1 set battery & 1
set charger in case of 132/33 kV extension substations. 48V DCDB shall feed all loads for PLCC
purposes including EPAX,Telemetery,Event logger etc.through 2 pole MCB feeders of appropriate
rating. The board shall have all necessary metering, indications & protections (U/V, O/V).
Common requirement for all boards
The bidder shall make his own estimation for all present and future feeders required as per
Substation single line diagram and GA/Layout. 20% spare outgoing feeders of each Type & Rating
shall be provided in respective board.
The other Technical requirements as per Section – L.T. Switchgear are to be met except for the
above.

IMPORTANT POINTS TO BE NOTED BY TENDERERS BEFORE FILLING
UP OF PRICE SCEDULES
Not understanding anything mentioned anywhere in the specifications, the following
conditions shall prevail over all other conditions:
1. 220KV, 132KV & 33KV Isolators
The 220KV, 132KV & 33KV Isolators shall be provided with moving contacts manufactured
completely with only Hard Drawn Electrolytic Copper only. Moving contacts of Aluminium
shall not be acceptable in any case.
All current carrying parts of the Isolators shall be designed for maximum current
density not exceeding the limits as indicated below:
a) Hollow tube Sections --- Copper – 2.0A/sq mm
--- Aluminium – 1.0A/sq mm

b) Other Sections and contacts --- Copper – 1.6 A/sq mm
--- Aluminium – 0.8 A/sq mm
The tender specifications stands modified to the above extent.
2. ACDB and DCDB
The ACDB and DCDB shall be suitable for feeders of complete grid substation with 20%
spare feeders, with provision for incoming AC power from two no’s. of SSTs and also with
provision for incoming DC power from two no’s. of Battery banks. Arrangement shall be
made in the ACDB and DCDB for provisions to use either of AC source or both the AC
Sources at a time in ACDB and also provisions to use either of DC source or both the DC
Sources at a time in DCDB.
The provision shall also be made for incoming power from generator in case of
failure of power from SST’s.
The buses of ACDB and DCDB shall be made of Hard Drawn Electrolytic Copper
only. All other provisions shall also be made as per provisions of Technical specifications.
3. Control and Relay panels

In Control and Relay panels the provision for under frequency relays with df/dt features have
been made in case of 220KV, 132KV and 33KV line feeders as well as bus coupler feeders.
In case the feature of under frequency relays with df/dt feature is available in Earth fault and
over current relays provided in the feeder panels, separate under frequency relays shall not be
required to be provided. However, if this feature is available in case of Differential or
Distance protection relays, then separate Under frequency relays with df/dt feature will be
required to be provided.
The meters are required to be communicable type. In case the contractors intend to
supply one communicable type multifunction meter, they can do so but they will have to
provide additionally ammeters, voltmeters and wattmeters of non communicable type as and
where applicable.
In case of transformer control and relay panels, one no of Master trip relays may be
provided on each HVside and LV side provided the model of tripping relays are provided
with suitable no of contacts and meet the requirement of the protection scheme.
LED type of lamps are also acceptable.
All energy meters to be installed in the Control & Relays panels for 220KV, 132KV &
33KV shall be DLMS protocol complied 0.2s accuracy class AC static Trivector energy
meter modules suitable for inter utility metering feeder/bulk consumer metering feeder,
metering with Availability Based Tariff and Time Of Day features alongwith PC
hookup cable, relevant communication software and all other accessories as per
Technical Specifications with MODEMs suitable for communication and Data
Transfer.
All Control & Relay Panels shall be suitable for SAS/SCADA applications in future.
4. Circuit Breakers
The type of 220KV & 132KV circuit breakers is C-2, M-2, E-2 type and 33KV circuit
breakers is C-2, M-2, E-2 type. The 220KV, 132KV and 33KV breakers shall be necessarily
required to be offered with total break time of 60 msec maximum only. The minimum
guaranteed operations at full load current for 33KV circuit breakers shall not be less than
10000 operations. The breaker of the above type and duly type tested with the above model
only shall be acceptable.
The current rating of the circuit breakers shall be equivalent to the highest current
rating for which breakers have been type tested and type test reports are furnished by
tenderer / contractor for vendor approvals.
In case of turnkey contracts the operating platform shall also be constructed by the
contractor for breakers as and where applicable.
5. Windings of CT,PT,CVT, Lighting transformers

The windings of CT,PT,CVT, Lighting transformers shall be of Copper only.
6. Bus bars of Panels

All bus bars wherever applicable shall be made of HDEC only irrespective of anything
mentioned anywhere in the tender specifications.
7. Battery set
Battery set shall be of Exide/Amara Raja make only.
All battery chargers shall be suitable for charging the specific type of battery sets installed at
the respective Grid substations.
8. New Foundation works

As and where applicable, design based on pile foundations shall be used for new foundations
works. In case of non feasibility of pile foundations, other design of foundations shall be
acceptable.
In case the foundation works are to be done after filling of ground level, the design of
foundations shall be done from the level of virgin/mother soil only irrespective of the
level/height of earth filling. Tenderers are to visit the site prior to submission of their
offer, to assess the cost implication on account of the foundation works. No extra claim
shall be entertained by the BSPTCL on this account.
IMPORTANT: The new Control & Relay Panels to be delivered against this tender
shall also match with the existing protection schemes, colour and sizes of existing C&R
Panels as and where applicable. All other equipments shall also match in symmetry etc
with the existing equipments as far as possible.

2.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
1.0 FOREWORD
1.1 The provisions under this section are intended to supplement general
requirements for the materials, equipments and services covered under other
sections of tender documents and is not exclusive.
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
2.1 The bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and information as per
the technical data sheets provided in the bid documents.
2.2 The bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical
information, design documents, drawings etc., fully in conformity with the
technical specification.
2.3 It is recognized that the Contractor may have standardized on the use of certain
components, materials, processes or procedures different from those specified
herein. Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based
on the manufacturer’s standard practice will also be considered provided such
proposals meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements
and are acceptable to the Purchaser’s. Unless brought out clearly, the Bidder
shall be deemed to conform to this specification scrupulously. All deviations
from the specification shall be clearly brought out in the respective schedule
of deviations. Any discrepancy between the specification and the catalogues or the
bid, if not clearly brought out in the specific requisite schedule, will not be
considered as valid deviation.
2.4 Except for lighting fixtures, wherever a material or article is specified or defined
by the name of a particular brand, Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific name
mentioned shall be understood as establishing type, function and quality and
not as limiting competition. For lighting fixtures, makes shall be as defined in
Section- Lighting System.
2.5 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all
mountings, fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such
equipment and/or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the
equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been
specifically detailed in the Technical Specifications unless included in the list of
exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the specification
but which are necessary for commissioning and satisfactory operation of the
switchyard/substation unless specifically excluded shall be deemed to be included
in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied without any extra cost. All
similar standard components/parts of similar standard equipment provided, shall be
inter-changeable with one another.
3.0 STANDARDS
3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts,
Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.
3.2 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments (as on the date of bid opening) of standard
specified unless specifically mentioned in the specification.
3.3 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment
each other.
3.4 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this
specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be
considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
3.5 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than
those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall
take precedence.
3.6 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standards specified / individual sections
for various equipments shall also, be accepted, however the salient points of
difference shall be clearly brought out in additional information schedule of
Vol. III along with English language version of such standard. The
equipment conforming to standards other than specified / individual sections for
various equipments shall be subject to Purchaser’s approval.
3.7 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in
accordance with which the works will be carried out.
4.0 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING
FURNISHED
4.1 The equipment furnished under this specification shall perform all its functions and
operate satisfactorily without showing undue strain, restrike etc under such over
voltage conditions.
4.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various other electrical,
electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation.
4.3 All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal
mechanical, thermal and electromechanical forces due to various factors like wind
load, temperature variation, ice & snow, (wherever applicable) short circuit etc for
the equipment.
4.4 The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account
various forces that are required to withstand.
4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:
a) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be
“match marked”.
b) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/ operating

mechanism to marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear proper
identification to facilitate the connection at site.
4.6 EHV equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following
major technical parameters as brought out hereunder.
4.6.1 System Parameter
SL Description of parameters 220 KV 132 kV 33 kV
No System System System
1. System operating voltage 220 KV 132kV 33kV

2. Maximum operating voltage of the 245 KV 145kV 36kV
system(rms)
3. Rated frequency 50 Hz 50Hz 50Hz

4. No. of phase 3 3 3
5. Rated Insulation levels
i) Full wave impulse withstand voltage 1050 KVp 650 kVp 170 kVp
(1.2/50 microsec.)
ii) Switching impulse withstand voltage - - -

(250/2500 micro sec.) dry and wet
iii) One minute power frequency dry 460 kV 275kV 70kV

and wet withstand voltage (rms)
6. Corona extinction voltage 156 kV 105kV -
7. Max. radio interference voltage for 1000 micro- 500 micro- -

frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 volts volts
MHz at
508 kV rms for
765kV, 320KV rms for 400KV
system and 156KV rms for
220KV system &
92 KV rms for
132KV system
8. Minimum creepage 25 mm/KV 25 mm/KV 25 mm/KV

distance (3625 mm) (900 mm)
i. Phase to phase 2100 mm 1300 mm 320 mm
ii. Phase to earth 2100 mm 1300 mm 320 mm
iii) Sectional clearances 5000 mm 4000 mm 3000 mm
10. Rated short circuit current 40 KA for 1 31.5 KA for 1 25 KA for 3

sec. duration sec. duration sec. duration

11. System neutral earthing Effectively Effectively Effectively
Earthed Earthed Earthed
12
i. Phase to phase 1220 mm (for 530
BIL-550 mm (for BIL-
kVp) 250 kVp)/
350
mm (for BIL-
170 kVp)
ii. Phase to earth 1050 mm (for 480
BIL-550 mm (for BIL-
kVp) 250 kVp)/
320mm
(for BIL-
170 kVp)
The insulation and RIV levels of the equipments if applicable shall be as per values given in
Note : the respective chapter of the equipments.

4.6.2 Major technical parameters of bushings / hollow column / support insulators are
given below:
S.N. Parameters 245 KV 145 kV
(a) Max. System voltage 245 145
Um(kV)
(b) Impulse withstand voltage (dry 1050 + 650
& wet)
(kVp)
(c) Switching surge withstand - -
voltage
(dry & wet) (kVp)
(d) Power frequency withstand 460 + 275
voltage (dry and wet) (kV
rms)
(e) Total creepage 6125 3625

distance (min) (mm)
4.6.3 Major Technical Parameters

The major technical parameters of the equipments are given below. For
other parameters and features respective technical sections should be
referred.
(A) For 245 KV & 145 kV Circuit Breaker and Isolator
Rated voltage kV (rms) 245 145
Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50
No. of Poles 3 3
Design ambinet temperature (°C) 50 50
Rated insulation levels :
1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)
- between line terminals ±1050 kVp ±650 kVp
and ground
- between terminals ±1050 kVp ±650 kVp
with circuit breaker open
- between terminals ±1200 kVp ±750 kVp
with isolator open
2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage

- between line 400 kV (rms) 275 kV (rms)
terminals and ground
- between terminals 460 Kv (rms) 275 kV (rms)

with circuit breaker open
- between terminals 530 kV (rms) 315kV (rms)

with Isolator open
Max. radio interference 1000 500 voltage
(microvolts) for (at 156 (at 92 kV
frequency between 0.5 MHz Kv rms) rms)
and 2 MHz in all positions
of the equipments.
Minimum creepage distance :-

Phase to ground (mm)
6125 3625
Between CB Terminals (mm)
6125 3625
System neutral earthing Effectivey earted
Seismic acceleration
Rating of Auxiliary
Contacts
Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with circuit time

Auxiliary Contacts constant of not less
than20ms. Phase to phase spacing (mm) 4500 3000 or
2700
Auxiliary Switch shall also comply with other clauses of this
chapter.
(B) FOR 245 kV & 145 kV CT (0.2s)/CVT/SA
Rated voltage kV (rms) 245 145
Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50
No. of poles 1 1
Design ambient temperature (°C) 50 50
- between line terminals ±1050 kVp
±650kVp and ground for CT and CVT
- for arrester housing ±1050 kVp ±650 kVp
- between line terminals 460 kV rms 275 kV rms
and ground for CT and CVT
- for arrester housing 460 kV rms 275kV rms
Max. radio interference 1000 500
voltage (microvolts) for
frequency between 0.5 MHz (at 92 kV

and 2 MHz in all positions rms)
of the equipment.
Phase to ground (mm) 6125 3625
System neutral earthing - Effectively earthed -
Seismic acceleration - 0.3g horizontal -
Partial discharge for :-
- Surge arrester at - Not exceeding 50 pc. -
1.05 COV
- for CT/CVT - Not exceeding 10 pc. –
(C) For 36 kV EQUIPMENTS
Rated Voltage KV (rms) 36
Rated frequency (Hz) 50
No. of Poles 3
Design ambinet 50
temperature (°C)
- between line terminals ± 170 kVp
and ground
- between terminals ± 180 kVp
with Isolator open
2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand
voltage
- between line terminals 70 kV (rms)
and ground
- between terminals 80 kV (rms)
with Isolator open
Phase to ground (mm) 900
Seismic acceleration -- 0.3g horizontal --
Rating of Auxiliary Contacts 10A at 220/ DC (As applicable)
Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with circuit

Auxiliary Contacts time constant of
not less than 20
ms. Phase to phase spacing (mm)
1500

Auxiliary Switch shall also comply with other clauses of this chapter.
(D) 36 KV SURGE ARRESTOR WITH SURGE MONITOR
1. Rated voltage of arrestor 30 KV

2. Maximum continuous operating voltage 25 kv
(COV) at design ambient temperature
3. Standards IEC 60099-4
4. Normal discharge current (8/20 msec) 10 KA
5. Minimum discharge capability 5.0 KJ/KV
(FJ/KV) referred
6. One minute Power Frequency (dry) 80 KV rms
withstand voltage of arrestor
7. Line discharge class as per 3
IEC
8. Maximum residual voltage at 85 KVp
S.No. 4 above
(E) 36 KV ISOLATOR
1. Rated voltage 36 KV
2. Rated current As per price sehedule
3. Standards IS 9921/IEC 129
4. Rated short time withstand (inKA) 25 KA for 3 sec.
5. Operating drive Manual operating mechanism

6. Type Double break Isolator w/o E/S
3 pole, outdoor, Gang
operated.
7. Constructed detail All ferrous parts to be galvanized
except nuts and bolts which shall
be electroplated as per relevant
IS.
8. Terminal Connector To suit site conditions and
layout requirements.
5.0 ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS

5.1 The engineering data shall be furnished by the Contractor in accordance with
the Schedule for each set of equipment as specified in the Technical
Specifications.
5.2 The list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the
Purchaser shall be discussed and finalised by the Purchaser at the time of
award.
The Contractor shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents
unless anything is waived.
The Contractor shall submit 6 (six) sets of drawings/ design documents

/data/ test reports as may be required for the approval of the Purchaser.

5.3 Drawings
5.3.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the
time of bid shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size,
arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each
component, break-up for packing and shipment, dimensions, internal & the
external connections, fixing arrangement required and any other
information specifically requested in the specifications.
5.3.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the
name of the Purchaser, the unit designation, the specifications title, the
specification number and the name of the Project. If standard catalogue
pages are submitted, the applicable items shall be indicated therein. All
titles, noting, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All
the dimensions should be in metric units.
5.3.3 Further work by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with these
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of
the Purchaser, if so required.
5.4 The review of these data by the Purchaser will cover only general
conformance of the data to the specifications and documents, interfaces with
the equipment providedunder the specifications, external
connections and of the dimensions which might affect substation layout.
This review by the Purchaser may not indicate a thorough review of all
dimensions, quantities and details of the equipment, materials, any
devices or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. This
review and/or approval by the Purchaser shall not be considered by the
Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for
mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these
specifications and documents.
5.5 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment
prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The
Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make
the equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such
changes will again be subject to approval by the Purchaser. Approval of
Contractor’s drawing or work by the Purchaser shall not relieve the
contractor of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
5.6 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process
including review and approval by the Purchaser shall form part of the
Contract Document and the entire works
Performed under these specifications shall be performed in strict conformity,
unless otherwise expressly requested by the Purchaser in Writing.
5.7 Approval Procedure
The scheduled dates for the submission of the drawings as well as for, any
data/information to be furnished by the Purchaser would be discussed and
finalised at the time of award.
NOTE :
(1) The contractor may please note that all resubmissions must
incorporate all comments given in the earlier submission by the
Purchaser or adequate justification for not incorporating the same must
be submitted failing which the submission of documents is likely to

be returned.
(2) Softcopy of all drawings should be submitted in l a t e s t v e r s i o n o f

Auto Cad.
(3) The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all
equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded
diagrams with complete instructions for storage, handling, erection,
commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and
overhauling procedures.
(4) If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the
instruction manuals require any modifications/ additions/changes, the
same shall be incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Purchaser.
(5) The Contractor shall furnish to the Purchaser catalogues of spare parts.
(6) The Contractor shall furnish a l l t h e r e q u i s i t e m a i n t e n a n c e
m a n u a l s to the Purchaser for all equipments.
5.8 The contractor shall have to furnish details and documents required as per
specifications for release of advance.
6.0 MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP
6.1 General Requirement
6.1.1 Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship,
equipment, materials and components of the covered equipment, it is
essential that the same must be new, of highest grade of the best quality of
their kind, conforming to best engineering practice and suitable for the
purpose for which they are intended.
6.1.2 Incase where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the
specification as “similar” to any special standard, the Purchaser shall
decide upon the question of similarity. When required by the specification or
when required by the Purchaser the Contractor shall submit, for
approval, all the information concerning the materials or components to be
used in manufacture. Machinery, equipment, materials and components
supplied, installed or used without such approval shall run the risk of
subsequent rejection, it being understood that the cost as well as the time delay
associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.
6.1.3 The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions,
replacements and general maintenance may be undertaken with a
minimum of time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be
consistent with its duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual
agreements. All joints and fastenings shall be devised, constructed and
documented so that the component parts shall be accurately positioned and
restrained to fulfill their required function. In general, screw threads shall be
standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be permitted
when prior approval has been obtained from the Purchaser.
6.1.4 Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to gauge and
shall also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall
also be interchangeable and shall be made of the same materials and
workmanship as the corresponding parts of the Equipment supplied under
the Specification. Where feasible, common component units shall

be employed in different pieces of equipment in order to minimize spare
parts stocking requirements. All equipment of the same type and rating
shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.
6.1.5 All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance
with the best modern practices will be accepted. Installation shall be
considered as being the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This,
unless otherwise specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into
position, grouting, levelling, aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously
installed equipment bases/foundations, performing the alignment check and
final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in
accordance with the manufacturer’s tolerances, instructions and
the Specification. All factor assembled rotating
machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments made as
necessary to re-establish the manufacturer’s limits suitable guards shall be
provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or moving
machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and removal for
maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be
installed at designated locations and tested for healthiness.
6.1.6 The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit
the machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment.
Lubricants used for installation purposes shall be drained out and the
system flushed through where necessary for applying the lubricant
required for operation. The Contractor shall apply all operational lubricants to
the equipment installed by him.
6.1.7 All oil, grease and other consumables used in the Works/ Equipment shall be
purchased in India unless the Contractor has any special requirement for the
specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India. In such is
the case he shall declare in the proposal, where such oil or grease is
available.He shall help Purchaser in establishing equivalent Indian make and
Indian Contractor. The same shall be applicable to other consumables too.
6.1.8 Corona and radio interference voltage test and seismic withstand test
procedures for equipments shall be in line with the procedure a s
applicable.
6.2 Provisions For Exposure to Hot and Humid climate
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for
service and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high
humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favourable to the growth of fungi
and mildew. The indoor equipments located in non-airconditioned areas
shall also be of same type.
6.2.1 Space Heaters
6.2.1.1 The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V as supply
voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided.
6.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters shall be

supplied to prevent condensation in any compartment. The heaters shall be
installed in the compartment and electrical connections shall be made
sufficiently away from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of

supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the
compartment temperature to prevent condensation.
6.2.1.3 Suitable anti condensation heaters with the provision of thermostat
shall be provided.
6.2.2 FUNGI STATIC VARNISH

Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall
be applied on parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation
of fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish
shall not be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will
interfere with the operation or performance of
the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be
protected against the application of the varnish.
6.2.3 Ventilation opening
Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have ventilation
openings with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to
reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment
openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds and suitable provision
shall be made so as to avoid any communication of air / dust with any part in
the enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes,
panels etc.
6.2.4 Degree of Protection
The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling
Boxes, panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of protection as
detailed here under:
a) Installed out door: IP- 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31
c) Installed in covered area: IP-52
d) Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of entry of
water is limited: IP-41.
e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards) : IP-52
The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS:13947 (Part-I) /
IEC-60947 (Part-I) / IS 12063 / IEC-60529. Type test report for degree of
protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.
6.3 RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
6.3.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently
attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive
material upon which is to be engraved manufacturer’s name, year of
manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with details of
the loading conditions under which the item of substation in question has
been designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may be required by
the Purchaser. The rating plate of each equipment shall be according to IEC
requirement.
6.3.2 All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers,
reactors, CB, CT, CVT, SA, Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC

equipments shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by
English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi and the other
with English inscriptions may be provided.
6.4 FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS
All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds,
touch up paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit
breakers and essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the
equipment covered under the scope of the specifications, into successful
Operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specifically
excluded under the exclusions in these specifications and documents.
7.0 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS / COORDINATION
7.1 The bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid only shall
be accepted for supply. However, the Purchaser or the Contractor may
propose changes in the specification of the equipment or quality thereof
and if the Purchaser & contractor agree upon any such changes, the
specification shall be modified accordingly.
7.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and
schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of
any change in the price and/or schedule of completion before the
Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the
provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly.
7.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of
appropriate equipments to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the
entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this
Specification. The design of various components, sub-assemblies and
assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and
maintenance.
7.4 The Contractor has to coordinate designs and terminations with the
agencies (if any) who are Consultants/Contractor for the Purchaser. The
names of agencies shall be intimated to the successful bidders.
7.5 The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination
meetings with the Engineer, other Contractor’s and the Consultants of the
Purchaser (if any) during the period of Contract. The Contractor shall
attend such meetings at his own cost at Patna or at mutually agreed venue
as and when required and fully cooperate with such persons and agencies
involved during those discussions.
8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

The contractor has to strictly follow approved QAP of BSPTCL.
8.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this
Contract whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s
Works or at his Sub-contractor’s premises or at the Purchaser’s site or at any
other place of Work are in accordance with the specifications, the
Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control such
activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be broadly outlined
by the contractor and finalised after discussions. The detailed programme shall
be submitted by the contractor after the award of contract and finally
accepted by O r d e r i n g A u t h o r i t y . However, in case detailed valid
programme approved by O r d e r i n g A u t h o r i t y for the equipment

already exist, same would be followed till its validity. A quality assurance
programme of the contractor shall generally cover the following:
(a) His organisation structure for the management and implementation of
the proposed quality assurance programme:
(b) Documentation control system;
(c) Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel;
(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and
selection of sub-Contractor’s services including vendor analysis,
source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of
material purchases etc.
(e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including
process controls and fabrication and assembly control;
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions;
(g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field
activities.
(h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field
activities;
(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status;
(j) System for quality audits;
(k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the
Purcahser.
(l) System for maintenance of records;
(m) System for handling storage and delivery; and
(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to
each item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered.
The Purchaser or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to carry
out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure
of the Contractor/his vendor’s quality management and control activities.
8.2 Quality Assurance Documents
The contractor would be required to submit all the Quality Assurance

Documents as stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of purchaser’s
inspection of equipment/material
9.0 TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING& INSPECTION
CERTIFICATE
9.1 All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests including
additional type tests as per technical specification and shall be subject to
routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective
sections. Purchaser reserves the right to witness any or all the type tests. The
Contractor shall intimate the Purchaser the detailed program about the tests
atleast three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies& six (6)
weeks in advance in case of foreign supplies. This shall conform to the details
provided in the specifications.

10.0 TESTS
10.1 Pre-commissioning Tests
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item
of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by
the Purchaser and the Contractor
for correctnessand completeness of installation and acceptability for
charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at Site. The list of pre-
commissioning tests to be performed are given in respective chapters and
shall be included in the Contractor’s quality assurance programme.
10.2 Commissioning Tests

10.2.1 The available instrumentation and control equipment will to be used during
such tests and the Purchaser will calibrate, all such measuring equipment and
devices as far as practicable.
10.2.2 Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful
completion of the Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the
Contractor, free of cost.
10.2.3 The specific tests requirement on equipment have been brought out in the
respective chapters of the technical specification.
10.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the
concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the
switchyard.
11.0 PACKAGING & PROTECTION

11.1 All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and
crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage
at Site till the time of erection. On request of the Purchaser, the Contractor
shall also submit packing details/associated drawing for any
equipment/material under his scope of supply, to facilitate the Purchaser to
repack any equipment/material at a later date, in case the need arises. While
packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of
availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken into account.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any
demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters,
railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor. Purchaser takes no
responsibility of the availability of the wagons.
11.2 All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion,
impact, discolouration and any other damages. All exposed threaded
portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a non-metallic
protecting device. All ends of all valves and pipings and conduit
equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect
them from damage.
12.0 FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
12.1 All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion
protection. All ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated
elsewhere in the specification or specifically agreed, shall be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts & bolts and spring

washers shall be electro galvanized to service condition 4. All steel
conductors including those used for earthing/grounding (above ground
level) shall also be galvanized according to IS: 2629.
12.2 HOT DIP GALVANISING
12.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m and
minimum thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker than
6mm. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating
thickness shall be as per relevant ASTM. For surface which shall be
embedded in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m minimum.
12.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick
coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished
surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like
discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is
loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface,
flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on
visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to
rejection.
12.2.3 After galvanizing. no drilling or welding shall be performed on the
galvanized parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after
galvanizing. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid
formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization.
12.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in copper
sulphate solution as per IS-2633.
12.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four
immersions of the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six
immersions. The following galvanizing tests should essentially be
performed as per relevant Indian Standards.
- Coating thickness
- Uniformity of zinc
- Adhesion test
- Mass of zinc coating
12.2.6 Galvanised material must be transported properly to ensure
that galvanised surfaces are not damaged during transit.
Application of zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed.
12.3 PAINTING
12.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated
in accordance with the IS-6005 “Code of practice for phosphating iron
and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily accessible after shop
assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the
equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after
installation or require corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop
painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be
thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed
by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water,
rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
12.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.
The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready
mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be “flash
dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.
12.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel
paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat
shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting.
12.3.4 The exterior and interior colour of the paint in case of new substations shall
be RAL 7032 for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control
cabinets, panels etc.
unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of the
equipments. Glossy white colour inside the equipments /boards
/panels/junction boxes is also acceptable. The exterior colour for panels
shall be matching with the existing panels in case of extension of a
substation. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly
different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of
finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after
installation of the equipments.
12.3.5 In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and
protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like
electrostatic painting etc., the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the Bids
for Purchaser’s review & approval.
12.3.6 The colour scheme as given below shall be followed for Fire Protection and
Air Conditioning systems
S.No. PIPE LINE Base colour Band
colour
Fire Protection System
1 Hydrant and Emulsifier system FIRE RED -
pipeline
2 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sea
– water Green
3 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sky Blue
–Air
4 Pylon support pipes FIRE RED
Air Conditioning System
5 Refrigerant gas pipeline – at Canary -
compressor suction Yellow
6 Refrigerant gas pipeline – at Canary Red
compressor discharge Yellow
7 Refrigerant liquid pipeline Dark -
Admiralty
Green
8 Chilled water pipeline Sea Green -
9 Condenser water pipeline Sea Green Dark Blue
The direction of flow shall be marked by → (arrow) in black colour.
Base Colour Direction of flow Band Colour

12.3.7 For aluminium casted surfaces, the surface shall be with smooth
Finish.
Further, in case of aluminium enclosures the surface shall be coated with
power (coating thickness of 60 microns) after surface preparation for
painting.
13.0 HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION
13.1 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on
manufacturer’s drawingsoras directed by the Purchaser or his
representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and
place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract.
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is
level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of
switchyard equipment means completion of all site tests specified and
energisation at rated voltage.
13.2 Contractor may engage manufacturer’s Engineers to supervise the
unloading, transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the
various equipment being procured by them separately. Contractor shall
unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per
instructions of the manufacturer’s supervisory Engineer(s) and shall
extend full cooperation to them.
13.3 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of
manufacturer’s drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be
obtained from the Purchaser. Contractor shall be held responsible for any
damage to the equipment consequent to not following manufacturer’s
drawings/instructions correctly.
13.4 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make
all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections
including the connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary
adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers,
isolators and
their operating mechanisms. All components shall
be protected against damage during unloading,
transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any
equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
13.5 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the
Purchaser immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the
purpose of Purchaser’s information only. The Contractor shall submit to the
Purchaser every week a report detailing all the receipts during the weeks.
However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or
damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment
at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the
transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
13.6 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the
same is handed over to the Purchaser in an operating condition after
commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until taken
over by Purchaser, as well as protection of the same against theft,
element of nature, corrosion, damages etc.

13.7 Where material / equipment is unloaded by Purchaser before the
Contractor arrives at site or even when he is at site, Purchaser by right can
hand over the same to Contractor and there upon it will be the
responsibility of Contractor to store the material in an orderly and proper
manner.
13.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage
facilities, to store all equipment which requires indoor storage.
13.9 The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are
synonymous.
13.10 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the
requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
13.11 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best
engineering practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the
service life. If at any stage during the execution of the Contract, it is
observed that the erected equipment(s) do not meet the above minimum
clearances as given in the specifications. The Contractor shall immediately
proceed to correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost.
13.12 EQUIPMENT BASES
A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating
equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise
agreed to by the Purchaser. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive
assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall
have a raised lip all around, and shall have threaded drain connections.
14.0 TOOLS AND TACKLES

The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all
special tools and tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and
maintenance of the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be
separately, packed and brought on to Site.
15.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
15.1 The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system
indicated under section “Electrical & Mechanical Auxiliaries” having the
following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply, including the
equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air-conditioning,
lighting etc shall be designed for the specified Parameters as under. The DC
supply for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also conform the
parameters as indicated in the following.
Normal Variation in Frequency Phase/ Neutral
Voltage Voltage in HZ Wire connection
415V + 10% 50 + 5% 3/4 Wire Solidly
Earthed.
240V + 10% 50 + 5% 1/2 Wire Solidly

Earthed.
220V 190V to 240V DC - Isolated 2 wire
System

110V 95V to 120V DC - Isolated 2 wire
System
50V _ DC _ 2 wire
system (+)
earthed
Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to + 10%.

16.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE
16.1 The equipment support structure shall be suitable for equipmentconnection at first
level. All equipment support structure supplied alongwith brackets, angels, stools,
etc. for attaching the operating mechanism, control cabinets & marshelling box
(wherever applicable) etc.
16.2 The support structures should be hot dip galvanised with minimum 610
gram/sq.m net of zinc.
16.3 In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be considered
technically non responsive and shall be liable to be rejected.
16.4 Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements:
16.4.1 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part
of the bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of
the equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 metres.
17.0 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS
17.1 All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA CC1
and shall be made of materials listed below :
a) For connecting Aluminum alloy casting,
ACSR conductors conforming to
designation A6
of IS:617 and all test shall
conform to IS:617
b) For connecting Bimetallic connectors made
equipment from aluminum alloy
terminals made of casting conforming to copper
with designation A6 of thick
ACSR conductors IS:617 with 2mm
bimetallic liner and all test shall
conform to IS:617
c) For connecting G.I Galvanised mild steel shield
wire
d) i) Bolts, nuts & i) Electrogalvanised for sizes

Plain, washers below M12, for others hot dip
galvanised.
ii) Spring washers ii) Electro-galvanised mild
for items steel suitable for atleast
‘a’ to ‘c’ service condition-3 as per
IS:1573
17.2 Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and

connectors, as required by the ultimate design for the particular
installation. The conductor terminations of equipment shall be either
expansion, sliding or rigid type suitable for a) If corona rings are required
to meet these requirements they shall be considered as part of that
equipment and included in the scope of work.
17.3 Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic clamps
shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any
deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and restricted to parts
which are not current carrying or subjected to stress. The design details of the
joint shall be furnished to the Purchaser by the Contractor.
17.4 Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for
grounding all equipment as specified in each particular case, are also
included in the scope of Work.
17.5 All current carrying part of any clamp shall not be less than 12 mm thick.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2
mm thickness shall be cast integral with aluminum body for Bi-metallic
clamps.
17.6 All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
17.7 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal
clamps for bus posts shall be .
17.8 Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the
temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the
specified ambient temperature. The rated current for which the
clamp/connector is designed with respect to the specified reference
ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly marked on each component of
the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
17.9 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
17.10 Clamps and connectors shall be designed as per IEC/ISS & BSPTCL’s
requirement.
17.11 Tests
17.11.1 Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS:5561 and shall also
be subjected to routine tests as per IS:5561. Following type test reports on
samples of similar type shall be submitted for approval
i) Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is 35°C
over 50°C ambient)
ii) Short time current test
Iii) Corona (dry) and RIV (dry) test for 220 KV and above voltage
And clamp
iv) Resistance test and tensile test
18.0 CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES
& MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
18.1 All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in
accordance with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-60439, as applicable, and the

clauses given below:
18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be
made of sheet steel or aluminum enclosure and shall be dust, water and
vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be atleast 2.0 mm thick cold rolled.
The box shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be
sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and
rigidity during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed
box the thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate
rigidity and long life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness.
18.3 Cabinet/boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall mounting type
or pedestal mounting type as per requirements. A canopy and sealing
arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes /
Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain water.
18.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with padlocking
arrangements. The distance between two hinges shall be adequate to ensure
uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere. The quality of the
gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/cracked during the
operation of the equipment.
18.5 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with
suitably profiled EPDM/Neoprene gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in
accordance with approved quality plan, IS:11149 and IS:3400. The quality of
gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/ cracked during the ten
years of operation of the equipment or its major overhaul whichever is earlier.
All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth straight and reinforced if necessary to
minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. Ventilating Louvers, if
provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made
of brass.
18.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by
means of weather proof and dust-proof connections. Boxes and cabinets
shall be designed with generous clearances to avoid interference between the
wiring entering from below and any terminal blocks or accessories
mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable gland plate projecting at
least 150 mm above the base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided
for this purpose along with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of
cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate. Gland plate
shall have provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required.
The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression
type and made of brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour
of the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands
shall conform to BS:6121.
18.7 A 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be
provided in the cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps.
Plug and socket shall be of industrial grade.
18.8 For illumination, LED Bulb having equivalent lumen of 20 Watts fluorescent
tube or 15 watts CFL shall be provided. The switching of the fittings shall
be controlled by the door switch.
For junction boxes of smaller sizes such as lighting junction box, manual
operated earth switch mechanism box etc., plug socket, heater and
illumination is not required to be provided.

18.9 All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and Toggle/piano
switches shall not be accepted.
18.10 Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two
separate earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the
earthing pad and secured by the use of self etching washer. Earthing of
hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire.
18.11 The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a
diagram showing the numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the same on
the inside of the door. The bus bar in marshalling kiosks shall be suitably
covered to guard against unintentional contact.
18.12 a) The following routine tests alongwith the routine tests as per IS:5039
shall also be conducted:
i) Check for wiring
ii) Visual and dimension check
b) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box
shall conform to IP-55 as per IS:13947 including application of, 2.5
KV rms for 1 (one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test
after IP-55 test.
19.0 Auxiliary Switches (Applicable for isolators and circuit breakers)
The following type test reports on auxiliary switches shall be submitted for
approval:
(a) Electrical endurance test - A minimum of 2000 operation for 2A D. C.
with a time constant greater than or equal to 20 millisecond with a
subsequent examination of mV drop/visual defects/temperature rise test.
(b) Mechanical endurance test. A minimum of 1,00,000 operations with a
subsequent checking of contact pressure test/visual examination.
(c) Heat run test on contacts.
(d) IR/HV test etc.
20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING
20.1 Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other
equipment will be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in
conduits. All interphase and external connections to equipment or to
control cubicles will be made through terminal blocks.
20.2 Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and have continuous rating to carry the
maximum expected current on the terminals and non breakable type. These
shall be of moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type
terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated,
insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud type
terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall be non- disconnecting
stud type of Elmex or Phoenix or Wago or equivalent make.
20.3 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage
transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test links and
isolating facilities. The current transformer secondary leads shall also be
provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
20.4 The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable
is terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent
cable from escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.
20.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or
silver plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be
acceptable.
20.6 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.
20.7 The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from
the mounting rails.
20.8 The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of
transparent, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers
shall be provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not
hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the
barriers.
20.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side.
a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm
CT circuits copper flexible.
b) All CT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm
copper flexible.
20.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely
connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links
when the cabinet is live.
20.11 Atleast 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and
these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.
20.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row
of terminal block and the associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance
between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.
20.13 The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the
necessary interphase electrical connections (where applicable) as well as
between phases and common terminal boxes or control cabinets. For
equipments rated for 400 kV and above the wiring required in these items
shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded cables in order to avoid surge
overvoltages either transferred through the equipment or due to transients
induced from the EHV circuits.
20.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for
surge withstand capability in accordance
with the relevant IEC Publications, in both longitudinal and transverse
modes. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary filtering, surge
protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to achieve an
impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment.
21.0 LAMPS AND SOCKETS
21.1 Lamps
All LED lamps shall use a socket base as per relevant IS, except in the case
of signal lamps.
21.2 Sockets
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp &

15 Amp pin round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with
shutters.
21.3 Hand Lamp:
A 240 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the

interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
21.4 Switches and Fuses:
21.4.1 Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,
distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control,
signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-
circuits shall be separately provided with miniature circuit breaker /
switchfuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse ratings shall be
such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits
for relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC fuses.
21.4.2 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228 mounted on
plug-in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal
protection and alarm contacts will also be accepted. All accessible live
connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have
operation indicators for indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base
shall have imprints of the fuse rating and voltage.
22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators:
22.1 Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 2099 & IEC-
60137 while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC-60233/IS:5621. The support insulators shall be
manufactured and tested as per IS:2544/IEC-60168 and IEC-60273. The
insulators shall also conform to IEC-60815 as applicable.
The bidder may also offer composite silicon rubber insulator, conforming to
IEC-61109.
22.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be
manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be
homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws
or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or
dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to
moisture.
22.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from
blisters, burrs and similar other defects.
22.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to
have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions
under which they will be used.
22.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric
discharge between the conductors and bushing which would cause
corrosion or injury to conductors, insulators or supports by the formation of
substances produced by chemical action. No radio interference shall be
caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the normal rated voltage.
22.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal
pressures likely to occur in service design and location of clamps and the
shape and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the
tank shall be such that there is no risk of fracture.

All
portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and supports other than
gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall be
composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as metal or
glazed porcelain.
22.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight.
Surface of joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal
parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a
uniform compressive pressure on the joints.
22.8 Tests
In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to
type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS:
2099 & IS: 2544 & IS : 5621. The type test reports shall be submitted for
approval.
23.0 MOTORS
Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of sufficient
size capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as
required for the driven equipment and shall be subjected to routine tests as
per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved make.
23.1 Enclosures
a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose
proof enclosure equivalent to IP-55 as per IS: 4691. For motors to be
installed indoor i.e. inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust
proof equivalent to IP-44 as per IS: 4691.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of
the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water
resulting from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the
motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with eyebolts,
lugs or other means to facilitate lifting.
23.2 Operational Features
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10)
percent above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at
design duty point and the motor shall not be over loaded at any
operating point of driven equipment that will rise in service.
b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction in the
expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the
particulars as given in Clause 15.0 of this Section.
23.3 Starting Requirements:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-line
starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the
rated speed alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the
acceptable winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops
down to 80% of the rated voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and

heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full
load current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS:325.
d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting
torque under the supply voltage conditions specified under Clause
15.0 shall be capable of withstanding atleast two successive starts from
cold condition at room temperature and one start from hot condition
without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable
for three equally spread starts per hour under the above
referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated
voltage shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment of
minimum permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the
accelerating time whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to
meet the above requirement, the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type
speed switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall remain closed for
speed lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated
speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding
120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.
23.4 Running Requirements:
a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient
temperature of 50 degree C shall be within the limits specified in
IS:325 (for 3 - phase induction motors) after adjustment due to
increased ambient temperature specified.
b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits
specified in IS: 4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits
specified by the relevant standard for the driven equipment when
measured at the motor bearings.
c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated
voltage for a period of 5 minutes with rated load commencing from
hot condition.
23.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any
additional test based on specialities of the items as per the field
Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Contractor or Purchaser without any extra
cost to the Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required
for conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish
the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
(a) Insulation resistance.
(b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
(c) Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the
cause and the conditions corrected.
24.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS
24.1 Circuit Breakers (Applicable for 220 Kv, 132 kV & 33kV)
24.1.(i) The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered should have
designed, manufactured tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard
supplied the same for the specified system voltage which are in

satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening
OR
24.1(ii) The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered who have
recently established production line in India for the specified system
voltage or above class, based on technological support of a parent
company or collaborator for the respective equipment(s) can also be
considered provided the parent company (Principal) or collaborator meets
qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.4. (a) & (b) given below.
AND
24.1.(iii) Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a

legally enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely supply,
performance
and warranty obligations as specified for the equipment(s)
AND
24.1.(iv) Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator

alongwith the bid stating that parent company or collaborator shall furnish
performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the cost of such
equipment(s). This performance guarantee shall be in addition to contract
performance guarantee to be submitted by the Bidder
24.2 Isolators (Applicable for 220 KV, 132 KV & 33KV)

24.2.(i) The manufacturer whose isolator are offered, should have designed,
manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard and supplied the
isolator for the specified system voltage and should be in satisfactory
operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening
OR
24.2.(ii)(a) The manufacturer(s) whose Isolator are offered who have recently
established production line in India for the specified system voltage or
above class, based on technological support of a parent company or
collaborator for the respective equipment(s) can also be considered
provided the
parent company (Principal) or collaborator meets
qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.2.(i) (a) & (b)
given above.
AND
24.2.(ii)(b) Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a legally
enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely
supply, performance and warranty obligations as specified
for the equipment(s)
AND
24.2.(ii)(c) Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator
alongwith the bid stating that parent company or collaborator shall
furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the cost of such
24.3 Instrument Transformers (Applicable for 220 Kv, 132 kV & 33kV)
24.3.(i) (a) The manufacturer whose instrument transformers are offered, should have
designed, manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard
and supplied the same for the specified system voltage for CT
& CVT and should be in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as
on the date of bid opening
OR
24.3.(ii)(a) The manufacturer(s) whose Instrument Transformer are offered who have
qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.6.(i) given above.
AND
24.3.(ii)(b) Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a
legally enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely
supply, performance and warranty obligations as specified for the equipment(s)
AND
24.3.(ii)(c) Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator
24.4 Surge Arresters (Applicable for 220 Kv, 132 kV & 33kV)
(a) The manufacturer whose Surge Arresters are offered should have
designed, manufactured and tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent
standard and supplied the Surge Arrester for the specified energy
capability with rated system voltage and which are in satisfactory
operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.
OR
(b) The manufacturer(s) whose Surge Arrestors are offered who have
considered provided the parent company (Principal) or collaborator
meets qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no (a) given
above.
AND
Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a
legally enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely
supply, performance and warranty obligations as specified for the
equipment(s)
AND
Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator
performance guarantee to be submitted by the Bidder.
24.5 1.1 KV Grade Power & Control Cables
24.5.1 Applicable for PVC Control Cable
The manufacturers, whose PVC control cables are offered, should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract at least
100 Kms of 1.1 KV grade PVC insulated control cables as on the date of bid

opening. Further the manufacturer should also have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 27C x 2.5 Sq.mm or
higher size as on the date of bid opening.
24.5.2 Applicable for PVC Power Cable
The manufacturer, whose PVC Power Cables are offered, should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast
100 Kms of 1.1 KV or higher grade PVC insulated power cables as on the date
of bid opening. Further the manufacturer should also have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 150 Sq. mm or
24.5.3 Applicable for XLPE Power Cables
The Manufacturer, whose XLPE Power cables are offered, should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast
25 Kms of 1.1 KV or higher grade XLPE insulated power cables as on the date
of bid opening. Further the manufacturer should also have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 630 Sq. mm or
24.6 LT Switchgear
24.6.1 The Manufacturer whose LT Switchgear are offered, should be a
manufacturer of LT Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He
should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 50 nos. draw
out circuit breaker panels, out of which at least 5 nos. should have been with
relay and protection schemes with current transformer. He should have
also manufactured at least 50 nos. motor control center panels of the type
and rating being offered which should be in successful operation as on date of
bid opening.
24.6.2 The Switchgear items (such as circuit breakers, fuse switch units,
contactors etc.), may be of his own make or shall be procured from
reputed manufacturers and of proven design. At least one hundred circuit
breakers of the make and type being offered shall be operating
satisfactory as on date of bid opening.
24.7 Battery and Battery Charger
24.7.1 Requirements for Battery Manufacturers
The manufacturer whose Batteries are offered should have designed,
manufactured and supplied DC Batteries of the type specified and being
offered, having a capacity of at least 300 AH and these shall be operating
satisfactorily for two years in power sector and/or industrial installations as on
date of bid opening.
24.7.2 Requirements for Battery Charger Manufacturers
The manufacturer, whose Battery Chargers are offered, should have
designed, manufactured and supplied Battery Chargers generally of the
type offered, with static automatic voltage regulators and having a
continuous output of atleast ten (10) KW and these should be in
successful operation as on the date of bid opening.
24.8 LT Transformers
The manufacturer, whose transformers are offered should have designed,
manufactured, type tested including short circuit test as per IEC/IS or

equivalent standards and supplied transformers of at least 220 kV class of 100
MVA or higher capacity, for 132 kV class of 50 MVA or higher capacity 33
kV class of 3 1 5 KVA or higher rating respectively. The transformer
should have been in successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date of
bid opening.
24.9 Fire Fighting System
The bidder or his sub-vendor should have designed, tested and similar
equipments.
24.10 Control and Relay Panels
24.10.1 The manufacturer whose C&R panels and protective relay are offered
should have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned C&R
panels including protection relays which must be in satisfactory operation
on specified voltage level or above [for 400 kV & below substation] for atleast
2 (two) years on the date of bid opening.
24.10.2 The C&R Panel from a manufacturer who has designed, manufactured,
tested, installed and commissioned C&R panels which are in satisfactory
operation on 220 kV system or above for atleast 2 (two) years on the date
of bid opening can also be offered, provided the protective relay schemes
should be offered from a Contractor who fully meets the requirements
stipulated under specifications.
Further, in such an event the manufacturer shall furnish an undertaking
jointly executed by him and his protective relay schemes Supplier, as per the
format enclosed in the bid documents for successful performance of the
protection system offered.
24.11 PLCC
24.11.1 The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed,
manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for 132
kV system or above [for 132 kV substation] and the same should be in
successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.
24.11.2 The manufacturer whose line traps are offered should have designed,
manufactured tested, supplied and commissioned similar line traps for
specified voltage level or above and specified fault level and should be in
successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.
24.11.3 PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured by the manufacturer meeting the
requirements except that the PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured, tested
and supplied by them is not in operation for the stipulated period can
also be offered provided the manufacturer furnishes an undertaking jointly
executed by him and his collaborator, who in turn fully meets the
requirement specified above as per the format enclosed in the bid document
for successful performance of the equipment offered.
24.11.4 The manufacturer(s) whose PLCC Panels/Line traps are offered who have
qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.14.1/24.14.2 given
above.
A

nd
Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a
legally enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely supply,
performance and warranty obligations as specified for the equipment(s)
And
Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator
performance guarantee to be submitted by the Bidder.
ANNEXURE - A
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES

India Electricity Rules
Indian Electricity Act
Indian Electricity (Supply) Act
Indian Factories Act
IS-5, - Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels. IS-335,

- New Insulating Oils.
IS-617, - Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and
Castings for General Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 (P1 to P 145) - Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products. IS-2071
(P1 to P3) - Methods of High Voltage Testing.
IS-12063 - Classification of degrees of protection provided by
enclosures of electrical equipment.
IS-2165
P1:1997 - Insulation Coordination. P2:1983
IS-3043 - Code of Practice for Earthing
IS-6103 - Method of Test for Specific Resistance
(Resistivity) of Electrical Insulating Liquids
IS-6104 - Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil
against Water by the Ring Method
IS-6262 - Method of test for Power factor & Dielectric
Constant of Electrical Insulating Liquids.
IS-6792 - Method for determination of electric strength of
insulating oils.
IS-5578 - Guide for marking of insulated conductors. IS-

11353 - Guide for uniform system of marking &
identification of conductors & apparatus terminals.
IS-8263 - Methods for Radio Interference Test on High
voltage Insulators.
IS-9224 (Part 1,2&4) - Low Voltage Fuses
IEC-60060 (Part 1 to P4) - High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60068 - Environmental Test
IEC-60117 - Graphical Symbols
IEC-60156, - Method for the Determination of the Electrical

Strength of Insulation Oils.
IEC-60270, - Partial Discharge Measurements.
IEC-60376 - Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur
Hexafloride
IEC-60437 - Radio Interference Test on High Voltage
Insulators.
IEC-60507 - Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage
Insulators to be used on AC Systems.
IEC-60694 - Common Specification for High Voltage
Switchgear & Controlgear Standards.
IEC-60815 - Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect of
Polluted Conditions.
IEC-60865 (P1 & P2) - Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects. ANSI-
C.1/NFPA.70 - National Electrical Code
ANSI-C37.90A - Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)
Tests
ANSI-C63.21, - Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and
C63.3 - Field Strength Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1 GHZ
C36.4ANSI-C68.1 - Techniquest for Dielectric Tests
ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 - Standard General Requirements and Test
Procedure for Outdoor Apparatus Bushings. ANSI-SI-4
- Specification for Sound Level Metres
ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 - Drawing Symbols
ANSI-Z55.11 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and
Equipment No. 61 Light Gray
NEMA-107T - Methods of Measurements of RIV of High Voltage
Apparatus
NEMA-ICS-II - General Standards for Industrial Control and
Systems Part ICSI-109
CISPR-1 - Specification for CISPR Radio Interference
Measuring Apparatus for the frequency range
0.15 MHz to 30 MHz

CSA-Z299.1-1978h - Quality Assurance Program Requirements CSA-Z299.2-
1979h - Quality Control Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.3-1979h - Quality Verification Program Requirements CSA-
Z299.4-1979h - Inspection Program Requirements
TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS

IS:10028 (Part 2 & 3) - Code of practice for selection, installation &
maintenance of Transformers (P1:1993), (P2:1991),
(P3:1991)
IS-2026 (P1 to P4) - Power Transformers
IS-3347 (part 1 to Part 8) - Dimensions for Porcelain transformer Bushings
for use in lightly polluted atmospheres.
IS-3639 - Fittings and Accessories for Power Transformers
IS-6600 - Guide for Loading of OIl immersed Transformers.
IEC-60076 (Part 1 to 5) - Power Transformers
IEC-60214 - On-Load Tap-Changers. IEC-
60289 - Reactors.
IEC- 60354 - Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power trans formers
IEC-60076-10 - Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound
Levels
ANSI-C571280 - General requirements for Distribution, Power and
Regulating Transformers
ANSI-C571290 - Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation
Transformers
ANSI-C5716 - Terminology & Test Code for Current Limiting
Reactors
ANSI-C5721 - Requirements, Terminology and Test Code for
Shunt Reactors Rated Over 500 KVA
ANSI-C5792 - Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power
Transformers upto and including 100 MVA with 55
deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise
ANSI-CG,1EEE-4 - Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271-100 - High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breakers
IEC-60427 - Synthetic Testing of High Voltage alternating
current circuit Breakers.
IEC-61264 - Pressurised Hollow Column Insulators
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND
COUPLING CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705- (P1 to P4) - Current Transformers.

IS:3156- (P1 to P4) - Voltage Transformers.
IS-4379 - Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas

Cylinders
IEC-60044-1 - Current transformers.
IEC-60044-2 - Voltage Transformers.
IEC-60358 - Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.
IEC-60044-4 - Instrument Transformes : Measurement of Partial
Discharges
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power Line Carrier Systems. ANSI-
C5713 - Requirements for Instrument transformers ANSIC92.2 -
Power Line Coupling voltage Transformers
ANSI-C93.1 - Requirements for Power Line Carrier Coupling
Capacitors
BUSHING
IS-2099 - Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V IEC-
60137 - Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages
above 1000V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070 (PART2) - Lightning arresters for alternating current systems
: Metal oxide lightning arrestors without gaps. IEC-
60099-4 - Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps
IEC-60099-5 - Selection and application recommendation ANSI-C62.1
- IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits NEMA-
LA 1 - Surge Arresters
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS-722, IS-1248, - Electrical relays for power system
IS-3231, 3231 (P-3) protection
IS:5039 - Distributed pillars for Voltages not Exceeding
1000
Volts.
IEC-60068.2.2 - Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2:
Test B: Dry heat
IEC-60529 - Degree of Protection provided by enclosures. IEC-
60947-4-1 - Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC-61095 - Electromechanical Contactors for household and
similar purposes.
IEC-60439 (P1 & 2) - Low Voltage Switchgear and control gear
assemblies
ANSI-C37.20 - Switchgear Assemblies, including metal enclosed
bus.

ANSI-C37.50 - Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating
Current Power Circuit Breakers
ANSI-C39 - Electric Measuring instrument
ANSI-C83 - Components for Electric Equipment
IS: 8623: (Part I to 3) - Specification for Switchgear & Control
Assemblies.
NEMA-AB - Moulded Case Circuit and Systems
NEMA-CS - Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA-PB-1 - Panel Boards
NEMA-SG-5 - Low voltage Power Circuit breakers
NEMA-SG-3 - Power Switchgear Assemblies
NEMA-SG-6 - Power switching Equipment
NEMA-5E-3 - Motor Control Centers
1248 (P1 to P9) - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments & their accessories.
Disconnecting switches
IEC-60129 - Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and
Earthing switches
IEC-1129 - Alternating Current Earthing Switches Induced
Current switching
IEC-60265 (Part 1 & 2) - High Voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 - Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing
Specifications and Application Guide for high
voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and switch
accessories
ANSI-C37.34 - Test Code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6 - Power switching equipment
PLCC and line traps
IS-8792 - Line traps for AC power system.
IS-8793 - Methods of tests for line traps.
IS-8997 - Coupling devices for PLC systems.
IS-8998 - Methods of test for coupling devices for PLC
systems.
IEC-60353 - Line traps for A.C. power systems.
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power line carrier systems. IEC-
60495 - Single sideboard power line carrier terminals
IEC-60683 - Planning of (single Side-Band) power line carrier
systems.
CIGRE - Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35.
CIGRE - Guide on power line carrier 1979.

CCIR - International Radio Consultative Committee
CCITT - International Telegraph & Telephone Consultative
Committee
EIA - Electric Industries Association
Protection and control equipment
IEC-60051 : (P1 to P9) - Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating
analogue electrical measuring instruments and
their accessories.
IEC-60255 (Part 1 to 23) - Electrical relays. IEC-
60297
(P1 to P4) - Dimensions of mechanical structures of the
482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-60359 - Expression of the performance of electrical &
electronic measuring equipment.
IEC-60387 - Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters. IEC-
60447 - Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating
principles.
IEC-60521 - Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour
metres
IEC-60547 - Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch rack
mounting unit based on NIM Standard (for
electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 - Screw threads
ANSI-B18 - Bolts and Nuts
ANSI-C37.1 - Relays, Station Controls etc.
ANSI-C37.2 - Manual and automatic station control, supervisory
and associated telemetering equipment
ANSI-C37.2 - Relays and relay systems associated with electric
power apparatus
ANSI-C39.1 - Requirements for electrical analog indicating
instruments
MOTORS
IS-325 - Three phase induction motors.
IS-4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosure for
rotating electrical machinery.
IEC-60034 (P1 to P19:) - Rotating electrical machines
IEC-Document 2 - Three phase induction motors
(Central Office) NEMA-MGI Motors and Generators
Electronic equipment and components
MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750
IEC-60068 (P1 to P5) - Environmental testing
IEC-60326 (P1 to P2) - Printed boards
Material and workmanship standards
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) - Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product
grade C.
IS-1364 (P1 to P5) - Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products
grades A and B.
IS-3138 - Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts (M42 to M150)
ISO-898 - Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs
ASTM - Specification and tests for materials
Clamps & connectors
IS-5561 - Electric power connectors.
NEMA-CC1 - Electric Power connectors for sub station
NEMA-CC 3 - Connectors for Use between aluminium or
aluminum-Copper Overhead Conductors
Bus hardware and insulators
IS: 2121 - Fittings for Aluminum and steel cored Al conductors
for overhead power lines.
IS-731 - Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IS-2486 (P1 to P4) - Insulator fittings for overhead power lines with a
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IEC-60120 - Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of string
insulator units.
IEC-60137 - Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above
1000 V.
IEC-60168 - Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of
ceramic material or glass for Systems with
Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V.
IEC-60233 - Tests on Hollow Insulators for use in electrical
equipment.
IEC-60273 - Characteristices of indoor and outdoor post
insulators for systems with nominal voltages
greater than 1000V.
IEC-60305 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage
above 1000V-ceramic or glass insulator units for
a.c. systems Characteristics of String Insulator
Units of the cap and pintype.
IEC-60372 (1984) - Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of
string insulator units : dimensions and tests.
IEC-60383 (P1 and P2) - Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal
voltage above 1000 V.
IEC-60433 - Characteristics of string insulator units of the long
rod type.
IEC-60471 - Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of

string insulator units.
ANSI-C29 - Wet process proelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1 - Test methods for electrical power insulators
ANSI-C92.2 - For insulators, wet-process porcelain and
toughened glass suspension type
ANSI-C29.8 - For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus,
post-type
ANSI-G.8 - Iron and steel hardware
CISPR-7B - Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of
form and of Position, Part 1
ASTM A-153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
Strain and rigid bus-conductor
IS-2678 - Dimensions & tolerances for Wrought Aluminum
and Aluminum Alloys drawn round tube.
IS-5082 - Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars.
Rods, Tubes and Sections for Electrical purposes.
ASTM-B 230-82 - Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical purposes
ASTM-B 231-81 - Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350
conductors
ASTM-B 221 - Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire, shape
ASTM-B 236-83 - Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars)
ASTM-B 317-83 - Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and
structural shapes for electrical purposes (Bus
Conductors)
Batteries and batteries charger
Battery
IS:1651 - Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type
(with Tubular Positive Plates)
IS:1652 - Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type
(with Plante Positive Plates)
IS:1146 - Rubber and Plastic Containers for Lead-Acid
Storage Batteries
IS:6071 - Synthetic Separators for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:266 - Specification for Sulphuric Acid
IS:1069 - Specification for Water for Storage Batteries
IS:3116 - Specification for Sealing Compound for Lead-Acid
Batteries
IS:1248 - Indicating Instruments
IS:10918 - Vented type nickel Cadmium Batteries
IEC:60896-21&22 - Lead Acid Batteries Valve Regulated types –
Methods of Tests & Requirements

IEC: 60623 - Vented type nickel Cadmium Batteries
IEC:60622 - Secondary Cells & Batteries – Sealed Ni-Cd
rechargeable single cell
IEC:60623 - Secondary Cells & Batteries – Vented Ni-Cd
rechargeable single cell
IEC:60896-11 - Stationary Lead Acid Batteries – Vented Type –
General requirements & method of tests
IEEE-485 - Recommended practices for sizing of Lead Acid
Batteries
IEEE-1115 - Sizing of Ni-Cd Batteries
IEEE-1187 - Recommended practices for design & installation of
VRLA Batteries
IEEE-1188 - Recommended practices for design & installation of
VRLA Batteries
IEEE-1189 - Guide for selection of VRLA Batteries
Battery Charger
IS:3895 - Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells
and Stacks
IS:4540 - Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier
Assemblies and Equipment.
IS:6619 - Safety Code for Semiconductor Rectifier
Equipment
IS:2026 - Power Transformers
IS:2959 - AC Contactors for Voltages not Exceeding 1000
Vol
ts
IS:1248 - Indicating Instruments
IS:2208 - HRC Fuses
IS:13947 (Part-3) - Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse
combination units for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC
or 1200V DC
IS:2147 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures for
low voltage switchgear and controlgear.
IS:6005 - Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel IS:3231
- Electrical relays for power system protection IS:3842 -
Electrical relay for AC Systems
IS:5 - Colours for ready mix paint
IEEE-484 - Recommended Design for installation design and
installation of large lead storage batteries for
generating stations and substations.
IEEE-485 - Sizing large lead storage batteries for generating
stations and substations

Wires and cables
ASTMD-2863 - Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to
support candle like combustion of plastics (oxygen
index)
IS-694 - PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto
and including 1100 Volts.
IS-1255 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of
power cables, upto and including 33 kV rating
IS-1554 (P1 and P2) - PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1)
for working voltage upto and including 1100 V.
- Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and
including 11kV.
IS:1753 - Aluminium conductor for insulated cables
IS:2982 - Copper Conductor in insulated cables.
IS-3961 (P1 to P5) - Recommended current ratings for cables.
IS-3975 - Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for
armouring of cables.
IS-5831 - PVC insulating and sheath of electric cables.
IS-6380 - Elastometric insulating and sheath of electric
cables.
IS-7098 - Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
sheathed cables for working voltage upto and
including 1100 volts.
IS-7098 - Cross-linked polyethyle insulated PVC sheathed
cables for working voltage from 3.3kV upto and
including 33 kV.
IS-8130 - Conductors for insulated electrical cables and
flexible cords.
IS-1753 - Aluminum Conductors for insulated cables.
IS-10418 - Specification for drums for electric cables.
IEC-60096 (part 0 to p4) - Radio Frequency cables.
IEC-60183 - Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables.
IEC-60189 (P1 to P7) - Low frequency cables and wires with PVC
insulation and PVC sheath.
IEC-60227 (P1 to P7) - Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated
voltages up to and including 450/750V.
IEC-60228 - Conductors of insulated cables
IEC-60230 - Impulse tests on cables and their accessories. IEC-
60287 (P1 to P3) - Calculation of the continuous current rating of
cables (100% load factor).
IEC-60304 - Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency
cables and wires.
IEC-60331 - Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables. IEC-

60332 (P1 to P3) - Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
IEC-60502 - Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for
rated voltages from 1 kV upto to 30 kV
IEC-754 (P1 and P2) - Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric
cables.
AIR conditioning and ventilation
IS-659 - Safety code for air conditioning
IS-660 - Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ARI:520 - Standard for Positive Displacement
RefrigerationCompressor and Condensing Units
IS:4503 - Shell and tube type heat exchanger
ASHRAE-24 - Method of testing for rating of liquid coolers ANSI-B-
31.5 - Refrigeration Piping
IS:2062 - Steel for general structural purposes
IS:655 - Specification for Metal Air Dust
IS:277 - Specification for Galvanised Steel Sheets
IS-737 - Specification for Wrought Aluminium and
Aluminium Sheet & Strip
IS-1079 - Hot rolled cast steel sheet & strip
IS-3588 - Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans
IS-2312 - Propeller Type AC VentilationFans

BS-848 - Methods of Performance Test for Fans
BS-6540 Part-I - Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General
Ventilation
BS-3928 - Sodium Flame Test for Air Filters (Other than for
Air Supply to I.C. Engines and Compressors) US-PED-
2098 - Method of cold DOP & hot DOP test
MIL-STD-282 - DOP smoke penetration method
ASHRAE-52 - Air cleaning device used in general ventilation for
removing particle matter
IS:3069 - Glossary of Terms, Symbols and Units Relating to
Thermal Insulation Materials.
IS:4671 - Expanded Polystyrene for Thermal Insulation
Purposes
IS:8183 - Bonded Mineral Wool
IS:3346 - Evaluation of Thermal Conductivity properties by
means of guarded hot plate method
ASTM-C-591-69 - Standard specification for rigid preformed cellular
urethane thermal insulation
IS:4894 - Centrifugal Fans

BS:848 - Method of Performance Test for Centrifugal Fans
IS:325 - Induction motors, three-phase
IS:4722 - Rotating electrical machines
IS:1231 - Three phase foot mounted Induction motors,
dimensions of
IS:2233 - Designations of types of construction and
mounting arrangements of rotating electrical
machines
IS:2254 - Vertical shaft motors for pumps, dimensions of
IS:7816 - Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating
machines
IS:4029 - Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS:4729 - Rotating electrical machines, vibration of,
Measurement and evaluation of
IS:4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures for
rotating electrical machinery
IS:7572 - Guide for testing single-phase a.c. motors
IS:2148 - Flame proof enclosure for electrical apparatus
BS:4999 - Noise levels
(Part-51)
Galvanizing
IS-209 - Zinc Ingot
IS-2629 - Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing
on iron and steel.
IS-2633 - Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc
coated articles.
ASTM-A-123 - Specification for zinc (Hot Galavanizing) Coatings,
on products Fabricated from rolled, pressed and
forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.
ASTM-A-121-77 - Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel barbed wire
Painting
IS-6005 - Code of practice for phosphating of iron and steel.
ANSI-Z551 - Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and
equipment
SSPEC - Steel structure painting council
Fire protection system
Fire protection manul issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC) of India
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
IS:6595(Part 2) - Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold water
IS:9137 - Code for acceptance test for centrifugal & axial
pumps

IS:5120 - Technical requirement - Rotodynamic special
purpose pumps
API-610 - Centrifugal pumps for general services
- Hydraulic Institutes Standards
BS:599 - Methods of testing pumps
PTC-8.2 - Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps
DIESEL ENGINES
IS:10000 - Methods of tests for internal combustion engines
IS:10002 - Specification for performance requirements for constant
speed compression ignition engines for general purposes
(above 20 kW)
BS:5514 - The performance of reciprocating compression ignition
(Diesel) engines, utilising liquid fuel only, for general
purposes
ISO:3046 - Reciprocating internal combustion engines
performance
IS:554 - Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight

joints are required on threads
ASME Power Test Code - Internal combustion engine PTC-17
- Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer’s
Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES
IS:636 - Non percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose
IS:638 - Sheet rubber jointing and rubber inserting jointing
IS:778 - Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for general
purpose
IS:780 - Sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 300
mm)
IS:901 - Couplings, double male and double female
instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
IS:902 - Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes
IS:903 - Fire hose delivery couplings branch pipe nozzles
and nozzle spanner
IS:1538 - Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage
IS:1903 - Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including floats
for water supply purposes
IS:2062 - SP for weldable structural steel
IS:2379 - Colour Code for the identification of pipelines
IS:2643 - Dimensions of pipe threads for fastening
purposes

IS:2685 - Code of Practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of sluice valves
IS:2906 - Sluice valves for water-works purposes (350 to
1200 mm size)
IS:3582 - Basket strainers for fire fighting purposes
(cylindrical type)
IS:3589 - Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage (150 to 2000 mm nominal diameter)
IS:4038 - Foot valves for water works purposes IS:4927 -
Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting IS:5290 -
Landing valves (internal hydrant)
IS:5312 - Swing check type reflex (non-return) valves
(Part-I)
IS:5306 - Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations

and equipment on premises
Part-I - Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam inlets
Part-II - Sprinkler systems
BS:5150 - Specification for cast iron gate valves
MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS
IS:325 - Three phase induction motors
IS:900 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of
induction motors
IS:996 - Single phase small AC and universal electric
motors
IS:1231 - Dimensions of three phase foot mounted
induction motors
IS:2148 - Flame proof enclosure of electrical apparatus
IS:2223 - Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction
motors
IS:2253 - Designations for types of construction and
mounting arrangements of rotating electrical
machines
IS:2254 - Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps
IS:3202 - Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical
equipment
IS:4029 - Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS:4691 - Degree of protection provided by enclosure for
rotating electrical machinery
IS:4722 - Rotating electrical machines
IS:4729 - Measurement and evaluation of vibration of
rotating electrical machines

IS:5572 - Classification of hazardous areas for electrical
(Part-I) installations (Areas having gases and
vapours)
IS:6362 - Designation of methods of cooling for rotating
electrical machines
IS:6381 - Construction and testing of electrical apparatus
with type of protection ‘e’
IS:7816 - Guide for testing insulation for rotating machine
IS:4064 - Air break switches
IEC DOCUMENT 2 - Three Phase Induction Motor
(Control Office) 432
VDE 0530 Part I/66 - Three Phase Induction Motor

IS:9224 - HRC Fuses
(Part-II)
IS:6875 - Push Button and Control Switches
IS:694 - PVC Insulated cables
IS:1248 - Indicating instruments
IS:375 - Auxiliary wiring & busbar markings
IS:2147 - Degree of protection
IS:5 - Colour Relay and timers
IS:2959 - Contactors
PG Test Procedures
NFPA-13 - Standard for the installation of sprinkler system
NFPA-15 - Standard for water spray fixed system for the fire
protection
NFPA-12A - Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing
System
NFPA-72E - Standard on Antomatic Fire Detectors
Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)
NFPA-12 - Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher systems
IS:3034 - Fire of industrial building: Electrical generating and
distributing stations code of practice
IS:2878 - CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type Extinguisher
IS:2171 - DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type
IS:940 - Pressurised Water Type
D.G. SET
IS:10002 - Specification for performance requirements for constant
speed compression ignition (diesel engine) for general
purposes
IS:10000 - Method of tests for internal combustion engines IS:4722
- Rotating electrical machines-specification IS:12063
- Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:12065 - Permissible limit of noise levels for rotating
electrical machines.
- Indian Explosive Act 1932
Steel structures
IS-228 (1992) - Method of Chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast iron and
plain carbon and low alloy steels.
IS-802 (P1 to 3:) - Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead
transmission line towers.
IS-806 - Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general
building construction
IS-808 - Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column
channel and angle sections.
IS-814 - Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon of
carbon manganese steel.
IS-816 - Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in Mild steel
IS-817 - Code of practice for training and testing of metal
arc welders. Part 1 : Manual Metal arc welding.
IS-875 (P1 to P4) - Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake)
for buildings and structures.
IS-1161 - Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS-1182 - Recommended practice for radiographic examination of
fusion welded butt joints in steel plates.
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) - Hexagonal head bolts, screws & nuts of products
grade C.
IS-1364 - Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product
grades A and B.
IS-1367 (P1 to P18) - Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners.
IS-1599 - Methods for bend test.
IS-1608 - Method for tensile testing of steel products.
IS-1893 - Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS-1978 - Line Pipe.
IS-2062 - Steel for general structural purposes.
IS-2595 - Code of practice for Radiographic testing.
IS-3063 - Single coil rectagular section spring washers for
bolts, nuts and screws.
IS-3664 - Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse echo testing
by contact and immersion methods.
IS-7205 - Safety code for erection of structural steel work. IS-9595
- Recommendations for metal arc welding of

carbon and carbon manganese steels.
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and
screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 - Square and hexagonal nuts

ANSI-G8.14 - Round head bolts
ASTM-A6 - Specification for General Requirements for rolled
steel plates, shapes, sheet piling and bars of
structural use
ASTM-A36 - Specifications of structural steel
ASTM-A47 - Specification for malleable iron castings
ASTM-A143 - Practice for safeguarding against embilement of
Hot Galvanized structural steel products and
procedure for detaching embrilement
ASTM-A242 - Specification for high strength low alloy structural
steel
ASTM-A283 - Specification for low and intermediate tensile strength
carbon steel plates of structural quality
ASTM-A394 - Specification for Galvanized steel transmission
tower bolts and nuts
ASTM-441 - Specification for High strength low alloy structural
manganese vanadium steel.
ASTM-A572 - Specification for High strength low alloy colombium-
Vanadium steel of structural quality
AWS D1-0 - Code for welding in building construction welding
inspection
AWS D1-1 - Structural welding code
AISC - American institute of steel construction NEMA-CG1
- Manufactured graphite electrodes
Piping and pressure vessels
IS-1239 (Part 1 and 2) - Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings
IS-3589 - Seamless Electrically welded steel pipes for
water, gas and sewage.
IS-6392 - Steel pipe flanges
ASME - Boiler and pressure vessel code
ASTM-A120 - Specification for pipe steel, black and hot dipped,
zinc-coated (Galvanized) welded and seamless steel
pipe for ordinary use
ASTM-A53 - Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot-
dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless
ASTM-A106 - Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature
service

ASTM-A284 - Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon-
silicon steel plates for machine parts and general
construction.
ASTM-A234 - Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy
steel for moderate and elevated temperatures
ASTM-S181 - Specification for forgings, carbon steel for general
purpose piping
ASTM-A105 - Forgings, carbon steel for piping components
ASTM-A307 - Carbon steel externally threated standard
fasteners
ASTM-A193 - Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials for
high temperature service
ASTM-A345 - Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic
applications
ASTM-A197 - Cupola malleable iron
ANSI-B2.1 - Pipe threads (Except dry seal)
ANSI-B16.1 - Cast iron pipe flangesand glanged fitting. Class
25, 125, 250 and 800
ANSI-B16.1 - Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and 300
ANSI-B16.5 - Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel alloy
and other special alloys
ANSI-B16.9 - Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings
ANSI-B16.11 - Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and threaded
ANSI-B16.14 - Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with
piplethreads
ANSI-B16.25 - Butt welding ends
ANSI-B18.1.1 - Fire hose couplings screw thread.
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 - Square and hexagonal nuts
NSI-B18.21.1 - Lock washers ANSI-
B18.21.2 - Plain washers ANSI-
B31.1 - Power piping
ANSI-B36.10 - Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe
ANSI-B36.9 - Stainless steel pipe
Other civil works standards
IS-269 - 33 grade ordinary portland cement.
IS2721 - Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric

IS-278 - Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing.
IS-383 - Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for
concrete.

IS-432 (P1 and P2) - Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-
dawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.
IS-456 - Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete. IS-
516 - Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS-800 - Code of practice for general construction in steel.
IS-806 - Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS-1172 - Basic requirements for water supply, drainage
and sanitation.
IS-1199 - Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS-1566 - Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement.
IS-1742 - Code of Practice for Building drainage.
IS-1785 - Plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed
concrete.
IS-1786 - High strength deformed Steel Bars and wires for
concrete reinforcement.
IS-1811 - Methods of sampling Foundry sands.
IS-1893 - Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures.
IS-2062 - Steel for general structural purposes.
IS-2064 - Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary
appliances-code of practices.
IS-2065 - Code of practice for water supply in buildings. IS-2090
- High tension steel bars used in prestressed
concrete.
IS-2140 - Standard Galvanized steel wire for fencing.
IS-2470 (P1 & P2) - Code of practice for installation of septic tanks. IS-2514
- Concrete vibrating tables.
IS-2645 - Integral cement waterproofing compounds.
IS-3025 (Part 1 to Part 48) - Methods of sampling and test (Physical and chemical)
for water and waste water.
IS-4091 - Code of practice for design and construction of

foundations for transmission line towers and
poles.
IS-4111
(Part 1 to P5) - Code of practice for ancillary structures in
sewerage system.
IS-4990 - Plywood for concrete shuttering work. IS-5600
- Sewage and drainage pumps. National
buiding code of India 1970

USBR E12 - Earth Manual by United States Department of the
interior Bureau of Reclamation
ASTM-A392-81 - Zinc/Coated steel chain link fence fabric
ASTM-D1557-80 - test for moisture-density relation of soils using 10-
lb (4.5 kg) rame land 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.
ASTM-D1586 - Penetration Test and Split-Barrel
(1967) - Sampling of Soils
ASTM-D2049-69 - Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soil
ASTM-D2435 - Test method for Unconsolidated, (1982) Undrained
Strengths of Cohesive Soils in Triaxial Compression.
BS-5075 - Specification for accelerating Part I Admixtures,
Retarding Admixtures and Water Reducing
Admixtures.
CPWD - Latest CPWD specifications
ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR
IS:6745 Methods for Determination of BS:443-1969
Mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated Iron and Steel Articles
IS:8263 Methods for Radio Interference
IEC:437-1973 Test on High Voltage Insulators NEMA:107-1964 CISPR
IS:209 Zinc Ingot BS:3436-1961
IS:398 Aluminum Conductors for IEC:209-1966
Part - V Overhead Transmission Purposes
BS:215(Part-II) Aluminium Conductors galvanized IEC:209-1966 steel
reinforced extra high
BS:215(Part-II) voltage (400 kV and above)
IS:1778 Reels and Drums forBS:1559-1949

Bare Conductors
IS:1521 Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R89-1959of steel wire
IS:2629 Recommended practice for Hot dip Galvanising on Iron and
Steel.
IS:2633 Method for Testing Uniformity of coating of zinc Coated
Articles.
IS:4826 Hot dip galvanised coatings
on round steel wiresASTMA-472-729
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
IS:1521 Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R:89-1959
of Steel Wire
IS:1778 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
IS:2629 Recommended practice for Hot Dip Galvanising on Iron
and Steel.

IS:2633 Methods for testing Uniformity of Coating of Zinc Coated
Articles.
IS:4826 Hot dip Galvanised Coatings ASTM:A 475-72a on Round Steel
Wires BS:443-1969
IS:6745 Method for Determination BS:443-1969of mass of Zinc
Coating on Zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles. IS:209
Zinc ingot BS:3463-1961
IS:398 (Pt. I to Aluminum Conductors for BS:215 (Part-II)
P5:1992) overhead transmission purposes.
Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
IS:1913 General and safety requirements for electric lighting
fittings.
IS:3528 Water proof electric lighting fittings. IS:4012
Dust proof electric lighting fittings.
IS:4013 Dust tight proof electric lighting fittings.
IS:10322 Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors. IS:10322
Industrial lighting fittings with plastic reflectors.
IS:2206 Well glass lighting fittings for use under ground in mines (non-
flameproof type).
IS:10322 Specification for flood light.
IS:10322 Specification for decorative lighting outfits.
IS:10322 Luminaries for street lighting
IS:2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps

IS:9900 High pressure mercury vapour lamps.
IS:1258 Specification for Bayonet lamp fluorescent lamp. IS:3323
Bi-pin lamp holder tubular fluorescent lamps.
IS:1534 Ballasts for use in fluorescent lighting fittings.
(Part-I)
IS:1569 Capacitors for use in fluorescent lighting fittings. IS:2215
Starters for fluorescent lamps.
IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps
IS:418 GLS lamps
IS:3553 Water tight electric fittings
IS:2713 Tubular steel poles
IS:280 MS wire for general engg. purposes
Conduits, Accessories and Junction Boxes
IS:9537 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring IS:3837

Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring IS:4649
Adaptors for flexible steel conduits.
IS:5133 Steel and Cast Iron Boxes
IS:2629 Hot dip galvanising of Iron & Steel.
Lighting Panels
IS:13947 LV Switchgear and Control gear(Part 1 to 5)
IS:8828 Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold
and similar installations.
IS:5 Ready mix paints IS:2551
Danger notice plates
IS:2705 Current transformers
IS:9224 HRC Cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650V(Part-2)
(7)IS:5082 Wrought aluminium and Al. alloys, bars, rods, tubes and
sections for electrical purposes.
(8)IS:8623 Factory built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control Gear for
voltages upto and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC.
(9)IS:1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating instruments
Electrical Installation
IS:1293 3 pin plug
IS:371 Two to three ceiling roses
IS:3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes
IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical
work.
IS:732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (system
voltage not exceeding 650 Volts.)
IS:3043 Code of practice for earthing.
IS:3646 Code of practice of interior illumination part II & III. IS:1944
Code of practice for lighting of public through fares.
IS:5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous
areas.
IS:800 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general
building construction.
IS:2633 Methods of Testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles.
IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel.
INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT INDIAN ELECTRICITY
RULES
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear
assemblies
IS:13947 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear,
Part 1 General Rules
IS:13947 (part-2) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear,
Part 2 circuit breakers.
IS:13947 (part-3) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear.
Part 3 Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors
and fuse combination units
Part 4 Contactors and motors starters.
Part 5 Control-circuit devices and switching elements
Part 6 Multiple function switching devices.
Part 7 Ancillary equipments
IS:12063 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:2705 Current Transformers

IS:3156 Voltage Transformers
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:1248 Electrical indicating instruments
IS:722 AC Electricity meters
IS:5578 Guide for Marking of insulated conductors
of apparatus terminals
IS:13703 (part 1) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or
1500V DC Part 1 General Requirements
IS:13703 (part 2) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or
1500V DC Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized persons
IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
IS:5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum alloys for electrical
purposes
IS:2633 Hot dip galvanizing.

Annexure- ‘B’
LIST OF THE MAKES FOR WHICH TYPE TEST REPORTS NOT REQUIRED
TO BE SUBMITTED
S.No. ITEM MAKE

DESCRIPTION
1. Out door receptacles CGL / B&C / BCH / Sakti, Chennai / Indo Asian / Havells
2. Tre foil clamps Moulded Fibre Glass Products, Calcutta
3. Diesel Engine K.Cummins / Ruston & Hornsby
4. Alternator AVK / KIRLOSKAR / STAMFORD
5. Motors KEC / Siemens/ NGEF/Crompton/ABB Sunil
6. Cable Glands & Co. / Arup/ Comet / QPIE
7. Junction Box Sarvana / ECS / C&S / Vikas/ Maktel/Unilac/Jasper
8. Lighting Fixtures Phillips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells
NOTE : For a new make other than above approved list of sub vendor, type
test reports & performace test report as per relevant standard shall
be submitted for Purchaser’s approval.

3. LT SWITCHGEAR

SECTION: LTSWITCHGEAR
Table of contents
Clause No. Description .
1.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF SWITCHBOARDS AND

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1.2 DERATING OF EQUIPMENTS
1.3 POWER BUS BARS AND INSULATORS
1.4 EARTH BUS
1.5 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.6 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) and
MCB
1.7 RELAYS
1.8 CONTACTORS
1.9 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.10 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
1.11 CONTROL & SELECTOR SWITCHES
1.12 AIR BREAK SWITCHES
1.13 PUSH BUTTONS
1.14 INDICATING LAMPS
1.15 FUSES
1.16 TERMINAL BLOCKS
1.17 NAME PLATES AND LABELS
1.18 SPACE HEATER
1.19 CONTROL AND SECONDARY WIRING
1.20 POWER CABLES TERMINATION
1.21 TYPE TESTS
1.22 ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.23 COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS
1.25 EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED
1.26 PARAMETERS
1.27 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF OUTDOOR LIGHTING
1.28 AUTOMATIC SUPPLY CHANGEOVER

SECTION: LT SWITCHGEAR
1.1. CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF SWITCHBOARDS
AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1.1.1. All boards shall be of metal enclosed, indoor floor mounted,
compartmentalised construction and freestanding type.
1.1.2. All board frames, shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or
pressed and shaped cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.0 mm. Frames
shall be enclosed in cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6 mm. Doors
and covers shall also be of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6
mm. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.
1.1.3. All panel edges and cover/door edges shall be reinforced against distortion by rolling,
bending or by the addition of welded reinforcement members.
1.1.4. The complete structures shall be rigid, self-supporting, free from flaws, twists and
bends.
All cut-outs shall be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges.
1.1.5. All boards shall be of dust and vermin proof construction and shall be provided with
a degree of protection of IP: 52 as per IS 13947 (Part-1). However, the busbar
chambers having a degree of protection of IP: 42, in accordance with IS 13947 (Part-
1), are also acceptable where continuous busbar rating exceeds 1000 Amp. Provision
shall be made in all compartments for providing IP: 52 degree of protection, when
Circuit breaker or module trolley, has been removed. All cut-outs shall be provided
with neoprene gaskets.
1.1.6. Provision of louvers on boards would not be preferred. However, louvers backed
with metal screen are acceptable on the busbar chambers where continuous busbar
rating exceeds 1000 Amps.
1.1.7. All boards shall be of uniform height not exceeding 2450 mm.
1.1.8. Boards shall be easily extendible on both sides, by the addition of the vertical
sections after removing the end covers.
1.1.9. Boards shall be supplied with base frames made of structural steel sections, alongwith
all necessary mounting hardware required for welding the base frames to the insert
plates.
1.1.10. All boards shall be of double front construction and shall have
(i) A completely enclosed busbar compartment for running horizontal busbars and
vertical busbars. Busbar chambers shall be completely enclosed with
metallic portions. Bolted covers shall be provided for access to horizontal and
Vertical

busbars for repair and maintenance, which shall be feasible without disturbing
feeder compartment. Vertical bus bar chambers shall be accessible from front as
well as back side of the panel. One set of vertical busbars shall be used in
between two adjacent sections for switchgear connections. In case of Incomer(s),
Bus-coupler and ACB feeders, vertical busbars located in rear side shall be
additionally covered with metallic perforated bolted sheets to avoid direct access
after opening rear door of chamber.
(ii) Completely enclosed switchgear compartment(s) one for each circuit for housing
circuit breaker or MCCB or motor starter.
(iii) A distinct compartment or alley for power and control cables on each side of panel.
Cable alley compartment shall have a through metallic partition for segregating
cables on both sides. Cable alley door shall preferably be hinged. Cable alley shall
have no exposed live parts. Any live terminals shall be fully shrouded/insulated
from safety aspects. However It shall be of at least 350mm width.
(iv) A compartment for relays and other control devices associated with a circuit
breaker.
1.1.11. Sheet steel barriers shall be provided between two adjacent vertical panels running to the
full height of the switchboard, except for the horizontal busbar compartment. Each
shipping section shall have full metal sheets at both ends for transport and storage.
1.1.12. All equipments associated with a single circuit except MCB circuits shall be housed in a
separate compartment of the vertical section. The Compartment shall be sheet steel
enclosed on all sides with the withdrawal units in position or removed. The front of the
compartment shall be provided with the hinged single leaf door, with locking facilities.
In case of circuits controlled by MCBs, group of MCB feeders can be offered in common
compartment. In such case number of MCB feeder to be used in a common compartment
shall not exceed 4 (four) and front of MCB compartment, shall have a viewing port of
toughen glass sheet for viewing and sheet steel door of module shall be lockable with
star knob/panel key.
1.1.13. After isolation of power and control circuit connections it shall be possible to safely
carryout maintenance in a compartment with the busbar and adjacent circuit live. Neces-
sary shrouding arrangement shall be provided for this purpose over the cable terminations
located in cable alley.
1.1.14. The minimum clearance in air between phases and between phase and earth for the entire
run of horizontal and vertical busbars, shall be 25 mm. For all other components, the
clearance between "two live parts", " A live part and an earthed part" and isolating
distance shall be atleast ten (10) mm throughout. Wherever it is not possible to maintain
these clearances, insulation shall be provided by sleeving or barriers. However, for
horizontal run of busbar minimum clearance of 25 mm should be maintained even if they
are sleeved.
1.1.15. The temperature rise of horizontal & vertical busbars when carrying rated current along
its full run shall in no case exceed 55°C, with silver plated joints and 40°C with all other
type of joints over an outside ambient temperature of 50°C.
1.1.16. All busbar chambers shall be provided with removable bolted covers. The covers shall
be provided with danger labels.

1.1.17. All identical circuit breakers and module chassis of same test size shall be
fully interchangeable without having to carryout modifications.
1.1.18. All Circuit breaker boards shall be of Single Front type, with fully drawout
circuit breakers, which can be drawn out without having to unscrew any
connections. The circuit breakers shall be mounted on rollers and guides for
smooth movement between SERVICE, TEST and ISOLATED positions and for
withdrawal from the Switchboard. Testing of the breaker shall be possible in the
TEST position.
1.1.19. Wherever two breaker compartments are provided in the same vertical section,
insulating barriers and shrouds shall be provided in the rear cable compartment to
avoid accidental touch with the live parts of one circuit when working on the other
circuit.
1.1.20. All disconnecting contacts for power circuits shall be of robust design and fully
self aligning. Fixed and moving contacts of the power drawout contact system
shall be silver plated. Both fixed and moving contacts shall be replaceable.
1.1.21. All AC & DC boards shall be of double Front type.
1.1.22. All module shall be fixed type except air circuit breaker module, which shall be
drawout type.
1.1.23. The connections from busbars to the main switch shall be fully
insulated/shrouded, and securely bolted. The partition between the feeder
compartment and cable alley may be non-metallic and shall be of such
construction as to allow cable cores with lugs to be easily inserted in the feeder
compartment for termination.
1.1.24. All equipment and components shall be neatly arranged and shall be easily
accessible for operation and maintenance. The internal layout of all modules
shall be subject to PURCHASER approval. Bidder shall submit dimensional
drawings showing complete internal details of Busbars and module components,
for each type and rating for approval.
1.1.25. The tentative power and control cable entries shall be from bottom. However,
Purchaser reserves the right to alter the cable entries, if required, during
detailed engineering, without any additional commercial implication.
1.1.26. Adopter panels and dummy panels required to meet the various busbar
arrangements and layouts required shall be included in Bidder's scope of work.
1.2. DERATING OF EQUIPMENTS
1.2.1. The current ratings of all equipments as specified in the `Bill of Materials
are the minimum standards current ratings at a reference ambient temperature of
50°C as per relevant Indian Standards.
1.2.2. The Bidder shall indicate clearly the derating factors employed for each
component and furnish the basis for arriving at these derating factors duly
considering the specified ambient temperature of 50°C.
1.3. POWER BUS BARS AND INSULATORS
1.3.1. All AC Distribution Boards shall be provided with three phase buses and a
neutral bus bars and the DC Distribution Boards shall be provided with two
busbars.
1.3.2. All busbars and jumper connections shall be of high conductivity HDEC copper
of adequate size the bus bar size calculation shall be submitted for approval.
1.3.3. The Cross-Section of the busbars shall be uniform through out the length of
Switchgear and shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the
stresses due to the specified short circuit currents.
1.3.4. All busbars shall be adequately supported by Non-hygroscopic, non-combustible,
track- resistant & high strength type Polyester fibre glass Moulded
Insulators. Separate supports shall be provided for each phase and neutral
busbar. If a common support is provided anti-tracking barriers shall be provided
between the supports.
1.3.5. All busbars joints shall be provided with high tensile steel bolts.
Belleville/spring washers and nuts, so as to ensure good contacts at the joints.

Non-silver plated Busbars joints shall be thoroughly cleaned at the joint locations
and a suitable contact grease shall be applied just before making a joint.
1.3.6. All busbars shall be colour coded as per IS: 11353
1.3.7. The Bidder shall furnish calculations alongwith the bid, establishing the
adequacy of busbar sizes for specified current ratings, On the basis of short
circuit current and temperature rise consideration at specified ambient temp.
1.4. EARTH BUS
1.4.1. A galvanised steel earthing shall be provided at the bottom of each panel and shall
extend throughout the length of each switchboard. It shall be welded/bolted to
the frame work of each panel and breaker earthing contact bar vertical bus shall
be provided in each vertical section which shall in turn be bolted/welded to main
horizontal ground bus.
1.4.2. The earth bus shall have sufficient cross-section to carry the momentary short
circuit and short time fault currents to earth as indicated in `Bill of Materials'
without exceeding the allowable temperature rise.
1.4.3. Suitable arrangements shall be provided at each end of the horizontal earth
bus for bolting to Purchaser's earthing conductors. The horizontal earth bus shall
project out the switchboard ends and shall have predrilled holes for this
connection. A joint spaced and taps to earth bus shall be made through at least two
bolts.
1.4.4. All non-current metal work of the Switchboard shall be effectively bonded to the
earth bus. Electrical conductivity of the whole switchgear enclosures frame work
and the truck shall be maintained even after painting.
1.4.5. The truck and breaker frame shall get earthed while the truck is being inserted in
the panel and positive earthing of the truck and breaker frame shall be
maintained in all positions. SERVICES & ISOLATED, as well as through out the
intermediate travel.
1.4.6. Each module frame shall get engaged to the vertical earth bus. Before the
disconnecting contacts on these module are engaged to the vertical busbar.
1.4.7. All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipments
shall be connected to earth by independent stranded copper wires of size not less
than 2.5 mm2.
Insulation colour code of earthing wires shall be green. Earthing wires
shall be
connected to terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering is not
acceptable. Looping of earth Connection which would result in loss of earth
connection to the devices when a device is removed is not acceptable.
However, looping of earth connections between equipment to provide alternative
paths or earth bus is acceptable.
1.4.8. VT and CT secondary neutral point earthing shall be at one place only, on the
terminal block. Such earthing shall be made through links so that earthing
of one secondary circuit shall be removed without disturbing the earthing of other
circuit.
1.4.9. All hinged doors shall be earthed through flexible earthing braid.
1.4.10. Caution nameplate `Caution-Live Terminals' shall be provided at all points
where the terminals are like to remain live and isolation is possible only at remote
end.
1.5. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.5.1. Circuit breakers shall be three-pole air break horizontal drawout type and shall
have inherent fault making and breaking capacities as specified in "Technical
Parameters". The circuit breakers which meet specified parameter only after
provision of releases or any other devices shall not be acceptable.
1.5.2. Circuit breakers shall be mounted along with it operating mechanism on a
wheeled carriage. Suitable guides shall be provided to minimise misalignment of
the breaker.
1.5.3. There shall be `Service', `Test' and `Fully withdrawn positions for the breakers. In
`Test' position the circuit breaker shall be capable of being tested for
operation without energising the power circuits i.e. the power Contacts shall be
disconnected while the Control circuits shall remain undisturbed. Locking
facilities shall be provided so as to prevent movement of the circuit breaker
from the `SERVICE', `TEST' OR FULLY WITHDRAWN' position. It shall be
possible to close the door in TEST position.
1.5.4. All circuit breakers shall be provided with 4 NO and 4 NC potentially free
auxiliary contacts. These contacts shall be in addition to those required for
internal mechanism of the breaker. Separate limit switches each having required
number of contacts shall be provided in both `SERVICE' & `TEST' position of
the breaker. All contacts shall be rated for making continuously carrying and
breaking 10 Amps at 240V AC and 1 Amp (Inductive) at 220V DC.
1.5.5. Suitable mechanical indications shall be provided on all circuit breakers to show
ÒPEN'.
`CLOSE', `SERVICE', `TEST' and `SPRING CHARGED'
positions.
1.5.6. Main poles of the circuit breakers shall operate simultaneously in such a way that
the maximum difference between the instants of contacts touching during closing
shall not exceed half cycle of rated frequency.
1.5.7. All circuit breakers shall be provided with the interlocks as explained in further
clauses.
1.5.8. Movement of a circuit breaker between SERVICE AND TEST positions shall not
be possible unless it is in OPEN position. Attempted with drawl of a closed circuit
breaker shall trip the circuit breaker.
1.5.9. Closing of a circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in SERVICE,
TEST POSITION or in FULLY WITHDRAWN POSITION.
1.5.10. Circuit breaker cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters operated automatically
by the movement of the circuit breaker carriage to cover the stationary isolated
contacts when the breaker is withdrawn. It shall however, be possible to open
the shutters intentionally, against spring pressure for testing purpose.
1.5.11. A breaker of particular rating shall be prevented from insertion in a cubicle of a
different rating.
1.5.12. Circuit breakers shall be provided with electrical anti-pumping and trip free feature,
even if mechanical antipumping feature is provided.
1.5.13. Mechanical tripping shall be possible by means of front mounted RED `Trip'
push- button. In case of electrically operated breakers these push buttons shall be
shrouded to prevent accidental operation.
1.5.14. Breaker controlled motors shall operate satisfactorily under the following
conditions:
(i) Direct on-line starting of Induction Motors rated 110 kW to 220 kW with a locked
rotor current of seven times the rated current, and starting time of up to 30
seconds.
(ii) Breaking on-load, full load and locked rotor currents of Induction Motors for rated
100 kW to 220 kW.
1.5.15. Means shall be provided to slowly close the circuit breaker in withdrawn
position. If required for inspection and setting of Contacts, in service position
slow closing shall not be possible.
1.5.16. Power operated mechanism shall be provided with a universal motor
suitable for operation 220V DC Control supply with voltage variation from
90% to 110% rated voltage. Motor insulation shall be class È' or better.
1.5.17. The motor shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for fully
charging the closing spring.
1.5.18. Once the closing springs are discharged, after the one closing operation of
circuit breaker, it shall automatically initiate, recharging of the spring.
1.5.19. The mechanism shall be such that as long as power is available to the motor, a
continuous sequence of closing and opening operations shall be possible. After
failure of power supply at least one open-close-open operation shall be possible.
1.5.20. Provision shall be made for emergency manual charging and as soon as this
manual charging handle is coupled, the motor shall automatically get mechanically
decoupled.
1.5.21. All circuit breakers shall be provided with closing and trip coils. The closing coils
shall operate correctly at all values of Voltage between 85% to 110% at rated
control voltage. The trip coil shall operate satisfactorily under all values of supply
voltage between 70% to 110% of rated control voltage.
1.5.22. Provision for mechanical closing of the breaker only in `TEST' and

`WITHDRAWN' positions shall be made.
1.5.23. PROTECTION CO-ORDINATION
1.5.23.1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to fully co-ordinate the overload and
short circuit tripping of the circuit breakers with the upstream and down
stream circuit breakers/fuses/motor starters, to provide satisfactory discrimination.
1.6. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) and MCB
1.6.1. MCCB shall in general conform to IS: 13947 Part-2. All MCCB shall be of P2 duty.
1.6.2. MCCB shall be flush mounted on the AC/DC distribution boards.
1.6.3 MCCBs shall be provided with thermo-magnetic type release for over current and
short circuit protection. The setting of the thermal release shall be adjustable
between 75% to
100% of the rated current. The MCCB shall have breaking capacity not less than 20kA.
1.6.4 MCCBs used for ACDB incomers and Bus coupler shall be equipped with stored
energy mechanism for electrical closing and tripping. All other MCCBs shall be
manually operated. The operating handle should give a clear trip indication.
1.6.5 Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) shall conform to IEC: 898-1987 and IS: 8828.
1.7 RELAYS
1.7.1 All relays and timers in protective circuits shall be flush mounted on panel front
with connections from the inside. They shall have transparent dust tight covers
removable from the front. All protective relays shall have a drawout
construction for easy replacement from the front. They shall either have built-
in test facilities, or shall be provided with necessary test blocks and test switches
located immediately below each relay. The auxiliary relays and timers may be
furnished in non-drawout cases.
1.7.2 All AC relays shall be suitable for operation, at 50 Hz with 110 volts VT secondary
and 1 amp or 5 amp CT secondary.
1.7.3 All protective relays and timers shall have at least two potentially free output
contacts.
Relays shall have contacts as required for protection schemes. Contacts of relays
and
timers shall be silver faced and shall have a spring action. Adequate number of
terminals
shall be available on the relay cases for applicable relaying schemes.
1.7.4 All protective relays auxiliary relays and timers shall be provided with hand
reset operation indicators (Flags) for analysing the cause of operation.
1.7.5 All relays shall withstand a test voltage of 2 KV (rms) for one minute.
1.7.6 Motor starters shall be provided with three element, ambient temperature
compensated, time lagged, hand reset type overload relays with adjustable settings.
The setting ranges shall be properly selected to suit the motor ratings. These
relays shall have a separate black coloured hand reset push button mounted on
compartment door and shall have at least one changeover contact.
1.7.7 All fuse-protected contactor-controlled motors shall have single phasing
protection, either as a distinct feature in the overload relays (by differential
movement of bimetallicstrips), or as a separate device. The single phasing
protection shall operate even with80% of the set current flowing in two of the
phases.
1.8 CONTACTORS
1.8.1 Motor starter contactors shall be of air break, electromagnetic type rated
for
uninterrupted duty as per IS:13947 (Part 4).
1.8.2 Contactors shall be double break, non-gravity type and their main contacts shall be
silver faced.
1.8.3 Direct on line starter contactors shall be of utilisation category AC2. These
contactors shall be as per IS:13947 (Part 4).
1.8.4 Each contactor shall be provided with two (2) normally open (NO) and two (2)
normally close (NC) auxiliary contacts.
1.8.5 Operating coils of contactors shall be of 240V AC Unless otherwise specified
elsewhere.
The Contactors shall operate satisfactorily between 85% to 110% of the rated
voltage.
The Contactor shall drop out at 70% of the rated voltage.
1.9 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.9.1 All current and voltage transformers shall be completely encapsulated cast resin
insulated type suitable for continuous operation at the temperature prevailing inside
the switchgear enclosure, when the switchboard is operating at its rated
condition and the outside ambient temperature is 50°C.
1.9.2 All instrument transformers shall be able to withstand the thermal and
mechanical stresses resulting from the maximum short circuit and momentary
current ratings of the associated switchgear.
1.9.3 All instrument transformer shall have clear indelible polarity markings. All
secondary terminals shall be wired to a separate terminal on an accessible terminal
block where star- point formation and earthing shall be done.
1.9.4 Current transformers may be multi or single core type. All voltage transformers
shall be single phase type. The Bus VTs shall be housed in a separate
compartment.
1.9.5 All VTs shall have readily accessible HRC current limiting fuses on both
primary and secondary sides.
1.10 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
1.10.1 All indicating and integrating meters shall be flush mounted on panel front. The inst
construction.
1.10.2 All instruments shall be compensated for temperature errors and factory
calibrated to directly read the primary quantities. Means shall be provided for zero
adjustment without removing or dismantling the instruments.
1.10.3 All instruments shall have white dials with black numerals and lettering. Black
knife edge pointer with parallax free dials will be preferred.
1.10.4 Ammeters provided on Motor feeders shall have a compressed scale at the upper
current region to cover the starting current.
1.10.5 Watt-hour meters shall be of 3 phase three element type, Maximum demand
indicators need not be provided.
1.11 CONTROL & SELECTOR SWITCHES
1.11.1 Control & Selector switches shall be of rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly
marked to show the function and positions. The switches shall be of sturdy
construction suitable for mounting on panel front. Switches with
shrouding of live parts and sealing of contacts against dust ingress shall be
preferred.
1.11.2 Circuit breaker selector switches for breaker Controlled motor shall have three
stay put positions marked `Switchgear', `Normal' and `Trial' respectively. They
shall have two contacts of each of the three positions and shall have black shade
handles.
1.11.3 Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall have four stayput position with
adequate number of contacts for three phase 4 wire system. These shall have
oval handles Ammeter selector switches shall have make before break type
contacts to prevent open circuiting of CT secondaries.
1.11.4 Contacts of the switches shall be spring assisted and shall be of suitable material to
give a long trouble free service.
1.11.5 The contact ratings shall be at least the following :
(i) Make and carry continuously 10 Amp.
(ii) Breaking current at 220V DC 1 Amp (Inductive)

(iii) Breaking current at 240V AC 5 Amp (at 0.3 pf lagging)
1.12 AIR BREAK SWITCHES

1.12.1 Air breaker switch shall be of the heavy duty, single throw group operated, load
break, fault make type complying with IS:4064.
1.12.2 The Bidder shall ensure that all switches are adequately rated so as to be fully
protected by the associated fuses during all abnormal operating conditions such as
overload, locked motor, short circuit etc.
1.12.3 Switch operating handles shall be provided with padlocking facilities to lock
them in
ÒFF' position.
1.12.4 Interlocks shall be provided such that it is possible to open the cubicle door only
when the switch is in ÒFF' position and to close the switch only when the door
is closed. However suitable means shall be provided to intentionally defeat the
interlocks explained above.
1.12.5 Switches and fuses for AC/DC control supply and heater supply wherever
required shall be mounted inside and cubicles.
1.13 PUSH BUTTONS
1.13.1 Push-buttons shall be of spring return, push to actuate type. Their contacts shall be
rated to make, continuously carry and break 10A at 240V and 0.5A (inductive) at
220V DC.
1.13.2 All push-buttons shall have one normally open and one normally closed contact,
unless specified otherwise. The contact faces shall be of silver or silver alloy.
1.13.3 All push-buttons shall be provided with integral escutcheon plates marked
with its function.
1.13.4 The colour of the button shall be as follows :
(i) GREEN : For motor START, Breaker

CLOSE (ii) RED : For motor TRIP,
Breaker OPEN
(iii) BLACK : For overload reset.
1.13.5 All push-buttons on panels shall be located in such a way that Red-push-buttons
shall always be to the left of green push-buttons.
1.14 INDICATING LAMPS
1.14.1 Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting cluster LED type. The lamps
shall have escutcheon plates marked with its function, wherever necessary.
1.14.2 Lamps shall have translucent lamp-covers of the following colours, as warranted
by the application :
(i) RED : For motor ON, Breaker

CLOSED (ii) GREEN : For motor
OFF, Breaker OPEN (iii) WHITE : For
motor Auto-Trip
(iv) BLUE : For all healthy conditions (e.g. control supply, and
also for
'SPRING
CHARGED"
(v) AMBER : For all alarm conditions (e.g. overload) Also for
`SERVICE' and `TEST' positions indicators.
1.14.3 Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the cubicle.
1.14.4 Indication lamps should be located just above the associated push
buttons/control switches. Red lamps shall invariable be located to the right of
green lamps. In case a white lamp is also provided, it shall be placed between
the red and green lamps along with the centre line of control switch/push button
pair. Blue and Amber lamps should normally be located above the Red and Green
lamps.
1.14.5 When associated with push-buttons, red lamps shall be directly above the green
push button, and green lamps shall be directly above the red push-button. All
indicating lamps shall be suitable for continuous operation at 90 to 110% of their
rated voltage.
1.15 FUSES
1.15.1 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge fuse link type. Screw type fuses shall
not be accepted. Fuses for AC Circuits shall be of class 2 type, 20 kA (RMS)
breaking current at 415 AC, and for DC circuits Class 1 type 4 kA breaking current.
1.15.2 Fuses shall have visible operation indicators.
1.15.3 Fuses shall be mounted on fuses carriers, which are mounted on fuse bases,
wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers fuses shall be directly
mounted on plug in type of bases. In such cases one set of insulated fuse pulling
handles shall be supplied with each switchgear.
1.15.4 Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending upon the circuit
requirements and these shall be subject to approval of PURCHASER.
1.16 TERMINAL BLOCKS
1.16.1 Terminal blocks shall be of 750 volts grade and have continuous rating to carry
the maximum expected current on the terminals. It shall be complete with
insulating barriers, clip-on-type/stud type terminals for Control Cables and
identification strips. Marking on terminal strip shall correspond to the terminal
numbering on wiring on diagrams. It shall be similar to ÈLEMEX' standard type
terminals, cage clamp type of Phoenix or WAGO or equivalent
1.16.2 Terminal blocks for CT and VT secondary leads shall be provided with test links
and isolating facilities. CT secondary leads shall be provided with short
circuiting and earthing facilities. It shall be similar to Èlem.' `CATD' - Type.
1.16.3 In all circuit breaker panels at least 10% spare terminals for external connections
shall be provided and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all
terminal blocks. Space for adding another 10% spare terminals shall also be
available.
1.16.4 All terminal blocks shall be suitable for terminating on each side, two (2) Nos. of
2.5 mm square size standard copper conductors.
1.16.5 All terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to the
function.
Engraved white-on-black labels shall be provided on the terminal
blocks.
1.16.6 Wherever duplication of a terminal block is necessary it shall be achieved by
solid bonding links.
1.16.7 Terminal blocks shall be arranged with at least 100 mm clearance between two
sets of terminal block. The minimum clearance between the first row of terminal
block and the associated cable gland plate shall be 250 mm.
1.17 NAME PLATES AND LABELS
1.17.1 All switchgears, AC/DC distribution boards, shall be provided with prominent,
engraved identification plates. The module identification plate shall clearly give
the feeder number and feeder designation. For single front switchboards,
similar panel and board identification labels shall be provided at the rear also.
1.17.2 All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lamicoid with white
engraved lettering on black back ground. Inscriptions and lettering sizes shall
be subject to PURCHASER approval.
1.17.3 Suitable plastic sticker labels shall be provided for easy identification of all
equipments, located inside the panel/module. These labels shall be positioned

so as to be clearly visible and shall give the device number as mentioned in the
module wiring drawings.
1.18 SPACE HEATER
1.18.1 Space heater shall be provided in all the boards for preventing harmful
moisture condensation.
1.18.2 The space heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation on 240V AC, 50 Hz,
single phase supply, and shall be automatically controlled by thermostats.
Necessary isolating switches and fuses shall also be provided.
1.19 CONTROL AND SECONDARY WIRING
1.19.1 All switchboards shall be supplied completely wired internally upto the terminal
blocks ready to receive Purchaser's control cables.
1.19.2 All inter cubicle and inter panel wiring and connections between panels of
same switchboard including all bus wiring for AC and DC supplies shall be
provided by the bidder.
1.19.3 All internal wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, 1.5 square
mm or larger stranded copper wires having colour coded, PVC insulation. CT
circuits shall be wired with 2.5 square mm copper wires. Voltage grade and
insulation shall be same as above. The cable shall be F.R.L.S. type.
1.19.4 Extra-flexible wires shall be used for wiring to device mounted on moving parts
such as hinged doors.
1.19.5 All wiring shall be properly supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
securely connected to equipment terminals and terminals blocks.
1.20 POWER CABLES TERMINATION
1.20.1 Cable termination compartment and arrangement for power cables shall be
suitable for stranded aluminium conductor, armoured XLPE/PVC insulated and
sheathed, single core/three core, 1100 V grade cables.
1.20.2 All necessary cable terminating accessories such as Gland plates, supporting
clamps and brackets, power cable lugs, hardware etc. shall be provided by the
successful bidder, to suit the final cable sizes which would be advised later.
1.20.3 The gland plate shall be of removable type and shall cover the entire cable alley.
Bidder shall also ensure that sufficient space is provided for all cable glands.
Gland plates shall be factory-drilled according to the cable gland sizes and number
which shall be informed to the Contractor later. For all single core cables, gland
plates shall be of non-magnetic Material.
1.21 TYPE TESTS
1.21.1 Type tests reports on Panels (Switchgear and Control gear assemblies) as per IS 8623
Part- I shall be submitted for the following tests in line with clause 9.0 of Section
GTR before the fabrication of switchgear is started:
i) Verification of temperature rise
limits ii) Verification of the dielectric
properties iii) Verification of short
circuit strength
iv) Verification of the continuity of the protective
circuit v) Verification of clearances and creepage
distances
vi) Verification of mechanical
operation vii) Verification of degree
of protection

1.21.2 Contractor shall submit type test reports for the following Switchgear and Control
gears before the fabrication of switchgear is started:
1. Circuit breakers/MCCB as per IS 13947 Part-II
2. Protective Relays as per IEC: 60255
For above equipments, test conducted once are acceptable (i.e. The requirement
of test
conducted within last five years shall not be applicable)
1.22 ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.22.1 The Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all
electrical equipment included in this specification.
1.22.2 Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman like manner so that it is level,
plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Tolerance shall be as
established in Contractor's drawings or as stipulated by purchaser. No equipment
shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been
checked and found acceptable by the purchaser.
1.22.3 Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour tools equipment rigging materials,
bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete inserts etc. in proper time required to completely
install, test and commission the equipment.
1.22.4 Manufacturer's and purchaser's instructions and recommendations shall be

correctly followed in handling, setting, testing and commissioning of all equipment.
1.22.5 Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective room through the regular
door or openings specifically provided for this purpose. No part of the structure
shall be utilised to lift or erect any equipment without prior permission of
Purchaser.
1.22.6 All boards shall be installed in accordance with Indian Standards IS:3072
and at Purchaser's instructions. All boards shall be installed on finished
surfaces, concrete or steel stills. Contractor shall be required to install and align
any channel sills which form part of foundations. In joining shipping sections of
switchboards together adjacent housing of panel sections or flanged throat
sections shall be bolted together after alignment has been completed.
Power bus, enclosures ground and control splices of
conventional nature shall be cleaned and bolted together being drawn up with
torque spanner of proper size or by other approved means.
1.22.7 All boards shall be made completely vermin proof.

1.22.8 Contractor shall take utmost care in holding instruments, relaying and other
delicate mechanism wherever the instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be
mentioned only after the associated panels have been erected and aligned. The
packing materials employed for safe transit of instrument and relays shall be removed after
ensuring that panel have been completely installed and to further movement of the same should
be necessary. Any damage shall be immediately reported to Purchaser.
1.22.9 Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched by up

Contractor if their surface is specified or marred while handling.
1.22.10 After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connections, Contractor
shall perform operational tests on all switchboards, to verify proper operation
of switchboards/panels and correctness of all equipment in each and every
respect. The cable opening and cables entries for cables terminating to the panels
shall be sealed with fire sealing materials.
1.23 COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS

The Contractor shall carry out the following commissioning checks, in addition
to the other checks and tests recommended by the manufacturers.
1.23.1 General
1.23.1.1 Check name plate details according to the specification.
1.23.1.2 check for physical damage.
1.23.1.3 Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, joints connecting terminals.
1.23.1.4 Check earth connection.
1.23.1.5 Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
1.23.1.6 Check all moving parts for proper lubrication.
1.23.1.7 Check settings of all the relays.
1.23.2 Circuit Breakers
1.23.2.1 Check alignment of breaker truck for free movement.
1.23.2.2 Check correct operation of shutters.
1.23.2.3 Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values.
1.23.2.4 Manual operation of breaker completely assembled.
1.23.2.5 Power closing/opening operation, manually and electrically.
1.23.2.6 Breaker closing and tripping time.
1.23.2.7 Trip free and anti-pumping operation.
1.23.2.8 IR values, minimum pick up voltage and resistance of coils.
1.23.2.9 Contact resistance
1.23.2.10 Simultaneous closing of all the three phases.
1.23.2.11 Check electrical & mechanical interlocks provided.
1.23.2.12 Check on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches, and
time of charging.
1.23.2.13 All functional checks.
1.23.3 Current Transformers
1.23.3.1 Megger between winding and winding terminals to body.
1.23.3.2 Polarity test
1.23.3.3 Ratio identification checking of all ratios on all cores by primary injection of
current.
1.23.3.4 Spare CT cores, if available, to be shorted and earthed.
1.23.4 Voltage Transformer

1.23.4.1 Insulation resistance test
1.23.4.2 Ratio test on all cores.
1.23.4.3 Polarity test.
1.23.4.4 Line connections as per connection diagram.
1.23.5 Cubicle Wiring
1.23.5.1 Check all switch developments.
1.23.5.2 Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the
wiring is as per relevant drawing. All interconnections between panels/equipment

shall be similarly checked.
1.23.5.3 All the wires shall be meggered to earth.
1.23.5.4 Functional checking of all control circuit e.g. closing, tripping control,
interlock, supervision and alarm circuit.
1.23.6 Relays
1.23.6.1 Check connections and wiring.
1.23.6.2 Megger all terminals to body.
1.23.6.3 Megger AC to DC terminals.
1.23.6.4 Check operating characteristics by secondary injection.

1.23.6.5 Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils.
1.23.6.6 Check operation of electrical/mechanical targets.
1.23.6.7 Relays settings.
1.23.6.8 Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for
directional relays, wherever required.
1.23.7 Meters
1.23.7.1 Check calibration by comparing it with a sub-standard.
1.23.7.2 Megger all insulated portions.
1.23.7.3 Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for power
type meters.
1.24.1 The Bidder shall include in his proposal any special tools and tackles required
for erection, testing commissioning and maintenance of the equipments offered.
1.24.2 The list of these special tools and tackles shall be given in the bid proposal
sheets alongwith their respective prices.
1.24.3 The total price of the special tools and tackles shall be included in proposal sheets.
1.25 EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED
1.25.1 The Bidder shall quote for various AC/DC distribution boards in accordance with
this specification
1.25.2 Standard scheme of interconnection of switchboards and distribution boards

alongwith tentative feeder disposition for each board shall be as per the requirement
of the project. The bidder shall quote board prices on the basis of their estimation
of feeders for entire present and future bays requirement. Any other feeder
required as per system requirement for efficient and reliable operation shall be
deemed to be included in bidder's scope.
1.25.3 The Bill of Materials for each type of module shall be as under. These are
minimum indicative requirement of the system. The necessary auxiliary relays, push
buttons and indicating lamps shall be provided as
per scheme requirement. Any other item/component required
with in a module for efficient and reliable operation shall be deemed to be included
in bidder's scope. The scheme shall have provision for remote annunciation for the
followings:
a) Station LT (415V) AC incomer supply unhealthy
b) 220V DCDB U/V, O/V & Earth leakage relay operated
c) 50V DCDB U/V & O/V relay operated
d) DG set start
e) DG set protection operated.

1.25.4 Module Type AE (Electrically controlled circuit breaker for incoming and Bus
Coupler
Circuit).
(i) One (1) Triple pole air circuit breaker complete with all accessories and
power operated mechanism as specified.
(ii) Two (2) Neutral link.
(iii) Three (3) Current Transformer for metering.
(iv) One (1) Ammeter with selector switch.
(v) Three (3) Current Transformer for relaying.
(vi) One (1) Triple pole instantaneous over-current relay having the
setting range of 200-800% or 500-2000% of CT secondary
and adjustable definite minimum time.
(vii) One (1) Instantaneous earth fault relay having an adjustable setting range
of 10-40% or 20 - 80% of CT secondary current and adjustable
definite minimum time. The earth fault relay shall be provided
with a stabilising resistor.
1.25.5 Module Type - M1 (Circuit Breaker Controlled Motor Feeder)
(i) One (1) Triple pole Air Circuit Breaker complete with accessories,
and power operated mechanism as specified.
(ii) One (1) Three position 6 pole selector switch
'SWITCHGEAR/NORMAL /TRIAL'.
(iii) Three (3) Current Transformer for metering.
(iv) One (1) Ammeter with Ammeter Selector Switch
(v) Three (3) Current Transformer for relaying.
(vi) One (1) Triple pole instantaneous over-current relay for providing
positive sequence current protection in all the three phases.
The relay setting range shall be continuously adjustable
between 200-800% or 400-1600% of CT secondary rated
current as required.
(vii) One (1) Double pole inverse definite minimum time over current
relays connected in R & B phases for over current protection
of motor rated 110 kW - 200 kW. The relay shall have an
adjustable setting range of 50% - 200% of CT Secondary
current and time setting range of 0-30 Second. The relay
shall be CDGM-22 of EE or equivalent.
(viii) One (1) Single pole adjustable definite time delay relay for motor
overload alarm connected in Y-phase only. The relay shall
have resetting ratio of not less than 90%. The relay shall have
continuously adjustable time delay range of 2.5 to 25 Sec.

(ix) One (1) Instantaneous earth fault relay having an adjustable setting
range of 10-40% or 20-80% of CT secondary current. The
earth fault relay shall be provided with a stabilising resistor.
1.25.6 Module Type E
(i) One (1) Four pole MCCB
1.25.7 Module G-1 (VT Module with under Voltage Relay)
(i) Three (3) 415 / 110 volts single phase voltage transformer star/star
√3 √3
connect with star point solidly earthed mounted on common
draw out chassis. Accuracy Class 0.5 for protection and
metering with 50VA Burden.
(ii) Six (6) HRC Fuses mounted on the above chassis.
(iii) One (1) Four position voltmeter selector switch.
(iv) One (1) Voltmeter (0-500V)
(v) One (1) Double pole instantaneous under voltage relays with
continuous variable setting range of 40-80% of 110 Volts.
(vi) One (1) Time delay pick up relay having a time setting range of 0.5
to 3 secs. with 3 `NO'. Self reset contacts, suitable for 220V
DC.
(vii) One (1) Auxiliary relay 220V DC with 2 NO. self reset contacts.
(viii) Three (3) Indicating lamps with series resistor and colour lenses (Red,
Blue & Yellow).
1.25.8 Module Type G-2

(i) Three (3) HRC Fuse
(ii) One (1) Voltmeter (0-500V)
(iii) One (1) Voltmeter selector switch four position (R-Y, Y-B, B-R
OFF).
(iv) Three (3) Indication lamps (Red, Blue & Yellow)
1.25.9 Module Type H & H (BC) (Isolating Switch Controlled Incoming Circuit)
(ii) One (1) Red Indicating lamp to indicate isolating switch closed
position.
1.25.10 Module Type S : (DC Metering and Protection Module)

(i) One (1) Voltmeter 300-0-300V DC for 220V DC DB/Voltmeter 0-
75V DC for 50V DCDB
(ii) One (1) Three (3) position voltmeter selector switch
(iii) One (1) Instantaneous under voltage relay with 95% of 220V DC.
The resetting ratio of relay of relay should not be more than
1.25. The relay shall be provided with a series resistor and
a push button across if for resetting (pick up) the relay at
about 105% of the drop out voltage.
(iv) One (1) Instantaneous over voltage relay with setting range of 110%
of 220V DC. The resetting ratio of relay should not be less
than 0.8. The relay shall have a push button in series of
resetting the relay at about 95% of the operating voltage.
(v) One (1) Earth leakage relay only for 220V DC system having
adjustable pick up range between 3 to 7 milliamps the relay
shall be suitable for 220V DC/240V AC Auxiliary supply.
1.25.11 Module Type X

One (1) Double pole 250 V MCB
1.25.12 Module Type-DC (Incomer from Battery & Chargers)

(i) One (1) Double pole 250V DC MCCB for incomer from Battery.
(ii) One (1) DC ammeter with shunt and range of 90-0-400 Amps. For
220V DC DB and 90-0-200 Amp for 50V DC DB.
(iii) Two (2) Double pole 250V DC MCCB/MCB
(iv) One (1) Double pole single throw 250V DC air break switch
connecting battery & charger sections to DC DB.
1.25.13 Module Type DG-1 (Electrically Controlled Circuit Breaker for Incomer from DG
Set)
a) One (1) Triple pole circuit breaker complete with all accessories
and power operated mechanism as specified.
b) One (1) Frequency meter.
c) One (1) Voltmeter with selector switch.
d) One (1) Remote/Local Selector switch.
e) Three (3) Current transformer for metering.

f) Six (6) Current Transformers for differential protection (out of this
3 Nos. will be supplied loose for mounting in DG set
panel).
g) Three (3) Current transformer for relaying.
h) One (1) Ammeter Selector Switch.
i) One (1) Ammeter
j) One (1) Wattmeter of range 0-300 KW.
k) One (1) Three pole voltage controlled definite time delay relay
having current setting range of 50-200% of CT secondary
current and adjustable time delay 0.3 to 3 secs.
l) One (1) Watt hour meter with six (6) digits and minimum count of
one (1) kwh.
m) One (1) Single pole definite time over current relay having a
continuous setting range of 50-200% of CT secondary current
and a time delay of 2.5-25 secs connected in CT of Y phase
for overload alarm. The relay shall have a setting ratio of
not less than 90%.
n) One (1) Three pole differential protection relay having an operating
current setting range of 10-40% of generator full load
current. The relay shall be of high impedance type, with
necessary stabilizing resistors.
o) Two (2) Push buttons for Remote starting & stopping of DG Set (Red,
Green).
1.25.14 Module Type H1
One (1) Double pole DC Switch with pad locking facility in off position.
1.25.15 Module Type EL
(ii) One (1) Contactor
(iii) Electronic Timer suitable for continuous operation, push button and selector
switch be as per scheme requirement
1.26 PARAMETERS
1.26.1 Power Supply
1.26.1.1 AC System 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed
a) Voltage 415 Volts, ± 10%

b) Frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
c) Combined variation ± 10% Absolute Sum

in Voltage & frequency
d) Fault Level 20 kA (rms)
1.26.1.2 DC System 2 Wire, unearthed
a) System 220V ± 10%

voltage
b) Fault Level 4 kA
c) System 50V ± 10%

Voltage
1.26.2 Control Supply Voltage
a) Trip and closing 220V DC Unearthed

coils
b) Spring charging 220V DC Unearthed
1.26.3 Cubicle Data
1.26.3.1 Busbar Rating

a) Continuous As specified in `Bill of Materials'
for Vertical panels.
b) Short time (1 sec. 20 kA
kA (rms)
c) Momentary (kA) 45 kA
PEAK
d) Ambient Temperature 50°C

e) One Minute Power Frequency Withstand
I. Power Circuit 2500 Volts (rms)

II. Control Circuit 2500 Volts (rms)
1.26.3.2 Cubicle Colour Finish
a) Interior Smoke Grey shade No.692 of IS:5

b) Exterior Smoke Grey shade No.692 of IS:5
1.26.4 Circuit Breaker
a) Type Air Break

b) No. of poles 3
c) Voltage & Frequency 415 ± 10%, 50 HZ + 5%
d) Rated Operating Duty As per IS
e) Rated service short-circuit 20 kA (RMS)

Breaking capacity (Ics)
f) Short Circuit 45 kA (Peak)

making current
g) Short time 20 kA (RMS) for 1 sec.

withstand current
for 1 sec. duration.
h) Operating Mechanism 20 kA (RMS) for 1 sec.

current for 1 sec.
duration.
i) No. of auxiliary 4 NO & 4 NC contacts for Purchaser's

contacts use on fixed portion of the cubicle
j) Short Circuit
breaking
current
I. AC Component 20 kA (RMS)
II. DC Component As per IS: 13947 (Part 2)

1.26.5
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
AC System DC System
a) No. of poles 4 2
b) Voltage & Frequency 415 ± 10%, 250V
50 HZ + 5%
c) Rated Operating Duty As per IS
d) Rated service short-circuit 20 kA (RMS) 4 kA

Breaking capacity (Ics)
e) Short Circuit 45 kA (Peak) -

making current
f) No. of auxiliary 2 NO & 2 NC 2 NO & 2 NC

contacts
g) Short Circuit
breaking
current
I. AC Component 20 kA (RMS) As per IS

II. DC Component As per As per
IS 13947 IS 13947
1.26.6 Meters
a) Accuracy class 2.5
b) One minute power 2.0

frequency withstand
test voltage in KV
1.26.7 Current Transformers
a) Type Cast resin, Bar primary
b) Voltage class and 650V, 50 Hz

frequency
c) Class of Insulation E or better
d) Accuracy Class 1, VA adequate for application

class metering CT but not less than 7.5 VA.
e) Accuracy class 5 P 15, VA adequate for application,

protection CT but not less than 7.5 VA.
f) Accuracy class PS, KPV = 300V

differential
protection
g) Short Time Current Rating

(for CTs Associated with
circuit breakers)
I. Current 20 kA (RMS)
II. Duration One Second
III. Dynamic Rating 45 kA (Peak)

IV. One minute power 2.5 kV (rms)
frequency
withstand test
voltage.
1.26.8 Voltage Transformer
a) Type Cast Resin
b) Rated Voltage
Primary 415/√3 V
Secondary 110/√3 V

c) Method of connection
Primary Star
Secondary Star
d) Rated voltage factor 1.1 continuous, 1.5 for 3 seconds
e) Class of insulation E or better
f) One minute power 2.5 KV (RMS)

frequency withstand
voltage
g) Accuracy class 0.5, not less than 20VA
1.26.9 Relay
a) One minute power 2 kV (rms)

frequency withstand test
1.27 AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF OUTDOOR LIGHTING
1.27.1 EL-type module of 415V Main lighting distribution board and Emergency lighting
distribution board and shall be controlled by timer and contactor module to facilitate its
operation automatically.
1.28 AUTOMATIC SUPPLY CHANGEOVER

Automatic changeover between Incomer I, Incomer II, and DG set is to be carried out
during the failure of supply in one/or both the incomers. After the restoration of the
supply, system shall be restored to normal condition automatically. The requirement of
changeover under various conditions are as below:
(i) Under normal conditions i.e. when supply is available in both the incomers,
incomers I&II of 415 V Main switchboard, ACDB shall be in closed condition
and Bus couplers and DG set breaker shall be in open condition.
(ii) In case of failure of either of the sources, the incomer of that source shall trip and
Bus-coupler shall get closed. On restoration of supply, normal conditions
described above are to be established automatically.
iii) In case of failure of supply in both the sources, both incomers, incomers of
ACDBs and ACDB Bus coupler shall trip and DG set breaker switched on.
On restoration of one or both sources, DG set breaker shall trip, DG set stopped
and conditions described in paragraph (i) /(ii) shall be restored.
To avoid unnecessary operation of switchgear for momentary disturbances all

changeovers from one state to another shall be initiated after a time delay, after the
conditions warranting such change has been detected.

4. LT TRANSFORMER

LT TRANSFORMER
1.0 INTENT
This specification is intended to cover outdoor type oil filled 33/0.433KV 315 KVA &
33/0.433kV, 630 kVA transformers.
2.0 Scope of Work
2.1 Scope of Supply
- Transformers as listed above, with insulating oil, all materials and accessories,
and complete in all respects.
- Gland plates, power cable, lugs, anchor bolts and hardwares.
- Mandatory & optional spares and special maintenance equipments if any.
2.2 Scope of Service
The scope includes but is not limited to the following items of work to be performed for
all equipment and materials furnished under this section:
a) Design, manufacturing, shop testing, packing & despatch
b) Transportation inclusive of insurance and delivery, FOR site basis
c) Unloading, handling, storing, transportation at site upto foundations, oil filling

and treatment, erection, testing and commissioning
d) Civil Works
e) Supply of external cables and termination as required.
f) Fire protection system.
3.0 General Information
3.1 All temperature indicators, Buchholz relays and other auxiliary devices shall be suitable
for
220 V DC Control supply. All alarm and trip Contacts shall also be suitable for
connection in 220V DC Circuits.
4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Core
The core shall be constructed from high grade, nonaging, cold rolled grain-oriented
silicon steel laminations. The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yoke
at normal voltage and frequency shall be such that the flux density at any tap position
with 10% voltage variation from the voltage corresponding to the tap shall not exceed 1.9
Wb/sq-m.
4.2 Windings
The conductor shall be of electrolytic copper, free from scales and

burrs.
4.3 Insulating Oil
The oil supplied with transformer shall be unused and have the parameters for unused
new oil conforming to IS:335 while tested at oil Contractor's premises, No inhibitors
shall be used in oil. Ten percent extra oil shall be supplied for topping up after
commissioning in nonreturnable containers suitable for outdoor storage.
4.4 Terminal Arrangement

a) Bushing terminals shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors of approved
type and size for cable/overhead conductors termination of HV side and cable
termination on LV side.
b) The neutral terminals of 433V winding shall be brought out on a bushing along with
the
433 volt phase terminals to form a 4 wire system for the 415 volt. Additional
neutral bushing shall also be provided for earthing.
4.5 Off Circuit Tap Changing Equipment
The tap change switch shall be three phase, hand operated for simultaneous switching
of similar taps on the three phases by operating an external hand wheel.
4.6 Marshalling Box
A metal enclosed, weather, vermin & dust proof marshalling box shall be provided with
each transformer to accommodate temperature indicators, terminal blocks etc. It shall
have a degree of protection of IP 55 as per IS: 2147
4.7 Cable boxes
Whenever cable connections are required, suitable cable boxes shall be provided and
shall be air insulated. They shall be of sufficient size to accommodate Purchaser's
cables and shall have suitable removable side/top cover to facilitate cable termination
and inspection. Cable boxes shall be dust & vermin proof.
5.0 Inspection and Testing
a) The Contractor shall draw up and carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing
program during manufacture and commissioning of the transformer. The programme
shall be duly approved by the Purchaser.
b) The Contractor shall submit copy of all type tests and carryout routine tests on
the transformers as per relevant standards. Routine tests shall be carried out on all
transformers.
6.0 Inspection
6.1 Tank and Accessories
a) Physical and dimensional check of transformer tank and
accessories.
b) Crack detection of major strength weld seams by dye penetration
test.
6.2 Core
a) Physical inspection and check of quality of varnish, if

used.
b) Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, bend

properties, magnestisation, characteristics and thickness.
c) Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any hot spot
by exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux density in the core.
d) HV
Test
6.3 Insulating Material
a) Sample checks for physical properties of the

material
b) Check for dielectric

strength
c) Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating

material
6.4 Winding
a) Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and
electrical conductivity and on installation covering.
b) Sample check on insulation paper for pH value, Bursting strength, Electric

strength.
6.5 Assembled Transformer

a) Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing provision for all
fittings, finish etc.
b) Jacking test on all the assembled transformers.
6.6 Oil
All standard tests in accordance with relevant Standards shall be carried out on oil
samples taken from the transformer before and after testing of the transformer.
The contractor shall also prepare a comprehensive inspection and testing programme for
all bought out sub-contracted items and shall submit the same to the Purchaser for
approval. Such programme shall include the following components:
a) Buchholz Relay
b) Winding temperature Indicator
c) Bushings
d) Marshaling Box
e) Tap changer switch
f) Oil temperature indicator
7.0 Factory Test
7.1 All standard routine tests in accordance with latest issue of IS : 2026 shall be carried out
on each transformer.
7.2 Report for all the type tests in accordance with latest issues of IS : 2026 shall be
furnished..
7.3 In addition to all type and routine tests, following additional type tests shall also be
carried out on one transformer of each rating as per IS : 2026.
a) Tem p R i se t est .
b) Measurement of capacitance and tan delta of transformer winding.
c) Test on oil samples.
Sequence of testing shall be mutually agreed between Purchaser and Contractor after
award.
7.4 All auxiliary equipment shall be tested as per the relevant IS Test Certificates shall be
submitted for bought out items.
7.5 High voltage withstand test shall be performed on auxiliary equipment and wiring
after complete assembly.
7.6 Tank Tests:

a) Routine Tests: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers
b) Type Tests:
i) Vacuum Tests: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers

ii) Pressure Test: As per CBIP Manual on Transformers
7.7 In addition to the above, the following checks should be carried out at manufacturer's
works before despatch for all transformers:
a) Check for interchangeability of components of similar transformers and for

mounting dimensions.
b) Check for proper packing and preservation of accessories like radiators,

bushings explosion vent, dehydrating breather, Buchholz relay, conservator etc.
c) Check for proper provision of bracings to arrest the movements of core and winding
assembly inside the tank.
d) Test for gas tightness and derivation of leakage rate. To ensure adequate reserve gas
capacity during transit and storage.
7.8 The Contractor shall submit a detailed inspection and testing programme for field
activities, covering areas right from the receipt of material stage upto commissioning
stage as per IS :86 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of transformers.
The indicative checks and tests are given below.
a) Physical checks on each transformer on receipt at site for any damage or

short supply.
b) Tests on oil samples
c) Oil leakage test
d) Physical checks for colour of silica in breather
e) Check for oil level in breather housing, conservator tank, etc.
f) Check for correct operation of all protections and alarms.
g) Insulation Resistance Measurement for Main Winding, control wiring etc.
h) Continuously observe the transformer operation at no load for 24 hours.
8.0 Fittings
The following fittings shall be provided with each transformer covered under
this specification.
i) Conservator with drain plug and oil filling hole with blanking plate
ii) Plain oil Gauge
iii) Silica gel Breather
iv) Pressure Relief vent
v) Pocket on tank cover for Thermometer
vi) Valves
vii) Earthing Terminals
viii) Rating & Terminal Marking Plates
ix) Lifting Lugs
x) Rollers
xi) Air Release Plug
The fittings listed above are only indicative and any other fittings which generally
are required for satisfactory operation of transformer are deemed to be included.
9.0 Spare Parts
9.1 The list of spares for outdoor type transformers covered under this section shall be as
per .
9.2 In addition, the Bidder shall also recommend optional spare parts and
maintenance equipment necessary for three(3) years of successful operation of the
equipment. The prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules and these shall
not be considered for the purpose of evaluation.
10.0 Technical Parameters
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- S.No. Description Parameters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Type Two Winding
b) Service Outdoor
c) Number of phases Three
d) Frequency 50Hz
e) Type of colling ONAN
f) Rating 315 kVA , 630 kVA
Ratio 33/0.433 kVA
g) Impedance at 75oC with tolerance 0.05+10%
h) Duty Continuous
i) Overload As per IS:6600
j) Maximum Temp. rise
over 50o C ambient
i) Oil (Temp. rise 50o C
measurement by
thermometer)
ii) Winding (Temp. rise 55o C
measured by
resistance method)
k) Windings 33 KV 0.433 KV
630 KVA/315 kVA
i) System Apparent short ------------------------ As per IS:2026 (Part-I) ----
circuit level (KA)
ii) Winding connection Delta Star
iii) Vector Group ------------------------- Dyn1 ------------------
iv) Insulation ----------------------------Uniform ---------------
v) Insulation level (KV) 36 0.433
a) Power frequency 70 2
test level (KV rms)
b) Basic impulse level 170 --
(KV peak)
vi) Highest voltage (KV) 36 --
for each winding
vii) Method of earthing ----------------------- Solidly earthed ----------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- S.No. Description Parameters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- l) Tap Changer
i) Tap range ---- +5% / -10% in steps of 2.5% on HV side -------
ii) Tap control Off circuit tap
change switch
m) H.V. Bushings 315KVA/630 KVA

33kV
i) Rated Voltage, KV 36
ii) Rated current, KV ------------ 100A ------------------
iii) Basic impulse 170
Level (KV)
iv) Wet and dry power 70
frequency withstand
voltage (KV rms)
v) Minimum total Creepage 900
distance (mm)
vi) Mounting ------Tank/Transformer body -----
n) L.V. and Neutral bushing

i) Rated Voltage (Volts)
1100
ii) Rated current (amps)
1000
o) Terminal details
i) High Voltage Suitable for 33 KV
cable or O/H
Conductor
ii) Low Voltage phase Cable box
and neutral
o) Minimum Clearance (mm)

in AIR 33 KV 0.433 KV
630/315 KVA
i) Phase to Phase 350 25
ii) ii)Phase to Earth 320 25

5. SURGE ARRESTER

SURGE ARRESTER
1.1. General
The surge arresters shall conform in general to IEC-60099-1 or IEC-60099-4 except to

the extent explicitly modified in the specification.
1.1 The bidder shall offer surge arresters of gapless type without any series or shunt gap.
1.2 Arresters shall be hermetically sealed units, of self supporting construction, suitable
for mounting on structures.
1.3 The surge arrester shall be designed for use in this geographic and meteorological condition
as given in the chapter GTP.
2 Duty Requirements
2.1 The surge arresters shall be of heavy duty station class type.
2.2 The surge arresters shall be capable of discharging over voltage occurring during switching
of unloaded transformers and reactors.
2.3 Surge arresters shall be capable of spark over on severe switching surges and multiple
strokes.
2.4 The surge arresters shall be able to withstand wind load calculated at 195 kg/sq.m.
2.5 The gapless arrester, if provided, shall meet following additional requirements.
2.5.1 It shall be fully stabilized thermally to give a life expectancy of 100 years under site
conditions and shall take care of the effect of direct solar radiation.
2.5.2 The reference current of the arrester shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of
grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage.The duty cycle of CB
installed in 245/145 KV system shall be 0-0.3 sec-co-3min-co.The surge arrester should be
suitable for such current breaker duties in the system.
3 Constructional Features
The features and constructional details of surge arresters shall be in accordance with
requirement stipulated hereunder:
3.1 Gapless Type Surge Arrester
3.1.1 The non linear blocks shall be of sintered metal oxide material. These shall be provided
in such a way as to obtain robust construction, with excellent electrical and mechanical
properties even after repeated operations.
3.1.2 The surge arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting parts
suitable for preventing shattering of porcelain housing and providing path for flow of
rated fault currents in the event of arrester failure.
3.1.3 The arresters shall incorporate anti-contamination feature to prevent arrester failure
consequent to uneven voltage gradient across the stack in the event of contamination
of the arrester porcelain.

3.1.4 Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always effectively maintained
even when discharging rated lightning current.
3.1.5 Outer insulator shall be porcelain used shall be homogenous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfection that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and
impervious to moisture. Glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown colour, free
from blisters, burrs and other similar defects. Porcelain housing shall be so coordinated
that external flashover will not occur due to application of any impulse or
switching surge voltage upto the maximum design value for arrester.
3.1.6 The end fittings shall be made of non-magnetic and corrosion proof material.
3.1.7 The name plate shall conform to the requirement of IEC incorporating the year of
manufacture.
3.1.8 The arrester shall be supplied with suitable support structure either of tubular GI
pipe or lattice steel galvanised.
3.1.9 The heat treatment cycle details along with necessary quality checks used for individual
blocks along with insulation layer formed across each block to be furnished.
Metalised coating thickness for reduced resistance between adjacent
discs to be furnished along with procedure for checking the same. Details of thermal
stability test for uniform current distribution of current on individual disc to be furnished.
3.3 Fittings and Accessories
3.3.1 Each arrester shall be complete with insulating base, support structure and terminal
connector. The height of the support structure shall not be less than
2500 mm. The structure would be made of galvanized steel generally conforming to
IS:802. The surge arrester can also be mounted on the neutral grounding reactor in
lieu of separate support structure.
3.3.2 Self contained discharge counter, suitably enclosed for outdoor use and requiring
no auxiliary or battery supply for operation, shall be provided for each unit. The
counter shall be visible through an inspection window from ground level. The counter
terminals shall be robust and of adequate size and shall be so located that incoming and
outgoing connections are made with minimum possible bends.
3.3.3 Suitable milliammeter on each arrester with appropriate connections shall be supplied to
measure the resistor grading leakage current. The push buttons shall be mounted such that
it can be operated from ground level.
3.3.4 Discharge counter and milliammeter shall be suitable for mounting on support structure
of the arrester.
3.3.5 Grading/Corona rings shall be provided on each complete arrester unit as required for
proper stress distribution.
.4 Tests4.1 The surge arresters shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to

acceptance test and routine tests as per IEC-60099.1/IEC-60099.4.
4.2 Surge arrester shall be subjected to additional acceptance tess.
(i) Thermal stability test on three sections
(ii) Ageing and Energy capability test on block

iii) Wattloss test
5.1 Gapless Surge Arrester 245 KV 145 KV
5.1.2 Rated arrester voltage 216 kV 120 kV
5.1.2 Rated system voltage 245 kV 145 kV
5.1.3 Rated system frequency 50Hz
5.1.4 System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
5.1.5 Installation Outdoor
5.1.6 Nominal discharge current 10kA of 8/20 micro sec wave.
5.1.7 Class of arrester 10kA heavy duty type
5.1.8 Minimum discharge capacity 5.0 kJ/kV (referred to rated voltage)
5.1.9 Continuous operating voltage at 50ø C 168 Kv 102kV
5.1.10 Maximum switching surge 500 kVp 280kVp

residual voltage (1kA)
5.1.11 Maximum residual voltage at
(i) 5kA 560kVp 310kVp
(ii) 10kA nominal discharge 600kVp 330kVp

current
5.1.12 Long duration discharge class 3 2
5.1.13 High current short duration 100kAp

test value (4/10microsec. wave)
5.1.14 Current for pressure relief 40kArms

test

5.1.15 Low current long duration As per IEC
test value (2000microsec.)
5.1.16 Min. total creepage distance. 6125mm 3625 mm.
5.1.17 One minute dry power 460kVrms 275kVrms

frequency withstand voltage of
arrester housing.
5.1.18 Impulse withstand voltage of ±1050 kVp ±650KVp

arrester housing with 1.2/50
microsec. Wave
5.1.19 Pressure relief class A
5.1.20 RIV at 92 kVrms. Less than 500microvolts
5.1.21 Partial discharge at 1.05 Not more than 50pC

continuous over voltage
5.1.22 Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal.
5.1.23 Reference ambient

temperature 50 deg C

6. SECTION: POWER & CONTROL CABLES

SECTION: POWER & CONTROL CABLES
SN DESCRIPTION
1 POWER & CONTROL CABLES [ FOR WORKING

VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 V]
2 HV POWER CABLES[ FOR WORKING VOLTAGES

FROM 3.3 kV AND INCLUDING 33 kV]
3 EHV XLPE POWER CABLE [FOR

WORKING VOLTAGES FROM 66 kV UP TO
AND INCLUDING 500 kV]
4 CABLE DRUMS
5 TYPE TESTS
STANDARD TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS ( UP TO

AND INCLUDING 1100 V)
XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES
PVC INSULATED POWER CABLES
PVC INSULATED CONTROL CABLES

SECTION: POWER & CONTROL CABLES
1. POWER & CONTROL CABLES [FOR WORKING VOLTAGES

UP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 V]
CRITERIA FOR SELECTION OF POWER & CONTROL CABLES
1.1.1. Aluminium conductor XLPE insulated armoured cables shall be used for main
power supply purpose from LT Aux. Transformers to control room, between
distribution boards.
1.1.2 Aluminium conductor PVC insulated armoured power cables shall be used for
various other applications in switchyard area/control room except for
control/protection purposes.
1.1.3 For all control/protection/instrumentation purposes PVC insulated

armoured control cables of minimum 2.5 sq. mm. size with stranded
Copper conductors shall be used.
1.1.4 BSPTCL has standardised the sizes of power cables for various feeders.
The sizes of power cables to be used per feeder in different application shall
be as follows
S.No. From To Cable size Cable type

1. Main Switch LT Transformer 2-1C X 630 mm2 XLPE
Board per phase
1-1C X 630 mm2
for neutral
2. Main Switch AC Distribution 2-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board Board
3. Main Switch Oil Filtration Unit & 1-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board Air conditioning board
4. Main Switch Colony Lighting 1-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board bboard
5. Main Switch HVW pump LCP(Not 1-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board applicable for this
project)
6. Main Switch Main transformer 1-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board
6.1 Lighting Main lighting 1-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE

transformer distribution board

7. AC Distribution D.G. Set AMF 2-3½C X 300 mm2 XLPE
Board Panel
8. AC Distribution Emergency 1-3½CX 70 mm2 PVC
Board Lighting
distribution
board
9. AC Distribution ICT MB 1-3½CX 70 mm2 PVC
Board
10. AC Distribution Bay MB 1-3½CX70mm2 PVC
Board
11. Bay MB AC Kiosk 1- 3 ½ x 35m m2 PVC
12. AC Distribution Battery Charger 1-3½CX 70 mm2 PVC

Board
13. DCDB Battery 2-1CX 150 mm2 PVC
14. DCDB Battery Charger 2-1CX 150 mm2 PVC
15. DCDB Protection/PLCC 1-4C X 16 mm2 PVC

panel
16. Main Lighting Lighting 1-3½CX 35 mm2 PVC
DB panels(Indoor)
17. Main Lighting Lighting panels 1-3½CX 70 mm2 PVC
DB (outdoor)
18. Main Lighting Receptacles 1-3½CX 35 mm2 PVC
DB (Indoor)
19. Main Lighting Receptacles 1-3½CX 70 mm2 PVC
DB (Outdoor)
20. Lighting Panel Sub lighting 1-4C X 16 mm2 PVC
panels
21. Lighting Panel Street Lighting 1-4C X 16 mm2 PVC
Poles
22. Lighting Panel/ Sub Lighting Fixtures 1-2C X 6 mm2 PVC
lighting panels (Outdoor)
23. Bay MB Equipments 1-4C X 16 mm2 PVC

/1-4C X 6 mm2
/1-2C X 6 mm2
1.1.5 Bidder may offer sizes other than the sizes specified in clause 1.1.4. In such
case and for other application where sizes of cables have not been indicated in
the specification, sizing of power cables shall be done
keeping in view continuous current, voltage drop & short-circuit
consideration of the system. Relevant calculations shall be submitted by bidder
during detailed engineering for purchaser’s approval.
1.1.6 Cables shall be laid conforming to IS : 1255.

1.1.7 While preparing cable schedules for control/protection purpose following shall
be ensured:
1.1.7.1 Separate cables shall be used for AC & DC.
1.1.7.2 Separate cables shall be used for DC1 & DC2.
1.1.8 For different cores of CT & CVT separate cable shall be used
1.1.9 Atleast one (1) cores shall be kept as spare in each copper control cable of 4C,
5C or 7C size whereas minimum no. of spare cores shall be two (2) for control
cables of 10 core or higher size.
1.1.10 For control cabling, including CT/VT circuits, 2.5 sq.mm. size copper
cables shall be used per connection. However, if required from voltage
drop/VA burden consideration additional cores shall be used. Further for
potential circuits of energy meters separate connections by 2 cores of 2.5 sq.mm.
size shall be provided.
1.1.11 Standard technical data sheets for cable sizes up to and including
1100V are enclosed at Annexure. Cable sizes shall be
offered/ manufactured in accordance with parameters specified in standard
technical data sheets. Technical data sheet for any other cores/sizes required
during detailed engineering shall be separately offered for owner’s approval by
the contractor/supplier.
1.2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1. General
1.2.1.1. The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and
underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of
flooding by water.
1.2.1.2. They shall be designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal
stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions. The XLPE
/PVC insulated L.T. power cables of sizes 240 sq. mm. and above shall
withstand without damage a 3 phase fault current of at least 45 kA for at least
0.12 second, with an initial peak of 105 kA in one of the phases at rated
conductor temperature ( 70 degC for PVC insulated cables and
90 degC for XLPE insulated cables). The armour for these power

cables shall be capable of carrying 45 kA for at least 0.12 seconds without
exceeding the maximum allowable temperature of PVC outer sheath.
1.2.1.3. The XLPE insulated cables shall be capable of withstanding a conductor

temperature of 250°C during a short circuit without any damage. The PVC
insulated cables shall be capable of withstanding a conductor temperature of
160°C during a short circuit.
1.2.1.4. The Aluminium/Copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true
circular in shape before stranding and shall be uniformly good quality, free from
defects. All Aluminium used in the cables for conductors shall be of H2 grade.
In case of single core cables armours shall be of H4 grade Aluminium.
1.2.1.5. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic, fire retardant
material, shall be softer than insulation and outer sheath shall be suitable for the
operating temperature of the cable.
1.2.1.6. Progressive sequential marking of the length of cable in metres at every one
metre shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.
1.2.1.7. Strip wire armouring method (a) mentioned in Table 5, Page-6 of IS :

1554 (Part 1 ) – 1988 shall not be accepted for any of the cables. For control
cables only round wire armouring shall be used.
1.2.1.8. The cables shall have outer sheath of a material with an oxygen index of not
less than 29 and a temperature index of not less than 250°C.
1.2.1.9. All the cables shall pass fire resistance test as per IS:1554 (Part-I)
1.2.1.10. The normal current rating of all PVC insulated cables shall be as per
IS:3961.
1.2.1.11. Repaired cables shall not be accepted.
1.2.1.12. Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be plus or minus
2 mm.
1.2.2. XLPE Power Cables
1.2.2.1. The XLPE (90°C) insulated cables shall be of FR type, C1 category

conforming to IS:7098 (Part-I) and its amendments read alongwith this
specification. The conductor shall be stranded aluminium circular/sector
shaped and compacted. In multicore cables, the core shall be identified by red,
yellow, blue and black coloured strips or colouring of insulation. A

distinct inner sheath shall be provided in all multicore cables. For XLPE cables, the
inner sheath shall be of extruded PVC of type ST-2 of IS:5831. When armouring is
specified for single core cables, the same shall consist of aluminium wires/strips. The
outer sheath shall be extruded PVC of Type ST-2 of IS:5831 for all XLPE cables.
1.2.3. PVC Power Cables
1.2.3.1. The PVC (70°C) insulated power cables shall be of FR type, C1 category, conforming
to IS: 1554 (Part-I) and its amendments read alongwith this specification and shall be
suitable for a steady conductor temperature of
70°C. The conductor shall be stranded aluminium. The Insulation shall be extruded
PVC to type-A of IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided in all multicore
cables. For multicore armoured cables, the inner sheath shall be of extruded PVC. The
outer sheath shall be extruded PVC to Type ST-1 of IS: 5831 for all cables.
1.2.4. PVC Control Cables
1.2.4.1. The PVC (70°C) insulated control cables shall be of FR type C1 category conforming to
IS: 1554 (Part-1) and its amendments, read alongwith this specification. The
conductor shall be stranded copper. The insulation shall be
extruded PVC to type A of IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided in all
cables whether armoured or not. The over sheath shall be extruded PVC to type ST-1 of
IS: 5831 and shall be grey in colour .
1.2.4.2. Cores shall be identified as per IS: 1554 (Part-1) for the cables up to five (5) cores and
for cables with more than five (5) cores the identification of cores shall be done by
printing legible Hindu Arabic Numerals on all cores as per clause 10.3 of IS 1554 (Part-
1).
2. HV POWER CABLES[ FOR WORKING VOLTAGES FROM

3.3 kV AND INCLUDING 33 kV]
2.1. HV POWER CABLE FOR AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(a) The HV cable of 1Cx185 mm2 (Aluminium Conductor) or

1Cx120mm2 (Copper Conductor) of voltage class as specified for
630 kVA LT transformer for interconnecting 630kVA LT transformer to the
feeder shall be, XLPE insulated, armoured cable conforming to IS 7098
(Part-II) or IEC 60502-2 1998. Terminating accessories shall conform to IS
17573-1992 or IEC 61442-
1997/IEC60502-4 1998.
(b) The HV cable of 3Cx95 mm2 (Aluminium Conductor) or 3Cx70mm2

(Copper Conductor) of voltage class as specified for 250kVA LT transformer
for interconnecting 250kVA LT transformer to the feeder shall be, XLPE
insulated, armoured cable conforming to IS
7098 (Part-II) or IEC 60502-2 1998. Terminating accessories shall conform to
IS 17573-1992 or IEC 61442-1997/IEC60502-4 1998.

2.2. Bidder may offer sizes other than the sizes specified in clause 2.1 (a) and (b). In such
case sizing of power cables shall be done keeping in view continuous current,
voltage drop & short-circuit consideration of the system. Relevant calculations shall
be submitted by bidder during detailed engineering for purchaser’s approval.
2.3. Constructional Requirements
Cable shall have compacted circular Aluminium conductor,

Conductor screened with extruded semi conducting compound , XLPE insulated,
insulation screened with extruded semi conducting compound, armoured with
non-magnetic material, followed by extruded PVC outer
sheath(Type ST-2), with FR properties .
2.5 Progressive sequential marking of the length of cable in metres at every one metre
shall be provided on the outer sheath of the cable.
2.6 The cables shall have outer sheath of a material with an Oxygen
Index of not less than 29 and a Temperature index of not less than
250°C.
2.7 Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be plus or minus 2
mm.
CABLE DRUMS
3.1 Cables shall be supplied in returnable wooden or steel drums of heavy construction.
Wooden drum shall be properly seasoned sound and free from defects. Wood
preservative shall be applied to the entire drum.
3.2 Standard lengths for each size of power and control cables shall be
500/1000 meters. The cable length per drum shall be subject to a tolerance of
plus or minus 5% of the standard drum length. The owner shall
have the option of rejecting cable drums with shorter lengths. Maximum, One (1)
number non standard length of cable size(s) may be supplied in drums for completion
of project.
3.3 A layer of water proof paper shall be applied to the surface of the drums and over the
outer most cable layer.
3.4 A clear space of at least 40 mm shall be left between the cables and the lagging.
3.5 Each drums shall carry the manufacturer's name, the purchaser's name, address and
contract number and type, size and length of the cable, net and gross weight stencilled
on both sides of drum. A tag containing the same information shall be attached to the
leading end of the cable. An arrow
and suitable accompanying wording shall be marked on one end of the reel indicating
the direction in which it should be rolled.

3.6 Packing shall be sturdy and adequate to protect the cables, from any injury due to
mishandling or other conditions encountered during transportation, handling and
storage. Both cable ends shall be sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate
ingress of water during transportation and erection.
4 TYPE TESTS
4.1 All cables shall conform to all type, routine and acceptance tests listed in the relevant
IS.
4.2.1 XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES ( For working voltages up to and including
1100V ):-
4.2.1 Following type tests ( on one size in a contract) as per IS: 7098 (Part 1)
– 1988 including its amendments shall be carried out as a part of acceptance
tests on XLPE insulated power cables for working voltages
up to and including 1100 V:
a) Physical tests for insulation

i) Hot set test
ii) Shrinkage test
b) Physical tests for outer sheath i)
Shrinkage test
ii) Hot deformation iii)
Heat shock test iv) Thermal
stability
4.2.2 Contractor shall submit type test reports as per t echnical Specification, Section:
GTR for the following tests-
a) Water absorption (gravimetric) test.

b) Ageing in air oven
c) Loss of mass in air oven
d) Short time current test on power cables of sizes 240 sqmm and above on
i) Conductors. ii)
Armours.
e) Test for armouring wires/strips.
f) Oxygen and Temperature Index test. g)
Flammability test.
4.3 PVC INSULATED POWER & CONTROL CABLES (For working

voltages up to and including 1100V)-
4.3.1 Following type tests ( on one size in a contract) as per IS: 1554 (Part 1) -
1988 including its amendments shall be carried out as a part of acceptance
tests on PVC insulated power & control cables for working voltages up to and
including 1100 V:
a) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath i)

Shrinkage test
ii) Hot deformation iii)
Heat shock test iv) Thermal
stability
b) High voltage test (water immersion test only a.c. test as per clause no. 16.3.1).
4.3.2 Contractor shall submit type test reports as per Technical Specification, Section:
GTR for the following-
a) High voltage test (water immersion d.c. test as per clause no. 16.3.2 of IS: 1554
(Part 1) - 1988).
b) Ageing in air oven.
c) Loss of mass in air oven.
d) Short time current test on power
cables of sizes 240 sqmm and above on
i) Conductors. ii)
Armours.
e) Test for armouring wires/strips.
f) Oxygen and Temperature Index test. g)
Flammability test.
4.4 XLPE INSULATED HV POWER CABLES( For working voltages from

3.3 kV and including 33 kV)-
4.4.1 Contractor shall submit type test reports as per clause no. 9.2 of Technical
Specification, Section: GTR for XLPE insulated HV power cables ( as per IS 7098
Part-II including its amendment or as per IEC).
4.5 TERMINATING & JOINTING ACCESSORIES-
4.5.1 Contractor shall submit type test reports as per of Technical Specification for
Terminating/jointing accessories as per IS 17573:1992/ IEC 60840:1999/ IEC62067.

STANDARD TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
(1.1 kV GRADE XLPE POWER CABLES)
CUSTOMER :
SN BSPTCL
Name of manufacturer : As per approved list
Cable Sizes 1 C x 630 3½ C x 300
1 Manufacturer's type designation : A2XWaY A2XWY
2 Applicable standard : ----------------------IS: 7098/PT-I/1988 & its referred specifications----------------------
3 Rated Voltage(volts) : -----------------------1100 V grade------------------------------------------------------
4 Type & Category : FR & C1 FR & C1
5 Suitable for earthed or unearthed system : -----------------------for both-------------------------------------------------------------
6 Continuous current rating when laid in air in a ambient temp. of 50 oC and
for maximum conductor temp. of 70 oC of PVC Cables[ For information : 732 410
only]
7 Rating factors applicable to the current ratings for various conditions of
installation: : -------------------------------As per IS-3961-Pt-II-67--------------------------------------
8 Short circuit Capacity

a) Guranteed Short Circuit Amp. (rms)KA for 0.12 sec duration at rated
conductor temperature of 90 degree C, with an initial peak of 105 KA. : 45 KA 45 KA
b) Maximum Conductor temp. allowed for the short circuit duty (deg
C.) as stated above. : --------------------------------------250 o C------------------------------------------------
9 Conductor
a) Material Stranded Aluminium as per Class 2 of IS : 8130
b) Grade : ------------------------------------- H 2 (Electrolytic grade) -------------------------
c) Cross Section area (Sq.mm.) : 630 300/150
d) Number of wires(No.)minimum : 53 30/15
e) Form of Conductor Stranded compacted
Stranded and compacted circular
circular/sector shaped
f) Direction of lay of stranded layers : -------- Outermost layer shall be R.H lay & opposite in successive layers --------
10 Conductor resistance (DC) at 20 oC per km-maximum 0.0469 0.1 / 0.206
11 Insulation
a) Composition of insulation : -------------------------------------Extruded XLPE as per IS-7098 Part(1)-----------------
b) Nominal thickness of insulation(mm) : 2.8 1.8/1.4
c) Minimum thickness of insulation : 2.42 1.52/1.16
12 Inner Sheath
a) Material : --------------------------------Extruded PVC type ST-2 as per IS-5831-84-----------------
b) Calculated diameter over the laid up cores,(mm) : NA 52
c) Thickness of Sheath (minimum)mm : N.A 0.6
d) Method of extrusion NA Pressure/Vacuum extrusion
13 Armour
a) Type and material of armour Al. Wire[ H4
: Gal. Steel wire
grade]
b) Direction of armouring : ----------------------------------left hand--------------------------------------------------
c) Calculated diameter of cable over inner sheath (under armour), mm
: 33.9 53.2
d)Nominal diameter of round armour wire (minimum) : 2 2.5

e)Guranteed Short circuit capacity of the armour for 0.12 sec at room
temperature. 45 KA 45 KA
f) DC resistance at 20 oC (Ω/Km) $ 0.577

14 Outer Sheath
a) Material ( PVC Type) : ST-2& FR ST-2& FR
b) Calculated diameter under the sheath : 38.3 59.50
c) Min.thickness of sheath(mm) : 1.72 2.36
d) Guaranteed value of minimum oxygen index of outer sheath at 27 o C
Min 29.0 Min 29.0
e) Guranteed value of minimum temperature index at 21 oxygen index

Min 250 Min 250
f) colour of sheath : Black Black

15 a) Nominal Overall diameter of cable $ $
b) Tolerance on overall diameter (mm) : ---------------------------------+2/-2 mm-----------------------------------------------------
16 Cable Drums : ----------------- shall conform to IS 10418 and technical specification
a) Max./ Standard length per drum for each size of cable ( single
length) with ±5% Tolerance (mtrs) 1000/500 1000/500
b) Non standard drum lengths : Maximum one(1) non standard lengths of each cable size may be supplied in
drums only over & above the standard lengths as specified above.(if required
for completion of project).
17 Whether progressive sequential marking on outer sheath provided at
1 meter interval : ----------------------------------------- YES -------------------------------------------------
18 Identification of cores
a) colour of cores As per IS 7098 Part(1)
b) Numbering : ----------------------------------------- N.A ---------------------------------------------------
19 Whether Cables offered are ISI marked : ----------------------------------------- YES ---------------------------------------------------
20 Whether Cables offered are suitable for laying as per IS 1255
: ----------------------------------------- YES -----------------------------------------------------
$'- As per manufacturer design data

STANDARD TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
(1.1 kV GRADE PVC POWER CABLES)
CUSTOMER :
SN BSPTCL
Name of manufacturer : As per approved list
Cable Sizes 1 c x 150 3.5 cx 70 3.5 cx 35 4 c x 16 4c x 6 2cx6
1 Manufacturer's type designation : AYWaY AYFY AYFY AYFY AYWY AYWY
2 Applicable standard : ------------ -------------------------IS: 1554/PT-I/1988 & its referred standards----------------------------
3 Rated Voltage(volts) : -----------------------1100 V grade----------------------------------------------
4 Type & Category : FR & C1 FR & C1 FR & C1 FR & C1 FR & C1 FR & C1
5 Suitable for earthed or unearthed system : -----------------------for both------------------------------------------------------
6 Continuous current rating when laid in air in a ambient temp. of
o o
50 C and for maximum conductor temp. of 70 C of PVC Cables[ For : 202 105 70 41 24 28
information only]
7 Rating factors applicable to the current ratings for various
conditions of installation: : x-------------------------------As per IS-3961-Pt-II-67---------------------------------------------------------

a) Short Circuit Amp. (rms)KA for 1 sec duration : 11.2 5.22 2.61 1.19 0.448 0.448
b) Conductor temp. allowed for the short circuit duty (deg C.)
: --------------------------------------160 o C-----------------------------------------------------------------------
9 Conductor
a) Material : -------------------------------------STRANDED ALUMINIUM ---------------------------------------------------
b) Grade : ------------------------------------- H 2 (Electrolytic grade) ----------------------------------------------------
c) Cross Section area (Sq.mm.) M-70 M-35
: 150 16 6 6
N-35 N-16
d) Number of wires(No.) : ------------------------------------------- as per Table 2 of IS 8130 ------------------------------------------------
e) Form of Conductor Non-compacted shaped shaped shaped Non-compacted Non-compacted
Standed circular conductor conductor conductor Standed circular Standed circular
f) Direction of lay of stranded layers : -------- Outermost layer shall be R.H lay & opposite in successive layers --------
10 Conductor resistance (DC) at 20 oC per km-maximum
0.206 0.443/ 0.868 0.868/ 1.91 1.91 4.61 4.61
11 Insulation
a) Composition of insulation : -------------------------------------Extruded PVC type A as per IS-5831-84--------------------------
b) Nominal thickness of insulation(mm) : 2.1 1.4/1.2 1.2/1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
c) Minimum thickness of insulation : 1.79 1.16/0.98 0.98/0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
12 Inner Sheath
a) Material : --------------------------------Extruded PVC type ST-I as per IS-5831-84----------------------------------
b) Calculated diameter over the laid up cores,(mm) : N.A 27.6 20.4 15.7 11.6 9.6
c) Thickness of Sheath (minimum)mm : N.A 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
13 Armour : -------------------------- as per IS 3975/88 ---------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Type and material of armour Gal.steel Gal.steel Gal.steel
: Al. Wire[H4 grade] Gal. Steel wire Gal. Steel wire
strip strip strip
b) Direction of armouring : ----------------------------------left hand-----------------------------------------------------------------------
c) Calculated diameter of cable over inner sheath (under armour), mm

: 18 28.4 21 16.3 12.2 10.2
d) Nominal diameter of round armour wire/strip : 1.6 4 x 0.8 4 x 0.8 4 x 0.8 1.4 1.4
e) Number of armour wires/strips : -------------------Armouring shall be as close as practicable------------------------------------------
f) Short circuit capacity of the armour along for 1 sec-for info only : --K x A√ t (K Amp)(where A = total area of armour in mm 2& t = time in seconds), K=0.091 for Al & 0.05 for steel
o
g) DC resistance at 20 C (Ω/Km) : 0.44 2.57 3.38 3.99 3.76 4.4
14 Outer Sheath
a) Material ( PVC Type) : ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR
b) Calculated diameter under the sheath : 21.2 30.1 22.6 17.9 15 13
c) Min.thickness of sheath(mm) : 1.4 1.56 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.24
d) Guaranteed value of minimum oxygen index of outer sheath at
Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0
27o C
e) Guranteed value of minimum temperature index at 21 oxygen index
Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250
f) colour of sheath : Black Black Black Black Black Black

15 a) Overall diameter of cable ;--------------------------------------------------------------------$----------------------------------------
b) Tolerance on overall diameter (mm) : ---------------------------------+2/-2 mm--------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Max./ Standard length per drum for each size of cable ( single
length) with ±5% Tolerance (mtrs) 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500
b) Non standard drum lengths Maximum one(1) non standard lengths of each cable size may be supplied in drums only over & above the standard
: lengths as specified above.(if required for completion of project).
17 Whether progressive sequential marking on outer sheath provided : ----------------------------------------- YES -------------------------------------------------------------
18 Identification of cores
a) colour of cores Red R,Y,Bl &Bk R,Y,Bl &Bk R,Y,Bl &Bk R,Y,Bl &Bk Red & Bk
b) Numbering : ----------------------------------------- N.A -------------------------------------------------------------
19 Whether Cables offered are ISI marked : ----------------------------------------- YES -------------------------------------------------------------
: ----------------------------------------- YES -------------------------------------------------------------

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
(1.1 kV GRADE PVC CONTROL CABLES – FRLS & C2 class)
CUSTOMER : BSPTCL
SN Name of manufacturer : As per approved list
Cable Sizes 2c x 2.5 3c x 2.5 5c x 2.5 7c x 2.5 10c x 2.5 14c x 2.5 19c x 2.5 27c x
1 Manufacturer's type designation : 2.5 YWY YWY YWY YWY YWY YWY YWY YWY
2 Applicable standard : -------------------------IS: 1554/PT-I/1988 & its referred standards--------------------------------
3 Rated Voltage(volts) :-- ---------------------------------------------------------1100-----------------------------------------------------
4 Type & Category : ------------------------------------------------------FR LS & C2-----------------------------------------------
5 Suitable for earthed or unearthed system :---- --------------------------------for both------------------------------------------------------
Continuous current rating when laid in air in a ambient temp.
o o
6 of 50 C and for maximum conductor temp. of 70 C of PVC : 22 19 19 14 12 10.5 9.7 8
Cables[ For information only]
Rating factors applicable to the current ratings for various
7 : -------------------------------As per IS-3961-Pt-II-67----------------------------------------
conditions of installation:
a) Short Circuit Amp. (rms)KA for 1 sec-for information only
: 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285
b) Conductor temp. allowed for the short circuit duty (deg C.) o
: --------------------------------------160 C--------------------------------
9 Conductor
a) Material : ----------- Plain annealed High Conductivity stranded Copper (as per IS 8130/84) --
b) Grade :--- ------------------------------------- Electrolytic------------------------------------------------------
c) Cross Section area (Sq.mm.) : 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
d) Number of wires(No.) : -------------------- as per Table 2 of IS 8130 ------------------------------------
e) Form of Conductor : --------------------------------------Non-Compacted stranded circular conductor---------
f) Direction of lay of stranded layers : ------------------ Outermost layer shall be R.H lay --------------------------
10 Conductor resistance (DC) at 20 oC per km(maxm) 7.41 7.41 7.41 7.41 7.41 7.41 7.41 7.41
11 Insulation
a) Composition of insulation : -------------------------------------Extruded PVC type A as per IS-5831-84-----------------
b) Nominal thickness of insulation(mm) : 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
c) Minimum thickness of insulation 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71
12 Inner Sheath
a) Material : --------------------------------Extruded PVC type ST-I as per IS-5831-84-----------------
b) Calculated diameter over the laid up cores,(mm) : 7.2 7.8 9.7 10.8 14.4 15.9 18 22.1
c) Thickness of Sheath (minimum)mm : 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
13 Armour : -------------------------- as per IS 3975/99 ------------------------------------------------
a) Type and material of armour Gal. Gal. Gal. Gal. Gal. Gal. Gal.
Gal. Steel
: Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel
wire
wire wire wire wire wire wire wire
b) Direction of armouring : ----------------------------------left land---------------------------------------------
c) Calculated diameter of cable over inner sheath
: 7.8 8.4 10.3 11.4 15 16.5 18.6 22.7
(under armour), mm
d) Nominal diameter of round armour wire / dimensions of
: 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
armour strip
e) Number of armour wires : -------------------Armouring shall be as close as practicable------------------
f) Short circuit capacity of the armour and duration-for info
: --0.05 x A√t (K Amp)(where A = total area of armour in mm2& t = time in seconds)----
only
g) DC resistance at 20 oC (Ω/Km) & Resistivity of armour : ------------ --As per IS 1554 Part(1), whereever applicable & IS 3975-1999-----------------
14 Outer Sheath
a) Material ( PVC Type) : ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1& FR ST-1&
b) Calculated diameter under the sheath :FR 10.6 11.2 13.1 14.2 18.2 19.7 21.8 25.9
c) Min.thickness of sheath(mm) : 1.24 1.24 1.24 1.24 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.56
d) Guaranteed value of minimum oxygen index of outer sheath
: Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min 29.0 Min
29.0
e) Guranteed value of minimum temperature index at 21
Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min
oxygen index 250
f) colour of sheath : Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey
15 a) Overall diameter of cable : $
b) Tolerance on overall diameter (mm) : ---------------------------------+2/-2 mm---------------------------------------
a) Max./ Standard length per drum for each size of cable (
: 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500 1000/500
single length) with ±5% Tolerance (mtrs) 1000/500
b) Non standard drum lengths : Maximum one(1) non standard lengths of each cable size may be supplied in
drums only over & above the standard lengths as specified above.(if required for
completion of project).
Whether progressive sequential marking on outer sheath
17 : ----------------------------------------- YES ------------------------------------------
provided
18 Identification of cores :
a) colour of cores R & Bk R,Y &Bl R,Y,Bl,Bk& Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey
b) Numbering
Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral
Numerals
N.A. N.A. N.A. s in s in s in s in in black
black ink black ink black ink black ink ink
19 Whether Cables offered are ISI marked : ----------------------------------------- YES ------------------------------------------
: ----------------------------------------- YES ------------------------------------------

7. Control & Protection Panels

SECTION: CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS
1. TYPE OF
PANELS Simplex
Panel
Simplex panel shall consist of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted
thereon and having wiring access from rear for control panels & either front or
rear for relay panels. In case of panel having width more than 800mm, double
leaf-doors shall be provided. Doors shall have handles with either built-in locking
facility or will be provided with pad-lock.
Duplex Panel
Duplex panel shall be walk-in tunnel type comprising two vertical front and rear
panel sections connected back-on-back by formed sheet steel roof tie members
and a central corridor in between. The corridor shall facilitate access to internal
wiring and external cable connections. In case of number of duplex panels
located in a row side by side, the central corridor shall be aligned to form a
continuous passage. Both ends of the corridor shall be provided with double
leaf doors with lift off hinges. Doors shall have handles either with built-in
locking facility or shall be provided with pad-locks. Separate cable entries shall
be provided for the front and rear panels. However, inter-connections between
front and back panels shall be by means of inter panel wiring at the top of the
panel.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
2.1. Control and Relay Board shall be of panels of simplex or duplex type design as
indicated in bill of quantity. However, this shall be finalized by BSPTCL during
detailed engineering at its discretion without any cost implication. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and
such unspecified complementary equipment required for completeness of
the protective/control schemes be properly accommodated in the panels
without congestion and if necessary, provide panels with larger dimensions.
No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed . However, the
width of panels that are being offered to be placed in existing switchyard
control rooms, should be in conformity with the space availability in the control
room.
2.2. Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and
vermin proof. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than
IP-31 in accordance with IS: 2147.
2.3. Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural
frames completely enclosed with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled
sheet steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the
panels such as base frame, front sheet and door frames, and 2.0mm for sides,
door, top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide
level transportation and installation.
2.4. All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with
synthetic rubber gaskets Neoprene/EPDM generally conforming with provision
of IS 11149. However, XLPE gaskets can also be used for fixing protective
glass doors. Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screens and filters. The
screens shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh
2.5. Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat
appearance, inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from
outside, with all exterior surfaces tune and smooth.
2.6. Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, which shall be fixed on
the embedded foundation channels/insert plates. Anti vibration strips made of
shock absorbing materials that shall be supplied by the contractor, shall be
placed between panel & base frame.
2.7. Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plate fitted on
the bottom of the panel shall be connected to earthing of the panel/station
through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.
2.8. Relay panels of modern modular construction would also be acceptable.
3. MOUNTING
3.1. All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the
terminal blocks ready for external connections. The equipment on front of panel
shall be mounted flush.
3.2. Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be
accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and
are readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking on the
equipment shall be clearly visible.
3.3. The Contractor shall carry out cut out, mounting and wiring of the free issue
items supplied by others which are to be mounted in his panel in accordance
with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings. Cut outs if any,
provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off with
blanking plate.
3.4. The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less
than 750mm from the bottom of the panel. The centre lines of relays, meters
and recorders shall be not less than 450mm from the bottom of the panel
3.5. The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be
matched to give a neat and uniform appearance. Like wise the top lines of all
meters, relays and recorders etc. shall be matched.
3.6. No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
3.7. At existing station, panels shall be matched with other panels in the control
room in respect of dimensions, colour, appearance and arrangement of
equipment (centre lines of switches, push buttons and other equipment) on the
front of the panel.
4. PANEL INTERNAL WIRING
4.1. Panels shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring provided between
all electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices
and terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the

panels. When panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter
panel wiring and connections between the panels shall be furnished and the
wiring shall be carried out internally
4.2. All wiring shall be carried out with 650V grade, single core, stranded copper
conductor wires with PVC insulation. The minimum size of the multi-stranded
copper conductor used for internal wiring shall be as follows:
• All circuits except current transformer circuits and voltage
transfer circuits meant for energy metering - one 1.5mm sq. per
lead.
• All current transformer circuits one 2.5 sq.mm lead.
• Voltage transformer circuit (for energy meters): Two 2.5 mm
sq.per lead.
4.3. All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily
accessible and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring
gutters & troughs shall be used for this purpose.
4.4. Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits,
annunciation circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of
the panels running throughout the entire length of the panels.
4.5. Wire termination shall be made with solderless crimping type and tinned copper
lugs , which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all
the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to
correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is
disconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directly connected to trip circuit
breaker or device shall be distinguished by the addition of red coloured
unlettered ferrule.
4.6. Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be
preferred for inter panel wiring. Inter-connections to adjacent panel shall be
brought out to a separate set of terminal blocks located near the slots of holes
meant for taking the inter-connecting wires.
4.7. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the
internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipments
5. TERMINAL BLOCKS
5.1. All internal wiring to be connected to external equipment shall terminate on
terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and have 10 Amps.
continuous rating, moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type
terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Markings on the terminal blocks shall
correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring diagrams. All
terminal blocks shall have shrouding with transparent unbreakable material.
5.2. Disconnecting type terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage
transformer secondary leads shall be provided. Also current transformer
secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
5.3. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare
terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.
5.4. Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors of external cable on each side
• All CT & PT circuits: minimum of two of 2.5mm Sq. copper.
• AC/DC Power Supply Circuits : One of 6mm Sq. Aluminium.
• All other circuits: minimum of one of 2.5mm Sq. Copper.
5.5. There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of terminal
blocks and the associated cable gland plate or panel side wall. Also the
clearance between two rows of terminal blocks edges shall be minimum of
150mm.
5.6. Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the
enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run in parallel and close
proximity along each side of the wiring-duct to provide for convenient
attachment of internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite the
wiring duct shall be reserved for the Owner's external cable connections. All
adjacent terminal blocks shall also share this field wiring corridor. All
wiring shall be provided with adequate support inside the panels to hold them
firmly and to enable free and flexible termination without causing strain on
terminals.
5.7. The number and sizes of the Owner's multi core incoming external cables will
be furnished to the Contractor after placement of the order. All necessary cable
terminating accessories such as gland plates, supporting clamps & brackets,
wiring troughs and gutters etc. (except glands & lugs) for external cables shall
be included the scope of supply.
6. PAINTING
6.1. All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the IS:6005 "Code of
practice for phosphating iron and steel".
6.2. Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
6.3. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
6.4. After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.
6.5. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready
mixed, stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried"
while the second coat shall be stoved.
6.6. After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall
be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be
applied after inspection of first coat of painting. The exterior colour of paint shall
be of a slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting.
6.7. A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up
required at site after installation of the panels.
6.8. In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure
like electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted for BSPTCLs review
and approval.
7. MIMIC DIAGRAM
7.1. Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the
system shall be provided in the front of control panels.
7.2. Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodised aluminium or
plastic of approved fast colour material, which shall be screwed on to the panel
and can be easily cleaned. Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable. The
mimic bus shall be 2mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10mm
for bus bars and 7mm for other connections.
7.3. Mimic bus colour will be decided by the BSPTCL and shall be furnished to the
successful Bidder during Engineering.
7.4. When semaphore indicators are used for equipment position they shall be so
mounted in the mimic that the equipment close position shall complete the
continuity of mimic.
7.5. Indicating lamp, one for each phase, for each bus shall be provided on the
mimic to indicate bus charged condition
8. NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS
8.1. All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted
inside the panels shall be provided with individual name plates with equipment
designation engraved. Also on the top of each panel on front as well as rear
side, large and bold nameplates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.
8.2. All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear with individual
name plates engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in the
panel internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
8.3. Each instrument and meter shall be prominently marked with the quantity
measured e.g. KV, A, MW, etc. All relays and other devices shall be clearly
marked with manufacturer's name, manufacturer's type, serial number and
electrical rating data.
8.4. Name Plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Name plates
shall be black with white engraving lettering.
8.5. Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its function e.g.
'BREAKER''52A', "SYNCHRONISING" etc. Similar inscription shall also
be provided on each device whose function is not other-wise identified. If any
switch device does not bear this inscription separate name plate giving its
function shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear inscription
for each position indication e.g. "Trip- Neutral-Close", "ON-OFF", "R-Y-B-OFF"
etc
8.6. All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel
bearing LOA No & Date , Name of the Substation & feeder and reference
drawing number.
9. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
9.1. Plug Point : 240V, Single phase 50Hz, AC socket with switch suitable to accept
5 Amps and 15 Amps pin round standard Indian plug, shall be provided in the
interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF switch.
9.2. Interior Lighting : Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting
fixture rated for 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz supply for the interior illumination
of the panel controlled by the respective panel door switch. Adequate lighting
shall also be provided for the corridor in Duplex panels.
9.3. Switches and Fuses: Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrange-
ments for receiving, distributing and isolating of DC and AC supplies for various
control, signaling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-
circuits shall be separately provided with Fuses. Selection of the main and sub-
circuit Fuses rating shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit
faults. Voltage transformer circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected
by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming to IS: 13703
mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. The short time fuse rating of Fuses
shall be not less than 9 KA. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse
'rating' and 'voltage'.
9.4. Space Heater : Each panel shall be provided with a thermostatically
connected space heater rated for 240V , single phase , 50 Hz Ac supply for the
internal heating of the panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The fittings
shall be complete with switch unit
10. EARTHING
10.1. All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed. Location of earth
bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various
switching conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of
the bus bar shall be at least 25 X 6 sq.mm perforated copper with threaded
holes at a gap of 50mm with a provision of bolts and nuts for connection with
cable armours and mounted equipment etc for effective earthing. When
several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made
continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be
included in the scope of supply of Contractor. Provision shall be made for
extending the earth bus bars to future adjoining panels on either side.
10.2. Provision shall be made on each bus bar of the end panels for connecting
Substation earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this
purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of Contractor.
10.3. All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment
including gland plate, shall be connected to the earth bus by copper wires of
size not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be
green.
10.4. Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to
other devices when the loop is broken, shall not be permitted. However,
looping of earth connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to
earth bus shall be provided.
10.5. VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place
only at the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be
made through links so that earthing may be removed from one group without
disturbing continuity of earthing system for other groups.
11. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS, RECORDERS & TRANSDUCERS

All instruments, meters, recorders and transducers shall be enclosed in dust
proof, moisture resistant, black finished cases and shall be suitable for tropical
use. All megawatt , megavar, Bus voltage and frequency dicating
instruments shall be provided with individual transducers and these shall be
calibrated along with transducers to read directly the primary quantities. They
shall be accurately adjusted and calibrated at works and shall have means of
calibration check and adjustment at site. The supplier shall submit calibration
certificates at the time of delivery. However no separate transducers are
envisaged for digital bus voltmeters and digital frequency meters and the
indicating meters provided in the synchronising equipment.
11.1. Indicating Instruments
11.1.1. Unless otherwise specified, all electrical indicating instruments shall be of
digital type suitable for flush mounting.
11.1.2. Instruments shall have 4-digit display; display height being not less than 25
mm
11.1.3. Instrument shall confirm to relevant IS and shall have an accuracy class of 1.5
or better Watt and Var meters shall have an indication of (+) and (-) to
indicate EXPORT and IMPORT respectively.
11.1.4. Digital voltage and frequency meters shall be of class: 0.5 and shall have
digital display of 4 and 4.5 digits respectively, with display size, not less
than25mm (height).
11.2. Bus Voltage & Frequency Recording Instruments
11.2.1 Recording instruments shall be square or rectangular in shape and shall be
suitable for flush mounting on panels. They shall be of 'draw out' type and
suitable for back connection.
11.2.2 Recorders shall be furnished in dust tight metal cases with gasketed doors
and they shall be designed so as to require minimum maintenance.
11.2.3 The recorder shall
i. be single pen type employing potentionmeteric servo drive principle.
ii. be of continuous recording type with disposable fibre tip cartridge pens,
employing ink on paper.
iii. have a Calibrated Chart width of at least 100 mm and a viewing area of
100x50mm, at least.
iv. have an accuracy of + 1.0% span.
vi. have full span response time of less than 2
seconds.
i. have maximum chart speed facility of 60mm per hour.
vii. be directly calibrated for CT and PT ratios in use.
viii. be provided with chart rolls of adequate length requiring replacement, not
earlier than 27 days. The quantity of chart rolls and ink included with the
offer shall be 1000 metre length of paper and five pens with each recorder.
ix. be suitable for operation with station DC source, in case of AC supply (230
volts, 1 phase, 50Hz) failure (inverter may be included ,if required) .
11.2.4 Alternatively, Static/Digital type frequency recorder and voltage recorder either
as individual units or composite unit for total substation with time tagged
information shall also be acceptable if it meets the accuracy of + 1.0% span
and full span response time of less than 2 seconds. The static/digital shall
also meet the high voltage susceptibility test , impulse voltage with stand test ,
high frequency disturbance test –class III and fast transient disturbance test –
level III as per IEC 60255.
11.3. Transducers
11.3.1.1. Transducers (for use with Indicating Instruments and Telemetry/Data
Communication application) shall in general conform to IEC:688-1
11.3.1.2. The transducers shall be suitable for measurement of active power, reactive
power, voltage, current and frequency in three phase four wire unbalanced
system.
11.3.1.3. The input to the transducers will be from sub-station current & potential
transformers. The output shall be in milli ampere D.C. proportional to the input
& it shall be possible to feed the output current directly to the telemetry
terminal or indicating instruments.
11.3.1.4. The transducer characteristic shall be linear throughout the measuring range.
11.3.1.5. The transducer output shall be load independent.
11.3.1.6. The input & output of the transducer shall be galvanically isolated.
11.3.1.7. Each transducer shall be housed in a separate compact case and have
suitable terminals for inputs & outputs.
11.3.1.8. The transducers shall be suitably protected against transient high peaks of
voltage & current.
11.3.1.9. The transducer shall withstand indefinitely without damage and work
satisfactorily at 120% of the rated voltage and 120% of the rated input current
as applicable.
11.3.1.10. All the transducers shall have an output of 4-20 mA.
11.3.1.11. The response time of the transducers shall be less than 1 second.
11.3.1.12. The accuracy class of transducers shall be 1.0 or better for voltage/current
transducer, 0.5 or better for watt/VAR transducer and 0.2 or better for
frequency transducer.
11.3.1.13. The transducers shall have a low AC ripple on output less than 1%.
11.3.1.14. The transducers shall be suitable for load resistance of 1000-1500

11.3.1.15. The transducer shall have dual output.
12. ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM
12.1. Alarm annunciation system shall be provided in the control board by means of
visual and audible alarm in order to draw the attention of the operator to the
abnormal operating conditions or the operation of some protective devices.
The annunciation equipment shall be suitable for operation on the voltages
specified in this specification.
12.2. The visual annunciation shall be provided by annunciation facia, mounted
flush on the top of the control panels.
12.3. The annunciator facia shall be provided with translucent plastic window for
alarm point with approximate size of 35mm x 50mm. The facia plates shall be
engraved in black lettering with respective inscriptions. Alarm inscriptions
shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and size of the
lettering shall not be less than 5 mm.
12.4. Each annunciation window shall be provided with two white lamps in parallel
to provide safety against lamp failure. Long life lamps shall be used. The
transparency of cover plates and wattage of the lamps provided in the facia
windows shall be adequate to ensure clear visibility of the inscriptions in the
control room having high illumination intensity (350 Lux), from the location
of the operator's desk.
12.5. All Trip facia shall have red colour and all Non-trip facia shall have white
colour.
12.6. The audible alarm shall be provided by Buzzer/ Hooter /Bell having different
sounds and shall be used as follows.
Hooter Alarm Annunciation
Bell Annunciation DC failure
Buzzer AC supply failure
12.7. Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows :
Sl. NO. Alarm Condition Fault Visual Audible
Contact Annunciation Annunciation
1. Normal Open OFF OFF
2. Abnormal Close Flashing ON
3. Accept Push Button Pressed Close Steady On OFF
Open Steady On OFF
4. Reset Push Button Pressed Close On OFF
Open Of OFF
f

5. Lamp Test Push Button
Pressed
Open Steady On OFF
12.8. Audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation
system shall be provided and this annunciation shall operate on 240 Volts
AC supply. On failure of the DC to the annunciation system for more than
2 or 3 seconds. (adjustable setting), a bell shall sound. A separate push
button shall be provided for the cancellation of this audible alarm alone
but the facia window shall remain steadily lighted till the supply to
annunciation system is restored .
12.9. A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure
of supply (240V AC) to the scheme mentioned in Clause above. If the
failure of supply exists for more than 2 to 3 seconds. this relay shall
initiate visual and audible annunciation. Visual and audible annunciation
for the failure of AC supply to the annunciation system shall be
provided and this annunciation shall operate on Annunciation DC and
buzzer shall sound.
12.10. The annunciation system described above shall meet the following
additional requirements :
a) The annunciation system shall be capable of catering to at least 20
simultaneous signals at a time.
b) One set of the following push buttons shall be provided on each
control panel:
• Reset push button for annunciation system.
• Accept push button for annunciation system.
• Lamp test push button for testing the facia windows
c) One set of the following items shall be provided common for all the
control panel (not applicable for extension of substation) :
• Flasher relay for annunciation system.
• Push button for Flasher test .
• Three Push buttons for test of all audible alarm systems
d) These testing circuits shall be so connected that while testing is
being done it shall not prevent the registering of any new annunciation
that may land during the test
e) The annunciation shall be repetitive type and shall be capable
of registering the fleeting signal. Minimum duration of the fleeting
signal registered by the system shall be 15 milli seconds.
f) In case of static annunciator scheme, special precaution shall be taken
to ensure that spurious alarm condition does not appear due to
influence of external electromagnetic/ electrostatic interference on
the annunciator wiring and switching disturbances from the
neighbouring circuits within the panels and the static annunciator shall
meet the high voltage susceptibility test , impulse voltage with stand
test , high frequency disturbance test– class III and fast transient
disturbance test –level III as per IEC 60255.
12.11. The annunciation system to be supplied for existing sub-stations shall
be engineered as an extension to the existing scheme.
12.12 For the Control panel with BCU, only common alarm lamp shall be
provided for each Control panel. Each BCU of the control panel shall
energize this common alarm lamp on occurrence of alarms/Trips. All
alarms shall be available in the BCU mimic/HMI.
13. SWITCHES
13.1. Control and instrument switches shall be rotary operated type with
escutcheon plates clearly marked to show operating position and circuit
designation plates and suitable for flush mounting with only switch
front plate and operating handle projecting out.
13.2. The selection of operating handles for the different types of switches shall
be as follows :
Breaker, Isolator control switches : Pistol grip, black
Synchronising switches : Oval, Black, Keyed
handle(one common
removable handle for a group of
switches or locking facility
having common key)
synchronising Selector switches : Oval or knob, black
Instrument switches : Round, knurled, black
Protection Transfer switch : Pistol grip, lockable and
black.
13.3. The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of spring return to
neutral type. The switch shall have spring return from close and trip
positions to "after close" and "after trip" positions respectively.
13.4. Instrument selection switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put)

type. Ammeter selection switches shall have make-before-break type
contacts so as to prevent open circuiting of CT secondary when changing
the position of the switch. Voltmeter transfer switches for AC shall be
suitable for reading all line- to-line and line-to-neutral voltages for non
effectively earthed systems and for reading all line to line voltages for
effectively earthed systems.
13.5. Synchronising switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put) type

having a common removable handle for a group of switches. The
handle shall be removable only in the OFF position and it shall be co-
ordinated to fit in to all the synchronising switches. These switches shall
be arranged to connect the synchronising equipment when turned to the
'ON' position. One contact of
each switch shall be connected in the closing circuit of the respective
breaker so that the breaker cannot be closed until the switch is turned
to the 'ON' position.
13.6. Lockable type of switches which can be locked in particular positions

shall be provided when specified. The key locks shall be fitted on
the operating handles.
13.7. The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap
action to minimise arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted
and contact faces shall be with rivets of pure silver or silver alloy.
Springs shall not be used as current carrying parts
1.8. The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to

give completeness to the interlock and function of the scheme.
1.9. Protection Transfer switch / BCU will energise a bi-stable relay for
protection transfer function from local/ remote HMI.
13.10. The contact rating of the switches shall be as follows :

Description Contact rating in Amps
220VDC 50V DC 240V AC
Make and carry 10 10 10

Continuously
Make and carry 30 30 30

for 0.5 sec.
Break for:
Resistive load 3 20 7
Inductive load 0.2 - -
with L/R = 40m sec.
4. INDICATING LAMPS
14.1. Indicating lamps shall be of cluster LED type suitable for panel mounting
with rear terminal connections. .Lamps shall be provided with series
connected resistors preferably built in the lamp assembly. Lamps shall
have translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights coloured red ,green, amber
,clear white or blue as specified .The lamp cover shall be preferably of
screwed type ,unbreakable and moulded from heat resisting material.
14.2. The lamps shall be provided with suitable resistors .
14.3. Lamps and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from
the front of the panel. Tools ,if required for replacing the bulbs and
lenses shall also be included in the scope of the supply.
14.4. The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage
on a continuous basis.

15. POSITION INDICATORS
15.1. Position indicators of "SEMAPHORE" type shall be provided when

specified as part of the mimic diagrams on panels for indicating the
position of circuit breakers, isolating/earthing switches etc. The
indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting with only the front
disc projecting out and with terminal connection from the rear.
Their strips shall be of the same colour as
the associated mimic.
15.2. Position indicator shall be suitable for DC Voltage as specified. When

the supervised object is in the closed position, the pointer of the
indicator shall take up a position in line with the mimic bus bars, and at
right angles to them when the object is in the open position. When the
supply failure to the indicator occurs, the pointer shall take up an
intermediate position to indicate the supply failure.
15.3. The rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.
15.4. The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a

continuous basis.
16. SYNCHRONISING EQUIPMENT

16.1. The synchronising instruments shall be mounted either on a
synchronising trolley or on a synchronising panel. The panel/ trolley shall
be equipped with double analog voltmeters and double
analog frequency meters, synchroscope and lamps fully
wired. The size of voltmeters and frequency meters provided in the
synchronising panel shall not be less than 144x144 sq.mm. Suitable
auxiliary voltage transformers wherever necessary shall also be provided
for synchronising condition. In case the synchroscope is
not continuously rated, a synchroscope cut-off switch shall be provided
and an indicating lamp to indicate that the synchroscope is energised,
shall also be provided
16.2. Synchronising check relay with necessary ancillary equipment’s shall

be provided which shall permit breakers to close after checking the
requirements of synchronising of incoming and running supply. The
phase angle setting shall not exceed 35 degree and have voltage
difference setting not exceeding
10%. This relay shall have a response time of less than 200
milliseconds when the two system conditions are met within present
limits and with the timer disconnected. The relay shall have a
frequency difference setting not exceeding 0.45% at rated value and at
the minimum time setting. The relay shall have a continuously adjustable
time setting range of 0.5-20 seconds. A guard relay shall be provided to
prevent the closing attempt by means of synchronising check relay
when control switch is kept in closed position long before the two
systems are in synchronism
16.3. The synchronising panel shall be draw out and swing type which can
be swivelled in left and right direction. The synchronising panel shall be
placed along with control panels and the number of synchronising panel
shall be as indicated in PRICE SCHEDULE. The incoming and running
bus wires of VT secondary shall be connected and run as bus wires in the
control panels and will be extended to synchronising panel for
synchronisation of circuit breakers. The selector switch provided for each
circuit breaker in respective control panels shall be lockable type with a
common key so that only one selector switch is kept in synchronising
mode at a time.
16.4. Alternatively, the trolley shall be of mobile type with four rubber-
padding wheels capable of rotating in 360 degree around the vertical
axis. Suitable bumpers with rubber padding shall be provided all
around the trolley to prevent any accidental damage to any panel in
the control room while the trolley is in movement. The trolley shall have
two meter long flexible cord fully wired to the instruments and
terminated in a plug in order to facilitate connecting the trolley to
any of the panels. The receptacle to accept the plug shall be provided on
the panel.
16.5. At existing sub-stations, the synchronising scheme shall be engineered to

be compatible with the existing synchronising scheme and
synchronising socket/switch on the panel. In substations, where
synchronising panels are available, the bidder shall carry out the
shifting of the above panels , if required , to facilitate the extension of
control panel placement .
17. RELAYS
1.1. All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255 or

other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush
mounting on the front with connections from the rear.
1.2. All protective relays shall be of numerical type and communication protocol
shall be as per IEC 61850 Editition-2. Protective relays shall also fulfil the
requirements specified for Protection IEDs in Section- Substation
automation system.
All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type/modular

cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall
be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.
17.3. All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC
Voltage operated relays shall be suitable for 110 Volts VT secondary
and current operated relays for 1 amp CT secondary. All DC operated
relays and timers shall be designed for the DC voltage specified, and shall
operate satisfactorily between 80% and 110% of rated voltage. Voltage
operated relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous
operation.
17.4. The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of
the protection scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary
relays and timers required for interlocking schemes for multiplying of
contacts suiting contact duties of protective relays and monitoring of
control supplies and circuits, lockout relay monitoring circuits etc. also
required for the complete protection schemes described in the

specification shall be provided. All protective relays shall be provided
with at least two pairs of potential free isolated output contacts.
Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as required
to complete the scheme, contacts shall be silver faced with spring action.
Relay case shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential
free external connections to the relay coils and contacts, including spare
contacts.
17.5. All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays
and interlocking relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type
contacts. All protective relays and timers shall be provided with
externally hand reset positive action operation indicators with inscription.
All protective relays which do not have built-in hand-reset operation
indicators shall have additional auxiliary relays with operating indicators
(Flag relays) for this purpose. Similarly, separate operating indicator
(auxiliary relays) shall also be provided in the trip circuits of protections
located outside the board such as Buchholtz relays, oil and winding
temperature protection, sudden pressure devices, fire protection etc.
17.6. Timers shall be of the electromagnetic or solid state type. Pneumatic

timers are not acceptable. Short time delays in terms of milliseconds
may be obtained by using copper slugs on auxiliary relays. In such
case it shall be ensured that the continuous rating of the relay is not
affected. Time delay in terms of milliseconds obtained by the external
capacitor resistor combination is not preferred and shall be avoided to the
extent possible.
17.7. No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay
is de- energised shall be employed in the circuits.
17.8. Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay
for the purpose of testing and maintenance.
17.9. Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably

be of shunt reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following
shall be strictly ensured:
(a) The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently

shorter than that of the trip coil or trip relay in series with which
it operates to ensure definite operation of the flag indicator of the
relay.
(b) Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one
or more relays operate simultaneously.
(c) Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to

permit satisfactory operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the
D.C. Supply Voltage is minimum.
17.10. All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra
isolated pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for future use.
17.11. The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the ones

specified shall also be acceptable if they meet the functional requirements.
17.12. Any alternative/additional protections or relays considered necessary

for providing complete effective and reliable protection shall also be
offered separately. The acceptance of this alternative/ additional
equipment shall lie with the CE (Project), BSPTCL.
17.13. The bidder shall include in his bid a list of installations where the relays
quoted have been in satisfactory operation.
17.14. All relays and their drawings shall have phase indications as R-Red, Y-
yellow, B-blue
17.15. Wherever numerical relays are used, the scope shall include the following:
a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from

the relay from/to the personal computer installed in the substation.
However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future

connectivity to SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting
IEC 870-5-103 protocol. Neither the interface hardware nor the
software for connectivity to SCADA will form part of the scope of
this specification.
c) In case of Numerical line protection and Numerical

transformer/reactor differential protection, the features like
disturbance recorder and event logging function as available in
these relays shall be supplied and activated in addition to
requirement specified for disturbance recorder and event logging
elsewhere in the specification.
18. TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION
18.1. The line protection relays are required to protect the line and clear the
faults on line within shortest possible time with reliability,
selectivity and full sensitivity to all type of faults on lines. The
general concept is to have two main protections having equal
performance requirement specially in respect of time as called Main-I
and Main-II for 400KV and 220KV lines. The general concept is to have
Main and back up protection for 132 KV lines.
18.2. The Transmission system for which the line protection equipment
are required is detailed inspecification . The length of lines
and the line parameters (Electrical Constants) are also indicated there.
18.3. The maximum fault current could be as high as 40 kA but the minimum
fault current could be as low as 20% of rated current of CT
secondary. The starting & measuring relays characteristics should be
satisfactory under these extremely varying conditions.
18.4. The protective relays shall be suitable for use with capacitor
voltage transformers as well as Potential Transformers/ Voltage
Transformers having non-electronic damping and transient response as
per IEC.
18.5. Disturbance Recorder, Distance to fault Locator and Over voltage

relay (stage -1) functions if offered as an integral part of line protection
relay, shall be acceptable provided these meet the technical requirements
as specified in the respective clauses.
18.6. Auto reclose relay function if offered as an integral part of line

distance protection relay, shall be acceptable for 132 KV lines
provided the auto reclose relay feature meets the technical
requirements as specified in the respective clause.
18.7. The following protections shall be provided for each of the Transmission
lines:
For 400 KV & 220KV
Main-I: Numerical distance protection scheme
Main-II: Numerical distance protection scheme of a make different from that of

Main –I
 If specified in Section-Project, Main-I and / or Main-II relay shall be
provided as Line differential protection relay with built in distance
function. Further, matching Line differential
protection relays for remote ends shall be provided as per Price Schedule.
 Main-I & Main-II relay shall be of different make & model. Same make
relay shall be acceptable only if they are of different hardware &
manufacturing platform.
 If specified in the “Section- Project, “back up Over current and Earth fault
protection shall be provided instead of Main –II protection scheme for
220KV lines to match with requirements
at the remote ends.
For 132KV
Main: Numerical distance protection scheme
Back up : Directional Over current and Earth fault Protection
18.8. However, Phase segregated phase/direction comparison

protection, Protection based on directional wave detection
principle, phase segregated line differential protection as Main 2
protection in place of Numerical distance protection scheme shall be
provided if specified in the specification.
18.9. Further, if specified, back up Over current and Earth fault protection shall
be provided instead of Main -II protection scheme for
220KV lines to match with requirements at the remote ends.
18.10. The detailed description of the above line protections is given here under.
18.10.1. Main-I & Main-II Numerical Distance Protection scheme :

(a) shall be numerical type and shall have continuous self monitoring
and diagnostic feature.
(b) shall be non-switched type with separate measurements for all phase
to phase and phase to ground faults
(c) shall have stepped time-distance characteristics and independent three
forward zones and one reverse/offset zone
(d) shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics

for all Zones
(e) shall have following maximum operating time (including trip relay
time , if any) under given set of conditions and with CVT being used on
line (with all filters included) .
(i) for 400 KV & 220 KV lines:
Source to Impedance ratio 4 15
Relay setting (Ohms) (10 or 20) and 2
2
Fault Locations (as % of relay setting) 50 50
Fault resistance (Ohms) 0 0
Maximum operating time 40 for all ph. 45 for 3 ph.
(Milliseconds) faults faults &
60 for all
other faults
(ii) for 132 KV lines :
A relaxation of 5 ms in above timings is allowed for 132 KV lines .
Note: However, the setting shall be finalised during detailed engineering,
testing & commissioning.
(f) The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30
-
75 degree or shall have independent resistance (R) and reactance (X)
setting.
(g) shall have two independent continuously variable time setting range of
0-3 seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.
(h) shall have resetting time of less than 55 milli-seconds (including

the resetting time of trip relays)
(i) shall have variable residual compensation.
(k) shall have memory circuits with defined characteristics in all three phases
to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse
conditions and shall operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to
zero-volt 3 phase fault
(l) shall have weak end in-feed feature
(m) shall be suitable for single & three phase tripping.
(n) shall have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage ci

(o) shall be provided with necessary self reset type trip duty contacts
for completion of the scheme (Minimum number of these trip duty
contacts shall be four per phase) either through built in or
through separate high speed trip relays . Making capacity of these trip
contacts shall be 30 amp for
0.2 seconds with an inductive load of L/R > 10 mill seconds . If separate
high
speed trip relays are used , the operating time of the same shall not be
more than 10 milliseconds
(p) shall be suitable for use in permissive under reach / over reach
/blocking communication mode .
(q) shall have suitable number of potential free contacts for Carrier
aided Tripping, Auto reclosing, Event Logger, Disturbance / Fault
recorder & Data acquisition system.
(r) include power swing blocking and out-of-step protection which shall
 have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection

described above.
 block tripping of distance function zones during power swing
conditions
 release blocking in the event of actual fault
 release tripping on detection of out-of-step power swing
condition
 Alternatively standalone relay for out of step protection shall
also be acceptable, if the same is not part of main protection
relays.
(s) include fuse failure protection which shall monitor all the three fuses
of C.V.T. and associated cable against open circuit.
 inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
 have an operating time less than 7 milliseconds
 remain inoperative for system earth faults
(t) include a directional back up Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT )

earth fault relay with normal inverse characteristics as per IEC 60255-3
as a built in feature or as a separate unit for 400 KV and 220KV
transmission lines.
(u) Must have a current reversal guard feature.

(v) Shall have Stub protection function with current setting minimum range
of 1 to 3 pu with definite time delay setting minimum range of 0 to
100msec.
(w) have feature of PRP as well as load encroachment blinder to safeguard
the protection trip during heavy line loading condition.
(x) In case the numerical distance relay is not having the built in feature as
per above clause (t), the same can be supplied as an independent relay.
18.10.2 Line Differential Relay protection scheme (If applicable)
The line current differential relay with built-in distance protection function
shall be capable of being selected to differential function with back up
distance function or shall activate back up distance automatically when the
differential relay is out of service. The relay shall fulfil the requirement
specified above at clause 18.9 for distance relay function.
Further, the line current differential function shall conform to the following
main requirements:
i. The current differential shall be a unit system of protection.
ii. The line Current differential Protection shall comprise a wellproven
high-speed phase segregated numerical current differential protection
scheme, which shall be designed for the selective protection of the
EHV network.
iii. The High speed numerical current differential protection shall be
suitable to work through directly connected fiber optics and the relay
shall have the requisite teleprotection communication capability.
iv. Shall have built-in signalling modules for communication with the
remote end relay via direct optical fiber cables.
v. The contractor shall coordinate the requirements of the current differential
relay with the communication system in order to ensure compatibility
between the two.
vi. The relay shall incorporate inter-tripping, VT Supervision functions and
heavy duty contacts for tripping of the feeder circuit breaker as well as
provide all flagging, alarms etc.
vii. Shall have high-speed fault detection capability with typical relay operation
time of less than 30 ms for 765kV/400kV/220kV line faults and less than 40
ms for 132kV & below.
viii. Shall have high sensitivity for all types of faults.
ix. Shall detect and clear faults along the whole length of the feeder within the
specified operating time when the remote end breaker is open or there is a
weak in feed.
x. Shall remain stable for fault on a parallel feeder under subsequent current
reversal in the healthy feeder due to slow opening of one of the faulty
feeder's circuit breakers.
xi. Shall not be affected by heavy load transfer, power swings, CT saturation,
distorted primary currents and voltages, VT fuse failure, line charging
currents external switching, arc or tower footing resistance, sudden power
reversal, zero sequence mutual coupling, fault resistance and out of phase
source at the two line terminals producing misleading apparent fault
reactance, power frequency variations, collapse of voltage on the faulted
phase(s), etc.
xii. Shall have features to clear close in faults at high speed in the event of
failure of signalling channel.
xiii. Shall have features to test at one end all the functions associated with the
protection, without the presence of personnel at the remote end.
xiv. Shall have features to block relay in case of signalling channel failure or
remote relay out of service / block or setting mismatch or dc failure etc., to
avoid inadvertent tripping and shall produce alarm during blocking.
xv. Shall have inter-tripping compliant with IEC60834-1 and IEC60834–2
respectively for signalling as appropriate.
xvi. The line differential device address shall be settable and shall be suitable to
set for no. of feeders shown in SLD.
xvii. CT supervision / VT Supervision shall be configured to initiate alarm
locally and to sub-station automation system or event recorder as per
requirement.
xviii. Shall have single pole/three pole tripping feature.
xix. Shall have built-in SOTF logic feature.
xx. Shall have features to block auto-reclose internally or externally at local end
and facility to send blocking signals to remote end relay internally (through
FO communication channels) during SOTF trips.
xxi. Shall have facility to configure signal transferred between local and remote
end relays in the internal event recorder and disturbance recorder.
xxii. Shall have configurable time delayed thermal protection element and back
up earth fault protection element.
xxiii. Shall have following features:
• Satisfactory Performance of relay under CT saturation during through
faults.
• Satisfactory Performance of relay under conditions of CT saturation
for in zone faults.
• Satisfactory Performance of relay during transient (jitter) and
permanent changes in signalling propagation delays.
xxiv. Shall include necessary Optical fibre cable & associated accessories for
connection between the current differential relay panel and existing Fibre
optic distribution panel (FODP).
18.10.3. Back-up Directional Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme
(a) shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall
be either independent or composite unit(s)
(b) Numerical type
(c) The scheme shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for
alarm purposes
(d) Directional over current relay shall
 have IDMT characteristic (normal inverse as per IEC)
 have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
 have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead
 include hand reset flag indicators /LEDs .
(e) Directional earth fault relay shall
 have IDMT characteristic (normal inverse as per IEC)

• have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current
• have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag
• include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs
• include necessary separate interposing voltage
transformers or have internal feature in the relay for open delta
voltage to the relay.
18.10.3. All trip relays usedin transmission line protection scheme shall be
of self/electrical reset type depending on application requirement.
19. CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTION:

19.1 NUMERICAL AUTO RECLOSING RELAY shall
(a) have single phase and three phase reclosing facilities (as
applicable).
(b) have a continuously variable single phase dead time range of 0.1-
2 seconds.
(c) have a continuously variable three phase dead time range of

0.1-2 seconds (as applicable).
(d) have a continuously variable reclaim time range of 5-300 seconds.
(e) Incorporate a two position selector switch, from which single phase
auto-reclosure and non-auto reclosure mode can be selected.
Alternatively, the mode of auto reclosing can be selected through
HMI of the relay or BCU & SAS.
(f) be of single shot type.
(g) have priority circuit to closing of both circuit breakers in case one
and half breaker arrangements to allow sequential closing of
breakers
(h) However, Auto-reclose as in built function of bay controller unit

(BCU) (if supplied) is also acceptable provided the signal exchange
for auto-reclose function from BCU to main Relays & vice-versa is
achieved through hardwiring.
(i) be acceptable asbuilt in with line distance relay for132kv
(j) include check synchronising relay which shall
• have a time setting continuously variable between 0.5-5

seconds. with a facility of additional 10 seconds.
• have a response time within 200 milli seconds with the

timer disconnected.
• have a phase angle setting not exceeding 35 degree
• have a voltage difference setting not exceeding10%

(k) include dead line charging relay which shall
• have two sets of relays and each set shall be able to monitor the
three phase voltage where one set shall be connected to the line
CVTs with a fixed setting of 20% of rated voltage and the
other set
sh
all be connected to the bus CVTs with a fixed setting of
80% of rated voltage.
• incorporate necessary auxiliary relays and timers to

give comprehensive scheme.
19.2. LOCAL BREAKER BACK-UP (LBB) PROTECTION SCHEME shall

(a) be triple pole type
(b) have an operating time of less than 15 milli seconds
(c) have a resetting time of less than 15 milli seconds
(d) have three over current elements
(e) be arranged to get individual initiation from the corresponding phase of
main protections of line for each over current element. However,
common three phase initiation is acceptable for other protections and
transformer /reactor equipment protections.
(f) have a setting range of 10-80% of rated current
(g) have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated current irrespective
of the setting
(h) have a timer with continuously adjustable setting range of 0.1-1 seconds
(i) have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme
(j) Shall have re-trip feature for tripping its own CB after initiation with a
set time delay.
(k) be acceptable as Built-in protection function of distributed bus bar
protection scheme only; however in that case separate LBB relay shall be
provided for tie bays.
(l) be similar relays for complete scope of work as per specification (if
provided as standalone relay unit).
20. LINE OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY shall
(a) monitor all three phases
(b) have two independent stages
(c) be either a standalone relay for both stage-I & II or as built in
function of Main-I & Main-II distance relay for both stage-I & II.
(d) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with
a setting least count of 0.1V (Secondary volts) and an adjustable
time delay range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage or as per the
practices adopted by BSPTCL.
(e) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage

with a time delay of 100-200 mill seconds for the second stage.
(f) be tuned to power frequency

(f) provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) and
signal for each stage relays with phase indication for event
logging.
(g) have a drop-off to pick-up ratio greater than 97%.
(h) provide separate out-put contacts for each 'Phase' and stage
for breaker trip relays, event logger and other scheme
requirements.
20.1 All trip relays used in transmission line protection scheme shall be of self -
electrical reset type depending on application requirement.
21. REACTOR PROTECTION
21.1. Differential Protection Relay shall
(b) have operation time less than 25 milli-seconds at 5 times

setting.
(c) be tuned to system frequency
(d) have current setting range of 10 to 40% of 1 Amp. Or a

suitable voltage setting range.
(e) be high impedance - biased differential type
(f) be stable for all external faults, CT saturation
(g) be provided with suitable non-linear resistors across the relay to

limit the peak voltage to 1000 volts.
21.2. Restricted earth fault protection Relay shall
(a) be single pole type
(b) be of current/voltage operated high impedance type
(c) have a current setting of 5-40% of 1 Amp./have a suitable voltage

setting range.
(d) be tuned to system frequency.
(e) have a suitable non-linear resistor to limit the peak voltage to 1000 Volts.
(f) Separate relay shall be provided for 1-phase spare reactor unit (if
envisaged).
21.3. Back up impedance protection Relay shall
(a) be triple pole type, with faulty phase identification/ indication
(b) be single step polarised 'mho' distance/ impedance relay suitable for
measuring phase to ground and phase to phase faults.

(c) have adequate ohmic setting range to cover at least 60 % of the
impedance of the reactor and shall be continuously variable.
(d) have an adjustable characteristic angle of 30-80 degree.
(e) have a definite time delay relay with a continuously adjustable setting
range of 0.2-2.0 seconds.
(f) include VT failure relay which shall block the tripping during VT fuse
failure condition.
(g) have Back-up over current and earth fault protection as built in
function
21.4. Further, Reactor auxiliary protections contacts (Buchholz, PRV, Oil Temperature,
Winding Temperature etc.) as applicable can be wired suitably in above protections
or provide separate Flag relays/Auxiliary relays as per scheme requirements.
Further reactor protections shall be grouped such that Differential protection,
Buchholz-I trip and Winding temperature trip are on DC-A while REF protection,
Back-up Impedance protection, PRD-I and Oil temperature trip are on DC-B. In
case multiple trip contacts for Buchholz relay / PRD relays are available, then their
contacts shall be wired to both Group of Protection.
22. TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

22.1. Transformer differential protection scheme shall
(a) be triple pole type, with faulty phase identification/ indication
(b) have an operating time not greater than 30 milli seconds at 5 times the
rated current .
(c) have three instantaneous high set over-current units
(d) be bias differential type having an adjustable bias setting range of 10-50%
(e) be suitable for 04 nos. of 3-ph CT input with rated CT secondary current of 1
Amp.
(f) have second harmonic or other inrush proof features and also should be
stable under normal over fluxing conditions. Magnetising inrush proof
feature shall not be achieved through any intentional time delay e.g use of
timers to block relay operation or using disc operated relays
(g) have an operating current setting of 15% or less
(h) include necessary separate interposing current transformers for angle and
ratio correction or have internal feature in the relay to take care of the
angle & ratio correction
(i) shall be numerical type and shall have continuous self monitoring and
diagnostic feature
(j) have a fault recording feature to record graphic form of instantaneous

values of following analogue channels during faults and disturbances for
the pre fault and post fault period:
• current in all three windings in nine analogue channels in case of

400kV class and above transformers or 6 analogue channels for
lower voltage transformers and Voltage in one channel
The disturbance recorder function built in the Differential protection IED shall
have the facility to record the following external digital channel signals
associated with transformer which shall be wired to differential relay apart from
the digital signals pertaining to differential relay:
1. REF protection operated

2. HV breaker status (Main & tie/transfer both separately)
3. IV breaker status (Main & tie/transfer both separately)
4. Bucholz / OLTC/ WTI/ OTI alarm
5. Bucholz / PRD / SPR/ Trip
6. Group-A, Group-B lock-out relay trip
Necessary hardware and software for automatic up-loading the data captured
by disturbance recorder to the personal computer (DR Work Station) available
in the substation shall be included in the scope.
(k) be acceptable with built in features of definite time over load protection
(alarm) relay provided the technical requirements of these relays
specified under the relevant clauses are met.
22.2. Over fluxing protection Relays shall
(a) operate on the principle of Voltage to frequency ratio and shall be phase to
phase connected
(b) have inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer over fluxing
withstand capability curve
(c) provide an independent 'alarm' with the time delay continuously

adjustable between 0.1 to 6.0 seconds at values of 'v/f' between 100% to
130% of rated
values
(d) tripping time shall be governed by 'v/f' Vs. time characteristics of the
relay
(e) have a set of characteristics for Various time multiplier settings. The
maximum operating time of the relay shall not exceed 3 seconds and 1.5
seconds at 'v/f' values of 1.4 and 1.5 times, the rated values,
respectively.
(f) have an accuracy of operating time, better than ±10%.
(g) have a resetting ratio of 97 % or better.
22.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection shall
(a) be single pole type
(b) be of current/voltage operated high impedance type
(c) have a current setting range of 5-40% of 1 Amp./ have a

suitable voltage setting range.

(d) be tuned to the system frequency
(e) be phase segregated type for 1-ph transformer units

(f) Not understanding anything mention any where Separate
restricted earth fault relay shall be provided even if REF feature
is provided as inbuilt feature of differential protection relay.
22.4. Back-up Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme with high
set feature
(a) Shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s)
which shall be composite unit(s).
(b) Numerical type
(c) The scheme shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for
alarm purposes
(d) Over current relay shall
• have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite

minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and
have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
• have low transient, over reach high set instantaneous unit

of continuously variable setting range 500-2000 % of
rated current
• have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead
• include hand reset flag indicators or
LEDs.
(e) Earth fault relay shall
• have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum

time of
3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range
of
20-80% of rated current
• have low transient, over reach high set instantaneous unit
of continuously variable setting range 200-800 % of rated current
• have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag
• include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs
• include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or
have internal feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay
22.5. Transformer Overload Protection Relay shall

(a) be of single pole type
(b) be of definite time over-current type and built in feature

with differential relay shall also be acceptable .
(c) have one set of over-current relay element, with

continuously adjustable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
(d) have one adjustable time delay relay for alarm having setting
range of 1 to 10.0 seconds, continuously.
(e) have a drop-off/pick-up ratio greater than 97%.

21.6. Transformer Neutral Current Protection relay (for 1-Phase transformer
bank neutral) shall
(a) have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum
time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and have a variable setting
range of 20-80% of rated current.
21.7. Further, Transformer auxiliary protections contacts (Buchholz,

PRD, SPRD, Oil Temperature, Winding Temperature, OLTC
Buchholz etc. can be wired suitably in above protections or provide
separate Flag relays/Auxiliary relays as per scheme requirements.
Further, transformer protections shall be grouped such that
Differential trip, Buchholz-I trip, Oil temperature alarm and
Winding temperature trip are on DC source-A while REF trip,
Buchholz alarm, PRD-I trip, winding temperature alarm and Oil
temperature trip are on DC source-B. In case multiple trip contacts
for Buchholz relay / PRD relays are available, then their contacts
shall be wired to both Group of Protection.
22.6. LOCAL BREAKER BACK-UP PROTECTION SCHEME shall
(b) be of solid-state type
(c) have an operating time of less than 15 milli seconds
(d) have a resetting time of less than 15 milli seconds
(e) have three over current elements
(f) be arranged to get individual initiation from the corresponding

phase of main protections of line for each over current element.
However, common three phase initiation is acceptable for other
protections and transformer /reactor equipment protections
(g) have a setting range of 20-80% of rated current

(h) have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated
current irrespective of the setting
(i) have a timer with continuously adjustable setting range of

0.1-1 seconds
(j) have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
23. TEE PROTECTION DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS (If Applicable)
23.1. TEE-1 differential protection relays shall
(b) have an operating time less than 30 milliseconds at 5 times the

rated current.
(c) have three instantaneous high set over current units
(d) have an adjustable bias setting range of 20-50%
(e) have an operating current setting of 15% of 1 Amp or less
23.2. TEE-2 Differential relay shall
(b) have operating time less than 25 milliseconds at 5 times setting
(c) be tuned to system frequency
(d) have current setting range of 20 to 80% of 1 Amp
(e) be voltage operated, high impedance type
(f) be stable for all external faults
(g) be provided with suitable non linear resistors across the relay to
limit the peak voltage to 1000 volts
24. TRIPPING RELAY
High Speed Tripping Relay shall
(a) be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds).
(b) reset within 20 milli seconds
(c) be D.C. operated

(d) have adequate contacts to meet the requirement of scheme,
other functions like auto-reclose relay, LBB relay as well
as cater to associated equipment like event logger, Disturbance
recorder, fault Locator, etc.
(e) be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
25. FLAG RELAYS
These shall
have
(a) hand reset flag

indication
(b) have minimum two contacts (NO or NC or combination as

required)
for each relay
26. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY
(a) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of

each
'phase' trip-coil and associated circuit of circuit breaker during
'ON' and 'OFF' conditions.
(b) The relay shall have adequate contacts for providing connection
to alarm and event logger.
(c) The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of not less than 200
milli seconds and be provided with operation indications for each
phase.
27. DC SUPPLY SUPERIVISION RELAY
(a) The relay shall be capable of monitoring the failure of D.C.

supply to which, it is connected.
(b) It shall have adequate potential free contacts to meet the

scheme requirement.
(c) The relay shall have a 'time delay on drop-off' of not less than
100 milli seconds and be provided with operation indicator/flag.
28. BUS BAR PROTECTION
28.1. Redundant (1+1) numerical low impedance biased differential Bus Bar
protection scheme for each Main bus (Bus1 / Bus2) & Transfer Bus (as
applicable) for 400kV shall be provided. The scheme shall be engineered
so as to ensure that operation of any one out of two schemes connected to

faulty bus shall result in tripping of the same.
28.2. Single busbar protection scheme shall be provided for each main
and transfer bus for 220KV and 132 KV voltage levels
28.3. Each Bus Bar protection scheme shall
(a) have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay

for all types of faults of 25 milli seconds at 5 times setting value.
(b) operate selectively for each bus

bar
(c) give hundred percent security up to 63 KA fault level for 400KV
and 220KV and 31.5 KA for 132 KV system.
(d) incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondary against

any possible open circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant
zone of protection inoperative and initiate an alarm
(e) not give false operation during normal load flow in bus
bars.
(f) not cause tripping for the differential current below the load current
of heaviest loaded feeder. Contractor shall submit application check
for the same.
(g) be of phase segregated and triple pole type

(h) incorporate clear zone indication
(i) provide independent zones of protection (including transfer
bus if any). If the bus section is provided then each side of bus
section shall have separate set of bus bar protection schemes
(j) include protection 'IN/OUT' switch for each zone

(k) include individual high speed hand reset tripping relays for
each feeder.
(l) be transient free in operation

(m) include continuous D.C. supplies supervision.
(n) shall include necessary C.T. switching relays wherever C.T.
switching is involved and have 'CT' selection incomplete alarm
(o) shall include trip relays, CT switching relays(if applicable) ,

auxiliary CTs (if applicable) as well as additional power supply
modules, input modules etc. as may be required to provide a Bus-
bar protection scheme for the complete bus arrangement i.e.
for all the bay or breakers under this specification as well as
for the future bays as per the Single line diagram for new
substations. However for extension of bus bar protection scheme in
existing substations, scope shall be limited to the bay or breakers
covered in the scope of work. Suitable panels (if required) to

mount these are also included in the scope of the work.
28.4. Built-in Local Breaker Backup protection feature as a part of bus

bar protection scheme shall also be acceptable.
28.5. At existing substations, Bus-bar protection scheme with independent

zones for each bus, will be available. All necessary co-ordination for
'AC' and 'DC' interconnections between existing schemes (Panels) and
the bays proposed under the scope of this contract shall be fully
covered by the bidder. Any auxiliary relay, trip relay, flag relay and
multi tap auxiliary CTs (in case of biased differential protection)
required to facilitate the operation of the bays covered under this
contract shall be fully covered in the scope of the bidder.
28.6. The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully enclosed
with removable covers and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic
material with boxes and barriers moulded integrally. All terminals shall
be clearly marked with identification numbers or letters to facilitate
connection to external wiring. Terminal block shall have shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for CT circuits.
29. WEATHER PROOF RELAY PANELS

(a) This panel shall include necessary number of electrically reset
relays each with at least eight contacts for isolator auxiliary
contacts multiplication and for changing the CT and DC
circuits to relevant zones of bus bar protection.
(b) The panel shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust,
weather and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be at least 2.0
mm thick and properly braced to prevent wobbling.
(c) The enclosures of the panel shall provide a degree of protection of

not less than IP-55 (as per IS:2147).
(d) The panel shall be of free standing floor mounting type or

pedestal mounting type as per requirement.
(e) The panel shall be provided with double hinged doors with
padlocking arrangement.
(f) All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all
around with synthetic rubber gaskets Neoprene/EPDM generally
conforming with provision of IS 11149. However, XLPE gaskets
can also be used for fixing protective glass doors. Ventilating
louvers, if provided shall have screens and filters. The screens
shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh
(g) Cable entries shall be from bottom. Suitable removable cable

gland plate shall be provided on the cabinet for this purpose.
(h) All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and
then applied with two coats of zinc chromates primer and two

coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint, both inside and outside.
The colour of the finishing paint shall be light grey in
accordance with shade no.697 of IS:5.
(i) Suitable heaters shall be mounted in the panel to

prevent condensation. Heaters shall be controlled by
thermostats so that the
cubicle temperature does not exceed 30oC. On-off switch and
fuse shall be provided. Heater shall be suitable for 240V AC
supply Voltage.
(j) The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully
enclosed with removable covers and made of moulded, non-
inflammable plastic material with boxes and barriers moulded
integrally. All terminals shall be clearly marked with
identification numbers or letters to facilitate connection to
external wiring. Terminal block shall have shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for CT circuits.
30.1 FAULT RECORDER
30.1.1 The fault recorder shall be provided for transmission lines. The fault
recorder as in-built feature of line distance relay is also acceptable
provided the requirements of following clauses are met.
30.1.2. Fault recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be used to
record the graphic form of instantaneous values of voltage and current
in all three phases, open delta voltage & neutral current, open or closed
position of relay contacts and breakers during the system disturbances.
30.1.3. The Fault recorder shall consist of individual acquisition units, one for
each feeder and an Evaluation unit which is common for the entire
Substation. Whenever, more than one acquisition units are connected to
an Evaluation unit, necessary hardware and software shall also be
supplied for on line transfer of data from all acquisition units to
Evaluation unit.
30.1.4. The acquisition unit is connected with evaluation unit being supplied as
described in section sub-station automation through bus conforming to
IEC 61850. In case of extension sub-station which is equipped with
Sub-station Automation System based on IEC 61850, one set of
evaluation software shall be supplied and loaded in existing fault
recorder evaluation unit. Automatic uploading of disturbance files from
acquisition unit to evaluation unit shall be done through existing station
bus only conforming to IEC 61850. Necessary configuration/updation
including hardware if any shall be in the scope of the contractor.
30.1.5. In case of extension of existing substation(s) which are without sub-
station automation system, one set of Evaluation unit shall be supplied
for each substation where ever disturbance recorders are required (as
per section-Project) to be supplied along with necessary evaluation
software as specified above. The Evaluation unit shall consist of a
desktop personal computer (including at least 17” TFT colour monitor,
mouse and keyboard) and A4 size colour printer. The desktop PC shall
have I5 processor or better and having a clock speed 2.0 GHz or better.
The hard disk capacity of PC shall not be less than 1000 GB and RAM
capacity shall not be less than 4 GB.
30.1.6. The evaluation unit hardware, for substations having SAS, shall be as
described in section sub-station automation system.
30.1.7. Fault recorder shall have atleast 8 analogue and 16 digital channels for
each feeder.
30.1.8. Acquisition units shall acquire the Disturbance data for the pre fault and
post fault period and transfer them to Evaluation unit automatically to
store in the hard disk. The acquisition units shall be located in the
protection panels of the respective feeders.
30.1.9. The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current transformers
with 1A rated secondary and capacitive voltage transformers with 63.5V
(phase to neutral voltage) rated secondary. Any device required for
processing of input signals in order to make the signals compatible to
the Fault recorder equipment shall form an integral part of it. However,
such processing of input signals shall in no way distort its waveform.
30.1.10. The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and
protected as may be required for its safe functioning. Also, the Fault
recorder shall have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of
maintenance and immunity from the effects of the hostile environment of
EHV switchyard which are prone to various interference signals typically
from large switching transients.
30.1.11. Void
30.1.12. Evaluation software shall be provided for the analysis and evaluation of
the recorded data made available in the PC under WINDOWS
environment. The Software features shall include repositioning of
analog and digital signals, selection and amplification of time and
amplitude scales of each analogue and digital channel, calculation of
MAX/MIN frequency, phase difference values, recording of MAX/MIN
values etc. of analogue channel, group of signal to be drawn on the
same axis etc, listing and numbering of all analogue and digital
channels and current, voltage, frequency and phase difference values at
the time of fault/tripping. Also, the software should be capable of
carrying out Fourier /Harmonic analysis of the current and voltage wave
forms. The Disturbance records shall also be available in COMTRADE
format (IEEE standard- Common Format for Transient data Exchange
for Power System)
30.1.13. The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the color printer to obtain the
graphic form of disturbances whenever desired by the operator.
30.1.14. Fault recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate from 220V
DC or 110V DC as available at sub-station. Evaluation unit along with
the printer shall normally be connected to 230V, single phase AC
supply. In case of failure of AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall
be switched automatically to the station DC through Inverter of
adequate capacity which shall form a part of Fault recorder system. The
inverter of adequate capacity shall be provided to cater the requirement
specified in section - sub-station automation and DR evaluation unit.
30.1.15. The acquisition unit shall have the following features
(a) Facility shall exist to alarm operator in case of any internal faults
in the acquisition units such as power supply fail, processor /
memory fail etc and same shall be wired to annunciation system
/SAS.
(b) The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz

or better on upper side.
(c) Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/channel or better.
(d) Pre-fault time shall not be less than 500 milliseconds and the
post fault time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If
another system fault occurs during one post-fault run time, the
recorder shall also be able to record the same. However, the
total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less than 5.0
seconds.
(e) The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either
through software or externally by providing necessary auxiliary
transformers.
(f) The acquisition unit for line fault recorder shall be typically used
to record at least the following digital channels :
1 Main CB R phase open
2Main CB Y phase open
3Main CB B phase open
4Tie/TBC CB R phase open
5Tie/TBC CB Y phase open
6Tie/TBC CB B phase open
7Main-1 carrier received
8Main-1 protection operated
9Main/Tie /TBC Auto reclosed operated
10Over Voltage -Stage-1 /2 operated
11Reactor / Stub/TEE-1/2/UF protection operated
12Direct Trip received
13Main-2 carrier received
14Main- 2/ Back Up protection operated
15Bus bar protection operated
16LBB operated of main /tie/TBC circuit breaker
(g) In case the Fault recorder is in-built part of line distance protection,
above digital channels may be interfaced either externally or
internally.
(h) The sequence of digital channels shall be as per above list and
which shall be ensured by the contractor. Digital channels shall
be named suitably for easy identification of signals in the fault
recordings.
(i) Any digital signal can be programmed to act as trigger for the
acquisition unit. Analog channels should have programmable

threshold levels for triggers and selection for over or under levels
should be possible.
30.1.16. The colour laser printer (A4 size) shall be provided which shall be
compatible with the desktop PC and shall use Plain paper. The print out
shall contain the Feeder identity, Date and time (in hour, minute and
second up to 100th of a second), identity of trigger source and Graphic
form of analogue and digital signals of all the channels.
30.1.17. Each Fault recorder shall have its own time generator and the clock of the
time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run without synchronisation. Further, Fault recorder shall have
facility to synchronise its time generator from Time Synchronisation
Equipment having output of following types :
 Voltage signal : (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec.
minimum pulse duration)

 Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)

 IRIG-B

 RS232C

 SNTP
The recorder shall give annunciation in case of absence of synchronising
within a specified time.
30.1.18. Substations where Time Synchronisation Equipment is not available, time
generator of any one of the Fault recorders can be taken as master and
time generators of other Fault recorders and Event loggers in that station
shall be synchronised to follow the master.

30. 2 DISTURBANCE RECORDER (SEPARATE RECORDER)
30.2.1. Disturbance recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be
used to record the graphic form of instantaneous values of
voltage and current in all three phases, open delta voltage &
neutral current, open or closed position of relay contacts and
breakers during the system disturbances and built in feature of
line distance relay is acceptable provided the requirements of
following clauses are met
30.2.2. The disturbance recorder shall consist of individual acquisition

units, one for each feeder and an Evaluation unit which is
common for the entire Substation. Whenever, more than one
acquisition units are connected to an Evaluation unit, necessary
hardware and software shall also be supplied for on line transfer
of data from all acquisition units to Evaluation unit . If there are
any constraints for one Evaluation unit to accept the data from
number of acquisition units under the present scope, adequate
number of Evaluation units shall be supplied. In case of extension
of existing substation(s), one set of Evaluation unit shall be
supplied for each substation where ever disturbance recorders
are specified.
30.2.3. Disturbance recorder shall have 8 analogue and 16 digital channels

for each feeder.
30.2.4. Acquisition units shall acquire the fault data for the pre fault
and post fault period and transfer them to Evaluation unit
automatically to store in the hard disk. The acquisition units
shall be located in the protection panels of the respective
feeders.
30.2.5. The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current
transformers with 1A rated secondary and capacitive voltage
transformers with 63.5V (phase to neutral voltage) rated
secondary. Any device
required for processing of input signals in order to make the
signals compatible to the Disturbance recorder equipment shall
form an integral part of it. However, such processing of input
signals shall in no way distort its waveform.
30.2.6. The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and

protected as may be required for its safe functioning. Also, the
disturbance recorder shall have stable software, reliable hardware,
simplicity of maintenance and immunity from the effects of the
hostile environment of EHV switchyard which are prone to
various interference signals typically from large switching
transients.
30.2.7. The Evaluation unit shall consist of a desktop personal computer
(including VGA colour monitor, mouse and keyboard) and
printer. The desktop PC shall have Pentium - IV processor or
better and having a clock speed 400
MHz or better. The hard disk capacity of PC shall not be less than
2 GB and
RAM capacity shall not be less than 256 MB.
Necessary software for transferring the data automatically

from local evaluation unit to a remote station and receiving
the same at the remote station through owner’s
PLCC/VSAT/LEASED LINE shall be provided.
30.2.8. Evaluation software shall be provided for the analysis and

evaluation of the recordeddata made available in the
PC under DOS/WINDOWS environment. The
Software features shall include repositioning of analog and digital
signals, selection and amplification of time and amplitude
scales of each analog and digital channel, calculation of
MAX/MIN frequency, phase difference values, recording of
MAX/MIN values etc. of analog channel, group of signal to be
drawn on the same axis etc, listing and numbering of all analog
and digital channels and current, voltage, frequency and phase
difference values at the time of fault/tripping. Also, the
software should be capable of carrying out Fourier /Harmonic
analysis of the current and voltage wave forms. The disturbance
records shall also be available in COMTRADE format ( IEEE
standard- Common Format for Transient data Exchange for
Power System )
30.2.9. The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the printer to obtain

the graphic form of disturbances whenever desired by the
operator.
30.2.10. Disturbance recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate

from 220V DC or 110V DC as available at sub-station
Evaluation unit along with the printer shall normally be
connected to 230V, single phase AC supply. In case of failure of
AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall be switched
automatically to the station DC through Inverter of adequate
capacity which shall form a part of Disturbance recorder system .
30.2.11. The acquisition unit shall have the following features
(a) Facility shall exist to alarm operator in case of any

internal faults in the acquisition units such as power
supply fail, processor / memory fail etc and same shall be
wired to annunciation system.
(b) The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and
250 Hz or better on upper side.
(c) Scan rate shall be 1000
Hz/channel or better.
(d) Pre-fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds
and the post fault time shall not be less than 2 seconds
(adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs
during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also

be able to record the same. However, the total memory
of acquisition unit shall not be less than 5.0 seconds
(e) The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be

derived either through software or externally by
providing necessary auxiliary transformers.
(f) The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record

the following digital channels :
1 Main CB R phase open
2 Main CB Y phase open
3 Main CB B phase open
4 Main-1 carrier received
5 Main-1 protection operated
6 Main/Tie /TBC Auto reclosed operated
7 Over Voltage -Stage-1 /2 operated
8 Reactor / Stub/TEE-1/2/UF protection operated
9 Direct Trip received
10 Main-2 carrier received
11 Main- 2/ Back Up protection operated
12 Bus bar protection operated
13 LBB operated of main /tie/TBC circuit breaker
14 Tie/TBC CB R phase open
15 Tie/TBC CB Y phase open
16 Tie/TBC CB B phase open
(g) In case the disturbance recorder is in-built part of

line distance protection, above digital channels may be
interfaced either externally or internally.
(h) Any digital signal can be programmed to act as

trigger for the acquisition unit. Analog channels
should have programmable threshold
levels for triggers and selection for over or under levels
should be possible.
30.2.12. The printer shall be compatible with the desktop PC and shall
use Plain paper. The print out shall contain the Feeder identity,
Date and time (in hour, minute and second up to 100th of a
second), identity of trigger source and Graphic form of analog
and digital signals of all the channels. Two packets of paper (500
sheets in each packet) suitable for printer shall be supplied.
30.2.13. Each disturbance recorder shall have its own time generator and
the clock of the time generator shall be such that the drift is
limited +0.5 sec/day, if allowed to run without synchronisation.
Further, Disturbance recorder shall have facility to synchronise
its time generator from Time Synchronisation Equipment
having output of following types
• Voltage signal : (0-5V continuously settable, with

50m Sec. minimum pulse duration)
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50

m Sec.)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
The recorder shall give annunciation in case of absence of

synchronising pulse within a specified time.
30.2.14. Substations where Time Synchronisation Equipment is not

available, time generator of any one of the disturbance recorders
can be taken as master and time generators of other disturbance
recorders and Event loggers in that station shall be synchronised
to follow the master.
31. EVENT LOGGER

31.1. The event logger shall be used to record Open and Close
states of switchyard equipment, relays and changes of alarms.
The event logger shall include Video Display unit (VDU),
printer and keyboard.
Alternatively, desktop PC with VDU, printer and keyboard can

be supplied with Event Logger.
31.2. The equipment is used to record changes in digital events.

When such changes occur, a display in VDU as well as print out
on printer should result.
31.3. The equipment should be constructed in clearly defined plug-in

modules. A monitor module should be provided for indicating
internal faults such as Processor failure, memory failure and
other internal hardware failures. These failures should be
displayed on the LED's mounted on the monitor module and
facility shall exist to alarm the operator.
31.4. The event logger shall have stable software, reliable hardware,
simplicity of maintenance. The equipment shall be carefully
screened, shielded, earthed and protected against severe
hostile electrical environment of EHV switchyard which are
prone to various interference signals typically from large
switching transients.
31.5. The event Logger equipment shall meet the following

requirements
(a) At least 500 digital event inputs shall be accommodated

in single equipment.
(b) The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
(c) Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds

interval.
(d) The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1

milli second followed by a message describing the point

which has operated.
(e) The operator shall be able to change the date and time
from the key board and allow normal inputs of Accept,
Alarm
demand log , Plant state demand log and date & time.
(f) Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of

being printed are to be stored to await printing.
Over 100 such
events must be stored.
(g) Necessary facility to change the text of the event by the

operator shall exist.
31.6. Event Logger shall its own time generator and the clock
of the time generator shall be such that the drift is limited
to ±0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run with out synchronisation.
Further, Event Logger shall have facility to synchronise
its time generator from Time Synchronisation Equipment
having output of following types
• Voltage signal : (0-5V continuously settable, with 50

milli seconds minimum pulse duration)
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50
milli seconds)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
The Event Logger shall give annunciation in case of

absence of Synchronising pulse within a specified time.
31.7. The printer shall be compatible with event logger and VDU/
desktop personal computer and shall use plain paper. Two
packets of paper (500 sheets in each packet) suitable for printer
shall be supplied.
31.8. The printout of the events shall contain at least the station
identification,
date& time (in hour, minutes, seconds & milliseconds), event
number
and event description (at least 40 characters).
31.9. Event Logger shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC or

110V DC as available at sub-station. VDU along with the
printer shall normally be connected to 230V, single phase AC
supply .In case of failure of AC supply, VDU and printer shall
be switched automatically to the station DC through Inverter of
adequate capacity. The inverter supplied along with Disturbance
Recorder can be shared for the Event Logger also.
31.10. At existing sub-stations where Event logger is provided,

necessary potential free contacts of various relays/equipment for
plant and alarm states shall be provided and co-ordinated with
existing Event logger for proper logging of events. The
drawings containing schedule of events with necessary
termination details shall be submitted during Engineering of the
project.
31.11. Necessary software for transferring the data automatically from

the local Event logger to a remote station and receiving the
same at the remote station through owner’s
PLCC/VSAT/LEASED LINE shall be provided .
32.1 DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR
a) be electronic or microprocessor
based type.
b) be 'On-line' type
c) be suitable for breaker operating time
of 2 cycles
d) have built-in display unit
e) the display shall be directly in percent of line length or

kilometres without requiring any further calculations
f) have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions
defined for operating timings measurement of distance relays .
g) The above accuracy should not be impaired under the

following conditions:
• presence of remote end infeed

• predominant D.C. component in fault current
• high fault arc resistance
• severe CVT transients
h) shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit if fault

locator is to be used on double circuit transmission line.
i) built in feature of line distance relay is acceptable

provided the requirements of above clauses are met
32.2 DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR-Travelling Wave type

(TWFL): Distance to Fault locator, based on Traveling wave
detection method, shall
a. be microprocessor based, On-line type

b. have programmable triggering thresholds
c. be suitable for breaker operating time of minimum 2 cycles
d. consist of acquisition unit and one central unit
e. provide fault location reading directly in kilo-meter without

requiring any further calculations
f. have fault location accuracy of + 150 Meter or better with a least

count of atleast 50 meter for fault locator readings
g. The above accuracy should not be affected by followings:
• Line length
• Presence of remote end in-feed
• Series compensation
• Non-uniform line (having Cable & Over head line both)
• Mutual coupling
• Transposition of line
• Fault resistance
• Severe CVT transients
h. Acquisition units shall:

i. be either standalone for each line
or
with the capability to cater to a number of lines emanating
from a substation. Incase more than one lines are to be
accommodated in one acquisition unit then suitable coupler
unit/measuring unit shall be provided in individual line bay
C&R panels and only secondary wiring shall be brought to
common acquisition unit. While offering this option,
bidders are advised to take care of maximum distance
between Acquisition unit & line bays C&R panels. In the
BPS, total no. of line bays envisaged for Travelling Wave
type Fault Locators is mentioned for further assessment by
the bidder for no. of Acquisition units required for total
functional requirements based on equipment design.
ii. include all required accessories (like couplers, cables,

connectors etc) to connect to the secondary wiring of the
Instrument transformers (in C&R panels) for detection of
traveling wave
iii. have built-in backlit display unit and keypad
iv. have the facility to locally download the data in case of

communication failure
v. have minimum 02 nos. binary input per line for line

protection trip input. Binary input shall be rated for 220V
DC and it shall be possible to set the de-bounce time of the
binary input.

vi. have minimum 1GB of storage space
vii. have facility to transmit the fault record to the Central unit
by dialing mode, IEC60870-5-103 or IEC60870-5-104 or
TCP/IP net protocol etc. Scope shall include dialup modem,
if required with each Acquisition unit.
i. include required GPS time synchronizing units for each

substation (internal or external to Acquisition unit)
j. Central data processing unit shall:

i. Consist of a desktop personal computer (including at least
17” TFT color monitor, mouse and keyboard), colour laser
jet multi-function printer (A4 size), LAN switches (as
required), all special cables and other required accessories.
The desktop PC shall have Intel Dual core processor or
better. The hard disk capacity of PC shall not be less than
1000 GB and RAM capacity shall not be less than 4 GB.
ii. have all necessary hardware & software for data download
from Acquisition units, storage, processing, device
(acquisition unit) creation and configuration, and
comprehensive viewer for manual analysis of waveform. It
will also have diagnostic feature to check the healthiness of
connected devices & communication link.
iii. calculate & report the fault location based on the traveling
wave data acquired from acquisition units of both end of the
line. However, Central data processing unit shall have the
facility to calculate the fault location even with only one end
acquisition unit data of the line.
iv. be able to communicate to the Master station (Control

centre) through IEC60870-5-104 net protocol. Alternate
Standard protocol shall also be acceptable subject to
fulfilling the functional requirements.
v. be located at local or any remote end based on the
availability of communication link. End to end
communication link shall be provided by BSPTCL.
However Scope shall also include a dialup modem with
central data processing unit.
k. In cases, Central data processing unit of Travelling wave fault

locator is existing at a location the Acquisition units under present
scope can be integrated with the existing Central data processing
unit (Make & Model of existing unit should be mentioned in
section-Project) by required augmentation (configuration and up
gradation of data base including supply of any additional
hardware / software etc.). Alternatively, bidder may offer separate
Central data processing unit & associated hardware & software as
may be required under the head of augmentation of Central data

processing unit.
l. Include required no. of panels to house the offered equipments at

various substations & central location. Acquisition units can also
be mounted in respective line protection panels.
m. TWFL as built-in feature of Standalone fault recorder or Line

Protection IED shall also be acceptable subject to meeting the
functional requirement specified.
n. Type test (EMI/EMC) and additional functional test for accuracy

shall be submitted for TWFL for review and approval.
33. TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUPMENT
33.1. The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the

co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo
Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronise
equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a substation.
33.2. Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all

special cables and processing equipment etc.
33.3. It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers,

Disturbance recorders and SCADA at a substation through
individual port or through Ethernet realised through optic fibre
bus.
33.4. Equipment shall operate up to the ambient temperature of

50 degree centigrade and 80% humidity.
33.5. The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second

accuracy.
Equipment shall give real time corresponding to IST
(taking into consideration all factors like
voltage, & temperature variations, propagation
& processing delays etc).
33.6. Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for

storage &
operation.
33.7. The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no

interruption of synchronisation signal.
33.8. The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site
for either one hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per
requirement.
33.9. The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combin
detailed engineering, from the following :
• Voltage signal : Normally 0-5V with 50 milli Seconds

minimum pulse duration. In case any other voltage signal
required, it shall be decided during detailed engineering.
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli

Seconds.)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
 SNTP Port
 IEEE 1588 PTP (Applicable only for Process bus automation
station)
33.10. The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of

one second periodicity.
33.11. Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from

220V DC
or 110V DC as available at Substation.
33.12. Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute,
second (24 hour mode) & have a separate time display unit to be
mounted on the top of control panels /SAS panel having display
size of approx. 100 mm height.
34. Bay Control Unit (BCU): BCU supplied shall meet the
requirements mentioned under technical specification Section-
Substation automation.
34. INTERFACE PANEL ( If specified in BoQ)

a) Interface panel is envisaged to minimize cabling/termination time
during erection stage at site, minimize hindrance in protection
panel and also ease of trouble shooting. This panel shall be
installed in Switchyard panel room and one no. interface panel
shall be provided for each feeder. Tie bay can be accommodated in
the Interface unit of any one of the associated feeder.
b) All control wiring from switchyard except CTs & CVTs shall be
terminated in the interface panel. CTs and CVTs wiring shall be
directly connected to the relay panel as per scheme requirements.
c) All wiring from Interface panel to relay panels or other panels

(Inter-panel wiring) in the switchyard panel room shall be factory
fitted / terminated through Plug-in type termination arrangement.
Plug-in type termination shall be heavy duty industrial grade with
double locking latch or screw locking arrangement with IP65
protection.
d) Minimum one number spare Plug-in type connector duly

terminated on each side per inter-panel wiring circuit shall be
provided for future use.
35. MONITORING, CONTROL & PROTECTION FOR AUXILIARY

TRANSFORMER
Suitable monitoring, control (operation of associated circuit breaker &
isolator) and protection for LT auxiliary transformer, connected to
tertiary winding of auto transformer for the purpose of auxiliary
supply shall be provided by the contractor. Over current and open
delta protection is required to be provided for the auxiliary
transformer. These protection and control shall be also be acceptable
as built in feature either in the bay controller to be provided for the
auxiliary system or in the control & protection IEDs to be provided
for autotransformer.
36. RELAY TEST KIT
36.1. One relay test kit shall comprise of the following equipment
as detailed here under
3 sets Relay tools kits.

2 nos. Test plugs for each type of TTB
2 nos. Special type test plugs for using with modular
type cases (if applicable)
37. CONFIGURATION OF RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS

The following is the general criteria for the selection of the
equipments to be provided in each type of panel. However, contractor
can optimise the requirement of panels by suitably clubbing the
feeder protection and CB relay panels. It may be noted that Main-I
and Main-II protections for line can not be provided in single panel.
Similarly, Group-I & Group-II protections for transformer can not be
provided in single panel. All Numerical Relays shall be complying to
IEC 61850 (Edition-2) Protocol with optical fiber ports sufficient
DI/DO ports and Relays shall have the feature of PRP and Load
blender (as applicable).
I) LINE PROTECTION PANEL: The Line Protection panel for

transmission lines shall consist of following protection
features/schemes
Sl. No. Description 400kV 220kV 132kV

1. Main-1 protection scheme 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
(Numerical type)
2. Main-2 protection scheme 1 Set 1 Set NIL*
(Numerical type)
3. Over Voltage Protection Scheme 1 Set NIL NIL
4. Fault Recorder 1 Set 1 Set NIL
5. Standalone Disturbance Recorder NIL NIL NIL
6. Distance to fault Locator 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
7. Cut out for mounting of 1 Set# NIL NIL
Distance to fault Locator
(TWFL)
8. 3 Phase Trip Relays (Hand Reset) 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
9. Flag relays, carrier receive relays, As As As

aux. Relays, timers etc as per required required required
scheme requirements
10. Under Voltage protection relay 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
For isolator/ earth switch
Interlock
11. Cut-out and wiring with TTB for 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
energy meter
12. Directional Back up Over current NIL NIL 1 Set
and E/F protection scheme with
df/dt feature
13. DC Supply supervision Relay 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
14. Trip Circuit supervision Relay 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
Note-1 *Back up –directional O/c & E/F protection is specified for
132kV system in place of Main-II
Note-2 In a substation where 400kV and 220 KV lines are under the scope of
the contract, bidder is required to give identical Main-1 and Main-2
distance protection schemes for all voltage levels.
Note-3 Cut out & mounting arrangement provided for BSPTCL supplied
energy meter shall be suitable for mounting of energy meter unit of
4” thickness
Note-4 # Cut out for mounting of Distance to Fault locator (Travelling wave
type) shall be provided, if required.
II) TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL: The protection

panel for Auto transformer/Transformer shall consists of the
following features/schemes:
Sl. No. Description HV Side MV/LV

Side
Transformer Differential Protection
1.
scheme 1 Nos. Nil
Restricted Earth fault protection scheme
separate relay to be provided even if it is
part of transformer differential protection
2. scheme 1 no. 1 no.
Directional back up O/C and E/F relay
3. with 1 set 1 set
non-directional high set feature with df/dt
feature
4. Over Fluxing Protection scheme 1 no. 1 no.$
$ Applicable only for 400/220kV Transformer
5. Overload protection scheme 1 nos. NIL
6. Three phase trip relays 2 nos. 2 nos.
CVT selection relays as per
7. scheme Lot Lot
requirement
8. Cut-out and wiring with TTB for 1 set 1 set
energy meter
Transformer Neutral Current relay for
9. 1- 1 Set
Phase transformer bank
Tertiary side O/C and Open delta
10. Voltage 1 Set
protection
11. Flag Relays/ Aux. Relays for wiring As required
Transformer auxiliary protection
contacts
such as Buchholz, Oil Temperature,
Winding
Temperature, PRV, SPRD, OLTC
Buchholz
etc. as per scheme requirements
12. DC Supply supervision Relay 2 nos. 2 nos.
13. Trip Circuit supervision Relay 2 nos. 1 no.
Tertiary side protections, over fluxing protection and overload
protection can be clubbed in other transformer protection relay,
however, over fluxing protection of HV and MV/LV side and REF
cannot be clubbed together. Further, tertiary side protection, if
Note- 1) provided in auxiliary BCU, shall be excluded from this panel.
This protection shall be applicable only for the transformer
whose tertiary side is connected to LT transformer for station
auxiliary supply.
Cut out & mounting arrangement for energy meter shall be suitable
Note- 2) for mounting of energy meter
III) REACTOR PROTECTION PANEL: The protection panel for

Reactor shall consist of the following features/schemes:
Sl. No. Description Qty.
1. Reactor Differential Protection scheme 1 no.
2. Restricted Earth fault Protection scheme 1 no.
3. Reactor back up impedance protection scheme 1 set
4. Three phase trip relays 2 nos.
5. CVT selection relay as per scheme requirement Lot
Flag Relays/Aux. Relays for wiring Reactor
auxiliary protection contacts such as Buchholz, Oil
6. Temperature, Winding Temperature, PRV, SPRD As
etc. as per scheme requirements required
IV) BREAKER RELAY PANEL: The breaker relay panel shall consist of
the following:
Sl. No. Description With A/R Without A/R
Breaker failure Protection Scheme
1. * 1 No. 1 No.
2. DC supply Supervision relay 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
3. Trip Circuit supervision relays# 6 Nos. 6 Nos.

Auto-reclose scheme (if
4. standalone) 1 Nos. NIL

Flag relays, aux relays, timers,
5. trip As required As required
relays as per scheme requirements
Note- 1) # Trip supervision relays shall be 2 or 6 numbers as per no. of trip
coils for each 132KV Circuit
breaker
Equipment/relays to be provided under CB Relay Panel may
be accommodated in the Protection Panels to be provided
Note- 2) for
Transmission Line/Transformer/Reactor as
applicable.
* In case of bay extension in existing half diameter, breaker failure
Note- 3) relay
for main CB / Tie CB shall be supplied only if BFR built-in
Bus Bar
protection bay unit is not available or Tie CB standalone BFR relay
is
not available in the existing protection scheme.
V) CONTROL PANEL: Various types of control panels shall consist of the

following:
a. Ammeter 3 set for each Line, BC, TBC Bus

section, Bus Reactor and
Transformer
b. Ammeter with Selector 1 set for each line reactor
switch
c. Wattmeter with transducer 1 set for each line, transformer
d. Varmeter with transducer 1 set for each line, transformer, Bus
reactor
e. Varmeter with transducer 1 set for each Line Reactor
f. CB Control switch 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
g. Isolator Control switch 1 no. for each isolator
h. Semaphore 1 no. for each earth switch
i. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
j. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
k. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
l. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
m. White indicating lamp 2 nos. for each feeder
(DC healthy lamp)
18 nos. for each feeder of 132
n. Annunciation windows with 18/24 KV
24 nos. for each feeder of 220
associated annunciation nos. KV

relays
3
o. Push button for alarm nos. for each control panel
Accept/reset/lamp test
p. Synchronising Socket 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker,
if required
q. Synchronising selector 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker
Switch switch,
if required
r. Protection Transfer Switch 1 no. for each breaker in case of
DMT /DM with bypass isolator
/ SMT schemes (Except TBC
and BC breaker)
s. Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panels
t. Voltmeter with selector 1 no. for each line, transformer, bus
Switch reactor
u. Cut out, mounting and wiring Lot for transformers/reactors
for RWTI and selector switch
v. 0.2s class ABT energy meters 1 no. 1 No. for line panels & Bus
(with Modem) coupler Panel, 2 No. for
Meter shall be suitable for Transformer panels i.e. 1 No.
functioning as ABT or non ABT each HV & LV as per
Meters with provisions for specification ,
modification in software at site. 1 No. for SST
Notes:
1 For transformer feeders, all equipments of control panel shall be
provided separately for HV and MV sides.
2. In case of incomplete diameter (D and I type layouts), control
panel shall be equipped fully as if the diameter is complete,
unless otherwise specified. Annunciation relays shall also be
provided for the same and if required, necessary panel shall be
supplied to accommodate the same.
3. The above list of equipments mentioned for control panel is
generally applicable unless it is defined elsewhere and in case of
bay extension in existing substations, necessary equipments for
matching the existing control panel shall be supplied.
4. Each line /HV side of transformer/MV/LV side of transformer
/Bus reactor /TBC /Tie / BC/ Bus Section shall be considered as
one feeder for above purpose.

VI) CONTROL PANEL WITH BAY CONTROL UNIT (BCU): Various
types of control panels shall consist of the following:
a. Bay Control Unit (BCU) 1 set for each Circuit Breaker

b. Ethernet switch complying 1 no. for each control panel
IEC61850
c. Selector switch for 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker
Local/Remote bay control
d. 1 set for each Line, BC, TBC, Bus
Ammeter with transducer & section, Bus reactor,
Selector switch Transformer and line reactor
e. CB Control switch 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
f. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
g. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
h. White indicating lamp 2 nos for each feeder
(DC healthy lamp)
Common Annunciation
i. lamp 1 no. for each control panel
j. Common hooter 1 no. for each control panel
k. Synchronising Socket 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker if
required
Synchronising selector
l. Switch 1 no. for each Circuit Breaker
switch if required
m. Protection Transfer Switch 1 no. for each breaker in case of
DMT /DMwith bypass
isolator/ SMT schemes
(Except TBC and BC
breaker)
n. Mimic to represent SLD Lot in all control panels
o. Voltmeter with selector Switch 1 no. for each line, transformer,
bus reactor
Notes:
1 For transformer feeders, all equipments of control panel
shall be provided separately for HV and MV sides.
2. In case of incomplete diameter (D and I type layouts),
control panel shall be equipped fully as if the diameter is
complete, unless otherwise specified. Annunciation relays
shall also be provided for the same and if required, necessary
panel shall be supplied to accommodate the same.
3. The above list of equipments mentioned for control panel
is generally applicable unless it is defined elsewhere and
in case of bay extension in existing substations, necessary

equipments for matching the existing control panel, if
applicable, shall be supplied.
4. Each line /HV side of transformer/MV/LV side of

transformer /Bus reactor /TBC /BC/ Bus Section shall be
considered as one feeder for above purpose.
5. Control panel with BCU can be combined in the CB relay

panels being supplied under present scope.
6. The Bay Control unit and the numerical relays supplied

under present scope shall be connected to the Ethernet
switch. The ethernet switch shall comply with IEC 61850-3
requirements. It shall have sufficient number of ports to
accommodate all the IEDs of the new bays and at least 6
spare ports for integrating the numerical Relays/BCUs with
NTAMC system i.e. redundant Gateways/RTU and
redundant SDC and two spare ports. The IP addressing
scheme for the devices shall be provided by BSPTCL.
7. Selector switch for Local/Remote bay control shall be

provided to transfer the control between the BCU and the
Control panel. The control shall be available to either the
BCU or from the Control panel however data monitoring
shall be available at both the devices
8. The Bay control unit shall be flush mounted in the panel
with their mimic displays accessible from the front of the
panel. The Bay control unit mimic shall dynamically
represent the current value of the measurements, state of the
devices and control of devices. The Bay control unit shall
provide telemetry and tele-control for remote operation from
control centres (NTAMC). The Bay control unit shall
acquire all the analog measurements, Status of Circuit
breakers, Isolators and Earth switches, status of alarms, and
provide Control of devices (Circuit breaker/Isolators/Reset
of Relays/position selection for Auto reclose etc). The Bay
control unit shall also provide synchronization check facility
for the circuit breakers suitable for the bus bar scheme.
9. For Protection transfer switch function in Transfer bus

schemes- The High Speed Bi-stable relays for protection
transfer from ‘Normal’ to ‘Transfer’ and vice versa, whose
position can be controlled locally as well as from remote via
BCU shall be provided. The position once selected should
not change in case of Power cycling.
10. In case the control panel is being provided in switchyard

panel room, its common alarm signal shall also initiate an
alarm facia in any of the existing control panel in control
room building.
VI) COMMON EQUIPMENTS

The following common equipments shall be provided
for each new substation. These equipments shall be
mounted and wired in the C& R panel offered.
1 Common Annunciation Scheme 1 set
2 Bus voltage recorder 1 no. for each main bus
3 Bus frequency recorder 1 no. for each main bus
4 Bus voltmeter(Digital) 1 no. for each main bus
5 Bus frequency meter (Digital) 1 no. for each main bus
6 Bus healthy indication lamps 3 nos for each bus
38. ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS

All special testing equipment required for the installation and
maintenance of the apparatus, instruments devices shall be furnished
in relevant schedule.
39. TROPICALISATION
Control room/ Panel room will be normally air-cooled/air-
conditioned. All equipments shall however be suitable for
installation in a tropical monsoon area having hot, humid climate
and dry and dusty seasons with ambient conditions specified in the
specification. All control wiring, equipment and accessories shall be
protected against fungus growth, condensation, vermin and other
harmful effects due to tropical environment.
40. TYPE TESTS

40.1. The reports for following type tests report (as per relevant IEC/ IS as
amended upto date) shall be submitted during detailed engineering for
the Protective relays, Fault Recorder, Fault locator and Disturbance
recorder:
a) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5
b) DC Voltage dips and interruptions/Variation as per IEC 61000-
4-29 or IEC 60255-11
c) High frequency (1MHz burst) disturbance test as per IEC
60255-22-1 (Not applicable for electromechanical relays)
d) Electrostatic discharges as per IEC 61000-4-2, level; 4 or
60255-22-2 with severity Class III (not
applicable IEC for Electromechanical relays)
e) Fast transient test as per IEC 61000, Level IV or IEC 60255-22-
4 with severity level IV (Not applicable for electromechanical
relays)
f) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC
60255
• Steady state Characteristics and operating time
• Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance
protection relays and current differential protection relays
• Conformance test as per IEC 61850-10.
For Fault recorder, Disturbance recorder; only performance
tests are intended under this item.
g) Tests for thermal requirements as per IEC 60255-6

h) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
i) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 or IEC61810-2
(not applicable for Distance to fault locator and Disturbance
recorder)
j) Tests for mechanical requirements ( Vibration, shock & bumps
and seismic) as per IEC 60255-21-1, 2 & 3 with severity class-I
k) Test for Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance as per IEC
60255-22-3 with severity class III (not applicable for
electromechanical relays)
In case there is a change either in version or in model (Except

firmware) of the relay, the contractor shall submit the type test
reports for the offered revision/model.
40.2. Steady state & Dynamic characteristics test reports on the

distance protection relays, as type test, shall be based on test
programme specified in Appendix A on simulator/network
analyser/PTL. Alternatively, the files generated using
Electromagnetic transient Programme (EMTP) can also be used
for carrying out the above tests. Single source dynamic tests
on transformer differential relay shall be/ should have been
conducted based on general guidelines specified in CIGRE
committee 34 report on Evaluation of characteristics and
performance of Power system protection relays and protective
systems.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 0.2s ACCURACY CLASS AC
STATIC TRIVECTOR ENERGY METERS, SUITABLE FOR INTER
UTILITY METERING, BULK CONSUMER METERING, RING FENCING
METERING AND AVAILABILITY BASED TARIFF (ABT) METRING
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, inspection and
testing before supply and delivery at site/ FOR destination of class 0.2S accuracy static
HT tri-vector CT/ VT operated meters, along with other associated equipments as per
details given in this specification. The meters shall be used for commercial/ tariff metering
for inter utility power flows/ bulk consumers application.
1.2 The meter shall have wide secondary current range support i.e. same meter shall be put
up for 1A or 5A rating as per field availability of CT’s. The meter shall support 200%
Ibasic. Meter required to be commissioned at each substation shall be of 3 phase 4 wire
or 3 phase 3 wire.
1.3 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction
of material. The material shall, however, conform in all respects to the best industry
standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing for
continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the purchaser The offered
equipment shall be complete in all respects including all components/ accessories for
effective and trouble free operation according to the specifications. Such components
shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification irrespective of whether those
are specifically brought out or not.
1.4 The metering system shall be wall mounted. Current terminal connection must be shorted
when the CT terminal connections at metering terminal been open. The meter can be
installed in the panel by using panel mounting kit.
2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
2.1 STANDARDS
The equipment shall conform (for testing, performance and accuracy) in all respects the
relevant Indian/ International metering standards with latest amendments thereof unless
otherwise specified.
S. No. Standard No. Title

1. IS 14697 AC static transformer operated Watt-hour
and VAR-hour meters for class 0.2s and 0.5s
2. CBIP technical report no. 304 Specification for AC static electricity energy
(magnet immunity) meters Immunity against magnetic
interference up to 0.27T
3. IS 15959 AC static transformer operated Watthour and
DLMS companion VAR hour meters for class 0.2s category B
Standard (ICS) (ABT compliant) metering
3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be required to operate

satisfactorily and continuously under the following tropical conditions of hot, humid, dusty,
rust and fungus prone environment.
i) Max. ambient air température : 55 ºC

ii) Min. ambient air temperature : (-) 5 ºC
iii) Average daily ambient air temp : 32 ºC
iv) Max. Relative Humidity : 95 %
v) Max. Altitude above mean sea level : 2000 m

vi) limit range of operating : (-)25ºC to +70 ºC
vii) Storage temperature range : (-)40ºC to +80ºC
viii) Operating temperature range : (-)10 to +60
ix) Display operating temperature range : (-)20 to +70
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
The energy meter shall be indoor type connected with the secondary side of outdoor
current and voltage transformers and mounted in suitable panel/ cubicles.
S. No. Item Specification

1. Type of Installation Indoor installation
2. VT secondary 3x110V/√3 Phase to Neutral (3P4W)
3x110V Phase to Neutral (3P3W)
Variation -30% to +30%
3. CT secondary 3 x /-1 Amps or 3 x /-5 Amps (site
configurable)
4. Auxiliary AC/ DC Supply 60-240 V AC/DC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz
or
24-48 V DC ± 20%
Or
VT powered
Note: Any of the two auxiliary supply
shall be available at a time
5. System frequency 50HZ +/- 5%
The meter should be suitable for working with above supply variations without damage
and without degradation of its metrological characteristics.
5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1 DISPLAY
The meter shall have Graphical LCD with backlight for proper depicting of values in
user friendly manner like values with unit, OBIS codes, negative signs, favourite page etc.
5.2 POWER FACTOR RANGE
The metering system shall be suitable for full power factor range from zero (lagging)
through unity to zero (leading). The meter shall work as an active energy import and
export meter along with reactive (lag and lead) meter. The energy measurement should
be true four quadrant type.
5.3 ACCURACY
Class of accuracy of the metering system shall be 0.2S for energy measurement. The
accuracy should not drift with time.
5.4 POWER CONSUMPTION OF METER
The meter must be capable to operate with the power drawn from the Auxiliary Power
supply (AC/DC) and station VT power supply.
i) Power Consumption in case of Aux supply (with communication module:

Voltage circuit < 0.1VA/phase
Current circuit < 0.1VA/phase @1A Ibasic, <0.5VA/phase @ 5A Ibasic
Auxiliary APS < 10VA
ii) Power consumption in case of Self power supply (with communication module):
Voltage circuit<6VA/phase
Current circuit<0.1VA/phase @ 1A Ibasic, <0.5VA/phase @ 5A Ibasic

5.5 STARTING CURRENT
The meter should start registering the energy at 0.1% Ib and unity power factor.
5.6 MAXIMUM CURRENT
The rated maximum current shall be 200% of basic current (Ib).
5.7 The meter shall work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the mains supply.
5.8 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Meters shall be designed and constructed in such a way so as to avoid causing any
danger during use and under normal conditions. However the following should be
ensured:
i) Personnel safety against electric shock

ii) Personnel safety against effects of excessive temperature
iii) Protection against spread of fire
iv) Protection against penetration of solid objects, dust and water in normal working
condition
All the materials and electronic power components used in the manufacture of the meters
shall be of highest quality and reputed make to ensure higher reliability, longer life and
sustained accuracy.
The meters shall be designed with application specific integrated circuits. The electronic
components shall be mounted on the printed circuit board using latest Surface Mount
Technology (SMT).
All insulating materials used in the construction of meters shall be non-hygroscopic, non-
aging and of tested quality. All parts that are likely to develop corrosion shall be effectively
protected against corrosion by providing suitable protective coating.
The metering system when mounted in panel shall conform to the degree of protection
IP54 in the normal working condition for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.
5.9 MANUFACTURING ACTIVITIES
Meter should be manufactured using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) components and
by deploying automatic SMT pick and place machine and reflow solder process; the
Bidder should own such facilities.
Quality should be ensured at the following stages:
i) At PCB manufacturing stage, each board shall be subjected to computerized bare

board testing.
ii) At insertion stage all components should undergo computerized testing for
conforming to design parameters and orientation.
iii) Complete assembled and soldered PCB should undergo functional testing using
Automatic Test Equipment.
iv) Prior to final testing and calibration, all meters shall be subjected to accelerated
ageing test to eliminate infant morality.
v) The calibration of meters shall be done in-house.
5.10 SEALING
Proper sealing arrangement shall be provided as follows:
i) 2 nos. sealing arrangement between cover and base.

ii) 2 nos. sealing arrangement between top cover and front cover.
iii) 2 nos. sealing arrangement between base and ETBC.
iv) 1 no. sealing arrangement on optical port.

The sealing arrangement should be suitable for application of Polycarbonate seals.
5.11 MARKING OF METER
The marking on every meter shall be in accordance with IEC. The basic marking on the
meter name plate shall be as follows:
i) Manufacturer’s name and trade mark

ii) Serial Number
iii) Year of manufacture
iv) Type Designation
v) Number of phases and wires
vi) VT commissioning information
vii) CT commissioning information
viii) Reference frequency
ix) Accuracy Class
Additionally, following information shall also be available on name plate.

i) Property Of “Purchaser name” optional
ii) P.O. No. “Number” optional
5.12 The connection diagram of the connecting 3P4W/3P3W meter shall be depicted on meter.
The meter terminals shall be properly marked to identify voltage, Current and Auxiliary
supply.
5.13 The meters shall be suitable for being connected directly through its terminals to VT’s
having a rated secondary line- to- line voltage of 110 V, and to CTs having a rated
secondary current of 1A or 5A. Any further transformers/ transducers required for their
functioning shall be in-built in the meters. Necessary isolation and/or suppression shall
also be built-in, for protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that occur in the
VT and CT circuits of extra high voltage switchyards.
5.14 The meters shall compute the active energy and load import; active energy and load
export from the substation bus bars during each successive 15/30 minute integration
period block and store it in its non volatile memory.
5.15 The meter shall compute the average frequency during each successive 15 minute block
and store in its memory.
5.16 The meter shall have Inputs/ Outputs pulsing pins availability. This shall help in
transferring the same Energy parameters being recorded inside the meters on pulse
output as well for SCADA application at remote distance. Also, the pulse input shall be
used for time synchronization pulse input. The meter shall have 7 fixed pulse outputs and
4 configurable as pulse input/output.
5.17 The meter shall compute the reactive power, with an accuracy as per relevant IS/ IEC
standards, and integrate the reactive energy algebraically into two separate reactive
energy registers, one for the period for which the average RMS voltage is greater than
103% (Reactive High), and the other for the period for which the average RMS voltage is
below 97.0% (Reactive Low). When lagging reactive power is being sent out from
substations bus bars, reactive registers shall move forward. When reactive power flow is
in the reverse direction, reactive registers shall move backwards.
5.18 Reactive energy shall be available in below different registers as-

i) Reactive import while active import
ii) Reactive import while active export
iii) Reactive export while active import
iv) Reactive export while active export
v) Reactive import
vi) Reactive export
vii) Reactive inductive
viii) Reactive capacitive
ix) Net reactive energy (Q1+Q2-Q3-Q4)

x) Reactive high import
xi) Reactive low import
xii) Reactive high export
xiii) Reactive low export
xiv) Net Reactive high
xv) Net Reactive low
5.19 Active and Apparent energies shall also be made available by meter in separate energy
registers as –
i) Active energy Import total
ii) Active energy Export total
iii) Active energy Import fundamental
iv) Active energy Export fundamental
v) Net active energy (import – export)
vi) Active energy import total (Phase wise)
vii) Active energy export total (Phase wise)
viii) Apparent energy (while active import)
ix) Apparent energy (while active export)
5.20 Meter shall have provision to compute apparent energy based on lag only or lag+lead.
The same shall be configured at factory end.
5.21 The meters shall be compatible with ABT tariff as well as TOD tariff.
5.22 For reactive power and reactive energy measurement, limits of errors all the four
quadrants shall be in accordance to IEC 62053-23/ IS14697.
5.23 Each meter shall have two calibration LEDs (visual) for checking the accuracy of active
energy and apparent/reactive energy measurement. Further, it shall be possible to switch
over the same test output device to apparent or reactive energy via suitable means
provided on the metering system. This LED shall be visible from the front side.
5.24 The metering system shall normally operate with the power drawn through the auxiliary
AC or DC supply. The metering system design should enable the auxiliary supply to be
switched automatically between the AC and DC voltage, depending upon their availability.
5.25 Meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of Accuracy: <2
min/year or better. The calendar and clock shall be correctly set at the manufacturer’s
works.
An automatic backup for continued operation of the meter’s calendar-clock shall be

provided through a long life battery, which shall be capable of supplying the required
power for at least two years under meter un-powered conditions. The meters shall be
supplied duly fitted with the field replaceable batteries
5.26 TOD (Time of day registers): The meter shall have TOD registers for active energy
import and export, apparent energy import and export and apparent MD import and
export. Maximum eight time of day registers including universal (0-24 hrs) register can be
defined. It shall be possible to program number of TOD registers and TOD timings through
suitable high level software/ MRI as an authenticated transaction.
5.27 Maximum Demand (MD) Registration: The meter shall continuously monitor and
calculate the average demand of configured parameter during the integration period set
and the maximum, out of these shall be stored along with date and time when it occurred
in the meter memory. The maximum demand shall be computed on fixed block principle.
The maximum registered value shall be made available in meter readings. The integration
period shall be set as 15 minutes that shall be capable to change to other integration
period (30/ 60 minutes), if required, through suitable high level software/ MRI as an
authenticated transaction.
5.28 Maximum Demand Reset: Following provisions shall be available for MD reset in meter –
i) Auto billing at predefined date and time

ii) Manual via common MD reset button (optional)
iii) Authenticated transaction through suitable high level software/ MRI (optional)
5.29 The display shall be of Graphical LCD type with colored back-lit and soft push button.
The display shall indicate direct values (i.e. without having to apply any multiplying factor)
of measured/ computed parameters as per the meter commissioning. It should be possible
to easily identify the single or multiple displayed parameters through legends on the
metering system display like OBIS codes etc.
The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a minimum of 1500
hours, the energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage and unity
power factor. The register shall not roll over in between this duration.
5.30 Each meter shall display on demand & in Auto scroll mode the following quantities/
parameters:
i) LCD segment check

ii) Date
iii) Time
iv) Cumulative active energy import
v) Cumulative active energy export
vi) Cumulative net active (Import – Export) energy
vii) Cumulative reactive energy lag while active import
viii) Cumulative reactive energy lead while active import
ix) Cumulative reactive energy lag while active export
x) Cumulative reactive energy lead while active export
xi) Cumulative apparent energy (while active import)
xii) Cumulative apparent energy (while active export)
xiii) Last 15 minutes block average of active import energy
xiv) Last 15 minutes block average of active export energy
xv) Last 15 minutes block average of the net active (Import – Export) energy
xvi) Last 15 minutes block average frequency
xvii) MD reset count
xviii) Maximum demand apparent (while active import) for current month (0-24 hrs)
xix) Maximum demand apparent (while active export) for current month (0-24 hrs)
xx) Cumulative active import energy reading of predefined date and time for monthly
billing purpose
xxi) Cumulative active export energy reading of predefined date and time for monthly
billing purpose
xxii) Cumulative net active (Import – Export) energy reading of predefined date and
time for billing purpose
xxiii) Cumulative apparent energy (while active import) reading of predefined date and
time for monthly billing purpose
xxiv) Cumulative apparent energy (while active export) reading of predefined date and
time for monthly billing purpose
xxv) Maximum demand for apparent (while active import) of predefined date and time
for monthly billing purpose
xxvi) Maximum demand for apparent (while active export) of predefined date and time
for monthly billing purpose
xxvii) Present anomaly status
xxviii) Date of first occurrence of anomaly
xxix) Time of first occurrence of anomaly
xxx) Time of last restoration of anomaly
xxxi) Date of last restoration of anomaly
xxxii) Total anomaly count
There should a facility to configure the display parameters in favorite pages.
5.31 Load Survey: Each meter shall have a non-volatile memory in which the configured
energy parameters and instantaneous parameters shall be automatically stored for each
successive fifteen (15) minute block. Meter shall have capability to store 9600 parameter-
days load survey data, not exceeding 1000 days/parameter.

i.e. If meter is configured for 5 load survey parameters with 15 minute block, then 960
days data shall be available for configured parameters.
It shall be possible to select either energy or demand view at Base Computer Software
(BCS) end. The load survey data should be available in the form of bar charts as well as in
spreadsheets. The BCS shall have the facility to give complete time synchronized load
survey data both in numeric and graphic form.
5.32 Billing parameters: The predefined date and time for registering the billing parameters of
shall be 00.00 hours of the first day of each calendar (billing) month. Each meter shall
store the configured billing parameters corresponding to defined bill dates. Up to max 53
billing dates can be configured
5.33 Daily midnight parameters: The meter shall store the configured energy parameters at
predefined time in a day. Maximum 100 days data can be stored
5.34 Data Communication Capability:
The meter shall have following communication ports for local/remote reading:
i) IEC 1107 optical port
ii) RS485 port (should be configurable on DLMS/MODBUS)
iii) RS232 port (for remote communication)
iv) TCP/IP Ethernet (should be configurable on DLMS TCP/MODBUS TCP)
Meter shall have GPRS modem inside the terminal cover which shall be connected with
RS232 port.
RS232, RS485 ports shall be hot swappable modular.
5.35 Each meter shall have a unique identification code i.e. serial number, which shall be
marked on name plate as well as in its memory.
5.36 Each meter shall have a non volatile memory in which the parameters as mentioned in
this specification shall be stored. The non volatile memory shall retain the data for a period
not less than 10 years under un-powered condition; battery back up memory shall not be
treated as NVM.
5.37 Meter shall have the capability and facility to compensate for errors of external
measurement transformers i.e. CT and VT:
i. Linear compensation for measurement PT errors (ratio and phase); there shall be
linear adjustment which shall be applied across the complete measurement range
of the transformer.
ii. Non-linear compensation for measurement CT errors (ratio and phase)

compensation; this shall allow multiple ratio and phase adjustments to be applied
for different load points per phase input of the meter.
It should be possible to program the errors of CT and VT in meter through front

optical communication port using compatible high level software. Metering system design
should support this feature and further it shall be possible to configure & incorporate this
feature in meter at later stage whenever required.
5.38 Meter shall have capability and facility to compensate power transformer losses;
percentage iron and copper losses shall be configured in the meter for compensation.
5.39 The meter display should depict the total harmonic distortion (THD) of current and
st
voltages up to 31 level of power quantity for providing the feature of supply monitoring to
Utility.

6.0 ANOMALY DETECTION FEATURES
6.1 The meter shall have features to detect and log the occurrence and restoration of
following anomalies, along with date and time of event:
i) Phase wise Missing Potential – The meter shall detect missing potential (1
or 2 phases) provided the line current is above a specified threshold. The
voltage at that stage would be below a specified threshold.
ii) Phase wise Current Circuit Reversal – The meter shall detect reversal of
polarity provided the current terminals are reversed. This shall be
recorded for 1 or 2 phase CT reversal.
iii) Voltage Unbalance – The meter shall detect voltage unbalance if there is
unbalance in voltages.
iv) Current Unbalance – The meter shall detect current unbalance if there is
unbalance in load conditions. Meter should ensure true system conditions
before going for current unbalance checks.
v) CT Miss – The meter shall detect current miss if the current is below a
defined threshold, provided the phase voltage is above a specified
threshold.
Following additional tampers should also be provided in the meter:

a) Over voltage
b) Under voltage
c) Voltage sag (power quality)
d) Voltage swell (power quality)
e) Voltage interruption (power quality)
f) Voltage unbalance (power quality)
g) Power fail/power on-off
h) Neutral disturbance
i) Magnet detection
j) Meter cover open detection
k) ETBC open detection
6.2 Compartment wise event logging should be available in the meter. Total 11 compartments
with 100 events /compartment should be stored in meter. The events (occurrence +
restoration), in total, shall be stored in the meter memory on first in first out basis.
6.3 There shall be atleast eleven separate compartments for logging of different type of
anomalies:
Once one or more compartments have become full, the last anomaly event pertaining
to the same compartment shall be entered and the earliest (first one) anomaly event
should disappear. Thus, in this manner each succeeding anomaly event shall replace the
earliest recorded event, compartment wise. Events of one compartment/ category should
overwrite the events of their own compartment/ category only. In general persistence time
of 5 min. for occurrence and restoration respectively need to be supported in meter.
6.4 Anomaly count should increase as per occurrence (not restoration) of anomaly events.
Total no. of counts shall be provided on BCS.
7.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES
The meters shall be fully type tested as per relevant standards IS 14697.
The type test report of the meters shall be submitted by bidder along with the offer. Type
test reports shall not be more than 2 years old.

GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
S.No. Technical Specification Requirements Bidder’s Offer
1. Manufacturer's name & Country

2. Type of Meter
3. Name and model no. of offered product
4. Standards to which meter complies
5. Accuracy class
 Active energy measurement
 Reactive energy measurement
6. Metrology indicator provided on meter and
switching facility for reactive & apparent
energy
7. Variation of voltage at which system
functions normally
8. Minimum Starting current
9. Maximum current
10. P.F. range
11. Power consumption per phase
 Voltage Circuit
 Current Circuit
12. AC and DC Auxiliary supply ratings for
powering up the metering system
13. Sealing arrangement
14. Energy parameters recorded in meter
15. ABT compatibility
16. TOD compatibility
17. MD Reset provisions
 Auto
 Manual
18. Demand integration period
19. Load survey parameters recorded in meter
20. Billing parameters recorded in meter
21. Daily Midnight parameters recorded in meter
22. Communication Capability for
 Local reading
 On demand Remote reading
23. Facility of external CT/ VT error

compensation
24. Anomaly detection features
25. Self diagnostics features
26. Magnetic immunity
27. Maximum nos of communication ports i.e.
Optical, USB, RS232 etc.
28. IEC DLMS
29. IEC DLMS certification number

8. PLCC

PLCC
1. GENERAL
1.1 All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall
conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the
relevant IEC/IS Specifications or equivalent National Standards,
2. Standard And Drawing
2.1 The IEC/IS Specifications and international publication

relevant to the equipment covered under this specification shall
include but not be limited to the list given at Section - GTR:
3. Location of Equipment
3.1 The PLCC Equipment and Line traps as specified shall be installed at
the respective ends of the transmission lines. The Contractor
shall be responsible for integrating the equipment supplied by
him with the already existing carrier equipment at the respective
sub-stations, if any. Contractor shall also be responsible for survey
for collecting all the necessary information/data from the
respective substations for the installation of the equipment.
The re-arrangement of PLCC panels / equipments etc. at both end,

as per site requirement i.e. dismantling of the existing PLCC
equipments at remote end and erection, testing and
commissioning of the same equipments at the new GSS/ site,
erection, testing and commissioning of the new equipments at the
remote end/ site is included in the scope of work in case of new
GSS or bay extension work.
4. Frequency Planning
4.1 For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals

Bidders may plan for a minimum receive signal to noise ratio of
25 dB for the speech channels without companders. The noise
power in 2.1 kHz band (300-2400 Hz) may be taken as -13 dBm
referred to the coupling point of the H.T. line. An additional minus
two and a half dB may be assumed for psophometric factor. As
far as coupling loss (phase to phase) is concerned the Bidders may
assume the same as
6dB at one coupling end for evaluating SNR. For protection
channels the minimum SNR shall not be less than 15 dB under
adverse weather. A safety margin of 9 dB shall be takesn over and
above these SNR values in order to cater for variations in line
attenuation from the computed value as inhand reserve.
Frequency and output power of PLC terminals for protection shall
be planned such that the protection signal is received with full
reliability even when one of the phase is earthed or is on open
circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of 6 dB.

The Bidder shall indicate the noise power in the bandwidth used
for protection signaling and shall submit the SNR calculations for
speech as well as protection channels on all the line section
given in at the proposed frequencies. Sample calculations for SNR
requirement and power allocation over different channels must be
furnished alongwith the bid. Maximum permissible line attenuation
shall be clearly brought out in these calculations. Further, Bidder
shall submit details of frequency planning done (including
computer studies carried out and facilities available) for PLCC links
on EHV lines in the past in the relevant schedule of DRS. Bidder
must enclose one copy of computer study result done in the past
along with the Bid.
4.2 Successful Bidder shall be fully responsible for the coordination

required finalising the frequency plan.
4.3 The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Adviser/DOP

Department for clearance and in case any change in the
Contractor’s recommended carrier frequency and power output is
proposed by these authorities, the Contractor shall have to modify
his proposal accordingly. Change of power output shall, however,
not involve repeater stations.
5. Proposed Arrangement
5.1 The power line carrier communication equipment required by the

OWNER is to provide primarily efficient, secure and reliable
information link for carrier aided distance protection and direct
tripping of remote-end breaker and also for speech communication
between 765/400/220 kV sub-stations. It shall include separate
carrier terminals of multipurpose type for speech and protection
purposes. All carrier terminals including those for protection shall
be suitable for point to point speech communication also.
5.2 The requirement of carrier Protection/Speech/Data information on

each link of 132KV covered under this specification is as below :
a)132kV transmission lines shall have Main I protection alongwith

backup over current and earth fault protections.
b) One speech channel with a facility to superimpose data signals
upto 1200Baud.
However, the number of channels for protection signaling , speech

and data communication for SAS and Load dispatch centre shall be
as per the BOQ.
Twin channel Carrier equipment (Speech + Protection + Data)

(Note - Each set shall consists provision of all the three functions
i.e. speech, protection and Data at the same time)

5.3 The requirement of carrier information on each link of
400kV/220KV covered under this specification is as below :
a) One protection channel for Main-I and another for Main-II

distance protection schemes. Further these channels will also be
used as main and back-up channel for carrier protection and direct
circuit breaker inter-tripping for 400KV/220KV lines. In case of
400KV/220 KV/132 KV lines ,speech and data channel can also be
used for protection wherever possible.
b) One speech channel with a facility to superimpose data

signals upto 1200Baud.
However, the number of channels for protection signaling , speech

and data communication for SAS and Load dispatch centre shall be
as per the BOQ .
5.4 The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of
reliability and speed. It shall be guaranteed to function reliably in
the presence of noise impulse caused by isolator or breaker
operation. The equipment shall be suitable for direct tripping of
remote end breaker for fault in unswitched Shunt Reactor &
Operation of Buchholz relays of reactor etc. It shall also be possible
to effect direct tripping of breaker at one end when the other end
breaker opens out either manually or by relays such as Bus fault
relay etc.
5.5 The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the

transmit side, its transmission over the carrier link, reception at the
far end and giving command to the trip relays at the distant end
shall not exceed 20 m sec. for permissive inter- tripping and 30 m
sec. for direct inter-tripping even for the longest line section. The
above timings are inclusive of operating time for auxiliary
relays and interposing relays, if any, included in the PLCC
equipment.
5.6 The requirement of protection signaling channel is such that

security against incorrect signals being received shall be at least
two to three orders higher than reliability against a signal not being
received.
5.7 For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling shall
be employed. Double differential coupling shall also be
considered for double circuit lines. Bidders must furnish
detailed write-up on methods of coupling and recommend
suitable coupling mode for double-circuit lines alongwith the
bids.
5.8 The Contractor shall have to check and prove through the results of

his computer studies that attenuation due to transpositions in the
EHV lines is within limits and the offered equipment will perform
satisfactorily.
5.9 The Bidder shall submit curves illustrating ‘incorrect tripping’ and
“Failure to trip” probability plotted against corona noise level, in
the presence of impulse noise due to switching of isolator and
circuit breaker etc. Details of field tests and laboratory tests for
successful operation of his equipment, under such adverse
conditions shall be furnished by the Bidder. These are to be related
to end-to-end signaling and shall take into account the type of
communication link e.g. account shall be taken of transpositions in
the phase to phase coupled H.T. line. Details of field tests and
laboratory tests for successful operation of the equipment under
the above circumstances shall be submitted by the Bidder
illustrating the above parameters.
6. LINE TRAP
6.1 Line trap shall be broad band tuned for its entire carrier
frequency range. Resistive component of impedance of
the line trap within its carrier frequency blocking range shall not be
less than 570 ohms for 220kV and 132 kV systems.
6.2 Line trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of
surge arrestors which shall be designed and arranged such that
neither significant alteration in its protective function nor physical
damage shall result from either temperature rise or the magnetic
field of the main coil at continuous rated current or rated short
time current. The protective device shall neither enter into operation
nor remain in operation, following transient actuation by the
power frequency voltage developed across the line trap by the
rated short time current. The protective devices in the form of
lightning arrestor shall be shunt connected to the main coil and the
tuning device.
The lightning arrestor shall be station class current limiting active

gap type. Its rated discharge current shall be 10 kA. Coordination,
however, shall be done by taking 20 kA at 8/20 micro-sec.
discharge current into account. Bidder has to furnish full
justification in case the use of gap-less metal oxide arrestor is
recommended by them.
6.3 The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap of each rating shall
fully comply with the requirements of IS:3070 Part-I/IEC-60099-I
Part-I. It shall conform to type tests as applicable and type test
certificate for the same shall be submitted by the Bidder.
6.4 The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap shall be subject
to routine and acceptance tests as per IEC-60099-1 (Part-I).

6.5 Radio interference voltage for 4 0 0 / 245/132 kV shall not exceed
500 micro volts at 2 8 0 / 163/97 kV (rms) respectively.
6.6 Line trap shall be equipped with the bird barriers.
6.7 Line trap shall conform to IEC 60353 (latest) fulfilling all the
technical requirements.
6.8 The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the line trap at
65 deg. C ambient.
6.9 Short duration current rating of the wave trap is the maximum rms.
values of the current in KA whose thermal effect, the wave trap shall
withstand for a period of one second following a continuous loading
at normal rating under standard thermal conditions. The
asymmetrical peak value of the first half wave of the rated short
time current shall be assumed to be 2.55 times the rms value. Line
traps should conform to the following short time ratings: -
400KV 220KV 132KV
2000/3150
(a)Normal rating in (for One & a Half
Amps. Breaker GIS) 1600 1250
(b)Short duration
current in KA 50 40 31.5
(c)First current
amplitude in KA 125 100 100
Line traps shall also conform to the following technical particulars:
400KV 220KV 132KV
(a) Normal system voltage (KV) 400 220 132

(b)Maximum system voltage on which
line traps are to be used (KV) 420 245 145
(c) Rated continuous current (Amps) 2000/3150 1600 1250
(d) Minimum resistive
components of
Impedance within the
Bandwidth (ohms) 450 570 570
(e) Rated inductance (nett) in mH 0.25/0.5/1
(f) Visual corona Extinction
Voltage (KV rms). 320 - -
(g) Radio Interference voltage Not exceeding 500 uV
(h) Blocking Band (50-500 KHz)
6.10 Reports for the following type tests on each type of line trap shall

be submitted as per GTR .
1. Measurement of Inductance of the main coil.
2. Measurement of temperature rise.
3. Insulation test.
4. Short time current test.
5. Corona Extinction Voltage test (procedure for this shall
be mutually agreed ).
6. Radio Interference Voltage measurement test (procedure
for this shall be mutually agreed ).
6.11 The Bidder must enclose with his bid the reports of type and
routine tests conducted on similar equipment earlier as per IEC-
60353.
6.12 Welding
All the welding included in the manufacture of line traps shall be

performed by personnel and procedure qualified in accordance
with ASME-IX and all the critical welds shall be subject to NDT as
applicable.
6.13 Line Trap Mounting
6.13.1 The Line Trap shall be suitable for outdoor pedestal or suspension
mounting and shall be mechanically strong enough to withstand
the stresses due to maximum wind pressure of 260 kg/square
meter. The type of mounting of wave trap i.e pedestal or suspension
shall be decided during detailed engineering. In case of suspension
type wave trap the Gantry Structure shall be designed suitably.
Wherever the proposal for pedestal type wave trap is considered,
the supply of structure and construction of the foundation for the
same alongwith all materials required for commissioning of wave
traps shall be done by the contractor/bidder.
In general pedestal type wave traps shall be preffered in case

of new Grid substations. However, in case of existing Grid
substations, it may be suspension type after taking account of gantry
strengthening matching with the existing system.
Two no of Line Traps (R and B Phase) will be mounted for

phase to phase communication system.
In case of provision of only one line trap at the remote end
connecting Substation/s. One no of Line Trap will be mounted for
phase to earth communication system.
Not understanding anything mentioned anywhere in the
tender specification. The R/Y/B phase for erection of Wave trap shall
match with the the R/Y/B phase at the remote end substation/s.

6.13.2 For pedestal mounting, each line trap shall be mounted on a
tripod structure formed by three insulator stacks arranged in a
triangular form. All the accessories and hardware, mounting stool
including bolts for fixing the line trap on insulators shall be of non-
magnetic material and shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Foundation, Structure and all hardware accessories have to be
provided by the Contractor, if required. All the structures shall be
fully galvanized using only mild steel sections for members. Along
with mounting of pedestal line trap, jumphering work of line trap
with the line have to be done by the Contractor , if required.
6.13.3 For suspension mounting, Contractor shall be required to coordinate

the mounting arrangement with the existing arrangement. Non-
magnetic suspension hook/link of adequate length and tensile
strength to provide necessary magnetic clearance between the
line trap and suspension hardware shall be supplied by the
Contractor. Along with mounting of Suspension line trap, jumpering
work of line trap with the line have to be done by the Contractor , if
required.
6.14 Terminal Connectors
6.14.1 The line traps shall be suitable for connecting to 4” IPS Aluminium
tube or 3” IPS Aluminium tube or ACSR single/twin/Quard bundle
conductor with horizontal or vertical take off. However, it is
Contractor’s responsibility to visit the site and provide suitable
connector.
6.14.2 Terminal Connectors shall conform to IS:5561.
6.14.3 No part of clamp or connector (including hardware) shall be of

magnetic
material.
6.14.4 Clamps/connectors shall be designed for the same current ratings

as line trap and temperature rise shall not exceed 35 deg. C over
50 deg. C ambient. No current carrying part shall be less than 12
mm thick.
6.14.5 Clamps/connectors shall conform to type test as per IS:5561.
6.14.6 Bidders are required to submit along with their bid typical
drawings clearly indicating the above mentioned features of the
line traps, line trap mounting arrangement and terminal
connectors. For suspension mounted line traps, Bidder shall submit
drawings showing single point as well as multi point (normally 3
point) suspension arrangements.

7. COUPLING DEVICE
7.1 The coupling devices shall be interposed between the

capacitor voltage transformer/Coupling Capacitor and coaxial line
to the PLC transmitter/receiver, and in conjunction with the
capacitor voltage transformer shall ensure :
a)Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the

carrier frequency connection and the power line.
b)Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts

and installation, against the effects of power frequency voltage
and transient over voltages.
7.2 The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT shall from an
electric filter of band pass type :
a) It shall match characteristic impedance of H.T. line to

impedance of the carrier frequency connection.
b) Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary

terminals of the coupling device shall be performed by the
above mentioned transformer.
c) Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be

drained to the earth by a separate inductance termed drain
coil of suitable rating.
d) Voltage surges coming from the power line at the

terminals of the coupling device shall be limited by a non-
linear surge arrestor of suitable rating in the primary side.
Requirement of a gas type voltage arrestor in secondary
side of the coupling device shall have to be fully justified,
but
in any case the input circuit of PLC. equipment shall have
protective devices in the form of zener diodes and surge
suppressers.
The surge arrester shall have power frequency spark
over voltage coordinated with the equipment ahead of it.
e) For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals,
the coupling device shall be equipped with an earthing
switch. The Earth Switch shall be available for earthing of
CVT-HT terminals, when the coupling filter units are
removed from circuit for maintenance/ replacement. The
design shall take due regard of requirements for safety in
accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules.
7.3 Two numbers ‘phase to earth’ type coupling filters shall be used to
achieve ‘phase to phase’/ ‘inter-circuit coupling’. Connection
between secondaries of the two phase to earth type coupling

device shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid such
that reliable communication shall be ensured even when one of the
coupled phase is earthed or open circuited on the line side. Two no of
Coupling Devices, LMU and LMDU (in R and B Phase) will be installed
for phase to phase communication system. One no of Coupling
Device will be installed for phase to earth communication system.
Preference will be given based on the requirement. Proper cabling of
CVT/CC to LMU/LMDU and HF cable connection of LMU to LMDU will
be provided by the Contractor through cable trench.
7.4 Coupling device shall conform to IEC-60481 and shall have the
following carrier frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase
to earth type coupling device:
a) Nominal line side impedance i) 240 ohms for 765kV and 400
kV Quad/triple bundle
conductor line.
ii) 320 ohms for 400kV twin
bundle
conductor line.
iii) 400 ohms for 220/132 kV

line
b) Nominal equipment 75ohms
(unbalanced)
side impedance
c) Composite loss Not more than
2 dB
d) Return Loss Not less than 12

dB
e) Bandwidth Shall suit the frequency plan

between 36
and 500kHz
f) Nominal peak Not less than 650 Watt.

envelope power
(for Inter-modulation product 80 dB down)
7.5 The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting.

Temperature of metallic equipment mounted outdoor is expected
to rise upto 65 deg. C during the maximum ambient temperature of
50 deg. C specified. The equipment offered by the Bidder shall
operate satisfactorily under these conditions.
7.6 The H.T. Terminal of coupling device shall be connected to H.F.

Terminal of the CVT/CC by means of 6 mm sq. copper wire with
suitable lugs & taped with 11 kV insulation by the contractor.

7.7 Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier
equipment connection. Bidder shall confirm that such a parallel
connection to coupling device directly will not result in any
additional attenuation.
7.8 The coupling device including the drainage coil, surge arrester
and earthing switch shall conform to type tests and shall be subject
to routine tests as per IEC-60481/IS:8998.
Routine tests shall include but not be limited to

the following :
i)Composite loss and return loss tests on coupling
device.
ii)Turns ratio test and insulation tests on the balancing

transformer.
iii)Milli volt drop test, power frequency voltage test and

mechanical
operation test on earthing switch.
iv)Power frequency spark over test for lightning arrester as per

relevant
IS/IEC.
7.9 Reports for the following type tests on coupling device shall be
submitted as per GTR .
1.)Return loss test.
2.)Composite loss test.
3.)Distortion and inter modulation test .
4.)Impulse voltage test.
5)Tests on Arrestors
Bidder shall furnish, alongwith his bid copies of all type and
routine test conducted earlier on similar coupling device in
accordance with relevant standards.
8. High Frequency Cable
8.1 High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in
the switchyard to the PLC terminal installed indoor.
8.2 The cable shall be steel armoured and its outer covering shall be
protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offer his

comments on method employed by him for earthing of screen and
submit full justification for the same with due regard to safety
requirements.
Bidder must enclose in his bid a detailed construction drawing of

the cable being offered, with mechanical and electrical parameters.
8.3 Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance

of the PLC terminal on one side and to that of the coupling device
on the other side over the entire carrier frequency range of 40-500
kHz. The bidder shall offer Co-axial H.F. cable with 75 Ohms
impedance (unbalanced.)
8.4 Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 16 ohms per Km at

20°C.
8.5 The cable shall be designed to withstand test voltage of 4 kV

between conductor and outer sheath for one minute.
8.6 Bidder shall specify attenuation per Km of the cable at various

carrier frequencies in the range of 40 to 500 kHz. The typical
attenuation figures for H.F. cable shall be in the range of 1 to 5
dB/km in the frequency range of 40-500 kHz.
8.7 The H.F. cable shall conform to type tests and be subjected to
routine tests as per IS 11967(Part 2/Sec 1): 1989/IS 5026:1987.
8.8 All HF cables within the scope of this specification shall be laid
through cable trench and termination shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
8.9 The cables shall be supplied wound on drums containing nominal

length of 500 meters each. However, exact requirement of drum
lengths shall be finalised during detailed engineering to avoid joint
in HF cable and its wastage.
8.10 Laying of HF cable along with its termination have to be done by the
Contractor.
9. Coupling Capacitors/ Capacitor Voltage Transformers
Line coupling capacitors shall be designed in accordance with the IEC

358 publication.The manufacturer whose coupling
capacitor/ CVT is offered should have designed,
manufactured and tested as per latest version of IEC/IS except to the
extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall be field proven
for successful operation in the power utility for at least 1
year as on date of bid opening. The design of coupling
capacitor /CVT shall be such that the accuracy shall not
be affected by the presence of pollution on the external surface of the
insulation. The capacitor unit shall normally be hermetically sealed.

For any communication system either phase to phase or
phase to earth, CVT will be installed in all three phases, while Two nos
of CC (R and B Phase) will be mounted for phase to phase
communication system and One no of CC will be
mounted for phase to earth communication system. Preference will
be given based on requirement.
The following requirements should be met for Coupling

Capacitor/Capacitor voltage transformers:
(a) The coupling capacitor / CVT shall be of single-phase type and shall
include necessary terminal connectors.
(b) CC/CVT shall be suitable for high frequency coupling required for power
line carrier communication. Carrier signal must be
prevented from flowing into potential transformer (EMU)
circuit by means of a RF choke/ reactor suitable for
effectively blocking the carrier signals over the entire carrier
frequency range. HF terminal of the CVT shall be
brought out through a suitable bushing and shall be easily
accessible for connection to the coupling filters of the
carrier communication equipment, when utilised. Further, earthing
link with fastener to be provided for HF terminal.
(c) All Secondary windings of potential transformer shall be protected by

HRC cartridge type fuses. In addition fuses shall be provided
for protection and metering
windings for fuse monitoring scheme. The secondary terminals of the
CVTs shall be terminated to the stud type non-
disconnecting terminal blocks in the individual phase
secondary boxes via the fuse.
(d) The electro-magnetic unit comprising compensating reactor, intermediate

transformer and protective and damping devices should have
separate terminal boxes with all the secondary terminals
brought out.
(e) The damping device, which shall be permanently connected to one of the
secondary windings, should be capable of suppressing the ferro-
resonance oscillations.
(f) Accuracy of 0.2 on metering core of secondary should be maintained

throughout the entire burden range specified without
any adjustments during operation.
(g) The coupling capacitor/CVT shall be suitable for mounting on support

structure of tubular GI pipe or on hot dip galvanised
lattice support structure. Foundation,Structure and all hardware
accessories have to provided by the Contractor, if required. All the
structures shall be fully galvanized using only mild steel sections for

members. Along with mounting of CVT/CC, jumphering work of
CVT/CC with the line and coneection of CVT/CC to LMU/LMDU have to
be done by the Contractor , if required. All necessary cables have to
be provided by the Contractor.
(h) It should be ensured that access to secondary terminals is without any

danger of access to high voltage circuit.
(i) A protective surge arrestor shall be provided to prevent breakdown of

insulation by incoming surges and to limit abnormal rise
of terminal voltage of shunt capacitor/primary winding, tuning reactor
/ RF choke etc. due to short circuit in transformer secondaries.
(j) Secondary terminals from individual phases of the CVT should be

brought and terminated by suitable armoured cable in a
common marshalling box made of sheet
steel and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. The sheet steel used
shall at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot
rolled. The common marshalling box shall conform to IP 55. A 240 V
single phase, 50Hz, 15 Ampere AC plug and socket shall be provided in
the common marshalling box with on/off switch for connection of
hand lamp. The plug and socket shall be of industrial grade.
(k) A bushing shall be provided to enable a high-frequency signal to be

coupled to the capacitor unit. The bushing shall be fully
protected against rain and vermin when in use, so as to avoid the
possibility of being shorted to earth.
The Coupling Capacitor /CVT mounting structure shall have provision for
the following:
(a) A coupling device contained in a weatherproof housing.
(b) An earthing switch capable of being operated from ground level. It shall
include a facility to enable the capacitor-coupling unit to
be earthed via the drain coil while simultaneously
isolating the carrier equipment for test purposes.
(c) A surge diverter connected between the coupling capacitor and earth to
protect the matching unit, drain coil, etc.
Typical values of important technical parameters of the Coupling

capacitor/CVT that will be supplied or are installed that may be of
interest to PLC Contractor are listed below in table 9-1.
Table 9-1: Technical Parameters for Coupling Capacitor/ CVT
Sr. Parameter 400 KV 220 KV 132KV

No.
(1) Rated primary 420 245 145
voltage
(2) Capacitance 4400/8800 pF 4400/8800 pF 4400/8800 pF
(+10%, -5%) (Shall match with (Shall match with (Shall match with
remote end CC/CVT) remote end CC/CVT) remote end CC/CVT)
(3) Rated -5/C -5/C -5/C
Temperature
Category
(4) Minimum 10500 6125 3625
creepage
distance(mm):
Phase to
Ground
(5) HF capacitance within 80% to 150% of rated value
for carrier freq.
range
(6) Equivalent
series  40ohms
resistance over
carrier freq.
range
(7) Stray
capacitance & as per IEC:358
conductance
(8) One minute 10 KV rms for exposed terminals & 4KV for terminals
power freq. enclosed in weather proof box 2 KV (rms)
Test voltage of
(I)HF terminals
(II)For
Secondary
Winding*
(9) Maximum
Temperature As per IEC 186
rise
over design
ambient
temperature
(10) Rated total
thermal 750 VA
burden*
(11) No. Of
Secondaries* 3
(12) Rated voltage
factor* 1.2 – continuous
1.5 - 30 seconds
(13) Phase angle
error*  20 minutes
(14) Secondary
voltage* 110 Volts (Phase to Phase)

(15) Application* Core I : Protection, Core II : Protection, Core
III:Metering
(16) Accuracy* Core I : 3P, Core II :3P, Core III : 0.2
(17) Output Burden Core I : 200, Core II : 200, Core III : 100
(VA)
minimum*
10. Power Line Carrier Terminal
Twin channel Carrier equipment (Speech + Protection + Data)

(Note - Each set shall consists provision of all the three functions
i.e. speech, protection and Data at the same time)
10.1 As already indicated the information link shall be provided for

speech, protection, telex and data services.
10.2 PLC terminal shall use Amplitude Modulation and shall have single
side band transmission mode. These shall be equipped for fixed
frequency duplex working.
Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLC

terminals shall be as per IEC-60495, unless otherwise specified.
10.3 The Salient features are detailed out below:
a) Mode of transmission Amplitude Modulation single

side band with suppressed
carrier or reduced carrier.
b) Carrier frequency 40 to 500 kHz range
c) Nominal carrier frequency 4.0 kHz

band in
either
direction of
transmission
d) Power output (PEP)

2
0/40/80 Watt at HF terminal
e) Frequency difference Frequency difference between

VF
between a pair of signal at the transmitting and
rece-
PLC terminals iving ends will not exceed 2
Hz with suppressed carrier.
With reduced carrier
frequency difference shall be
zero. This shall include

permissible ambient
temperature variation and
supply frequency and voltage
variation of (+) 15% and (-
)10%.
f) Automatic gain For 40 dB change in carrier

frequ-
control ency signal level within
the regulation range, change
in VF receive levels of both
speech and other signals
shall be less than 1dB.
g) Supply voltage 48 V DC + 15%, - 10%.

(Positive pole earthed)
10.4 All the PLC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The Bidder
shall confirm that the total transmission time for tele protection
shall not exceed 20 ms for permissive and 30 ms for direct
tripping signals. Speech and tele protection channels shall
independently fulfill the SNR requirements out of the power
allocated to its channel from the total power of the PLC terminals.
Detailed calculation for SNR requirement and power allocation

over different channels should be furnished along with the bid.
10.5 In the input circuit of the PLC terminal protective devices shall be
provided in the form of zener diodes or surge suppressers in order
to eliminate any surge transfer through the coupling device or the
surge induced in the connecting path of H.F. cable.
10.6 To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system,
compressors and expanders shall be provided. The companders
shall have at least 2:1 compression ratio with a corresponding
expansion ratio of 1:2. The operating range of compander shall
be compatible with the audio power levels specified for 4 wire
operation. The improvement gained by companders shall however
not be taken into account for power allocation and shall be in-hand
reserve.
10.7 Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false
tripping. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer the methods
adopted to ensure above phenomenon. The receiver design shall
also provide protection against false tripping from random noise.
10.8 Fail-safe devices shall be provided, so that a malfunction in

one unit or subassembly cannot cause damage elsewhere in
the system. All plug-in equipment shall be fitted with
features to prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables
shall not be routed across sharp edges or near sources of high

temperature. The adjustments, which are susceptible to
misadjustment from accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped
with suitable locking devices.
10.9 The PLC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from
0 deg. C to
50 deg. C ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the
equipment shall be so designed that the equipment remains
operational successfully upto 60 deg. C ambient temperature. Any
ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets
shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
10.10 The terminals shall be provided with built-in indicating instrument

to facilitate checking of important voltages and current values and
signal levels in different parts of the PLC Terminals. Protection
fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and fuses shall
be so mounted as allow their easy inspection and
replacement. All test points shall be easily accessible.
The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and

alarm facilities. Individual parts of the carrier set should be
accessible from front, making it possible to place the carrier
cabinets side-by-side. All components and parts of the carrier set
shall be suitably tropicalised.
10.11 PLC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal

cabinets, suitable for mounting on concrete plinth as well as
channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or welding. All the
panels shall be properly earthed to the OWNER’s earthing grid by
the Contractor. Contractor shall submit detailed drawings for
earthing connections.
10.12 All the panels shall be protected against moisture ingress and
corrosion during storage. Panels shall be properly dried before
they are installed and energized.
Bidder shall indicate measures adopted to prevent ingress of
moisture during operation.
10.13 All cabinets having PLC terminals shall be provided with lamps of
sufficient wattage for interior illumination with switch. Each panel
shall be provided with
240 V AC single phase socket with switch to accept 5 & 15A
standard Indian plugs.
10.14 A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each

cabinet indicating channel function, transmitter frequency and
direction etc.

10.15 Reports for the following type tests for PLC Terminals shall be
submitted as per GTR .
Tests to determine various characteristics of PLC terminals as per IEC-
60495.
a)Voltage variation
b)Carrier frequency range band.
c)Frequency
accuracy
d)Transmit/Receive frequency difference.
e)Automatic gain control
f)Harmonic distortion
g) Selectivity
h)Output impedence, Return loss&Tapping loss
i)Return loss, Afinputs/Outputs
j)Balance to ground
k)Limiter action l)Spurious emission
m)Carrier frequency levels and levels
n)Attenuation distortion
o)Noise generated within terminal
p)Near and far end cross talk
q)Group delay distortion
r)Conducted noise
s)Telephone signaling channel
t)Speech levels
u)Voltage withstand test
v)Insulation
test

10.16 Heat Soaking of panels
All the solid state equipment/system panels shall be subjected to
the Heat Soaking as per the following procedure :
All solid state equipment shall be burn-in for minimum of

120 hours continuously under operation condition. During the last
48 hours of testing, the ambient temperature of the test chamber
shall be 50°C. Each PLC panel shall be complete with all associated
sub-systems and the same shall be in operation during the above
test. During the last 48 hours of the above test, the temperature
inside the panel shall be monitored with all the doors closed. The
temperature of the panel interior shall not exceed 65°C.
11. SPEECH COMMUNICATION
11.1 PLC equipment offered shall provide telephone communication

between the stations where the transmission lines are
terminating. The equipment shall be suitable for providing the
following facilities :
a) It shall be possible for subscriber at any of the stations to

contact the subscriber at all other stations connected in
the system as shown in the specification drawing by
dialing his call number. To achieve this a 24 lines EPBAX
with 2 wire interface & remote subscriber units shall be
provided/available at different stations.
b) The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring

back tone, dial tone, engage tone & priority tone, and
suitable pulses to establish and disconnect communication
between subscribers.
c) The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm

circuits and fuses etc.
d) The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either

direction and be suitable for providing superimposed data
and teleprinter facilities at a later date without major
modifications and high cost. The Bidder shall clearly
indicate in his bid the provision made in his proposal
for future development and the extent to which such
additional facilities can be added at a later date.
e) The system shall be completely automatic with definite

number allocated for each telephone. The numbering
scheme for telephones, exchange and tie lines shall be
developed by the Bidder and indicated in the bid. Final
numbering scheme shall be fully coordinated with the
existing/ proposed future systems by the Contractor.
f) Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided
by means of priority keys wherever specified. The over-
riding facility shall enable cutting-in ongoing calls with the
priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their
conversation. The wanted number should then get
automatically connected without having to redial the
number.
g) All the carrier telephone conversations shall be secret and it

should not be possible for anybody to over hear the
conversation going on between any two parties excepting
those provided with over-riding facilities.
h) The necessary cables for connecting all the telephone

instruments ordered for at each sub-station (including
wiring and termination) shall be provided by the
Contractor. These telephone instruments shall be located
within control room building at respective sub-station.
i) The cabinets housing the equipment for EPBAX, four wire

E/M interface & remote subscriber units (four wire) shall
have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLC
terminals.
j) All the terminals for speech shall be with Transit Band Pass
Filter suitable for tuning at site and shall be wired for
addition of VFTs in future.
k) Equipment for speech communication must be fully

compatible with OWNER’s existing equipment. Any
interfaces required for proper matching and connection
with the OWNER’s existing equipment shall be provided by
the Contractor.
l) Terminals for protection shall be suitable for speech

between two ends of each transmission line or on tandem
operation basis with back to back connection at the
intermediate stations.
m) Each PLC terminal for speech as well as protection

purposes shall be provided with a plug-in type service
telephone and buzzer. Further, 4 wire remote telephone
instruments (parallel to service telephone) shall also be
provided on one PLC terminal for protection for each
link. These instruments shall be located in respective
Switchyard control room to enable the operator to make
emergency calls on point-to-point basis. Each such
instrument shall be equipped with a buzzer and ‘press-to-
call’ key and shall not require any additional power supply
units.
n) It shall be required for subscriber of a station to contact
the subscriber at other station point to point. To achieve
this a 4 wire telephone set with 4 wire telephone cable is
required. Contractor shall provide the 4 wire Telephone Set
at Operator Table of GSS with proper laying/wiring of
Telephone Cable. Supply of required cable with all materials
and telephone set at the operator table is covered under the
scope of work without any cost implication.
11.2 Electronic Private Automatic Exchange (EPAX)
The 24 line Electronic Private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) wherever

specified shall be connected to minimum six trunk routes through
PLCC channels (speech panel) with 4 wire E/M' interface unit. This 4-
wire interface unit either shall form an integral part of 'EPAX' system
or be suitable for mounting/housing in the carrier panel. The
exchange will have its own ringing current and tone generator etc.
The exchange shall be suitable for working on 48 V DC power Supply
(positive pole earthed).The exchange shall be fully automatic, solid
state, and of modular construction and shall have multiple switching
routes (minimum 4-routes).
11.2.2 'EPAX' shall also be provided with two (2) additional interface units
and operate exclusively with OWNER's leased subscriber
lines, of Department of Telecommunication (DOT) and
compatible with 2 wire full duplex, voice grade mode of
operation.The details of communication protocol, for interfacing of
'DOT' leased lines, shall be coordinated by the Contractor, with the
licensing authority (DOT).
11.3 Remote End Four Wire 'E/M' Interface & Subscriber Unit or
Equivalent
EPAX (4x4)
11.3.1 Remote End Four Wire 'E/M' Interface & Subscriber Units, wherever
specified, shall be of electronic type and be suitable
for working on fixed frequency power line carrier systems with E &
M signalling. This shall be housed in the carrier set and be fully
wired to the power line carrier terminal equipment.
11.3.2 This unit shall receive and register various signals, on PLCC Channels,
from remote exchanges or other remote end subscriber
units and associated four wire interface unit.
11.3.3 The Four wire interface unit shall be equipped for routing transit calls
and shall be supplied pre-wired to handle calls for minimum eight

directions, in a form suitable for transmission over PLCC.
11.3.4 The bidder shall also indicate the total number of trunk-line capacity,
available with four-wire interface unit. The unit shall be suitable for
connecting two-wire telephone sets. Further, the associated
telephone cables for locating two subscriber lines, within the control
room is in the scope of this specification.
11.4 Network Protection Equipment (Protection Coupler)
Protection Coupler may be of following types based on the

requirement:
a) Digital Protection Coupler with Analog Interface:
11.4a.1 General : Digital Protection Coupler for protection signalling

through optical fibre cable system as well as analog/digital PLCC
system.
11.4a.2 General Requirement :

(a) The Digital protection signalling equipment is required to
transfer the trip commands from one end of the line to the other end
in the shortest possible time with adequate security and
dependability. The most important performance features of a
teleprotection equipment are transmission time, dependability and
security.
(b) It shall also monitor the healthiness of the link from one end
to the other and give alarms in case of any abnormality.
(c)The protection signalling equipment shall have a proven

operating record in similar application over EHV systems and shall
operate on 48V DC (+15%, -10%).
(d) It shall provide minimum four commands in analogue

communication channels and eight commands in digital channel.
These commands shall be suitable for Direct tripping, lntertripping
and Blocking protection scheme of EHV lines.
(e)It should be designed for the transmission of protection

commands over all kinds of communication media, like copper wires,
optical fibers, analog and digital channels of optical networks and
microwave radio links, as well as Ethernet / IP based
telecommunication networks.
(f)The equipment shall be of latest components, technology and

highly reliable. The equipments offered must have been type tested.
(g)The equipment shall be unaffected by spurious tripping

signals. The bidder shall submit proof as to how this is achieved
satisfactorily.

(h)Details regarding application of the equipment over
400kV/220kV/132kV systems shall be submitted along with the bid.
(i)The bidder shall clearly indicate and describe the facility

/items provided in the equipment in details.
11.4a.3 Operating Principle:

(a)During normal operation, protection signalling equipment shall
transmit a guard signal/code. In case, Protection signalling
equipment is actuated by protective relays for transmission of
commands, it shall interrupt the guard signal/code and shall transmit
the command code to the remote end. The receiver shall recognize the
command code and absence of the guard code and will generate the
command to the protective relays.
(b)All signal processing i.e. generation of tripping signal and the

evaluation of the signals being received shall be performed
completely digital using Digital Signal Processing techniques.
11.4a.4 Loop Testing:

(a)The equipment shall be constructed such that in permissive line
protection system, operational reliability of the protection channel
may be checked over the carrier link from end to end and by means
of a loop test. An automatic loop testing routine shall check the
teleprotection channel.
(b) It shall also be possible to initiate a loop test manually at any

station by pressing a button on the front of the equipment.
(c)Internal test routine shall continuously monitor the availability

of the protection signalling equipment.
(d)It shall be possible to carry out the above tests from either end of
the carrier link.
(e)During healthy condition of transmission line, the loop test shall

not initiate a tripping command.
(f)In the event of a system fault , while loop test is in progress

,protection signal shall over ride the test signal.
(g)With regard to trip counters alternate arrangement i.e. Laptop

along with software & all accessories to download events including
carrier receipt and transit shall be acceptable . Laptop for the above
shall be supplied at each substation under substation package.
(h)High security and dependability shall be ensured by the

manufacturer. Probability of false tripping and failure to trip shall be
minimum. Statistical curves /figures indicating above mentioned

measures shall be submitted along with the bid.
(i)DPC can be either housed in offered Control & Protection Panel

/PLCC Panel or in separate panel.
(j)Reports of the following tests shall be submitted for approval for

protection signalling equipment and relays associated with the
protection signalling equipment and interface unit with protective
relay units,if any.
11.4a.5 General equipment Interface tests:

a) Insulated voltage withstand tests
b) Damped oscillatory waves disturbance test
c) Fast transient bursts disturbance test
d) Electrostatic discharge disturbance test
e) Radiated electromagnetic field test
f) RF disturbance emission test
11.4a.6 Specific power supply tests:
a) Power supply variations
b) Interruptions
c) LF disturbance emission
d) Reverse polarity
11.4a.7 Tele-protection system performance tests:
a) Security
b) Dependability
c) Jitter
d) Recovery time
e) Transmission time
f) Alarm functions
g) Temperature and Humidity tests (As per IEC 68-2)
-Dry heat test (50˚C for 8 hours)
-Low temperature test (-5˚C for 8 hours)
-Damp heat test (40˚C/95%RH for 8 hours)
All the above tests (except temperature & humidity tests) shall be
as per IEC 60834-1 and the test standards mentioned therein.
11.4a.8 Relays:
a) Impulse voltage withstand test as per IEC 60255
b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255
The protection signalling equipment shall be of modular

construction and preferably mounted in the Relay Panels. Cabling
between the protection signalling equipment & Communication
equipment shall be in the scope of bidder.
The input /output interface to the protection equipment shall be

achieved by means of relays and the input/output rack wiring shall
be carefully segregated from other shelf/cubicle wiring.

The isolation requirements of the protection interface shall be for 2
kV rms.
11.4a.9 General Technical Particulars:
The major technical particulars of protection signalling equipment

shall be as follows :
a. Power supply : 48VDC +15%,-10%
b. Number of commands : Analog channel-
4(four)
Digital channel-8(eight)
c. Operating time : <7ms
d. Back to back operate
Time without propagation delay : ≤ 8ms
e. Interface to Protection relays
Input
Contact Rating :
Rated voltage : 220 volts DC

Maximum Current rating : 5 amps
Output
Contact Rating :
Rated current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC -255-0-20
f. Alarm contact
Rated Current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC -255-0-20
g. Line Interface
Analog :2-wire or 4-wire ,600 Ohms or
high
Impedence,
Digital :G703.1(64 Kbps),G703.6(2
Mbps),E1,
V.11 /X.21/X.24/V35
Optical :Direct optical interface at 256
Kbit/1310
Nm and 1550 nm more than
200km range
Ethernet :10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet
Electrical port (RJ45)
b)Analog Protection Coupler:
11.4b.1 The Bidder shall offer voice frequency transmission equipment

which shall work on frequency shift or coded signal principle
for transmission/reception of protection signals as single purpose
channel. The equipment shall be suitable for connection to the
power line carrier terminal.
11.4b.2 The voice frequency transmission equipment shall not only be

insensitive to corona noise but shall also remain unaffected by

impulse type noise which are generated by electrical discharge
and by the opening and closing of circuit breakers, isolators,
earthing switches etc. The equipment shall also be made
immune to a field strength of 10V/m expected to be caused by
portable radio transmitters in the range of 20-1000 MHz. In his
offer, bidder shall clearly explain as to what measures have been
taken to make the equipment insensitive to corona noise, white
noise and to impulse noise of an amplitude larger than the
wanted signal and submit full field test and laboratory test
reports. The guarantee on design data shall not be acceptable.
11.4b.3 The equipment shall be unaffected by spurious tripping signals. The

Bidder shall submit proof as to how this is achieved satisfactorily.
11.4b.4 The equipment shall be suitable for transmission of direct and

permissive trip signal as well as blocking signals for protective
gear of power system. The equipment shall be operated in the
audio frequency range in
speech band or above speech band as superimposed channel in 4
kHz band of SSB carrier. The equipment shall operate with full
duplex frequency shift mode of operation or by switching between
two frequencies in case of coded signals . The protection
signaling equipment shall be of solid state design, modular in
construction and have a proven operating record in similar
application over EHV systems. Details regarding application of the
equipment over 765kV/400kV/220kV systems shall be submitted
along with the bid. Each protection signaling equipment shall
provide:
i) Transmission facilities for minimum three protection
signals.
ii) Reception facilities for minimum three protection
signals.
11.4b.5 The equipment shall be designed for remote tripping/ blocking on

permissive basis and direct tripping for reactor fault and others. The
overall time of PLC, VFT and transmission path for permissive
trip/blocking shall be 20 m. Sec. or less and for direct tripping 30 m.
Sec. or less even for the longest line section. Operating time lower
than specified above may be preferred provided they fulfill the
requirements of security and reliability as mentioned below :
Falset trip probability 10-5 (Noise burst of any amplitude)
Fail to trip probability 10-2 for S/N 6 dB in 3.1 kHz Band

(white Noise Measurement)

11.4b.6 It may be emphasized that specified time, as mentioned above is
composed of the following :
a) Back-to-back signal delay in frequency shift or coded signals

protection equipment.
b) Back-to-back delay in PLC terminal.
c) Delay in transmission line.
d) Operation time of interposing relay, if any, in frequency

shift or coding equipment.
Reference is invited in this regard to the guide lines

expressed in CIGRE Publication “Teleprotection” report by
Committee 34 and 35.
11.4b.7 The following transfer criteria shall be provided by the equipment:
a) Transmit side
One number potential free NO (normally open) contact

of protective relays (To be supplied by the OWNER) of
under noted rating for each of the following functions:
i) Permissive trip command: Main I and Main II for
220KV/400KV
line and Main I for 132KV line
ii) Direct trip command :Optional for 132KV line.
Contact Rating:
Maximum voltage :
660 Volts Maximum current rating :
5 amps Maximum power rating
:1
250W/VA
b) Receive Side
Voice frequency transmission equipment for network

protection shall be provided with one potential free NO
(normally open) contact of the under noted rating for each
of the following functions:
i) Permissive trip command: Main I and Main II for
220KV/400KV line and Main I
for
132KV line
ii) Direct trip command : Optional for 132KV line.
Contact Rating:
Rated voltage :
250 Volts DC Rated current :
0.1 A DC
Other Parameters : As per IEC-
60255-25 c) Alarm
In addition, the voice frequency protection terminal shall

provide at least one number potential free change over
contact of the following rating for alarm purposes.
Rated voltage :
250 volts DC Rated current :
0.1 A
DC
Other Parameters : As per IEC-60255-25
11.4b.8 The Contractor shall submit drawings showing inter-connection

between PLCC
and protection panels for approval by the OWNER. Laying of Control
Cable through Cable trench and termination of Control Cable in both
end (PLCC and Control & Relay Panel) have to be done by the
Contractor. Availability of Control Cable and Cable Trench have to be
done by the Contractor without cost implication.
11.4b.9 It has to be ensured that under no circumstances protection

channel should share the power. Each protection channel shall be
able to transmit power for which system is designed. For
example, a 40 W PLC terminal shall transmit 40 Watt (max.) for
protection channel alone in the event of fault. Speech and
superimposed data channels, in the same protection terminal
must get disconnected momentarily during the operation of
protection channels.
11.4b.10 The equipment shall be constructed such that in permissive line

protection system, operational reliability of the protection channel
may be checked over the carrier link by means of a loop test. It
shall be possible to carry out the above test from either end of the
carrier link. During healthy condition of the transmission line, the
loop test shall not initiate a tripping command. In the event of a
system fault, while loop test is in progress, protection signal shall
over-ride the test signal.
11.4b.11 The equipment shall be complete with built in counters for

counting the number of trip commands sent and number of trip
commands received.
11.4b.12 Reports for the following tests as per GTR shall be submitted for
approval for protection coupler and the relays associated with
PLCC equipment for network protection signaling equipment and

interface unit with protective relay units if any :
1) Protection coupler ( As per IEC 60834 -1)
a)Power supply
variation b)Power
supply interruption
c)Reflected
noise
d)Reverse polarity
e)Interference by discrete frequency
f)Transmission time
g) Interference by frequency deviation. ( Wherever applicable)
h)Alarm function
g)Security
h)Dependability
i)Voltage
withstand test
j)Insulation
test.
j) Electrical fast transient test (along with carrier terminal)
k)HF disturbance test (along with carrier terminal)
l )Electro static discharge test (along with carrier terminal)
m)Radiated electromagnetic field susceptibility test (along with carrier

terminal)
n)Environment test (as per IS 9000 )
2.
Relays.
a)Impulse voltage withstand test as per Clause 5.1 of

IS:8686 (for a test voltage appropriate to Class III as per

Clause 3.2 of IS:8686).
b)High Frequency Disturbance test as per Clause 5.2 of

IS:8686 (for a
test voltage appropriate to Class III as per Clause 3.2 of
IS:8686).
12. EARTHING:
A separate Earth pit must be required for communication

equipment with all necessary accessories. It is responsibity of
contractor to visit the site and ensure the availability of separate
Earth pit for communication equipment. If not available, Earth pit
including all necessary accessories for communication equipment
shall be provided by the contractor without cost implication.
13. LIST OF COMMISSIONING TESTS
The following tests shall be carried out on complete

system/subsystem during commissioning:
1. Composite loss and return loss on coupling device using

dummy load.
2. Composite loss (Attenuation) for HF Cable coupling device.
3. End to end attenuation measurement for verification of

optimum coupling mode. Test shall be done for all
combinations.
4. End to end return loss for optimum coupling mode.
a.open behind line trap.
b.grounded behind line trap.
5. If end to end return loss for optimum coupling mode is

not satisfactory, same shall be measured for other coupling
modes also.
6. Adjustment of Tx/Rx levels on PLCC equipment at both end as

per test
schedule.
7. AF frequency response (end to end) for the entire 4 kHz

Bandwidth for speech and tele operation channels.

8. Measurement of noise in 2 kHZ bandwidth with and
without line energised.
9. SNR (test-one) with line energised noting down weather

conditions.
10. Transmission time for tele protection and other data

channels.
11. Observation of Tx/Rx levels (test-tone) for each channel at
both ends by sequential switching on/off parallel channels
using dummy load and also with the transmission line.
12. Observation of end to end and trunk dialing performance.
13. Observation of end-to-end protection signaling

(command sent & received) in conjunction with
protective relays, noting down
transmission/receipt of unwanted commands under
switching operations in the switchyard during protective
relay testing.
Notes
1. All measurements for link attenuation, composite loss and

return loss shall be carried out for the entire range of
carrier frequencies with specific attention to the
frequencies.
i. within coupling device bandwidth
ii. within line trap bandwidth, and
iii. operating frequencies.
2 Following tests shall be carried out independently at each
and
i. Composite loss & return loss for coupling device.
ii. Attenuation test for HF cable + coupling device.
iii. Levels and other local adjustments (on dummy load).

Final adjustment shall be on end to end basis.
iv. Test for loading by parallel channels with dummy load.

This test can be done along with tests for
couplingdevice.

v. Protection signaling under local loop test (dummy
load).
3. Necessary test instruments required for all the above tests
shall be brought by commissioning engineers of the
contractor.

9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SPECIFICATION FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.0 GENERAL
1.0 The circuit breakers and accessories shall conform to IEC: 62271-100,
IEC: 60694 and other relevant IEC standards except to the extent explicitly
modified in the specification and shall also be in accordance with
requirements specified in specification.
1.1 The 245 Kv/ 145 kV circuit breakers offered would be of Sulphur
Hexafluoride (SF6) type only and of class C2-M2-E2 as per IEC. The
bidder may also offer circuit breakers of either live tank type or dead tank
type of proven design.
1.2 The circuit breaker shall be complete with terminal connectors, operating
mechanism, control cabinets, piping, inter pole cable, cable accessories
like glands, terminal blocks, marking ferrules, lugs, pressure gauges,
density monitors (with graduated scale), galvanised support structure for
CB and control cabinets, their foundation bolts and all other circuit breaker
accessories required for carrying out all the functions the CB is required to
perform.
1.3 All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker
installation such as main equipment, terminals, control parts, connectors
and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not shall be
provided.
1.4 The support structure of circuit breaker as well as that of control cabinet
shall be hot dip galvanised. All other parts shall be painted as per shade
697 of IS -5.
1.5 The circuit breakers shall be designed for use in the geographic and
meteorological conditions as given in specification.
1.6 Standard
The circuit breakers shall conform to the latest revisions with amendments
available at the time of testing of relevant standards, rules and codes, some
of which are listed herein for ready reference. Equipment meeting with the
requirements of any other authoritative standards, which ensures equals or
better quality than the standards mentioned herein may also be offered. In
that case, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and
the specified standards shall be clearly brought out in the bid and shall be
considered acceptable, if found justified after due technical evaluation.
SR. NO STANDARD TITLE NO.

1 IEC-62271-100 Specification for alternating current circuit breaker
2 IEC-62271-203 Gas Insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated
voltages above 52KV
3 IEC – 62271-1 Common clauses for high voltage Switchgear and
control-gear standards
4 IEC – 62271-102 Alternating current earthing switches. Induced
current switching
5 IEC - 60137 Bushing for alternating voltages above 1000V
6 IEC – 62271-209 Cable connections for gas-insulated switch gear
7 IEC – 60480 Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride taken
from electrical equipment

8 IEC-376 Specification and acceptance of new supply of
sulfur hexafluoride
9 IEC: 60947 Degree of protection provided for enclosures for
low voltage switch gear and control gear
10 IS-325 Specification for three phase induction motors
11 IS-2516 Specification for high voltage alternating current
circuit breakers
12 IS-2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of
iron and steel
2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:

2.1 The circuit breakers shall be totally re-strike free under all duty conditions
and shall be capable of performing specified duties without opening
resistors.
2.2 The circuit breakers shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault
or fault location, for line charging and dropping when used on an
effectively grounded system and perform make and break operations as
per stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.
2.3 The circuit breakers shall be capable of:
i) Interrupting the steady and transient magnetizing current corresponding to
220/132 kV class transformers of 200/160/150/100/80/50 MVA and rating
respectively.
ii) Interrupting line charging current as given in "Principal Parameters" of
this specification with a temporary over voltage as high as 1.5 p.u. without
re-strikes and without use of opening resistors.
iii) Clearing short line faults (Kilometric faults) with source impedance
behind the bus, equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified.
iv) Breaking inductive currents of 0.5 to 10 A without switching over
voltage exceeding 2.0 p. u.
v) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at twice rated voltage under phase
opposition condition.
2.4 The breaker shall be capable of interrupting the steady state and transient
magnetising current corresponding of power transformers.
2.5 The breakers shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on
them during fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with
trapped charges. The breakers shall also withstand the voltage specified in
"Principal Parameters" of the specification.
2.6 The critical current which gives the longest arc duration at lockout
pressure of extinguishing medium and the arc duration shall be indicated
3.0 TOTAL BREAK TIME:

3.1 The "Total Break Time" as specified in this specifications, "Principal
Parameters" of this section shall not be exceeded under any of the following
duties:

i) Test duties T10,T30,T60, T100s and T100a (with TRV as per IEC-62271-
100).
ii) Short line fault L90, L75 (with TRV as per IEC-62271-100).
3.2 The bidder may please note that there is only one specified break time of the
breaker which shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions specified
such as with the combined variation of the trip coil voltage. The proof for
the total break time of complete circuit breaker shall be furnished
3.3 The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
4.0 Additional Requirements

a) Drawing showing contacts in close, arc initiation, full arcing, arc extinction
and open position.
b) The temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density monitor,
along with details of density monitor.
c) Method of checking the healthiness of voltage distribution devices
(condensers) provided across the breaks at site.
d) Data on capabilities of circuit breakers in terms of time and number of
operations at duties ranging from 100% fault currents to load currents of the
lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or checks.
e) Sectional view of non return couplings if used for SF6 pipes (for SF6 Circuit
Breakers).
f) Details and type of filters used in interrupter assembly and also the operating
experience with such filters.
g) Details on SF6 Gas :
i) Proposed tests to assess the condition of SF6 gas within a circuit breaker
after a period of service particularly with regard to the purity and moisture
contents of the gas.
ii) The precise procedure to be adopted by maintenance personnel for handling
equipment who are exposed to the products of arcing in SF6 gas, so as to
ensure that they are not affected by possible irritants of the skin and respiratory
system. Recommendations shall be furnished for suitable protective clothing,
methods of disposal of circuit breaker cleaning utensils and other relevant
matters.
h) A complete catalogue on operation analyzer satisfying all the requirements
stipulated in this specification.
i) Curves supported by test data indicating the opening time under close open
operation with combined variation of trip coil voltage.
j) Detailed literature and schematic diagrams of switching mechanism for
closing resistor showing the duration of insertion shall also be furnished along
with calculations in respect of thermal rating of resistors for the duties.
5.0 Temperature Rises:

1. The temperature rise and the maximum temperature on any part of the
equipment when in service of site under continuous full load conditions and
exposed continuously to the direct rays of the sun shall not exceed the
permissible limits as per IEC latest publication, this shall not be exceeded
when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the
ambient temperature specified in the relevant specification. The correction
proposed shall be stated in the bid and shall be subject to the approval of the
purchaser.

2. Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within their specified
rating, the temperature of each part will be limited to values consistent with a
long life of the material used. The temperature shall not exceed that indicated
in IEC-62271-100 under specified ambient conditions.
6.0 Operational Capabilities

The circuit breaker shall have the following operating capabilities;
a) Shunt Capacitor Switching Capacity
b) Breaking Capacity for Kilometeric Fault
c) Transformer Charging Current Breaking Capacity
d) Restriking Voltage Breaking Capacity
e) Recovery Voltage and Power Factor Breaking Capacity
f) Automatic Rapid Reclosing
h) Cable charging breaking capacity
i) Line charging breaking capacity
7.0 Trip Free Operation:
The circuit breakers shall be trip-free as per IS-2516.
8.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

1) Any part of the breaker, especially the removable ones, shall be freely
interchangeable without the necessity of any modification at site.
2) Breaker assemblies with bases, support structure for circuit breaker as well
as for control cabinet, central control cabinet and foundation bolts for main
structure as well as control cabinet and central (except concrete foundations)
terminals and operating mechanisms are included in the scope of supply.
3) Compressed SF6 gas, spring operating system in all respects, also included
in scope of supply.
4) All necessary parts to be provided for a complete circuit breaker installation
such as main equipment, terminal, control parts, connectors and other devices,
whether specifically called for herein or not.
5) The circuit breaker shall be designed for three phase reclosing breaker.
6) All other parts like control cabinet, mechanism, housing shall be epoxy
painted as per Smoke Grey shade No.692 of IS:5. Bolts, nuts etc shall be hot
dip galvanized/steel.
7) The terminal pads shall be of copper. Terminal pads will be silver plated
with at least 50 microns thickness.
8) The current density adopted for the design of the terminal pads shall, in no
case exceed the following values. For copper pads 1.6 A/sq. mm
9) All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if necessary
to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. The operating rod connecting
the operating mechanism to the arc chamber (SF6 media) shall have adequate
seals. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the gas leakage rate should not
exceed 1 % p. a. failing which total cost of refilling the gas including service
charges shall be borne by the supplier.
10) In the interrupter assembly, there shall be an absorbing product box to
eliminate SF6 decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the
construction of the circuit breakers shall be fully compatible with SF6 gas.
11) SF6 density of circuit breaker shall be monitored and regulated by density
monitor and pressure switches respectively in each pole. The SF6 gas density

monitor shall be adequately temperature compensated. It will meet the
following requirements:
a. It shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for
checking/replacement without draining the SF6 gas by using suitable
interlocked non-return couplings.
b. It shall damp the pressure pulsation while filling the gas service so that the
flickering of the pressure switch contacts does not take place.
c. A gas pressure indicator shall also be supplied.
12) Facility shall also be provided to reduce the gas pressure within the breaker
to a value not exceeding 8 millibars within 4 hours or less.
13) Sufficient SF6 gas shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers installed.
14) Provisions shall be made for attaching an operation analyzer after
installation at site to record contact travel, speed and making measurement of
operation timings, pre-insertion timing of closing resistor, synchronization of
contacts in one pole.
15) The bidder shall furnish complete literature regarding assembly,
maintenance and charging procedures as applicable to SF6 breakers.
16) The supply shall cover necessary remote control switches, temperature
compensated gas pressure switches which shall give an alarm or lockout
operation of the breakers in case density of SF6 fall below a predetermined
value or when the air pressure falls below the present values.
17) The bidder shall provide the following spare parts for SF6 gas circuit
breakers for each breaker free of cost.
i) Trip coil- 1 set
ii) Closing coil - 1 set
18) Tests :
Besides the tests on SF6 circuit breakers as per the latest IS/IEC, the certificate
of following tests shall be submitted for the SF6 gas:
a) Toxicity test
b) Moisture Test
c) Tests to determine the quantities of air, CF4 and free acid in the gas.
9.0 Insulation Of The Circuit Breaker:

1. The porcelain to be used in bushing shall be homogeneous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws which may impair its mechanical and/or
dielectric strength and shall be glossy, tough and impervious to moisture.
2 The bushings shall have adequate mechanical strength and rigidity for
conditions under which they will be used. Bushing insulation shall be
coordinated with that of Circuit Breaker. The puncture strength of the bushings
shall be greater than the dry flashover value.
3 When operating at rated voltage and under operation in heavily polluted area,
there shall not be any electrical discharge between bushing terminal and earth.
No radio disturbance shall be caused by the bushings when operating up to the
maximum system voltage. It shall also be free from corona.
4 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised.
5 The basic insulation level of the bushings and insulating porcelain shall be as
specified and shall be suitable for installation in climatic conditions specified
in of this specification. The hollow insulators shall confirm to the latest edition
of IS: 5621 or IEC publication no: 815 and 168.
6 All bushings of identical rating shall be interchangeable.
10.0 CONTACTS

1 All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed free from atmospheric
effects. Contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current
carrying capacity for the duty specified and to have a life expectancy so that
frequent replacements due to excessive burning will not be necessary.
Provision shall be made for rapid dissipation of heat generated by the arc on
opening.
2 Main contacts shall be the first to open and the last to close so that there will
be little contact burning and wear.
3 If arcing contacts are used they shall be the first to close and the last to open.
These shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacement. If there are no
separately mounted arcing contacts the main contacts shall be easily accessible
for inspection and replacements. Tips of arcing contacts shall be made of
Tungsten alloy/Graphite and main contacts shall be silver plated or have
tungsten alloy tipping.
4. Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or to prevent
restrict prior to the complete interruption of the circuit or to limit over-voltages
on closing shall have a life expectancy comparable to that of the breaker as a
whole.
5. Contacts shall be kept permanently under pressure of SF6 gas. The poles
shall be partially filled with SF6 gas at the time of dispatch and only topping
upto required pressure shall be permitted at site. The gap between the open
contacts shall be such that it can withstand atleast the rated phase to ground
voltage continuously at zero gauge pressure of SF6 gas due to its leakage.
6. Specific guarantee that the SF6 gas will not leak more than 1% per year
from the breaker for a minimum period of 10 years from supply or
commissioning whichever is later shall be given. If leakage of SF6 gas
occurs beyond this limit within 10 years the defects in the breaker shall be
attended to by the company free of cost and this shall be done irrespective of
the number of leakages during the period of 10 years. The defect shall be
rectified within 7 days from the date of intimation (by email, Telephone,
letter) including travel time of the service personnel. If the defects due to
which the gas leak occurs, are not attended by the bidder within 7 days, the
cost towards the quantum of gas to be refilled due to the defective system,
shall be recovered from their running bills or shall be made good by the
bidder.
7. Special guarantee for interrupter:

The bidder should give a special guarantee for interrupter for 5 years from the
date of supply or commissioning whichever is later. Free replacement, if fails
during five years period.
11.0 OPERATING MECHANISM AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENTS

1. The circuit breakers shall be designed for electrical local as well as remote
control. In addition there shall be provision for local mechanical control
(emergency trip).
2. The operating mechanism for 245 kV SF6 Circuit Breakers shall be spring
charging type by electric control. The mechanism shall be adequately designed
for the specified tripping and re-closing duty. The entire operating mechanism
control circuitry, spring charge motor for spring mechanism Circuit Breaker
etc., as required, shall be housed in an outdoor type, CRCA steel enclosure.
This enclosure shall conform to degree of protection of IP-55 if IS-2147.The
enclosure shall be invariably mounted on mounting tail at CPRI High power
loboratory. In case of painted enclosures, the housing shall be painted with

Smoke Grey shade No.692 of IS:5 i.e. epoxy light gray. All interiors and
exteriors of the housing shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales,
corrosion, grease and other adhering foreign matter and the surface treated by
recognized phosphating (i.e. seven tank phosphating sequence). After such
preparation of surfaces, two coats of Zinc Oxide primer shall be given by
suitable stoving and air drying before final painting. The final painted cubicle
shall present aesthetically pleasing appearance free from any dent or uneven
surface. Painting inside the metallic housing shall be of anti-condensation type
and the paint on outside surface shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
3. All working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material.
All bearings which require greasing, shall be equipped with pressure grease
fittings.
4. The design of the operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be
practically maintenance free for a minimum period of ten (10) years from the
date of installation under all operating conditions. The guaranteed years of
maintenance free operation, the number of full load and full rated short circuit
current breaking/operation without requiring any maintenance or overhauling
shall be clearly stated in the bid. As far as possible the need for lubricating the
operating mechanism shall be kept to the minimum and eliminating altogether
if possible.
5. The operating mechanism shall be non-pumping (and trip free). There shall
be no rebounds in the mechanism and it shall not require any critical
adjustments at site. Operation of the power operated closing device, when the
circuit breaker is already closed shall not cause damage to the circuit breaker
or endanger the operator. Provision shall be made for attaching an operation
analyser to facilitate testing of breaker at site.
6. A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close positions
of the breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man
standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed and operation
counter shall also be provided in the central control cabinet.
7. The Bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the
mechanism along with operation manual for the circuit breakers.
12.0 MOTOR COMPRESSED SPRING CHARGING MECHANISM:

a) Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring,
closing spring and all other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a
complete unit. Breaker operation shall be independent of motor which shall be
used solely for the purpose of charging the closing spring.
b) Motor rating shall be such that it requires only 15 seconds or less for fully
charging the closing spring. Closing operation shall compress the opening
spring and keep ready for tripping. The mechanism shall be provided with
means for charging the spring by hand. This operation shall be carried out with
the doors of the cubicle open. During this process no electrical or mechanical
operation of the mechanism shall endanger the operator or damage the
equipment. A mechanical indicating device shall be provided to indicate the
state of the charge of the spring and shall be visible with the door of the
cubicle closed. An alarm shall be provided for indicating spring failing to be
charged by a pre-set timer after circuit breaker closing.
c) The spring mechanism shall be fitted with a local manual release, preferably
by a push button to avoid inadvertent operation. Means shall be provided for
discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position without
circuit breaker attempting to close.

13.0 CONTROL
1. The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary
contact switches and push buttons.
2. The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control.
Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However, provisions
shall be made for local electrical control. For this purpose a local/remote
selector switch and close and trip push buttons shall be provided in the breaker
central control cabinet. Remote located push buttons and indicating lamps shall
be provided by the Purchaser.
3. The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit
supervision relay would be provided by the Purchaser. Necessary terminals
shall be provided in the central control cabinet of the circuit breaker by the
Bidder.
4. Closing coil shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and
110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip shall operate correctly under all operating
conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the circuit
breaker and at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated
voltage.
5. Suitable relay for monitoring of DC supply voltage to the control cabinet
shall be provided. The pressure switches used for interlock purposes shall have
adequate contact ratings to be directly used in the closing and tripping circuits.
In case the contacts are not adequately rated and multiplying relays are used
then the interlock for closing/opening operation of breaker shall be with "NO"
logic of the relay i.e. if the DC supply to the interlock circuit fails then it is
essential that breaker trips in order to protect the switch gear and connected
equipment like transformers etc., for any possible faults at that time. Provision
for automatic tripping of the breaker shall be made along with the flag
indication for non-availability of DC supply. The connection must be such that
capacitor provided for this purpose gets charged from the DC source provided
by the Board only and the capacitor supply is released for the tripping circuit
as soon as DC supply fails. It must be possible to close the breaker only after
restoration of DC supply. The entire arrangement of CTD (Capacitor Tripping
Device ) facility shall be mounted on control cubicle for 220 kV SF6 Circuit
Breakers.
6. A local manual closing device which can be easily operated manually by
one standing on the ground shall also be provided for maintenance purposes
and direction of motion of handle shall be clearly marked for the spring
operating mechanism of Circuit Breaker.
7. The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be preferably positively driven by
the breaker operating rod and where due to construction features, same is not
possible a plug-in device shall be provided to simulate the opening and closing
operations of circuit breaker for the purpose of testing control circuits.
14.0 SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL CABINETS

1. Control cabinets shall be of the free standing floor mounting out door type.
2. Control cabinets shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust, weather and
vermin proof. Sheet steel shall be atleast 3.0 mm. thick . 15 mm. thick
neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure degree of
protection of atleast IP 55 as per IEC:60947. Control cabinets shall be provided
with hinged door and padlocking arrangement. The door hinges shall be of
union joint type to facilitate easy removal. Door shall be properly braced to
prevent wobbling. There shall be provision in the bottom sheet for entrance of
cables from below.

3. Equipment and devices shall be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3 phase
3/4 wire 50 Hz. AC system. The wiring shall be of stranded copper with
minimum cross section of 2.5 sq.mm. with 1100 V FRLS insulation.
4. Bus bars shall be of tinned copper of adequate cross-section to carry the
normal current, without exceeding the permissible temperature rise over an
ambient temperature of 50 deg.C. outside the cubicle. The buses shall be
braced to withstand forces corresponding to short circuit current of 10 kA.
5. Motors rated 1 kW and above being controlled from the control cabinet shall
be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3 phase 50 Hz. system. Fractional kW
motors shall be suitable for operation on a 240 V, 1-phase, 50 Hz. supply
system.
6. Isolating switches shall be group operated units Quick make quick break
type, capable of breaking safely and without deterioration, the rated current of
the associated circuit. Control cabinet door shall be interlocked with the
operating handle of the switch so as to prevent opening of the door when the
switch is closed. A device for bypassing the door interlock shall also be
provided. Switch handle shall have provision for locking in both fully open and
fully closed positions.
7. Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link type having prospective current rating of
not less than 46 kA (rms). They shall be provided with visible operation
indicators to show when they have operated. One fuse pulling handle shall be
supplied for every ten fuses or a part thereof.
8. Push button shall be rated for not less than 6 Amps. 240 V AC or 2 Amps,
220 V DC and shall be flush mounted on the cabinet door and provided with
appropriate name plates. Red, Green and Amber indicating lamps shall be flush
mounted and provided with series resistors to eliminate the possibility of short
circuiting of control supply in the event of fusing of lamps.
9. For motors upto 5 kW, contactor shall be direct-on-line, air break, single
throw type and shall be suitable for making and breaking the starting current of
the associated motor which shall be assumed equal to 6.5 times the full load
current of the motor at 0.2 p.f. For motors above 5 kW, automatic star delta
type starters shall be provided. 3 pole contactor shall be furnished for 3 phase
motors and 2 pole contactor for single phase motors. Reversing contactor shall
be provided with electrical interlocks between forward and reverse contactor.
If possible, mechanical interlocks shall also be provided. contactor shall be
suitable for uninterrupted duty and shall be of duty category class AC4 as
defined in IEC:60947. The main contacts of the contactor shall be silver plated
and the insulation class for the coils shall be class E or better. The dropout
voltage of the contactor shall not exceed 70% of the rated voltage.
10. Contactor shall be provided with a three element, positive acting, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged, hand reset type thermal overload relay
with adjustable setting. Hand reset button shall be flush with the front door of
the cabinet and suitable for resetting with starter compartment door closed.
Relays shall be either direct connected or CT operated depending on the rated
motor current.
11. Single phasing preventor relay shall be provided for 3 phase motors to
provide positive protection against single phasing.
12. Mini starters shall be provided with no volt coils wherever required.
13. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as glands, crimp type
tinned copper lugs etc., for control cables shall be included in Bidder's scope of
supply. Suitable brass cable glands shall be provided for cable entry.
14. Wiring for all control circuits shall be carried out with 1100/650 volts
grade FRLS insulated tinned copper stranded conductors of sizes not smaller

than 2.5 sq.mm. Atleast 10% spare terminal blocks for control wire
terminations shall be provided on each panel. The terminal blocks shall be
ELMEK type or equivalent. All terminals shall be provided with ferrules
indelibly marked or numbered and these identifications shall correspond to the
designations on the relevant wiring diagrams. The terminals shall be rated for
adequate capacity which shall not be less than 10 Amps.
15. Control cabinet shall be provided with 240 V, 1-phase 50 Hz, 20 W
fluorescent light fixture and 5 Amps. 3 pin socket for hand lamp.
16. Space heaters shall be provided inside each cabinet complete with
thermostat (preferably differential type) to prevent moisture condensation.
Heaters shall be controlled by suitably rated double pole miniature circuit
breakers.
17. Signal lamps provided shall be of neon screw type with series resistors,
enclosed in bake lite body. Each signal lamp shall be provided with a fuse
integrally mounted in the lamp body.
18. All AC control equipment shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 phase
50 Hz. system.
19. Items inside the cabinet made of organic material shall be coated with a
fungus resistant varnish.
20. All doors, panels, removable covers and breaker openings shall be gasketed
all around. All louvers shall have screens and filters. Cabinets shall be dust,
moisture and vermin proof.
15.0 INTERLOCKS
It is proposed to electrically interlock the circuit breaker with Purchaser's
associated air break isolating switches in accordance with switchyard safety
interlocking scheme. All accessories required on breaker side for satisfactory
operation of the scheme shall be deemed to be included in the scope of supply
of this Specification.
16.0 SUPPORT FITTINGS AND STRUCTURE

The Bidder shall include the price of support structure along with the
foundation bolts required in the bid proposal sheet and these shall be
considered in evaluation. The support structure shall meet the following
requirements.
1. The minimum vertical clearance from any energized metal part to the
bottom of the circuit breaker (structure) base, where it rests on the foundation
pad, shall be as this specification.
2. The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part
of the bushings, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of
the circuit breaker base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be shall be
as this specification.
17.0 ACCESSORIES
1. Following is the major fittings and accessories to be furnished by Bidder in

the central control cabinet.
a) Central control cabinet in accordance with clause “SPECIFICATION FOR
CONTROL CABINETS” complete with:
i) Cable glands for the following sizes of cables tentatively proposed.
2 x 4 sq.mm. Al. cable

2 x 2.5 sq.mm. Cu. cable
4 x 2.5 sq.mm. Cu. cable
6 x 2.5 sq.mm. Cu. cable.
10 x 2.5 sq.mm. Cu. cable.
ii) Local/remote changeover switch.

iii) Four digit operation counter.
v) Control switches to cut off control power supply.
vi) Fuses and links as required.
vii) The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out all
contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for Purchaser's use.
viii) Operation hour meter for motor.
ix) Three pin plug with socket.
x) Illuminating lamp with door switch.
xi) Lock and key for mechanism box.
xii) Capacitor tripping device.
xiii) Thermostatically controlled space heater.
xiv) Antipumping arrangement in the closing circuit.
b) Anti-pumping relay.
c) Rating and diagram plate in accordance with IEC incorporating year of
manufacture.
18.0 SURFACE FINISH

1. All interiors and exteriors of tanks, control cubicles and other metal parts
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, greases or
other adhering foreign matter. All steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil,
as far as accessible, shall be painted with not less than two coats of heat
resistant, oil insoluble, insulating paint.
2. All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of
zinc chromate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal
parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting material.
All machine finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable
preventive compound and suitably wrapped or otherwise protected. All paints
shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather
within the limits specified. The paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be
removed by abrasion due to normal handling. All external paintings shall be as
per shade Smoke Grey shade No.692 of IS:5
3. All ferrous hardware, exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip galvanised.
19.0 GALVANISING
All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers,
support channels, structures, shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to latest
version of IS:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard.
20.0 EARTHING
The operating mechanism housing, control cabinets, dead tanks, support
structure etc., shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals suitable
for bolted connection to 50x8mm. Galvanised MS flat to be provided by the
Purchaser for connection to station earth mat.

21.0 NAME AND RATING PLATES:
1. Circuit breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a rating plate
or plates marked with but not limited to following data:
a) Manufacturer's or trade mark.
b) Serial number or type designation making it possible to get all the relevant
information from the manufacturer.
c) Year of manufacture.
d) Rated voltage.
e) Rated insulation level.
f) Rated frequency.
g) Rated normal current.
h) Rated short circuit breaking current.
i) First pole to clear factor.
j) Rated duration of short circuit.
k) Rated auxiliary DC supply voltage of closing and opening devices.
l) Rated pressure of compressed air gas for operation and interruption.
m) Rated out of phase breaking current.
n) Rated supply voltage of auxiliary circuits.
o) Rated supply frequency of auxiliary circuits.
p) Purchase order number and customer's name.
2. The coils of operating devices shall have a reference mark permitting the
data to be obtained from the manufacturer.
3.The rating plate shall be visible in position of normal service and installation.
The rating plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof.
22.0 LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE

The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise specified below under the conditions specified in test clauses.
Sl. Nature of the part or of Maximum value of

No. the liquid
Temperature Temperature rise at a max. ambient
air temp. not exceeding 50 deg. C.
1. Contacts in air, silver 105 55
faced copper, copper alloy 75 25
or aluminum alloy(see
notes (i)&(ii) Bare copper
or tinned Al. alloy
2. Contacts in oil: 90 40
Silver faced copper, 80 30
copper alloy or aluminum
alloy (see note-ii) Bare
copper or tinned Al. alloy
3. Terminals to be connected 105 55

to external conductors by
screws or
bolts silver faced (see
note-iii)
5. Metal parts in contact
with insulation of the
following classes:
Class Y : (for non- 90 40
impregnated materials)
Class A : (for materials
immersed in oil or 100 90
impregnated)
Class E : in air 120 70
in oil 100 50
Class B: in air 130 80
in oil 100 50
Class F : in air 155 105
in oil 100 50
enamel: Oil base 100 50
Synthetic in air 120 70
Synthetic in oil
100 50
6. Any part of metal or of 100 50

insulating material in
contact with oil, except
contacts.
7. Oil 100 50
Notes:
i) When applying the temperature rise of 55 deg.C. care should be taken to
ensure that no damage is caused to the surrounding insulating materials.
ii) The quality of the silver facing shall be such that a layer of silver remains at
the points of contact after the mechanical endurance test. Otherwise, the
contacts shall be regarded as "bare".
iii) The values of temperature and temperature rise are valid whether or not the
conductor connected to the terminals is silver faced.
iv) The temperature shall not reach a value where the elasticity of the material
is impaired. For pure copper, this implies a temperature limit of 75 deg.C.
23.0 MOTORS
Motors shall be “Universal Motor” three phase of sufficient size capable of

satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven
equipment.
24.0 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS)

a) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-376, 376A and 376B and be suitable in
all respects for use in the switch gear under the worst operating conditions.

b) The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at
site shall comply with requirements of the following standards and regulations:
i) IS:4379 - Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.
ii) IS:7285- Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and high
pressure liquifiable gases.
The cylinders shall also meet Indian Boiler Regulations.

c) Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, breakdown voltage, water
contents as per IEC-376, 376A and 376B and test certificates shall be furnished
to Purchaser indicating all the tests as per IEC376 for each lot of SF6 gas. 24

25.0 TESTS
1 TYPE TESTS
1. All the equipment offered, shall be fully type tested by the bidder as per the
relevant standard. The bidder shall furnish one set of the following type test
reports for each equipment offered along with bid. The type tests must have
been conducted not earlier than five years from the date of bid opening.
i) Electrical Endurance Test (E2)
ii) Mechanical Endurance Test (M2).
iii) Capacitive current breaking capacity (C2)
iv) Power frequency voltage withstand tests (wet & dry)
v) Lightning Impulse withstand test.
vi) Basic short circuit tests, short line fault test duties and out – of phase
switching tests.
vii) Short time withstand current and peak withstand current tests.
viii) Line and cable charging current tests.
ix) Temperature rise test.
x) Seismic withstand test.
xi) Capacitive current switching tests.
xii) RIV (Radio Interference ) Voltage Test. (for 220 kV SF6 Circuit Breakers
only)
26.0 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS
1. All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall
be carried out by the Supplier in the presence of Purchaser/Purchaser's
representative.
Once the breaker is installed, purchaser on his discretion can perform one
full current shot of 50kA at 245kV TRV and 5kA at 245kV TRV will be
taken on the breaker using the synthetic test facility, the breaker should
not show any restrikes, any restrike supplier has to replace the breaker
free of cost.
2. In addition to the mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the

following shall also be performed. Speed curves for each breaker shall be
obtained with the help of a suitable operation analyzer to determine the breaker
contact movement during opening, closing, auto-re-closing and trip free
operation under normal as well as limiting operating conditions (control
voltage,etc.). The tests shall show the speed of contacts directly at various
stages of operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time, shortest time
between separation and meeting of contacts at break/make operation etc. This
test shall also be performed at site for which the necessary operation analyzer
along with necessary transducers, cables, console, etc., shall be furnished as
mandatory maintenance equipment.
3. Immediately after finalisation of the programme of type/acceptance/routine
testing, the supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation to the Purchaser to
enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests.
27.0 ADDITIONAL TESTS

The Purchaser reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a reasonable
nature at the works of the Supplier/laboratory or at any other recognised
laboratory/research institute in addition to the above mentioned type,

acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the Purchaser to satisfy that the
material complies with the intent of this specification.
28.0 INSPECTION
1. The inspection may be carried out by the Purchaser at any stage of
manufacture. The Supplier shall grant free access to the Purchaser/Purchaser's
representative at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection
and acceptance of any equipments under this specification by the Purchaser
shall not relieve the Supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in
accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if
the equipment is found to be defective.
2. The supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance, about the
manufacturing programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
3. The Purchaser reserves the right to insist on witnessing the
acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items.
4. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
5. The supplier shall give 15 days (for local supplies)/ 30 days. (In case of
foreign supplies) advance, intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his
representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests.
29.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING & UNLOADING

The equipment shall be packed in suitable crates so as to withstand handling
during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing and
handling. The easily damageable materials shall be carefully packed and
marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper
arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc., shall be provided. Any
material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the Supplier
without any extra cost. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed
packing list containing the following information:
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package and spare material.
The Supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved
by the Purchaser before despatch.

30.0 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Guaranteed Technical Particulars Circuit breaker
Voltage Class (220kV) Voltage Class (145kV)
1 Name of the manufacturer

2 Country of Manufacturer
3 Type of Circuit Breaker SF6 Outdoor type-Live SF6 Outdoor type-Live
tank tank
4 Manufacturer's type designation
5 Standard applicable IEC-62271-100 IEC-62271-100
6 Rated System Voltage (kV rms) 220kV 132KV
7 Maximum System Voltage (KV rms) 245KV 145KV
8 Rated Current
(i)Under Normal condition 3150A 3150A
(ii) Under site condition 3150A 3150A
9 Rated frequency (Hz) 50Hz (+/- 5%) 50Hz (+/- 5%)
10 No. of Poles 3 3
11 Whether 3 pole or single per unit 3 single pole unit 3 Single pole unit
12 Whether all the 3 poles gang electrically or Electrically gang Mechanically gang
mechanically operated operated
13 Whether dead tank or live tank design. Live tank Live tank
14 Type of installation Outdoor Out door
15 No. of Breaks per pole Single Single
16 Latching current (kA) NA 100kA
Guaranteed Technical Particulars
17 Rated Short circuit breaking current
(i) Symmetrical component at highest 40KA 40KA
system voltage (kA)
(ii) DC Component (%) 46% 50% as per test reports
(iii) Asymmetrical breaking current at 46.8kA as per IEC 46.8KA as per IEC
highest system voltage (kA)
18 Rated making capacity
(i) At higher rated voltage (kAp) 100kA peak 100KA peak
(ii) At lower rated voltage(kAp) 100kA peak 100KA peak
19 (i) Maximum total break time under any <65 msec <65 msec
duty condition for any current upto rated
breaking current with limit condition of
voltage and pressure(ms)
(ii) Rated break time as per IEC <=60msec <-60msec

20 Closing time (ms) <72msec <63msec
21 Minimum opening time under any condition <37 msec <30msec
with limiting voltage and pressure (ms)
22 Maximum opening time under any condition <61msec <54msec
with limiting voltage and pressure (ms)
23 Maximum close open time under any 70msec 40msec
condition with limiting voltages pressures
(ms)
24 First pole to clear factor 1.3 1.5
25 Short time current rating for 1 sec (KA) 40kA-3Sec 40kA-3 Sec

26 Rated operating duty O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO O-0.3 Sec.-CO-3min-CO
27 Maximum breaking capacity under L90-36kA and L75- L-90-36kA and L75-
Kilometric faults & rated TRV 30kA with TRV peak 30kA with TRV peak
characteristics (kAp) value 280kV value 166KV
28 Maximum breaking current under phase 10KA 10KA

opposition (kAp)
29 Maximum line charging breaking current 125A 50A
with temporary over voltage upto 1.4p.u (A)
30 Maximum over voltage on switching Test Not applicable as Test not applicable as per
transformer on no load and corresponding per IEC1233, clause 2.2, IEC-1233 clause 2.2,
charging current. however breaker is However breaker is
suitable for this suitable for this
application (value 0-25A, application (Value -0-
2.5 p.u.) 25A,2.5p.u)
31 Maximum period between closing of first NA N.A
contact last contact in a pole (ms)
32 Maximum pole discrepancy (ms) <3ms <3 ms
33 Maximum arc duration and corresponding 30msec, 40kA 25msec, 40KA
current under lockout pressure
34 Pre-insertion resistor NA NA
35 Small fault current breaking capacity (kAp) NA NA
36 Maximum temperature rise for main Within limits specified Within limits specified
contacts over design ambient temp. Of by IEC-694 25.6deg.C by IEC-694 29 deg. C
50deg.C (tested value) (tested value)
37 Rated voltage & pick up range for trip coil 70%-110% of rated 70%-110% of rated
(VDC) control (Rated voltage current control (Rated
220V DC) voltage 250V DC)
38 Rated voltage & pick up range for closing 85%-110% of rated 85%-110% of rated
coil (VDC) control (Rated voltage control voltage.(Rated
220V DC) voltage 250V DC)
39 Rated pressure and limits of pressure of NA NA
operating mechanism
40 Rated pressure and limits of pressure of Rated pressure Rated pressure
extinguishing medium 6.1kg/cm2 at 20deg.C 6.1kg/cm2 at 20 deg.C
Limits of pressure Limits of
5.1Kg/cm2 to 6.1kg/cm2 pressure.5.1Kg/cm2 upto
at 20deg.C 7.6Kg/cm2 at 20deg C
41 Maximum dead time for
(i) Three Phase reclosing (ms) 300msec 300msec
(ii) Single phase reclosing (ms) 300msec NA
42 Dielectric Withstand of complete breaker
One minute dry & wet power frequency
withstand voltage
(i) Between line terminal and ground (kV 460KV 275KV
rms)
(ii) Between terminals with breaker contacts 460KV 275KV
open (kV rms)
43 1.2/50micro sec impulse withstand test
voltage
(i) Between live terminal and ground (KVp) (+-)1050kVp (+/-) 650KVp

(ii) Between terminals with breaker contacts (+-)1050kVp (+/-)650KVp
open (kVp)
44 250/2500 micro sec switching surge
withstand test voltage
(i)Between live terminals and ground (KV NA NA
Peak)
(ii) Between terminals with breaker contacts NA NA
open (KV peak)
45 Corona extinction voltage >156KV (rms) >92KV(rms)
46 maximum radio interference voltage (micro <1000 micro volts <500 micro volts @
V) at 1.1 Ur/√ 3 @1.1Ur/√ 3 1.1Ur/√ 3
47 Total creepage distance
(i) To ground (mm) 6125mm 3625 mm
(ii) Between terminals (mm) 6125mm 3625 mm
Operating mechanism
48 Type of operating mechanism for
(i) Closing Spring Spring
(ii) Opening Spring Spring
49 Manufacturer's type designation FA2 FA2
50 Normal rated power consumption (W) at
rated voltage of
(i) Trip Coil 2x300W 2x300W
(ii) Closing Coil 1x300W 1x300W
51 No. Of Close open operations possible after One One
failure of AC supply to motor
52 Time required for motor to charge the Max.15 sec Max.15 Sec
closing spring (sec)
53 Whether indication of spring charged Yes (Mechanical Yes (Mechanical
condition provided in central control cabinet Indication) Indication)
Type of Breakers
SF6 Circuit breakers
54 Quantity of SF6 per pole(m3) at rated 7.33kg per pole @20deg 2.7kg per pole @
pressure at 20 deg. C C 20deg.C
55 Guaranteed maximum leakage rated per year <1% per year <1% per year
56 Rated pressure of SF6 in operating chamber 6.1kg/cm2 at 20deg.C 6.1kg/cm2 at 20deg.C

(Kg/cm2)
57 Limits of pressure at which breaker operates 5.1kg/cm2 to 6.1kg/cm2 >5.1kg/cm2 upto
correctly (kg/cm2) at 20deg.C 7.6kg/cm2 at 20deg.C
58 Standard to which SF6 has complies IEC-60376 IEC-60376
59 Whether 20% spare SF6 gas stored in Yes Yes
unused gas cylinders included in proposal
60 Capacity & filling ratio of containers in Cylinder 25Kg Cylinder capacity-10Kg
which SF6 gas would be shipped (m3) and SF6 gas weight-22Kg Filling
the corresponding pressure (kg/cm2) Filling pressure- pressure>10Kg/cm2
25kg/cm2
61 Whether breakers are dispatched filled with SF6 gas is partially filled SF6 gas is partially filled
SF6 or required to be filled at site upto 5 to 3 Kg and needs upto 1.5kg and needs
topping up at site topping up at site

62 Type and make of SF6 pipe coupling used Copper pipe with Copper pipe with
suitable valves suitable valves
63 Parameters of SF6 gas for (For Fresh Gas) As per IEC60376 As per IEC 60376
initial filling & satisfactory operation
(i)Density 6.07g/l @20degC at1 Bar 6.07g/l at 20deg.C at
1Bar
(ii) Dielectric strength kV/mm Depends on contact Depends on contact
geometry As per IEC geometry, as per IEC
60376 60376
(iii) Acidity (ppm) <=0.1ppm <=0.1ppm
(iv) Water Content (ppm) <=0.15ppm <=0.15ppm
(v) Oil content (ppm) <=0.2ppm <=0.2ppm
(vi) Condensation temperature As per IEC 60376 As per IEC 60376
(vii) Resistivity (Ohm-cm) Thermal conductivity Thermal conductivity
3.36x10-5 3.36x10-5
64 Type and material of gasket used to ensure
gas tight joints for
(i) Metal to metal joints Neoprene gasket ('O' ring Neoprene gasket (O ring)
for stationary joints & for stationary joints &
for Dynamic seals- for Dynamic seats -
EPDM rubber EPDM rubber
(ii) Metal to porcelain joints Neoprene gasket ('O' ring Neoprene gasket (O ring)
for stationary joints for stationary joints
65 Method of housing SF6 gas compressors and
equipment
(i) At circuit breaker Not applicable Not applicable
(ii) In Control Cubicle. Not applicable Not applicable
66 Type and make of
(i) Density meter COMDE Germany COMDE Germany
(catalogue enclosed)
(ii)Pressure gauge Wika Wika (catalogue
enclosed)
67 Density meter settings
(i) Lockout 5.1kg/cm2 @20deg.C 5.1kg/cm2 @20deg.C
(ii) Alarm 5.3kg/cm2 @20deg C 5.3kg/cm2 @ 20deg.C
68 Minimum time interval between each As per operating As per operating

make/break operation (ms) sequence sequence
O-0.3 Sec.-CO-3 min- O-0.3Sec-CO-3min-CO
CO
General
69 Whether OGA Drawing enclosed Yes Yes
70 Weight of complete 3 phase breaker for 3000Kg w/o structures 1500Kg w/o structures (
foundation design (kG) (each support structure- each support structure-
315kg approx.) 150kG approx.)
71 Weight of heaviest part of breaker 1000kg 500Kg

72 Impact loading for foundation Enclosed GA drawing Enclosed GA drawing
73 Seismic level for which breaker is designed 0.3g 0.3g
74 Minimum safety clearance from earthed 3000mm 3000mm
objects

75 Noise level at base of the breaker (dB) and Less than 75 db Less than 140dB
upto 50 meters
76 Minimum clearance in air
(i) Between live parts (mm) 4000mm (Ph-Ph) 1360mm(Ph-Ph) Centre
Centre to Centre distance to Centre distance
4415mm 1700mm
(ii) Live parts to earth (mm) 2x1100 mm 1250mm

(iii) Live parts to ground level (mm) 5900mm 4600mm
Constructional details
77 Whether arcing contacts provided Yes Yes
78 Type and material of main contacts and Main contact- Main contact-
arcing contacts Multilam-St.strip with Multilam-St. Strip with
Cu louvers Cu Louvers
Heat cylinder-Al silver Heat Cylinder-Al Silver
plated plated
Contact fingers-Cu Cr Zr Contact Fingers-Cu
plated Silver plated.
Arcing Arcing-
Pin-Copper with Cu Tulip-Copper Tungsten
Tungsten
Finger Contact-Cu Cr Zr
plated
79 Contact pressure on main contacts (kg/cm2) Adequate Adequate
80 Contact separation in arcing problem (mm) NA NA

81 Contact separation in open position
(i) Main Contacts (Arcing Contacts) 140.5mm 77mm
(ii) PIR Contacts) NA NA
82 Whether pressure relief device for each of No No
the chamber of SF6 CB provided
83 Rate of Contact Travel
(i) Opening (m/sec) 5.3-5.9 m/sec 4.4-5.1 m/sec

(ii)Closing (m/sec) 3.5-4.5 m/sec 3.5-4.5 m/sec
84 Whether the making & breaking contacts are Yes Yes
hermetically sealed
85 Type and capacity of device used to obtain NA NA
uniform voltage distribution between breaks
86 Over voltage withstand capability of grading NA NA
components (KV rms)
87 No. of auxiliary contacts per pole provided 10 NO+10 NC 6NO + 6NC
for owner's use.
88 Rated voltage of auxiliary contacts (V) 220VDC 250V DC
89 Current rating of auxiliary contacts
(i) Continuous (A) 10A 10A
(ii) DC breaking with 20ms time constant 2.5A (Resistive) 2.5A (Resistive)
(A)
90 Whether auxiliary contacts silver plated Yes Yes

91 Whether support structure included in Yes Yes
supply
92 Height of Support structure 2885mm 2650mm
93 Material of support structure Hot dip galvanized Hot dip galvanized
lattice steel support lattice steel support
structure, bolted type structure, bolted type
94 Standard to which the design of support IS 800 & IS 816-1969 1S 800& IS 816-1969
structure conforms.
95 Whether foundation bolts for breaker and Yes Yes
cabinets included in scope of supply
Detailed literature
96 Whether the following are enclosed
(i) Type test as per IEC-62271-100 Yes Yes
(ii) Type test report & field test report in NA NA
case of reactor switching duty
(iii) Details of the operating mechanism Yes (Part of GA Drg.) Yes (Part of GA Drg.)
(iv) Drawing of breaker support structure Yes (Part of GA Drg.) Yes (Part of GA Drg.)
(iv)Calculations for compressed air plant NA NA
sizing
(vi) Details of SF6 gas filling evacuating
(vii) Details of SF6 gas leak detector
(viii) Precautions in use of SF6 gas
(ix) Leaflets & literature bringing out salient
features of equipment offered
x) Schematic diagrams of switching NA NA
mechanism for closing resistor showing the
duration of insertion along with calculations
for thermal rating of closing resistors
xi) Whether drawings enclosed Yes (Refer O&M Yes (Refer O&M
Manual) Manual)
(xii) Method of checking of voltage NA NA
distribution devices at site enclosed
(xiii) Details along with a complete
catalogue of operation analyzer
(xiv) Data on capabilities of circuit breaker At50% rated load At50% rated load current
in terms of time & no. of operations at duties current-upto6000 (3150A)-upto6000
ranging from 100% fault currents to load At 100 rated load At 100 rated load current
currents of the lowest possible value w/o current-upto 6000 (3150A)-upto 6000
requiring any maintenance or checks. At 50% rated breaking At 50% rated breaking
current-upto90 current (40kA)-upto30
At 100% rated breaking At 100% rated breaking
current-upto 30 current (40kA)-upto 18
(xv) Effect of non-simultaneously between Non-simultaneity Non-simultaneity

contacts within a pole or between pole & between contacts (within between contacts (within
also show how it is covered in the pole) is not applicable pole) is not applicable
guaranteed rated break time since breaker is single since breaker is single
break. Non-simultaneity break. Non-simultaneity
between pole is <3 m as between pole is <3 m as
per 2(p) per 2(p)

(xvi) Details and type of filters used in MOS 13X-absorbent MOS 13X-absorbent
interrupter assembly and also the operating used to absorb moisture used to absorb moisture
experience with such filters content. content.
97 Whether the equipment is type tested Yes Yes

98 Whether the similar equipment has been in Yes Yes
successful operation for 2 years.
Insulators
99 Manufacturer's Name
100 Type Hollow Porcelain Hollow porcelain
101 Applicable standards IEC 60233 IEC 60233
(i) Height As per enclosed drawing AS per drawing
(ii) Diameter (top)
(iii) Diameter (bottom)
102 Total creepage distance 6125mm 3625mm
103 Rated Voltage (KV) 245KV 145KV
104 Power frequency withstand voltage for 1 460kVrms 275kVrms
min (kV rms) dry & wet
105 1.2/20 micro sec. Impulse withstand voltage 1050KVp 650KVp
(kvp)
106 250/2500 micro sec. Switching impulse NA NA
withstand voltage (KVp)
(i) Dry
(ii) Weight
107 Corona Extinction voltage 156KV 92KV
108 Weight (Kg) As per enclosed drawing As per drawing
109 Maximum allowable span (mm) As specified As specified
110 Cantilever strength 30.1kN-M 30.1kN-M
111 OGA drawing enclosed. Yes Yes
Motors for Circuit Breakers
112 Manufacturer's Name & Address
113 Equipment driven by Motor Closing spring Closing spring
114 Motor type Universal motor Universal Motor
115 Country of Origin India India
116 Frame size NA NA
117 Type of Duty Short time delay Short time duty
118 Type of Enclosure and method of cooling Air natural Air natural
119 Applicable standard to which motor IS 996 IS 996
generally confirms
120 Type of mounting Vertical Vertical
121 Direction of rotation as viewed from non- Unidirectional Unidirectional
driving end (Clockwise) (Clockwise)
122 Standard continuous rating at 40deg.C 750Watts 750Watts
ambient temp. As per Indian standard (KW)
123 De rated rating for specified normal Not applicable NA
conditional i.e.50 deg. C ambient temp.
(KW)
124 Rated voltage 220V DC/240V AC 250V DC/ 240V AC

125 Rated speed at rated voltage and frequency 12000rpm 1200 rpm
(rpm) @220VDC/240V AC at @250VDC/240V AC at
no load no load
126 Full load current at rated voltage and 3.5Amp max @220V DC 3.5Amp max @ 250V
frequency 7.5Amp max @240V DC
AC,50Hz 7.5Amp max @240V
AC, 50Hz
127 Power factor at rated load. 0.9 0.9
Control Cabinets
128 Material of enclosure HR sheet steel CR Steel Sheet
129 Thickness of Sheet Steel 2.5mm 2.5mm
130 Painting for control cubicle Epoxy/ polyester paint Epoxy/Polyester paint
131 Paint shade 697 as per IS 5 (outside 697 as per IS 5 (outside
grey) grey)
132 Degree of protection IP55 IP55
133 Dimensions Pole panel:H-936, W- Control Panel:
550,D440mm H-925, W1080,
MARSHALLING BOX D-500mm
H-1251 W-840, D-
325mm
134 Material of the gasket EPDM EPDM

10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ISOLATOR

9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ISOLATOR
1.0 GENERAL:
1.1 The Isolators and accessories shall conform in general to IEC: 62271-102 (or
IS: 9921) except to the extent explicitly modified in specification and shall be
in accordance with requirement of specification.
1.2 Isolators shall be outdoor, off-load type. Earth switches shall be provided on
Isolators wherever called for.
1.3 Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall
be supplied including but not limited to the following:
1.3.1 Isolator with complete Support Insulators, operating rod insulator, base frame,
linkages, operating mechanism, control cabinet, interlock, interpole cables etc.
1.3.2 All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable isolator installation,
control parts and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not.
1.4 The isolator shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological
conditions as given in specification.
2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:
a) Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and
thermal effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems
in their closed position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open
under influence of short circuit current.
b) The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked

so that the earth switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and
vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of
isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical and mechanical interlocks
provided in the operating mechanism.
c) In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall

have provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the
associated and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall
be of fail safe type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall
be provided. The interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation
from DC supply and within a variation range as stipulated in specification.
The earth switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of
the associated lines.
d) The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no

significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of
isolator on account of make/break operation.
e) The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking magnetising current of 0.7A

at 0.15 power factor and capacitive current of 0.7A at 0.15 power factor at
rated voltage.
3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

Isolators shall be outdoor, off-load type. Earth switches shall be provided on
isolators wherever called for, with possibility of being mounted on any side
of the isolator. 420kV & below rated isolators shall be double break type,
unless specified otherwise. Isolator design shall be such as to permit addition
of earth switches at a future date. The features and constructional details of
isolators, earth switches and accessories shall be in accordance with
requirements stated hereunder:

3.1 Contacts:
a) The contacts shall be self aligning and self cleaning and so designed that
binding cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in a
heavily polluted atmosphere.
b) No undue wear or scuffing shall be evident during the mechanical endurance
tests. Contacts and spring shall be designed so that readjustments in contact
pressure shall not be necessary throughout the life of the isolator or earth
switch. Each contact or pair of contacts shall be independently sprung so that
full pressure is maintained on all contacts at all time.
c) Contact springs shall not carry any current and shall not loose their
characteristics due to heating effects.
d) The moving contact of double break isolator shall have preferably turn-and
twist type or other suitable type of locking arrangement to ensure adequate
contact pressure.
e) Flexible braided copper, where used, shall have corrosion resistant coating
such as tinning or silvering.
f) The 220KV, 132KV & 33KV Isolators shall be provided with moving contacts and
fixed contacts manufactured completely with Hard Drawn Electrolytic Copper (HDEC)
only. Moving contacts of Aluminium shall not be acceptable in any case.
g) All current carrying parts of the Isolators shall be designed for maximum current
density not exceeding the limits as indicated below:
a) Hollow tube Sections --- Copper – 2.0 A/sq mm
b) Other Sections and contacts --- Copper – 1.6 A/sq mm
3.2 Base :
Each single pole of the isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanized
steel base provided with holes and designed for mounting on a standard
supporting structure. Common base frame shall be provided for 400/220/132kV
isolators suitable for mounting on pipe structures.
Each single pole of the isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised
steel base provided with holes and designed for mounting on a supporting
structure.
3.3 Blades :
a) All metal parts shall be of non-rusting and non-corroding material. All
current carrying parts shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic
copper/aluminium. Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers.
Keys or equivalent locking facilities if provided on current carrying parts, shall
be made of copper silicon alloy or stainless steel or equivalent. The bolts or pins
used in current carrying parts shall be made of non-corroding material. All
ferrous castings except current carrying parts shall be made of malleable cast
iron or cast-steel. No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of
the isolator.
b) The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and other corona
producing surfaces, where this is impracticable adequate corona shield shall be
provided. Corona shields/rings etc., shall be made up of aluminum/aluminum
alloy.
c) Isolators and earth switches including their operating parts shall be such that
they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by short circuit
forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks, or accidental touching of the

connecting rods of the operating mechanism.
d) The isolator and earth switch shall be designed such that no lubrication of any
part is required except at very infrequent intervals. i.e. after every 1000 operations
or after 5 years whichever is earlier.
3.4 Insulator :
a) The insulator shall conform to IS: 2544 and/or IEC-168. The porcelain of the
insulator shall conform to the requirements stipulated in specification and shall
have a minimum cantilever strength of 600 Kg. for 145 kV insulators and 800 kg
for 245 Kv isolator.
Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the insulators after the main
blades are fully closed.
b) The parameters of the insulators shall meet the requirements specified in
specification.
c) Insulator shall be type and routine tested as per IEC-168. Besides following
additional routine/acceptance tests shall also be conducted:
(i) Bending load test in four directions at 50% of minimum
bending load guaranteed on all insulators, as a routine test.
(ii) Bending load test in four directions at 100% of minimum
bending load as a sample test on each lot.
(iii) Torsional test on sample insulators of a lot.
(iv) Ultrasonic test as a routine test.
d) Requirement of Insulators of Isolators shall be as follows:

i) For 420 kV Insulator:
Cantilever strength (min.) = 1000kg
Top PCD = 127 mm
No. of holes = 4 x M16
Bottom PCD = 325 mm
No. of holes = 8 x 18mm dia
ii) For 245 kV Insulator:
Top PCD = 127 mm
Bottom PCD = 275 mm
iii) For 145 kV Insulator:
Top PCD = 127 mm
Bottom PCD = 254 mm
3.5 Name Plate :
The name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating

year of manufacture.
4.0 EARTH SWITCHES :

a) Where earth switches are specified these shall include the complete operating
mechanism and auxiliary contacts.
b) The earth switches shall form an integral part of the isolator and shall be
mounted on the base frame of the isolator.
c) Earth switches shall be only locally operated.
d) The earth switches shall be constructionally interlocked with the
isolator so that the earth switches can be operated only when the
isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in
construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the electrical
interlocks.Suitable mechanical arrangement shall be provided for de-linking
electrical drive for mechanical operation.
e) Each earth switch shall be provided with flexible copper/aluminum braids for
connection to earth terminal. These braids shall have the same short time
current carrying capacity as the earth blade. The transfer of fault current
through swivel connection will not be accepted.
f) The plane of movement and final position of the earth blades shall be such that
adequate electrical clearances are obtained from adjacent live parts in the
course of its movement between ON and OFF position.
g) The frame of each isolator and earth switches shall be provided with two
reliable earth terminals for connection to the earth mat.
h) Isolator design shall be such as to permit addition of earth switches at a future
date. It should be possible to interchange position of earth switch to either side.
i) The earth switch should be able to carry the same fault current as the main
blades of the Isolators and shall withstand dynamic stresses.
j) The earth switches shall also comply with the requirements of IEC-1129, 1992
in respect of induced current switching duty as defined for Class-B earth
switches.
k) Earth switch blade in open condition shall not project (from the centre line of
Insulator) by more than 3000mm for 400kV and 2000mm for 220kV
respectively.
5.0 OPERATING MECHANISM :
a) The bidder shall offer motor operated Isolators and earth switches.
b) Common Marshalling Box/Control cabinet/operating mechanism box shall
conform to the requirement stipulated in specification and shall be made of cast
aluminium/aluminum sheet of adequate thickness (minimum 3 mm) or stainless
steel (grade-304) of minimum thickness 2mm.
c) A “Local/Remote” selector switch and a set of open/ close push buttons shall be
provided on the control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through
local or remote push buttons.
d) Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to
prevent local/remote power operation.
e) Motor shall be an AC motor and conform to the requirements of
specification.
f) Suitable reduction gearing shall be provided between the motor and
the drive shaft of the isolator. The mechanism shall stop immediately
when motor supply is switched off. If necessary a quick
electromechanical brake shall be fitted on the higher speed shaft to
effect rapid braking.
g) Manual operation facility (with handle) should be provided with
necessary interlock to disconnect motor.
h) Gear should be of forged material suitably chosen to avoid bending/jamming on
operation after a prolonged period of non operation. Also all gear and connected
material should be so chosen/surface treated to avoid rusting.

i) Blocked rotor test of motor shall be conducted as a routine test. During the
blocked rotor test, overload protection relay should operate to prevent failure of
motor.
j) The test report for blocked rotor test of motor shall be submitted as per the
requirement of Technical Specification.
k) Only stranded conductor shall be used for wiring. Minimum size of
the conductor for control circuit wiring shall be 1.5 sq.mm. (Copper).
l) The operating mechanism shall be located such that it can be directly mounted
on any one of the support structure.
m) Snap type limit/auxiliary switches shall be used with Factory set values. No
adjustment shall be required at site during commissioning.
n) For individual pole operated electrically ganged isolator, a common marshalling
cabinet shall be provided to interface cables from all three phases for further wiring to
power, control and protection system.
o) Plug-in type terminals shall be used for interconnecting cables.
6.0 OPERATION :
a) The main Isolator and earth switches shall be individual pole operated
gang operated in case of 145 kV. The operating mechanism of the three
poles shall be well synchronized and interlocked.
b) The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all

service conditions. All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall
be designed for negligible deflection and strain less than 1%. The length of
inter insulator and inter pole operating rods shall be capable of
adjustments, by means of screw thread which can be locked with a lock nut
after an adjustment has been made. The isolator and earth switches shall be
provided with “over dead center” device in the operating mechanism at
open and close position to prevent accidental opening by wind, vibration,
short circuit forces or movement of the support structures.
c) Each isolator/pole of isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a
manual operating handle enabling one man to open or close the isolator
with ease while standing at ground level. Non-detachable type manual
operating handle shall have provision for padlocking. For detachable type
manual operating handles, suitable provision shall be made inside the
operating mechanism box for parking the detached handles. The provision
of manual operation shall be located at a convenient operating height from
the base of isolator support structure.
d) The isolator contacts shall be positively driven by the operating mechanism
continuous control throughout the entire cycle of operation. The operating
pipes and rods shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain positive control under
the most adverse conditions and when operated in tension or compression
for isolator closing /opening operation. They shall also be capable of
withstanding all torsional and bending stresses due to operation of the
isolator.Wherever supported the operating rods shall be provided with
bearings on each support and at the ends. The operating rods/ pipes shall be
provided with suitable universal couplings to account for any angular
misalignment.
e) All rotating parts shall be provided with grease packed roller or ball
bearings in sealed housings designed to prevent the ingress of moisture,
dirt or other foreign matter. Bearings pressure shall be kept low to ensure
long life and ease of operation. Locking pins wherever used shall be

rustproof.
f) Signaling of closed position shall not take place unless it is certain that the
movable contacts, have reached a position in which rated normal current,
peak withstand current and short time withstand current can be carried
safely. Signaling of open position shall not take place unless movable
contacts have reached a position such that clearance between contacts is at
least 80% of the isolating distance.
g) The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each of the
Isolators and earth switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at
the lower end of the vertical rod of shaft for the Isolators and earth switch.
The indicator shall be of metal and shall be visible from operating level.
h) The contractor shall furnish the following details along with quality norms,
during detailed engineering stage.
(i) Current transfer arrangement from main blades of isolator along with
milli volt drop immediately across transfer point.
(ii) Details to demonstrate smooth transfer of rotary motion from motor
shaft to the insulator along with stoppers to prevent over travel.
7.0 TERMINAL CONNECTOR STUD/PAD:

The isolator terminal pads/studs shall be made of high quality copper or
aluminum and shall be conforming to Australian standard AS-2935 for
rated current. The terminal pad shall have protective covers which shall be
removed before interconnections. Only terminal pads shall be used for
current ratings above 1250A. Terminal pads shall be mounted below the
current transfer contacts so that the cantilever pull from the terminal
connector is not transferred through the current transfer point to the support
insulator. The terminal pad shall be suitable for horizontal plane connection
with terminal connector. The terminal pads for all isolators with 3150A &
above rating shall have six holes for terminal pad.
8.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE:

420 kV/245 kV/145 kV Isolators along with Earth switches shall be
suitable for mounting on standard support structures.
9.0 TESTS:
9.1 In continuation to the requirements stipulated under Section-GTR the
isolator alongwith its earthing switch and operating mechanism should
have been type tested as per IEC/IS and shall be subjected to routine
tests in accordance with IEC-62271-102. Minimum 1000 Nos.
mechanical operations in line with mechanical endurance test, M0 duty,
shall be carried out on 1 (one) isolator out of every lot of Isolators,
assembled completely with all accessories including insulators, as
acceptance test for the lot. The travel characteristics measured at a
suitable location in the base of insulator along with motor current/power
drawn, during the entire travel duration are to be recorded at the start
and completion and shall not vary by more than (+/-) 10% after
completion of 1000 cycles of operation. After completion of test,
mechanical interlock operation to be checked.
10.0 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT:

Bidder shall include in his proposal mandatory spare parts in accordance
with the requirements stipulated in Section - Project.

11.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
Sl. Description Unit 420kV ISO 245kV ISO 145kV ISO 36kV ISO
No.
1 Rated voltage kVrms 420 245 145
36
2 Rated frequency Hz 50 50 50 50
3 No. of poles Nos. 3 3 3

3
4 Design ambient °C 50 50 50 50
temperature
5 Type Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor
6 Rated current at A 3150 1600A / 1600A / 1600A /

50oC ambient temperature 2500A 2500A 2500A
(as applicable) (as (as
applicable) applicable)
7 Rated short time withstand kA 40 /50 /63for 40 / 50 for 1 31.5 for 1 25 KA for 3
current of withstand 1 sec (as sec (as sec sec
current of isolator and applicable) applicable)
earth switch
8 Rated dynamic short time kAp 100 kAp / 100 kAp / 125 80kAp 62.5 kAp
withstand current of 125 kAp / kAp (as
isolator and earth switch 157.5 kAp applicable)
(as
applicable)
9 Temperature rise over As per Table-3 of IEC-62271-1
design ambient
temperature
10 Rated mechanical As per table III of IEC-62271-102 or as per value
terminal load
11 Mechanical Isolator-M2
Endurance Class E/S-M0
12 Operating A.C. Motor operated
mechanism of
isolator/erath-switch
13 No. of auxiliary Besides requirement of this spec., 5 NO + 5 NC contacts wired
contacts on each on each isolator to terminal block exclusively for Employer’s
isolator use in future.
14 No. of auxiliary Besides requirement of this spec., 3 NO + 3 NC contacts wired

contacts on each on each isolator to terminal block exclusively for Employer’s
earthing switch use in future.
15 Max. Operating time secs 20 secs 12 secs 12 secs 12 secs
Number of terminal in All contacts & control circuits are to be wired up to control
16 control Cabinet (Interpole cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly distributed.
Cabling
shall be supplied by
Contractor)
17 Rated Insulation levels

i Between line terminals and kVpeak ±1425 ±1050 ±650 ±170
ground
ii between line terminals kVpeak ±1425 kVp ±1200 ±750 ±180
with isolator open impulse on
one terminal
and 240 kVp
power
frequency
voltage of
opposite
polarity on
other
terminal
(a) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 microsec.)
i Between line terminals and kVpeak ±1425 ±1050 ±650 ±170

ground
ii between line terminals kVpeak ±1425 kVp ±1200 ±750 ±180

with isolator open impulse on
one terminal
and 240 kVp
power
frequency
voltage of
opposite
polarity on
other
terminal
(b) Switching impulse withstand voltage (250/2500 micro-second) dry and wet
between line kV peak ± 1050 -NA- -NA

i terminals and ground
ii between terminals kV peak 900 kVp -NA- -NA

with Isolator open impulse on
one terminal
and 345 kVp
power
frequency
voltage of
opposite
polarity on
other
terminal
(c) One minute power frequency dry withstand voltage
i between line kV rms 520 460 275 70

ii between terminals with kV rms 610 530 315 80

isolator open
18 Minimum Corona KV rms 320 156 92 -

extinction voltage
with Isolator in all
positions

19 Max. radio micro 500 at 266 500 at 156 500 at 92 -
interference voltage volts kVrms kVrms kVrms
for frequency
between0.5 MHz and 2
MHz. in all
positions
20 Minimum Creepage distance
i Phase to ground* mm 10500 6125 3625 900
21 Seismic acceleration As per As per As per As per

IS:1893 IS:1893 IS:1893 IS:1893
22 Thermal Rating of A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Auxiliary Contacts at 220 V DC at 220 V DC at 220 V at 220 V DC
DC
23 Breaking Capacity of 2 A DC with 2 A DC with 2 A DC 2 A DC

auxiliary contacts circuit time circuit time with circuit with circuit
constant not constant not time time
less than 20 less than 20 constant constant
ms ms not less not less
than 20 ms than 20 ms
24 Distance between m 4.0 2.5 - As per as layout
support structures
foundations (within
same phase)
25 System neutral Effectively Effectively Effectively Effectively
earthing Earthed Earthed Earthed Earthed
* The values indicated are for specific creepage of 25mm/kV. In case of specific creepage of
31mm/kV is specified, the Minimum Creepage distance values shall be considered
proportionately.
Note: The above insulation levels are applicable for altitude up to 1000 meters above M.S.L. For higher
altitudes, suitable correction factor as per relevant IEC shall be applied.

12.1 Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per
the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment manufacturer or Employer without any
extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for
conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates at his own cost.
12.2 An indicative list of tests on isolator and earthswitch is given below. Contractor shall
perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field
Q.P./instructions of the equipment Supplier or Purchaser without any extra cost to the
Purchaser. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these
tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the
Purchaser for approval.
(a) Insulation resistance of each pole
(b) Manual and electrical operation and interlocks
(c) Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors
(d) Ground connections
(e) Contact resistance
(f) Proper alignment so as to minimize vibration during operation
(g) Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch
(h) Resistance of operating and interlocks coils
(i) Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical
interlocks
(j) 50 operations test on isolator and earth switch
12. 3 The Contractor shall ensure that erection, testing and commissioning of
Isolators shall be carried out under the supervision of the Isolator
manufacturer's representative and the cost of the same shall be included in the
erection price of the respective equipment.

11. 33 KV EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION/ SYSTEM
PARAMATER

33KV EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION / SYSTEM PARAMETER
The technical requirements for various equipments and systems are

furnished in this section. The equipments and works to be executed against this
tender shall necessarily meet the requirement and parameters furnished below.
1. 33kV System Fault current & duration – 25kA for 3 seconds
2. Min. clearances
(i) Phase to phase 320mm
(ii) Phase to earth 320mm
(iii) Safety working clearance 3000mm
3. Major Technical Parameters
The major technical parameters of the equipments are given below:
(A) For 33 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker and Isolator:
Rated voltage kV (rms) 36
No. of Poles 3
Design ambient temperature (°C) 50
- between line ±170 kVp
- between terminals with circuit ±170 kVp
breaker open
- between terminals with ±170 kVp
isolator open
- between line terminals and 70kV(rms)
ground
- between terminals with circuit 70kV(rms)
breaker open
between terminals with 70kV(rms)
Isolator open

Minimum creepage distance:
Phase to ground (mm) 900
Between CB Terminals (mm) 900
System neutral earthing Effectively earthed

Seismic acceleration 0.3 g
Rating of Auxiliary Contacts 10 A at 250 V DC
Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with circuit time

Auxiliary Contacts constant of not less than 20ms
Auxiliary Switch shall also Comply with other clauses of specification.
(B) FOR 33kV CT/VT/SA

Rated voltage kV (rms) 36
No. of poles 1
Design ambient temperature (°C) 50
- between line ±170 kVp
- for arrester housing ±170 kVp
-between line 70kV rms
-for arrester housing 70kV rms
Minimum creepage distance
: Phase to ground (mm) 900
Between Terminals (mm) 900
System neutral earthing - Effectively earthed -
Seismic acceleration 0.3 g
Cantilever strength of bushing 350 kg (minimum)

(C) Technical Parameters of Bushings/Hollow Column Insulators/support
insulators for 33kV:
(a) Rated Voltage (kV) 36
(b) Impulse withstand ±170
voltage (Dry & Wet) (kVp)
(c) Power frequency 70
withstand voltage
(dry and wet) (kV rms)
(d) Total creepage 900
distance (mm)
(e) Pollution Class-III Heavy (as per IEC 71) and as specified in
specification for all class of equipments.
The requirement of alternate long & short sheds stated in technical
specification shall not be applicable in case of 33 kV.
4. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR SWITCHGEAR
A.)33KVVacuum Circuit Breaker
a)Rated operating duty cycle 0-3min-CO-3 min-CO
b)First pole to clear factor 1.3
c)Rated line/cable charging interrupting As per IEC
current at 90 deg. Leading power factor angle
(A rms)
(The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated line/cable charging current with test
voltage immediately before opening equal to the product of U/(root)3 & 1.4 as per IEC –
62271-100)
e)Rated break-time as per IEC (ms) 60
f)Total closing time (ms) Not more than 80
g)Operating mechanism SPRING
h) Max. difference in the instants of 3.3

closing/opening of contacts between poles at
rated control voltage and rated operating and
quenching media pressures (ms).
i) Trip coil & closing coil voltage 250V DC with variation as specified
j)Noise level at base of CB and up to 50 mtr 140 db (max)

distance from base of CB.
k) Rated terminal load As per IEC
l) Auxiliary contracts (Auxiliary switch Besides requirement of specification,
shall also comply with requirements the bidder shall wire up to 5 NO + 5

Stipulated under specification NC contacts for future use of owner.
m) No. of Terminals in Common Control All Contacts & control circuits to be
cabinet wired out up to common control
cabinet plus 24 terminals exclusively
for BSEB use.
n)Rated continuous current at design ambient 1250
temperature (amp).
o)Rated short circuit current breaking 25 KA with pcercentage DC
capacity at total voltage. component as per IEC-62271-100
corresponding to minimum opening time
& operating conditions specified.
p) Symmetrical interrupting capability 25
(KA,rms)
q) Rated short circuit making current (KAP) As per IEC
r)Short time current carrying capability for 3 25
second (KA,rms)
s)Reclosing Three phase auto reclosing
B. 33kV Isolator
(a) Type Outdoor (Double Break)
(a) Temperature rise over design As per table V of IEC 694
ambient temperature
(b) Rated mechanical terminal load As per table-III of IEC 62271-102 IEC
129(1984) or as per value calculated in
Specification whichever is higher
(c) Number of terminals in control All contacts and control circuits

cabinet are to be wired upto control
(Interpole cabling shall be cabinet plus 24 terminals
Supplied by contractor) exclusively for Board’s use.
(d) Rated current at design 1250/1600 Amps(as applicable).

ambient temperature
(e) Rated short time withstand 25 kA for 3 Sec

Current of isolator and earthswitch

(f) Rated dynamic short circuit As per IEC
withstand current of isolator
and earth switch
(g) Operating mechanism for Isolator Manual

and Earth switch
(h) No. of auxiliary contacts on each 5 NO + 5 NC contacts, wired

isolator to terminal block exclusively
for Board's use in future.
(i) No. of auxiliary contacts on each 3 NO + 3 NC contacts wired

earthing switch to terminal block exclusively
for Board’s use in future.
(j) No. of spare auxiliary contacts 4 NO + 4 NC contacts wired
to terminal block
B.1 The porcelain of the 36 kV insulators shall have minimum cantilever strength
of 450 kgs
B.2 33 kV Isolator shall be gang operated for main blades and earth switches.
C. Surge Arresters
____________________________________________________________
Equipment to BIL of the equipment to be protected
be protected 33 kV system (kVp)
____________________________________________________________
Power Transformer + 170
Instrument Transformer + 170
CB/Isolator
Phase to ground + 195
Across open contacts + 195
___________________________________________________________
(a) Rated arrester voltage 30 kV
(b) Nominal discharge capability 10 kA of 8/20 microsecond wave

(c) Minimum discharge 5kJ/kV (referred to rated arrester
capability voltage corresponding to minimum
discharge characteristics).
(d) Continuous operating 24 kV rms
voltage at 50 deg.C
(e) Max. switching surge 63 kVp

residual voltage (0.5kA)
(f) Max. residual voltage

(i) 5 kA 80 kVp
(ii) 10 kA nominal 85 kVp
discharge current
(g) Long duration discharge class 2
(h) High current short duration 100 kAp
test value (4/10 micro second wave)
(i) Current for Pressure Relief test 40kA rms
(j) Low current long duration As per IEC.

test value (2000 micro sec)
(k) Pressure relief class as per IEC-99-1
D. 33 KV Current Transformers
1.(a).Rated Primary current 600/1200A(as applicable)
(b)Rated Extended Primary current
2. Rated short time thermal Current 120% (on all cores)
3. Rated dynamic current
4. Maximum temperature 25 kA for 3 sec.

rise over design ambient
Temperature
As per IEC
5. One minute power
frequency withstand As per IEC:44-1,5KV
voltage sec. terminal &
earth

6. Number of terminals All terminals of control
circuits are to be wired
upto marshaling box
plus 20% spare
terminals evenly
distributed on all TBs.
7. Type of insulation Class A
Current transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table – I given

below:
TABLE – I
A. Current Transformer (600A)
No. Cor Applicati Curre Outp Accura Min. Max. Max.

of e on nt ut cy Knee CT Sec. Exc.
Cor No. Ratio Burd Class Point Windin Curre
es en as per Volta g nt at
(VA) IEC ge Vk Resista Vk
44-1 nce (mA)
(Ohms)
3 1 O/C & 600- - PS 600/3 .
E/F 300 00
/1
2 Metering 600- 20 0.5 - - -
300-
150/1
3 Trafo. 600- - PS 600/3
Diff. 300/1 00
Protectio
n
4 Spare
5 Spare
All Relaying CT shall be accuracy class PS as per IS: 2705
B. Current Transformer (1200A)
No. Cor Applicati Curre Outp Accura Min. Max. Max.

of e on nt ut cy Knee CT Sec. Exc.
Cor No. Ratio Burd Class Point Windin Curre
es en as per Voltag g nt at
(VA) IEC e Vk Resista Vk
44-1 nce (mA)
(Ohms)
3 1 O/C & 1200- - PS 1200/6 - 25 on
E/F 600/1 00 1200/
1 Tap,
50 on
600/1
Tap.
2 Metering 1200- 30 0.5 - - -

600/1
3 Trafo. 1200- - PS 1200/6 - 25 on

Diff. 600/1 00 1200/
Protectio 1 Tap,
n 50 on
600/1
Tap.
4 Spare
5 Spare
All Relaying CT shall be accuracy class PS as per IS: 2705
F. 33 kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS

1. Rated primary temperature
voltage (kV 9. Number of terminals in
rms) control Cabinet
2. Type 10.Rated total thermal
3. No. of burden
secondaries
4. Rated voltage
factor 36
Single phase PT
5. Phase angle 3
error 1.2 continuous
6. Standard 1.5 - 30 seconds
reference +/- 20 minutes (for metering core)
range of 96% to 102% for protection and
frequenci 99% to 102% for measurement
es for
which the
Accuracie
s are valid
7. One minute
power
frequency
Withstand
voltage:
i) Between LV
terminal and earth terminal
ii) For secondary winding

8. Maximum
temperature rise over
design ambient 10kVrms for exposed terminals and
4kVrms for terminals enclosed in a
weather proof box.
2 kVrms
As per IEC 186
All terminals of control circuits are

wired upto marshalling box Plus
spare 20% terminals evenly
distributed on all TBs
75 VA
12. A a
p t 13. A
11. .Vol p i c
tage l o c
Rati i n u
o c r
acy Secon- Secon- Secon-
14. Outp dary I dary II daryIII
ut
burd 33/0.11 33/0.11 33/0.11
en
(VA
) Protec- Protec-
(min tion tion Meter-
imu ing
m)
3P 3P
0.5
50 50
25

5. INSULATOR STRING (33 KV)
a) Power frequency withstand : 75

voltage of the complete
string with Corona Control ring (wet) - kV rms
b) Lightning impulse withstand : ±170

Voltage of string with corona
control rings (dry) – kVp
c) Power frequency puncture with- : 1.3 times actual wet flashover
stand voltage for a string insulator voltage of the unit
d) Total creepage distance of the : 900
complete insulator string (mm)
f) Total no. of discs per strings : 5 ( S/T & S/S )
6. 33kV Bus Post Insulators.
a) Type Solid Core
b) Voltage class (kV) 36
c) Dry and wet one minute power 70
frequency withstand voltage(kV rms)
d) Dry lightning impulse ±170

withstand Voltage (kVp)
e) Total minimum cantilever 450
strength (Kg)
f) Minimum torsional moment As per IEC-273
g) Total height of insulator (mm) As per requirement
h) Pollution level as per Heavy(III)
IEC-815
i) Minimum creepage distance for 900
Heavy Pollution (mm)

12. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause No. Description
1.00.00 General
2.00.00 Air Conditioning System For Control Room Building
3.00.00 Air Conditioning System For Switchyard Panel Rooms

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 This specification covers supply, installation, testing and

commissioning and handing over to BSPTCL of Air conditioning system
for the control room building and switchyard panel rooms (if required).
1.01.01 Air conditioning units for control room building shall be set to
maintain the inside DBT at 24.4 o C ± 2oC and the air conditioning
system for switchyard panel rooms shall be designed to maintain DBT
inside switchyard panel rooms below 24oC.
2.00.00 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR CONTROL ROOM BUILDING.

2.01.00 The following rooms shall be air conditioned.
i) Control & Relay Room

ii) Conference Room
iii) AEE Room / JEE Room / Office
iv) Battery Room
v) PLCC Room
vi) Testing Lab
2.02.00 Air conditioning requirement of rooms indicated at clause no. 2.01.00 shall
be met using split AC units. High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity
each with high wall type indoor evaporator unit shall be used for all
rooms.
2.03.00 Scope
The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be

provided under the contract are outlined hereinafter and the same is to be
read in conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/
clauses. The scope of the work under the contract shall be deemed to
include all such items, which although are not specifically mentioned in the
bid documents and/or in Bidder's proposal, but are required to make the
equipment/system complete for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble
free operation.
2.03.01. Required number (as per heat load calculation) of high wall type split AC
units of 2TR capacity each complete with air cooled outdoor
condensing unit having hermetically sealed compressor and high wall type
indoor evaporator unit with cordless remote controller.
2.03.02 Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor
and remote outdoor condensers as required.
2.03.03 PVC drain piping from the indoor units upto the nearest drain point.
2.03.04 Power and control cabling between the indoor unit and outdoor unit

and earthing.
2.03.05 MS Brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
2.04.00 Specification for Split AC units.
2.04.01 The split AC units will be complete with indoor evaporator unit,
outdoor condensing units and cordless remote control units.
2.04.02 Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically sealed reciprocating/ rotary

compressors mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow
fans and copper tube aluminium finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal
casing. The casing and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be
weatherproof type. They shall be compact in size and shall have horizontal
discharge of air.
2.04.03 The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be
compact and shall have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise
centrifugal blowers driven by special motors and copper tube aluminium
finned cooling coils. Removable and washable
polypropylene filters shall be provided. They shall be complete with multi
function cordless remote control unit with special features like
programmable timer, sleep mode and soft dry mode etc.
2.04.04 Cooling capacity of 2TR AC units shall not be less than 22000 btu/hr. and
shall have energy efficiency rating of 3star or above.
2.04.05 The Split AC units shall be of Carrier, Voltas, Blue Star, Hitachi,
Daikin, LG, National, O’ General or Samsung make.
2.05 Warranty
All compressors shall have minimum 5 years Warranty from the date of
commissioning.

13. DIESEL GENERATOR SET

SECTION: DIESEL GENERATOR SET
Table of contents

1.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICE
3.0 D.G. SET TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0 FUEL TANK & FUEL PUMP
5.0 BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
6.0 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION INCLUDING AMF
PANEL
7.0 DG SET ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
8.0 DOCUMENTS
9.0 TESTS
Annexure- D.G. SET MAJOR TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
A
Annexure- DG SET CONTROLLER FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
B

SECTION: DIESEL GENERATOR SET
1.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The scope covers supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Diesel Generator set of
stationary type. The D.G. Set shall have a net electrical output as specified in the Price
Sheet/BOQ, under the site conditions of 40o C ambient temperature & 1000 meters
altitude. This net electrical output shall be measured after reducing all power consumptions
for D.G. Set auxiliaries.
The scope of supply for DG set shall include the following:
(a) Diesel engine complete with all accessories such as Engine Cooling and lubrication
system, Engine air filtering system, Exhaust silencer package, Fuel Intake System
etc.
(b) An alternator directly coupled to the engine through coupling, complete with all
accessories including Automatic voltage regulator etc.
(c) Complete starting arrangement, including two sets of batteries & SMPS based
battery chargers
(d) Base frame, mounting pads, foundation bolts, etc (as required)
(e) Fuel Tank (Outside the Acoustic Enclosure)
(f) Set of MS pipes, valves, strainers, unloading hose pipes as required for fuel transfer
system from storage area to fuel tank including electrically driven fuel pump
(g) All lubricants, consumable, touch up paints etc. for first filing, testing &
commissioning at site. The fuel oil for first commissioning will also be provided by
the contractor
(h) AMF panel & Microprocessor based controller (As per Annexure-B) for control,
metering and alarm
(i) Enclosure for silent type D.G. Set enclosing Engine & the Alternator to make it
work silently (with in permissible noise level as per CPCB norms) and suitable for
outdoor installation.
2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICE
The Contractor shall provide following services:
(a) Design, manufacture, shop testing including assembly testing of engine &
alternator
(b) Despatch & transportation to site
(c) Erection, testing & commissioning with all equipments/materials required for the
purpose
3.0 D.G. SET TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

Major technical parameters for various rating of DG Set(s) are specified at
Annexure-A to this technical specification.
4.0 FUEL TANK & FUEL PUMP
(a) The Fuel tank (as per Annexure-A) shall be provided on a suitably fabricated steel
platform. Fuel Tank shall be kept outside acoustic enclosure & fuel piping shall be
carried out to connect the D.G set kept inside the acoustic enclosure.
(b) For transferring fuel from bulk storage to fuel tank, transfer pump is envisaged. The
capacity of transfer pump shall be adequate to fill the fuel tank in about 30 minutes.
Fuel pump shall be electrically driven.
5.0 BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
(a) Two sets of Lead-acid batteries (capacity & quantity as per Annexure-A) complete
with all leads, terminals and stand shall be provided. Arrangement shall be made
inside the acoustic enclosure for housing the Battery set in a tray.
(b) The battery charger (230V, 1-Ph, 50 Hz) shall be SMPS based (rating as per
Annexure-A) with provision for trickle/boost charge and complete with D.C.
current & voltage display, battery charge status & loading indications, charger
failures annunciation. Float charge mode shall have built-in current limiting
features.
(c) One set of Battery & Battery Charger shall form an independent system, thus there
will be two such systems i.e., Main + Standby systems for Engine Starting. In case
of failure of main system, it should be possible to switchover the engine starting on
the Standby system.
6.0 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION INCLUDING AMF PANEL
(a) Each D.G. Set shall be provided with suitable instruments, interlock and protection
arrangement, suitable annunciation and indications etc. for proper start up, control,
monitoring and safe operation of the unit. One local AMF control panel along with
each D.G. set shall be provided by the Supplier to accommodate these instruments,
protective relays, indication lamps, annunciations, battery chargers etc. The AMF
Panel shall have IP-52 degree of Protection as per IS:12063.
(b) The D.G. sets shall be provided with automatic start facility to make it possible to
take full load within 30 seconds of Power Supply failure.
(c) Testing facility for automatic operation of D.G.Set shall be provided in AMF panel.
(d) Microprocessor based controller shall be supplied for DG Set monitoring, metering
and control system. A summary of all basic functions to be available in the DG Set
Microcontroller are specified at Annexure-B.

(e) DG set shall be capable of being started/stopped manually from remote as well as
local. For remote operation START/STOP push button is being provided in 415V
ACDB. Interlocking of DG breaker shall be provided to prevent parallel operation
of DG set with normal station supply.
(f) In addition to the shutdown conditions specified at Annexure-B, DG Set shall
shutdown whenever any of the following conditions appear in the system :
1) Generator differential protection operated
2) Short circuit protection operated
(g) Following indication lamps shall be provided in AMF panel :
1) DG Mains /Alternator ON (R,Y,B phases separately)

2) Charger ON (For Both Chargers separately)
3) DG Set Breaker ON/OFF
4) Auxiliary LT Supply ON (For Source-1 & Source-2 separately)
(h) Thermostatically controlled space heaters and cubicle illumination operated by

Door Switch shall be provided in AMF panel. Necessary isolating switches and
fuses shall also be provided.
(i) Following shall also be provided in AMF panel:
1) 3 Nos. single phase CT's for metering (Class-1, Output Burden=15VA)
2) 3 Nos. single phase CT's (Provided by LT switchgear manufacturer) with KPV

= 300V & RCT = 0.25 ohm for differential protection of DG Set on neutral
side.
3) One (1) Auto/Manual Selector Switch
4) Local/Remote Selector Switch for DG Set
5) A manual changeover switch to switch the ignition load on either Battery-Set 1

or Battery-Set 2
6) Two (2) Sets of Battery chargers
7) Necessary MCBs for LT Auxiliary Supply Distribution
8) Any other item required for completion of Control scheme shall be deemed to
be included.
7.0 D.G. SETACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
7.1 General requirements

(a) Diesel engine, alternator, AMF panel, Batteries and Chargers shall be installed in a
suitable weather-proof acoustic enclosure. This enclosure shall be provided for
protection from rain, sun, dust etc. Further, in addition to the weather proofing,
Acoustic enclosures shall be designed such that the noise level of acoustic
enclosure DG set shall meet the requirement of MOEF. The diesel generator sets
should also conform to Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 as amended. The
enclosure shall be suitably designed for temperature control inside the enclosure.
The enclosure shall allow sufficient ventilation to the D.G. Set, so that temperature
inside the enclosure is limited to 50°C. The enclosure shall have suitable viewing
glass to view the local parameters of the DG Set through display unit of
Microprocessor based controller.
(b) Fresh air intake for the Engine should be available abundantly; without making the
Engine to gasp for air intake. A chicken mesh shall be provided for air inlet at
suitable location in enclosure.
(c) The Enclosure and the layout of the equipment inside shall be designed in such a
way that there is easy access to all the serviceable parts.
(d) Engine and Alternator used inside the Enclosure shall carry their respective
manufacturer’s Warranty and this shall not degrade their performance.
(e) Exhaust from the Engine shall be let off through Silencer arrangement to keep the
noise level within desired limits. Interconnection between silencer and engine
should be through stainless steel flexible hose/ pipe. Stack Height shall be governed
as per CPCB guidelines.
(f) All the Controls for Operation of the D.G. Set provided in AMF Panel &
Microprocessor based controller shall be easily accessible. There should be
provision for emergency shutdown from outside the enclosure.
7.2 Construction Features:
(a) The enclosure shall be fabricated from at least 14 Gauge CRCA sheet steel and of
modular construction for easy assembling and dismantling. The sheet metal
components shall be pre-treated by Seven Tank Process and Powder coated (PURO
Polyester based) both-inside and outside – for long life. The hardware and
accessories shall be high tensile grade. Enclosure shall be given a lasting anti-rust
treatment and finished with pleasant environment friendly paint. All the hardware
and fixtures shall be rust proof and able to withstand the weather conditions.
(b) Doors shall be large sized for easy access and provided with long lasting gasket to
make the enclosure sound proof. All the door handles shall be lockable type.
(c) The Enclosure shall be provided with anti-vibration pads (suitable for the loads and
vibration they are required to carry) with minimum vibration transmitted to the
surface the set is resting on.

(d) High quality rock wool of required density and thickness (as per Annexure-A) shall
be used with fire retardant thermo – setting resin to make the Enclosure sound
proof.
(e) Provision for Neutral/Body earthing shall be available. Points shall be available at
two side of the enclosure with the help of flexible copper wires from alternator
neutral, and electrical panel body respectively. The earthing point shall be isolated
through insulator mounted on enclosure.
8.0 DOCUMENTS
(a) Following drawings and data sheet shall be submitted for approval/information:
1) Data sheet for Engine, Alternator, Battery, DG Set Controller, AMF panel
and Enclosure
2) GA drawing of DG set
3) Layout of DG set in the enclosure along with sections
4) GA and schematic of AMF panel and DG Set Controller.
5) Rating Plate (in English & Hindi)
6) Drawings, datasheets, design calculations and erection, operation &
maintenance manual in hard & soft copies.
7) Certification and compliance for meeting noise level & emission parameters
and other requirements in accordance with latest Notification of
MOEF/CPCB.
(b) The DG Set shall be supplied with
1) DG Set test certificate

2) Engine Operation & maintenance Manual.
3) Engine Parts Catalogue.
4) Alternator Operation, maintenance & Spare parts Manual.
5) Alternator test certificate.
9.0 TESTS
9.1 Routine & Acceptance Tests

The Diesel generator set shall be tested for routine and acceptance tests in
accordance with the agreed FAT procedure as per the relevant IS/IEC standards.
9.2 Type Tests
Type test reports of engine and alternator as per relevant standard shall be
submitted for purchaser’s approval.
9.3 Commissioning Checks
In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the

Contractor shall carryout the following commissioning tests to be carried out at
site.
(a) Load Test

The engine shall be given test run for a period of atleast 6 hours. The set
shall be subjected to the maximum achievable load as decided by Purchaser
without exceeding the specified DG Set rating:
During the load test, half hourly records of the following shall be taken:
1) Ambient temperature
2) Exhaust temperature if exhaust thermometer is fitted
3) Cooling water temperature at a convenient point adjacent to the water
output from the engine jacket
4) Lubricating oil temperature where oil cooler fitted
5) Lubricating oil pressure
6) Colour of exhaust gas
7) Speed
8) Voltage, wattage and current output
9) Oil tank level
The necessary load to carry out the test shall be provided by the purchaser.
(b) Insulation Resistance Test for Alternator
Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the
alternator when tested with a 500V megger shall not be less than
IR=2x(rated voltage in KV)+1
(c) Check of Fuel Consumption
A check of the fuel consumption shall be made during the load run for the
purpose of proper tuning of the engine.
(d) Insulation Resistance of Wiring
Insulation resistance of control panel wiring shall be checked by 500V

Megger. The IR shall not be less than one mega ohm.
(e) Functional Tests
1) Functional tests on control panel AMF Panel & Controller

2) Functional test on starting provision on the engine
3) Functional tests on all Field devices (like Fuel Transfer Pump)
4) Functional tests of AVR and speed governor
(f) Measurement of Vibration
The vibration shall be measured at load as close to maximum achievable

load and shall not exceed 250microns.
(g) Noise Level check as per relevant standard
The Vibration & Noise Level tests shall be carried out with the DG set
operating at rated speed and at maximum achievable load. Necessary
correction for Test environment condition & background noise will be
applied as per IS:12065.

ANNEXURE-A
D.G. SET MAJOR TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
S.No. PARTICULARS
A ALTERNATOR
1.0 Net Rated Output at 40°C 250kVA 100kVA
temperature & 1000m of
altitude after reducing DG
Set auxiliaries load
2.0 Rated Terminal Voltage 415V AC 415 VAC
3.0 No. of Phases 3 3
4.0 Rated Power Factor 0.8 lag 0.8lag
5.0 Rated Speed 1500 RPM 1500 RPM
6.0 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
7.0 Standard BS 2613/IS 4722/IEC 60034; latest edition
8.0 Type of Exciter Used Brushless, Self-Excited
9.0 Class of Winding Insulation Class H Class H
10.0 Permissible Temperature Rise Class F Class F
11.0 Degree of Protection IP-23 IP-23
12.0 Overload Capacity 10% Overload for 1 hour in every 12 hours of
continuous running
13.0 Terminal Box Seven (7) output terminals (R, Y, B, R’, Y’, B’ & N)
14.0 Each output terminal suitable 2 Runs of 300 sq.mm XLPE 1 Run of 300
for cable size of cable sq.mm XLPE
cable
Neutral Formation Inside AMF Panel Inside AMF Panel
B ENGINE
1.0 Standard IS 10002/BS 5514/ISO 3046/ IS 13018; latest edition

2.0 RATING As per Manufacturer Datasheet
3.0 Rated Speed 1500 RPM 1500 RPM
4.0 No. of Strokes 4 4
5.0 Cylinder Design Multi-Cylinder Multi-Cylinder
6.0 Type of Cylinder Arrangement V-Type or Inline Type
7.0 Method of Aspiration Turbo-Charged
8.0 Method of Engine Cooling Water-Cooled (Through Radiator)
9.0 Method of Starting Battery Operated Auto Start
10.0 Ignition Voltage 24V DC 24V DC
11.0 Type of Governor Electronic as per ISO 8528 or latest IS/BS standards
12.0 Balancing Dynamically balanced flywheel
13.0 Air-Suction & Exhaust Suction of air shall be from indoor for ventilation and
exhaust flue gasses will be let out to outside
atmosphere. & Condensate traps shall be provided on
the exhaust pipe.
14.0 Air Filter Dry Type (Replaceable)
15.0 Lubricating System Forced (Closed Loop)
16.0 Fuel Type High Speed Diesel oil (HSD) as per IS:1460
17.0 Fuel Injection Mechanical/Electronic
18.0 Emission Levels In accordance with latest Notifications of
MOEF/CPCB
(certificate to be furnished)
C ENGINE-ALTERNATOR
SET
1.0 Maximum Starting Time 30 Sec 30 Sec

2.0 Interval Between Starting 10 Sec 10 Sec
Impulse
3.0 Maximum no. of starting 3 3
Impulse
4.0 Maximum Voltage Variation ±1% ±1%
5.0 Maximum Frequency Variation ±2% ±2%
6.0 Voltage Adjustment Range 90% to 110% of Nominal Voltage
7.0 Balancing Dynamic Balanced Rotor to minimize vibration
8.0 Maximum Vibration Level 250 microns 250 microns
9.0 Coupling of Engine & Directly coupled by means of self-aligning flexible

Alternator flange coupling & with a protecting guard to avoid
accidental contact
10.0 Mounting Arrangement DG set enclosed in the acoustic enclosure shall be
installed on Concrete Pedestal. Adequate number of
anti-vibration mounting pads shall be fixed on the
common base frame on which the engine and the
alternator shall be mounted to isolate the vibration
from passing on to the common base frame or the
foundation of the D.G. Set.
D BATTERY
1.0 Type Lead-Acid Lead-Acid

2.0 Capacity in AH 180 AH 150 AH
3.0 Voltage of each Battery Set 24V DC 12V DC
4.0 No. of Battery Set 2 Nos. (i.e. Main + Standby) 2 Nos. (i.e. Main
+ Standby)
E BATTERY CHARGER
1.0 Type of Charger SMPS based SMPS based

2.0 Input 230V AC, 50 HZ, Single Phase
3.0 Output Current 12 Amps 10 Amps
4.0 Output Voltage As per 24V battery system As per 12V
battery system
5.0 Qty. of Battery Charger 2 sets 2 sets
6.0 Automatic Float/Boost Charge Yes Yes
Provision
7.0 Ripple Not more than 1% (RMS)
F FUEL TANK & FUEL

PUMP
1.0 Capacity 990 ltrs (1 No.) 990 ltrs (1 No.)

2.0 Material of Construction MS Sheet MS Sheet
3.0 Sheet Thickness (Minimum) 2 mm 2 mm
4.0 Accessories Level Indicator, Filling Inlet with removable screen,
outlet, drain plug, an air vent, air-breather and
necessary piping
5.0 Painting Oil Resistant Paint
6.0 Erection In accordance with Indian Explosive Act of 1932
7.0 Location Outside Acoustic Enclosure
8.0 Fuel Pump Type Electrically Driven
9.0 Fuel Pump Rating Adequate to fill the fuel tank in 30 minutes
G ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
1.0 Minimum Sheet Thickness 2 mm 2 mm

2.0 Acoustic Material Rockwool Rockwool
(Min.thickness 50mm) (Min.thickness
50mm)
3.0 Max. Noise Level 75 dBA at a distance of 1 meter (as per CPCB
Norms)

ANNEXURE-B
DG SET CONTROLLER FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
Measurement Shutdown Warning Indication (LED)

Voltage : 3 Ph AC Over Speed On operation of any DG Set Running
Protection Trip
Current: 3 Ph AC Over Load Fail to Crank Local/Remote Mode
Frequency Under Voltage Low Battery Manual/Auto
Voltage
Power Output Over Voltage High Battery Warning
(KVA) Voltage
Power Output (KW) Low lube Oil DG Set Failed to Shutdown
Pressure Start in 30 sec.
Power Factor High Coolant Low Level in Fuel
Temperature Tank
Engine Speed High Temperature
inside enclosure
Running Hours Alternator Fault
Battery Voltage
Lube Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Notes:
1. Controller shall have configurable Time Delay for START/STOP of DG
Set.
2. Controller shall have configurable cranking function to configure the
number of cranking cycles (atleast 3 cranks) and time duration between
successive cranks.
3. Controller shall also have the facility for adjustment of speed and voltage
including fine adjustments in remote as well as in local mode.
4. Controller shall be IEC 61850 compliant (either directly or through a
converter) for purpose of remote monitoring of the DG Set.

14. LIGHTING SYSTEM

1 LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.1 GENERAL
The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of various lighting fixtures complete with lamps,
supports and accessories, ceiling fans with electronic regulators, exhaust fans with
accessories, lighting panels, Sub-Lighting Panels, lighting poles with distribution
boxes, PVC conduits, lighting wires, G.I. earth wire, receptacles, tag block &
telephone socket, switchboards, modular switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes
complete with accessories, lighting transformer, aluminum ladders for
maintenance.
1.1.1 General Design Criteria

The illumination system shall be designed on the basis of best engineering
practice and shall ensure uniform, reliable, aesthetically pleasing and glare free
illumination. The finish of the fixtures shall be such that no bright spots are
produced either by direct light source or by reflection. The diffusers/ louvers used
in the lighting fixtures shall be made of impact resistant polystyrene sheet and
shall have no yellowing property over a prolonged period Illumination. The
Lighting Fixture to be used in different areas shall be as per BoQ.
1.1.2 For Indoor and Outdoor Illumination, detailed drawings showing the lighting
layout, Conduit layout and electrical distribution diagram shall be prepared by the
Contractor and submitted for approval. The above layout drawings will include
disposition and location of lighting fixtures, receptacles, lighting panels etc. While
finalizing the detailed layout of lighting fixtures, the position/location and layout
of equipments should be taken into account to have adequate illumination at
desired locations.
The lux levels to be maintained shall be as per following:
Sl No Area Average Lux Level
1. Control Room Building, SN. Area Average Lux
Fire Fighting Pump level at floor level
house
i) Control Room, 350 Lux
Office, Conference
Room etc.
ii) Battery room, 100 Lux
Passage, Pantry,
Toilets, Corridors etc
iii) All other rooms 200 Lux
The minimum lux level to average lux level ratio should not be less than 0.6
(i.e Emin/Eav> 0.6 ). The maintenance factor for indoor illumination design
shall be considered as 0.8. The surface reflectance for ceiling/wall/floor shall
be 50/30/10.
2 Switchyard - 50 lux on main Equipments(i.e, Transformer,
Reactor ISO, CB, CT, CVT, SA) at first level
(Equipment connections level.)
- 20 lux on balance area of switchyard and
street / Road at ground level
The minimum lux level to average lux level ratio should not be less than 0.3
(i.e Emin/Eav>0.3). The maintenance factor for outdoor illumination design
shall be considered as 0.65.
The contractor shall submit detailed calculation for reaching the above Lux level.
Contractor shall conform the Lux levels at different locations of the switch yard
and street lighting by measurement. In addition to the normal lighting provided in
the switchyard area to maintain the desired lux levels, few high beam fixtures on
swivel support shall be provided in strategic locations near equipments which
shall be kept normally OFF and these shall be switched ON in case of
maintenance work.
1.1.2.1 Indoor Illumination
Indoor illumination shall be done by LED Luminaries as per the requirement of
false ceiling and non-false ceiling of buildings.
1.1.2.2 Outdoor Illumination
Outdoor illumination shall be done by LED luminaries as per the requirement. For
Outdoor Switchyard area, LED fixtures shall be installed at gantry structures (For
400kV & below voltage level) & available lightning masts (if any). For other
outdoor areas, Street Lighting, lighting poles & nearby buildings (if any) shall be
used for installation of LED fixtures. Mounting structure /Accessories for
Mounting of LED Lighting Fixtures will be prefabricated and will be hot dip
galvanized. Additional firewall mounted Flood Lights, if required have to be
provided for Transformer & Reactors as specified in the BoQ.
Portable Flood Light Panel (PFLP): Portable Flood Light Panel alongwith
fixture is to be supplied, if required for maintenance purpose of the Substation.
1.2 LIGHTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The lighting system shall comprise of the following :
1.2.1 AC Normal Lighting
AC lights will be connected to AC lighting panels. All the lights connected to the
AC lighting system in different areas will be connected to the main lighting
distribution boards.
1.2.2 AC Emergency Lighting

This system will be available in control room building, Fire fighting pump house,
DG Set building & switchyard. AC lighting load will be connected to this system
which will be normally ‘ON’. The lighting panels of this system will be connected
to the Emergency lighting board which is fed from diesel generator during the
emergency. 50% of lighting fixtures shall be connected on AC emergency lighting.
1.2.3 D.C. Emergency lighting
DC emergency lighting fixtures shall be operated on the 220/110V DC system (as

per available Station DC Supply) and will be provided in the strategic locations
including Control Room Building, Fire Fighting Pump House, GIS Building and
other critical areas etc.
A few DC emergency lighting fixtures operated on the DC system will be provided
in the strategic locations including staircase, corridors, electrical rooms, Battery
charger room, LT switchgear room in control room building, Fire fighting pump
house and DG Set building so that the operating personnel can safely find their way
even during emergency of a total AC failure. These lights will be normally 'OFF'
and will be switched 'ON' automatically when under voltage occurs in the AC main
lighting distribution board. GLS lamp down lighters in false ceiling area and
Bulkhead fixtures in non false ceiling area to be used.
1.2.4 Portable Fixtures
Three numbers of battery operated, portable fixtures will be provided in the
Control room building and one number shall be provided in DG Set Building Cum
Fire fighting pump house. These fixtures will be provided at important locations in
the above mentioned areas.
1.2.4.1 Ceiling fans (1400 mm sweep, AC 230 volts ) shall be provided in DG Set building,
fire fighting pump house and non AC rooms in the control room building as shown
in the enclosed drawings. Wall mounted fans shall be provided in the conference
room, shift manager and substation incharge rooms in control room building.
Exhaust fans shall be provided in toilets and pantry.
1.5 One no. of aluminium ladder of each size shall be supplied by the contractor for
maintenance purpose.
1.6 The following specific areas are included in the scope of lighting:
(i) Switchyard Area.
(ii) Switchyard Control Room cum Administrative Office Building
(iii) DG Building cum Fire fighting pump house
(iv) Street lighting (peripherial) inside switchyard fencing (Street lighting shall
be as per Technical Specification using street lighting poles)
(v) Landscape Lighting around control room
1.7 For Outdoor Illumination

The switchyard and street lighting design, detailed drawings showing the lighting
layout and Electrical distribution diagram shall be prepared by the Contractor and

submitted for approval. The above layout drawings will include disposition and
location of lighting fixtures, receptacles, etc.
1.8 For Indoor Illumination
The conduit layout for substation buildings based on the tender drawings, Electrical
distribution diagram for substation buildings & for landscape lighting cable
schedule for substation yard etc. shall be prepared by the Contractor. All wiring
including telephone wiring (tinned two pair copper) shall be in concealed conduit.
Concealed MS junction boxes for sockets and light points shall be provided in all
the rooms of Control Room cum Administrative Office Building and DG Building
cum Fire Fighting pump house.
1.9 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with number that appear in the cable and
conduit schedules. Cables and conduits shall be tagged at their entrance and/or exit
from any piece of equipment, junction or pull box, floor opening etc.
1.10 The tag shall be made up of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely
attached to the cable by not less than two turns of G.I. wire. Cable tags shall be
rectangular in shape for power cables and circular shape for control cables.
1.10 Location of cables laid directly under ground shall be indicated clearly by cable
marker made of galvanised iron plate embedded in concrete block.
1.11 The location of under ground cable joints if any, shall be clearly indicated with
cable marker with an additional inscription "cable joint".
1.12 The marker, which is a concrete block, shall project 150 mm above ground and
shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every change of direction. It shall
also be located on both sides of the road or drain crossing.
2. DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
The Contractor shall and install the following equipment and accessories in
accordance with the specification.
2.1 LED LUMINAIRES

LED Luminaries shall be used for the lighting of all the indoor and outdoor areas.
In false ceiling area LED luminaries shall be recessed mounting type & in non-false
ceiling area the LED luminaries shall be surface mounting type. However,
conventional type Luminaire (HP Sodium vapour Lamps in High Flood Lighting)
may be used additionally in Switchyard area, as per BoQ.
Suitable heat sink with proper thermal management shall be provided in the
luminaries. All LED Luminaries shall be BSPTCL approved make. The marking on
luminaries & safety requirements of luminaries shall be as per IS standards.
Necessary Care shall be taken so that there is no water stagnation anywhere in the
Luminaries. The entire housing shall be dust and water proof protection as per IS
12063.

Sl. Description
1 Indoor Lighting
(All Luminaire used shall be of LED type only except for Emergency Lighting)
LED Lighting fixtures and receptacles (including accessories/ materials etc. as per
requirement like junction box, cable/wires, flexible conduits (if required) from junction
box to lighting fixtures, mounting arrangements)
a Supply of <15 Watt LED Lamp having minimum System Lumen Output of 1200 with
all accessories (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells) Confirming to IP:20
b Supply of complete fittings of 18/20 Watt LED Tube Light with all accessories (Make
Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells) Confirming to IP:20
c Supply of complete fittings of <2x20 Watt LED Tube Light having minimum System
Lumen Output of 3600 with all accessories (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells)
Confirming to IP:20
d Supply of complete fittings of <40 Watt LED Tube Light having minimum System
Lumen Output of 3400 with all accessories (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells)
Confirming to IP:20
e Lighting fixture Type- PF: as per Tech. Specification
(1x11 W CFL Lamp emergency light with Battery operated portable fixture with built
in chargeable Batteries and battery charger suitable for a lighting period of six hours)
2 Outdoor lighting (Switchyard and Street lighting)
(All Luminaire used shall be of LED type only. However, conventional type Luminaire
(HP Sodium vapour Lamps in High Flood Lighting) may be used additionally in
Switchyard area)
LED Lighting Fixtures and receptacles (including accessories/ materials etc. as per
requirement like junction box, cable/wires, flexible conduits (if required) from junction
box to lighting fixtures, mounting arrangements)
a Supply of Complete fitting of LED Flood Lighting Luminairs (<150 Watt) having
minimum System Lumen Output of 14000 with all accessories (Make
b Supply of Complete fitting of LED Flood Lighting Luminairs (<250 Watt) having
c Supply of Complete fitting of LED Flood Lighting Luminairs (<530 Watt) having
d Supply of Complete fitting of Post Top Lantern with all accessories with LED Lamp
40 to 45 Watt (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells) Confirming to IP:65
e Supply of Complete fitting of Street Light Luminairs with LED Lamp 110 to 130
Watt, with all accessories (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells) Confirming to IP:65
f Lighting fixture Type- SF1: as per Tech. Specification
(1x400W HP Sodium Vapour lamps in high flood lighting fixture mounted on Swivel
support, integral control gear (Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells)
g Lighting fixture Type- SF2: as per Tech. Specification
(2x400W HP Sodium Vapour lamps in high flood lighting, non-integral control gear
(Make Philips/CGL/Bajaj/ Havells)

2.2 LIGHTING PANELS
2.2.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES OF LIGHTINNG PANELS
i) Each panel shall be provided with one incoming triple pole Miniature Circuit
Breaker (MCB) with neutral link and outgoing MCBs. The panels shall
conform to IS-8623.
ii) All Outdoor Lighting Panels shall be Stainless sheet steel of Grade 304 and
shall be dust, weather and vermin proof. Panels shall be of thickness not less
than 1.5 mm smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. Stiffeners shall be
provided wherever necessary.
iii) The panels shall be of single front construction, front hinged and front
connected, suitable for either floor mounting on channels, sills or on
walls/columns by suitable M.S. brackets. Indoor Lighting panels shall be
modular flush mounted and wall embedded of slim depth.
iv) All panels shall have a dead front assembly provided with hinged door(s) and
with suitable locking arrangement.
v) All Outdoor panel’s removable covers and doors shall be gasketed all around
with neoprene/EPDM gaskets/ puff arrangement.
vi) The outdoor panels shall be suitable for cable/conduit entry from the bottom.
Suitable removable cable gland-plate shall be provided in the bottom of panels.
For indoor lighting panels the provision of cable/conduit entry shall be from
both top and bottom side with suitable removable gland plate. The thickness of
the gland plate shall be 3 mm. Necessary number of double compression brass
type cable gland shall be supplied, fitted on to these gland plates.
vii) The panels shall be so constructed as to permit free access to connection of

terminals and easy replacement of parts.
viii) Each panel shall have a caution notice fixed on it.
ix) Each panel will be provided with laminated as built circuit diagram suitably
pasted in the panel.
x) Main Bus Bars
Bus bars shall be of aluminum alloy conforming to IS: 5082 and shall have
adequate cross-section to carry the rated continuous current and withstand short
circuit currents. Maximum operating temperature of the bus bars shall not
exceed 85 deg. C. The bus bars shall be able to withstand a fault level of 9 kA
for 1 sec. for AC panels and 4 kA for 1 sec. for DC panels.
2.2.2 CONFIGURATION OF INDOOR AND OUTDOOR LIGHTING PANELS

Type of Panel Description Detail Of Feeders
ACP 1 Indoor AC Bus Bars: 415V, 63A, 3 phase 4 wire bus bars
Lighting Panel with Colored LED indication lamps with fuse
for each phase.
Incomer: One no. 415V, 63A TPN MCB with
300mA 63A Four Pole RCCB.
Outgoings: 18 nos. 230V, 16A – 32A Single
Phase feeder with Single Pole MCB and 1 no.
5/15A Switch with Socket.
Mounting: The indoor ACP shall be of slim
depth suitable for embedding in the wall and
will be flush mounted.
ACP 2 Outdoor- Bus Bars: 415V, 63A, 3 phase 4 wire bus bars
Switchyard AC with Colored LED indication lamps with fuse
Lighting panel for each phase.
Incomer: One no. 415V, 63A TPN MCB.
Outgoings: 6 nos., 230V, 20A Single Phase
feeder with Single Pole MCB and 3 Nos. 230V,
32A TPN MCB with suitable timer and
contactor for automatic switching and 1 no.
5/15A Switch with Socket.
Mounting: Suitable for Outdoor applications.
ACP 3 Outdoor - Bus Bars: 415V, 63A, 3 phase 4 wire bus bars
Street AC with Colored LED indication lamps with fuse
Lighting Panel for each phase.
Incomer: One no. 415V, 63A TPN MCB.
Outgoings: 3 nos. 32A TPN MCB with suitable
timer and contactor for automatic switching and
1 no. 5/15A Switch with Socket.
Mounting: Suitable for Outdoor applications.
DCP Indoor- Bus Bars: 220/110V DC (as applicable) 32A
DC Lighting two wire Bus Bar.
panel
Incomers: 220/110V DC (as applicable) with
one 32A DP Contactor backed up by 32A
double pole MCB.
Outgoings: 6 nos.16 A Double Pole MCB
Mounting: The indoor DCP shall be of slim
will be flush mounted.
SLP Outdoor Incomers: 4 pole 32A TPN MCB suitable for
Sublighting 415V AC supply
panel
Outgoings: 8 nos. terminal blocks suitable for
cable upto 16 sq. mm cable.
Mounting: Suitable for Outdoor applications
with Loop in and Loop out facility.
Sub-DB Indoor Type AC Incomers: 32A TPN MCB suitable for 415V
Sub Distribution AC supply.
Box
Outgoings: 6 nos. 230V, 16A Single Phase
feeder with Single Pole MCB.
Mounting: The MCB Box shall be of slim
will be flush mounted/surface mounted as per
site requirement.
Note:-
1) The number of outgoing feeders indicated above are minimum.
2) For outdoor use, enclosure shall be with IP-55 degree of protection as per IS:
13947 (Part-I)
2.5 RECEPTACLES
RO 15A, 240V, Outdoor Receptacle 2 pole, 3- pin type
R1 5/15A, 240V, Indoor Receptacle 3-pin type.
RP 63A, 415V, Interlocked switch socket, outdoor receptacle
2.6 SWITCH BOARDS

Modular type switches, 5/15 Amp. Receptacles.
2.7 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

Galvanised Rigid Steel Conduits of 19mm/25mm/32mm/40mm dia.
2.8 JUNCTION BOXES with 5 Nos.of terminal blocks
2.9 LIGHTING POLES - (Type A1 poles & Type E1 poles)
2.10 CEILING FANS-1400 mm Sweep with Electronic regulator
2.11 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

i) A type Aluminium ladder of 3 mtr vertical height.
ii) Cartwheel mounted aluminium ladder Vertical Height 7.5 Mtrs. (When Extended)
2.12 LIGHTING TRANSFORMER
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 100 kVA or above (in case the capacity of
transformer required is higher than 100 KVA as per approved calculations) / 25KVA (in
case of substations where highest voltage level is 132kV), 415/415 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz Dry
type natural air cooled lighting transformers. The technical parameters of these lighting
transformers are as follows:

Technical Parameters of Lighting Transformer
Type of transformer : Dry type natural air cooled Rating : 100 KVA or above 25
KVA (as applicable) Voltage ratio : 415/415 volts No. of phases : Three Frequency
: 50 Hz Winding connection : Dyn-1 Class of insulation : 'B' class Impedance : 4% ±
10% No. of taps & steps : 5, ± 5% in steps of 2.5% Ref. standard : IS:2026
The enclosure for the above transformer shall have degree of protection not less than IP-
42. The rating of lighting transformer should be suitable for lighting load. The contractor
shall submit the supporting calculation for the rating of lighting transformer.
3. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

3.1 General
All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed for continuous operation under
atmospheric conditions existing at site, without reduction in the life or without any
deterioration of materials, internal wiring.
3.2 Temperature Rise
All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed to have a low temperature rise
according to the relevant Indian Standards. The design ambient temperature shall be taken
as 50 deg.C.
3 .3 Supply Voltage
3.3.1 Lighting fixtures and accessories meant for 240V A.C. operation shall be suitable for
operation on 240V A.C. 50Hz, supply voltage variation of ± 10%, frequency variation of ±
5% and combined voltage and frequency variation of ± 10%. Technical
3.3.2 Lighting fixture and accessories meant for 220V DC operation shall be suitable for
operation on 220V DC with variation between 190 to 240 Volts.
3.4 Lighting Fixtures
The lighting fixtures shall be Philips or Bajaj or Crompton Greaves or Havells make only
except for fixtures type ‘DSM’ & ‘HL’ for which make has been specified elsewhere in
this section. The different types of lighting fixtures are also indicated elsewhere in this
Section.
3.4.1 All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The finish of the fixtures shall be
such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by reflection.
3.4.2 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with fluorescent tubes / incandesent
lamps/mercury vapour/sodium vapour lamps LED type luminaires and additional Sodium
Vapour lamps (specifically required for Outdoor Switchyard) as specified and shall be
suitably wired up.
3.4.3 Deleted.

3 4.4. High beam fixtures shall be suitable for pendant mounting and flood lights shall
have suitable base plate / frame for mounting on steel structural member. Hook mounted
high beam fixtures are not acceptable.
3.4.5 Each lighting fixture shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for
connection to 16 SWG GI earthing conductors.
3 .4 6. All light reflecting surfaces shall have optimum light reflecting co-efficient such as
to ensure the overall light output as specified by the manufacturer.
3.4.7 Height of fixtures should be such that it is easy to replace the lamps with normal
ladder/stool. In case the ceiling height is very high, the fixtures may be placed on the walls
for ground lighting.
3.5 ACCESSORIES
3.5.1 Reflectors
The reflectors shall be manufactured from sheet steel or aluminium as applicable. They
shall be securely fixed to the captive type.
3.5.2 Lamp holders and Starter Holders
Lamp holders/starter for incandescent lamps and HPMV/HPSV lamps shall be of screwed
type, manufactured in accordance with relevant standard and designed to give long and
satisfactory service.
3.5.3 Ballasts
a) The Ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with relevant
standard and function satisfactorily under site condition specified. The ballasts shall be
designed to have a long service life and low power loss.
b) Ballasts shall be mounted using self locking anti-vibration fixing and shall be easy to
remove without dismantling the fixtures. They shall be totally enclosed units.
c) The ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy duty type, filled with thermosetting
insulating moisture repellent polyester compound filled under pressure or vacuum. The
ballast wiring shall be of copper wire. They shall be free from hum. Ballasts which
produce humming sound shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor. Ballasts for high
pressure mercury vapour/ HPSV lamps shall be provided with suitable tappings to set the
voltage within the range specified. End connections and taps shall be brought out in a
suitable terminal block, rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure.
d) Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi-lamp fixtures.
3.5.4 Starters
Starters shall have bimetal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters shall be
replaceable without disturbing the reflector or lamps and without the use of any tool.
Starters shall have brass contacts and radio interference suppressing capacitor.
3.5.5 Capacitors
a) The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected across
the supply of individual lamp circuits.
b) The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as specified and shall
have a value of capacitance so as to correct the power factors of its corresponding lamp
circuit to the extent of 0.98 lag.
c) The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in a metal enclosure.
3.6 Lamps
3.6.1 General Lighting Services (GLS) lamps shall be provided with screwed caps and
shall be of 'clear' type unless otherwise specified.
3.7 The Bidder shall furnish typical wiring diagram for LED type luminaries, HPMV &
HPSV fitting including all accessories. The diagram shall include technical details of
accessories i.e. starters, chokes, capacitors etc.
3.8 Flexible conduits if required, for any fixture shall be deemed to be included in
Contractor’s scope.
4. RECEPTACLES
a) All receptacles shall be of cast steel/aluminium, heavy duty type, suitable for fixing on
wall/column and complete with individual switch.
b) In general the receptacles to be installed are of the following types :
i) Type RO-15A, 240V, 2 pole, 3 pin type with third pin grounded, metal clad with gasket
having cable gland entry suitable for 2Cx6 sq.mm. PVC/aluminium armoured cable and a
metallic cover tied to it with a metallic chain and suitable for installation in moist location
and or outdoor. The switch shall be of rotary type. Receptacles shall be housed in an
enclosure made out of 2 mm thick Gl sheet with hinged doors with padlocking
arrangements. Door shall be lined with good quality gasketing. This shall conform to IP-
55.
ii) Type RI The 5/15 amp 6 pin receptacles with switches will be of Modular type with
flush type switches and electroplated metal enclosures of approved make
iii) Type RP - 63A, 415V, 3 phase, 4 pin interlocked plug and switch with earthing
contacts. Other requirements shall be same as type RO. The receptacle shall be suitable
for 3.5C x 35/3.5Cx70 sq.mm. aluminium conductor cable entry and shall also be suitable
for loop-in and loop out connection of cables of identical size. Receptacle shall be suitable
for outdoor application. Receptacles shall be housed in a box made out of 2mm thick G.I.
sheet, with hinged door with padlocking arrangement. Door shall be lined with good
quality gasketing. This shall conform to IP-55.
5. SWITCH AND SWITCHBOARD
(a) All Switch board/boxes, 5/15 Amp Receptacles and electronic fan regulators located in
office/building areas shall be modular flush mounted type or brick wall with only the
switch knob projecting outside.
(b) Switch boards/boxes shall have conduit knock outs on all the sides. Adequate
provision shall be made for ventilation of these boxes.
(c) The exact number of switches including regulator for fans and layout of the same in
the switchboard shall be to suit the requirement during installation.
(d) The maximum number of luminaires ,controlled by one no 6 amp switch would 4
nos. For DC fixtures there will be no switch and the same shall be directly controlled
from DC LP
(e) The luminaires shall be wired in such a fashion that luminaires on each
phase are evenly distributed all over the room.
6. CONDUITS & CONDUIT ACCESSORIES

a) The conduits shall be Rigid PVC conduits of 20/25 /32/40 mm dia for Lighting,
Telephone wiring & LAN Cabling and shall be ISI marked conforming to IS:9537.
b) Flexible conduits wherever required shall be PVC type.
c) All conduits accessories shall be ISI marked.
d) Galvanized Steel Conduits for Surface Conductor (wherever applicable).
7. JUNCTION BOXES
7.1 The junction boxes shall be concealed type for indoor lighting and suitable for
mounting on columns, lighting poles, structures etc., for outdoor lighting.
7.2 Junction boxes shall be of square/rectangular type of 1.6 mm sheet steel with minimum
6 mm thick pressure diecast aluminium material LM-6 and shall have bolted cover with
good quality gasket lining.
7.3 The junction box and cover shall be hot dip galvanised.
7.4. The junction boxes shall be complete with conduit knockouts/threaded nuts and
provided with terminal strips .The junction boxes shall be suitable for termination of
conduit/glands of dia 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm on all sides. The junction boxes
shall be provided with 4 way terminals suitable for two numbers 10 sq. mm. wire & for
street lighting/switchyard lighting suitable for 2 numbers 4C x 16 Sq.mm Al. cable.
7.5 The junction boxes shall have the following indelible markings
(i) Circuit Nos. on the top.
(ii) Circuit Nos. with ferrules (inside) as per drawings.
(iii) DANGER sign in case of 415 volt junction box.

7.6 The junction boxes shall be weather proof type with gaskets conforming to IP 55 as per
IS:13947 (Part I) . The conduit connections shall also be properly sealed to prevent entry of
water.
8. TERMINAL BLOCKS
8.1 Each terminal shall be suitable for terminating upto 2 Nos. 10 sq.mm. stranded
Aluminium Conductors without any damage to the conductors or any looseness of
connections. Terminal strips provided in street - lighting poles shall be suitable for
terminating upto 2 nos. 4C x 16 sq. mm aluminium cables.
9. PULL OUT BOXES
9.1. The pull out boxes shall be concealed type for indoor lighting and suitable for
mounting on column, structures etc., for outdoor lighting. The supply of bolts, nuts and
screws required for the erection shall be included in the installation rates.
9.2 The pull out boxes shall be circular of cast iron or 16 SWG sheet steel and shall have
cover with good quality gasket lining.
9.3 The pull out boxes and cover shall be hot dip galvanised.
9.4 The pull out boxes shall be completed with conduit knock outs/threaded hubs and
provided at approximately 3 meters intervals in a conduit run.
10. LIGHTING PANELS (L.P.)
10.1 Each panel shall be provided with one incoming triple pole MCB with neutral link and
outgoing miniature circuit breakers as per clause 2.0. The panels shall conform to IS-8623.
10.2 Constructional Features
10.2.1 Panels shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust, weather and vermin proof.
Sheet steel used shall be of thickness not less than 2.00 mm (cold rolled) or 2.5 mm (hot
rolled) smoothly finished, levelled and free from flaws. Stiffners shall be provided
wherever necessary.The indoor lighting panels will be ready made DB of minimum 20 swg
sheet thickness .
10.2.2 The panels shall be of single front construction, front hinged and front connected,
suitable for either floor mounting on channels, sills or on walls/columns by suitable M.S.
brackets.
10.2.3 Panels shall have a dead front assembly provided with hinged door(s) and out door
panels will be with padlocking arrangement with single key supplied in duplicate.
10.2.4 All out door panels , removable covers, doors and plates shall be gasket all around
with neoprene gaskets.

10.2 5 The panels shall be suitable for cable/conduit entry from the top and bottom.
Suitable removable cable gland-plate shall be provided on the top and bottom of panels.
Necessary number of double compression cable gland shall be supplied, fitted on to this
gland plate. The glands shall be screwed on top and made of tinned brass.
10.2.6 The panels shall be so constructed as to permit free access to connection of

terminals and easy replacement of parts.
10.2.7 Each panel shall have a caution notice fixed on it.

10.2.8 Each panel will be provided with directory holder in which printed and laminated as
built circuit directory would be kept
10.2.9 Each Outdoor lighting panel shall be provided with one no. ‘ON’ indicating lamp
for each phase alongwith fuses.For indoor lighting panels din mounted phase indication
lamps will be provided , mounted along side of the MCB
10.3 Main Bus Bars
10.3.1 Bus bars shall be of aluminium alloy conforming to IS:5082 and shall have adequate
cross-section to carry the rated continuous and withstand short circuit currents. Maximum
operating temperature of the bus bars shall not exceed 85 deg. C. The bus bars shall be
able to withstand a fault level of 9 kA for 1 sec. for AC panels and 4 KA for 1 sec. for DC
panels.The Indoor lighting panels shall have copper bus bar only.
10.4 Residual Current Circuit Breakerss (RCCB)

10.4.1 For indoor panels 63A 4pole 300 mA conforming IS 12640 will be provided
along with incomer
10.5 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
a) The miniature circuit breakers shall be suitable for manual closing, opening, automatic
tripping under overload and short circuit. The MCBs shall also be trip free.
b) Single pole as well as three pole versions shall be furnished as required in the Schedule
of Lighting Panels.
c) The MCBs and panel MCCB together shall be rated for full fault level. In case the
MCB rating is less than the specified fault level the bidder shall co-ordinate these breaker
characteristics with the back up MCCB in such a way that if fault current is higher than
breaker rating, the MCCB should blow earlier than the breaker. If the fault current is less
than MCB breaking capacity, MCB shall operate first and not the incomer MCCB.
d) The MCBs shall be suitable for housing in the lighting panels and shall be suitable for
connection with stranded copper wire connection at both the incoming and outgoing side
by copper lugs or for bus bar connection on the incoming side.
e) The terminals of the MCBs and the ‘open’ ‘close’ and ‘trip’ conditions shall be clearly
and indelibly marked.

f) The tenderer shall check and co-ordinate the ratings of MCBs with respect to starting
characteristics of discharge lamps. The vendor has to furnish overload and short circuit
curve of MCB as well as starting characteristics curves of lamps for Employer’s approval.
g) The MCB shall generally conform to IS:8828.
10.6 Contactors
Contactors shall be of the full voltage, direct-on line air break, single throw, electro-
magnetic type. They shall be provided with atleast 2-’NC’ and 2’NO’ auxiliary contacts.
Contactor shall be provided with the three element, positive acting, ambient temperature
compensated time lagged, hand reset type thermal overload relay with adjustable settings
to suit the rated current. Hand reset button shall be flush with the front of the cabinet and
suitable for resetting with starter compartment door closed. The Contactor shall be suitable
for switching on Tungsten filament lamp also. The bidder shall check the adequacy of the
Contactors rating wire with respect to lighting load.
10.7 Push Buttons
All push buttons shall be of push to actuate type having 2 ‘NO’ and 2 ‘NC’ self
reset contacts. They shall be provided with integral escutcheon plates engraved with their
functions. Push buttons shall be of reputed make.
10.8 Labels
a) The lighting panels shall be provided on the front with panel designation labels on a 3
mm thick plastic plate of approved type. The letter shall be black engraved on white back
ground.
b) All incoming and outgoing circuits shall be provided with labels. Labels shall be made
of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicold. Labels shall have white letters on black or dark
blue background.
10.9 Earthing Terminals
Panels shall be provided with two separate and distinct earthing terminals suitable to
receive the earthing conductors of size 50x6 G.S. Flat.
10.10 Type test reports for following tests on all lighting panels shall be submitted for
approval.
(i) Wiring continuity test

(ii) High voltage (2.5 KV for 1 minute) and insulation test
(iii) Operational test
(iv) Degree of protection (not less than IP-55 test on outdoor Lighting Panels and IP-52
test on indoor Lighting Panels as per IS 13947 (part I))
(v) Heat run test
17.0 TYPE TEST REQUIREMENT:
a) Lighting Panels, Receptacles, Junction Boxes etc. shall conform to
following degree of protection:
(i) Installed outdoor: IP- 55
(ii) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31
(iii) Installed in covered area: IP-52
(iv) Installed indoor in non-air conditioned area where possibility of
entryof water is limited: IP-41.
(v) Wiring continuity test
(vi) High voltage (2.5 KV for 1 minute) and insulation test
(vii) Operational test
(viii) Heat run test
b) Lighting fixtures LED type shall conform to type test requirements of

LM-79, LM-80 and TTC.
10.11 Lighting Transformer
Lighting transformer shall be located in MCC room, in seperate enclosure. Enclosure shall
have degree of protection not less than IP-42 as per IS-13947 (Part-I).
11. Emergency Portable Lighting Fixtures

11.1 The portable fixtures shall have a built in battery rated for six hours, battery chargers
and solid state inverters. These shall be of approved make.
11.2 The portable fixtures shall be of a single unit, completely tropicalised and suitable for
prolonged use with no maintenance.
11.3 The portable fixtures shall be supplied and necessary supporting brackets of
galvanised steel suitable for wall/column mounting shall also be supplied.
11.4 The portable fixture shall come up automatically in the event of failure of normal
supply.
12. LIGHTING POLES
12.1 The Contractor shall supply, store and install the following types of steel tubular
lighting poles required for street lighting.
a) Type A1 Street Lighting Pole - for one fixture

b) Type E1 Post top lantern pole - for one fixture
12.2 Street/flood light poles shall conform to the enclosed drawings. In front of control
room building , DG Set and Fire Fighting Buildings, decorative post top lantern (Type E1)
poles and Bollards shall be installed as per the quantities given in the tender drawing.
12.3 Lighting poles shall be complete with fixing brackets and junction boxes. Junction
boxes should be mounted one meter above ground level.
12.4 The lighting poles shall be coated with bituminous preservating paint on the inside as
well as on the embedded outside surface. Exposed outside surface shall be coated with two
coats of metal primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium).

12.5 The galvanised sheet steel junction box for the street lighting poles shall be
completely weather proof conforming to IP-55 and provided with a lockable door and HRC
fuse mounted on a fuse carrier and fuse base assembly. The fuses & junction box shall be
as specified in the specification. However, terminals shall be stud type and suitable for 2
nos. 16 sq.mm. cable.
12.6 Wiring from junction box at the bottom of the pole to the fixture at the top of the pole
shall be done through 2.5 sq. mm wire.
12.7 Distance of centre of pole from street edge should be approximately 1000 to 1200
mm.
12.8 Earthing of the poles should be connected to the switchyard main earth mat wherever
it is available and the same should be earthed through 3M long, 20 mm dia, earth electrode.
13. CEILING & WALL MOUNTED FANS AND REGULATORS

13.1 The contractor shall supply and install 1400 mm sweep ceiling fans complete with
electronic regulator and switch, suspension rod, canopy and accessories.The wall mounted
fans shall be of 400 mm sweep, Exhaust fans shall be of 300mm size.
13.2 The contractor shall supply and install the switch, electronic regulator and board for
mounting switch and electronic regulator for celling fans.
13.3 Winding of the fans and regulators shall be insulated with Class-E insulating
material. Winding shall be of copper wire.
13.4 Electronic regulator with smooth control shall be provided.

13.5 Fans and electronic regulators shall be of Crompton Greaves / Bajaj Electricals / Usha
Electricals/ Havells make.
14. LIGHTING WIRES
14.1 The wiring used for lighting shall be standard products of reputed manufacturers.
14.2 The wires shall be of 1100 V grade, PVC insulated product of reputed manufacturers.
14.3 The conductor sizes for wires used for point wiring beyond lighting panels shall be
single core 4 sq. mm., 6 sq.mm and 10 sq.mm stranded aluminium wires and 2.5 sq.mm, 4
sq.mm, 6 sq.mm and 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper wire.
14.4 The wires used for connection of a lighting fixture from a nearest junction box or for
loop-in loop-out connection between two fluorescent fixtures shall be single core copper
stranded conductor, 1100V grade flexible PVC insulated cords, unsheathed, conforming to
IS:694 with nominal conductor cross sectional areas of 2.5 sq. mm.
14.5 The wires shall be colour coded as follows:

Red for R - Phase
Yellow for Y - Phase
Blue for B - Phase
Black for Neutral
White for DC (Positive)
Grey for DC (Negative)
15. PAINTING OF SHOP MADE ITEMS
15.1 All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the following procedure
and in accordance with IS:6005 'Code of Practice for Phosphating Iron and Steel'.
15.2 Oil grease and dirt shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
15.3 Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
15.4 After phosphating through rinsing shall be carried out with clean water, followed by
final rinsing with diluted dichromate solution and oven drying.
15.5 The phosphate coating shall be sealed by the application of two coats of ready mixed
stoving type metal primer (comprising of red oxide and Zinc chromate in a
synthetic medium). The first coat may be 'flash dried' while the second coat shall be stoved.
15.6 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied with each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat for the external of
panels shall be applied after completion of tests.The panels can also be powder coated
instead of painting after surface treatment as given above.
15.7 Both outside and inside of lighting panel, sheet metal fabricated junction boxes etc.
and outside of lighting fixtures shall be finished in light grey (IS-5 shade 631). Inside of
lighting fixtures shall be finished in white. The colour of indoor lighting panels should
match with colour of wall.
15.8 Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly different shade so as to
enable inspection of the painting.
15.9 The final finished thickness of paint film on steel shall not be less than 100 microns
and shall not be more than 150 microns.The final thickness of powder coating will not be
less than 50 microns. For indoor lighting panels the painting will be as per approved
manufacturers specification.
15.10 Finished painted appearance on equipment shall present on aesthetically pleasing

appearance, free from dents and uneven surfaces.
16. LIGHTING SYSTEM INSTALLATION WORKS
16.1 General
16.1.1 In accordance with the specified installation instructions as shown on

manufacturer’s drawings or as directed by Employer, Contractor shall unload, erect, install,
test and put into commercial use all the electrical equipment included in the contract.
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanship manner so that it is level, plumb
square and properly aligned and oriented. Tolerances shall be as established in
manufacturers drawing or as stipulated by Purchaser.
16.1.2 All apparatus, connections and cabling shall be designed so as to minimise risk of
fire or any damage which will be caused in the event of fire.
16.2 Conduit System
16.2.1 Contractor shall supply, store and install conduits required for the lighting
installation as specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the installation
complete, including but not limited to pull out boxes (as specified in specification ordinary
and inspection tees and elbow, checknuts, male and female bushings (brass or galvanised
steel), caps, square headed make plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes, conduits
terminal boxes, glands,
gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be
supplied by the Contractor. The conduit fittings shall be of the same material as
conduits.The contractor shall also supply 19 mm PVC conduit and accessories for
telephone wiring.
16.2.2 All unarmoured cables shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting
fixtures, receptacles. etc.
16.2.3 Size of conduit shall be suitably selected by the Contractor.

16.2.4 Conduit support shall be provided at an interval of 750 mm for horizontal runs and
1000 mm for vertical runs.
16.2.5 Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by
saddles or U-bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the
building steel by welding and to concrete or brick work by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs.
Wooden plug inserted in the masonary or concrete for conduit support is not acceptable.
16.2.6 Where conduits are alongwith cable trays they shall be clamped to supporting steel
at an interval of 600 mm.
16.2.7 For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base
compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the
conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.
16.2.8 For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate
wiring.
16.2.9 Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock
nut inside and outside the box.
16.2.10 Conduits joints and connections shall be made through water-tight and rust proof
by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for
application on embedded conduit and red lead for exposed conduit.
16.2.11 The entire metallic conduit system, shall be embedded, electrically continuous and
thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be provided
around the joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit.

16.2.12 Conduits and fittings shall be properly protected during construction period against
mechanical injury. Conduit ends shall be plugged or capped to prevent entry of foreign
material.
16.3 Wiring
16.3.1 Wiring shall be generally carried out by PVC insulated wires in conduits. All wires
in a conduit shall be drawn simultaneously. No subsequent drawings of wires is
permissible.
16.3.2 Wires shall not be pulled through more than two equivalent 90 deg. bends in a
single conduit run. Where required, suitable junction boxes shall be used.
16.3.3 Wiring shall be spliced only at junction boxes with approved type terminal strip.
16.3.4 For lighting fixtures, connection shall be teed off through suitable round conduit or
junction box, so that the connection can be attended without taking down the fixture.
16.3.5 For vertical run of wires in conduit, wires shall be suitably supported by means of
wooden/hard rubber plugs at each pull/junction box.
16.3.6 Maximum two wires can be terminated to each way of terminal connections.
16.3.7 Separate neutral wires are to be provided for each circuit.
16.3.8 AC and DC wiring should not run through the same conduit.
16.4 Lighting Panels
16.4.1 The lighting panels shall be erected at the locations to be finalised during detailed
engineering.
16.4.2 Suitable foundations/supporting structures for all outdoor type lighting panels shall
be provided by the Contractor.
16.5 Foundation & civil works
16.5.1 Foundation for street lighting poles, panel foundation and transformer foundation
shall be done by the Contractor..
16.5.2 All final adjustment of foundation levels, chipping and dressing of foundation
surfaces, setting and grouting of anchor bolts, sills, inserts and flastening devices shall be
carried out by the Contractor including minor modification of civil works as may be
required for erection.
16.5.3 Any cutting of masonary / concrete work, which is necessary shall be done by
the Contractor at his own cost and shall be made good to match the original work.

15. BATTEY AND BATTEY CHARGER

BATTEY AND BATTEY CHARGER
Table of contents

1.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMNTS
1.2 Battery
1.3 Battery Charger
Annexure-I

SECTION: BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
1.1. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1. All materials/components used in battery chargers and batteries shall be free from
flaws and defects and shall conform to the relevant Indian/IEC standards and
good engineering practice.
1.1.2. For 220 kV sub-stations, DC System shall consist of t wo Fl oat an d float-

cum-boost chargers and two battery sets for each of 250V and 48 V systems
respectively.
1.1.3. For 132 kV sub-stations, DC System shall consist of t w o F l o a t a n d float-

cum-boost chargers and two battery sets for 250V system. For 48 V system,
DC scheme shall consist of two (2) battery and two(2) float-cum-boost chargers.
1.1.4. Bidder shall select number of cells, float and Boost voltage to achieve following
system requirement:
System Maximum Minimum voltage available when
Voltage Voltage during no charger working and
Float operation battery fully
250 Volt 275 Volt discharged
225 Volt upto 1.85V per cell.
48 Volt 52.8 Volt 43.2 Volt
Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of battery sizing, selection of number of

cells, float and Boost voltages during detailed engineering for Owners acceptance.
Battery sizing calculations shall be done as per IEEE- 485 on the basis of
following duty cycle:
Load Duration Type Of Loads
Continuous Load 3 hours Relays, IEDs, Station HMIs, spring charging,
250V Isolator interlocking load, Miscellaneous
DC permanently connected loads etc.
Emergency Load 1 hour Substation emergency lighting loads.
System
Momentary Load 1 minute Breaker closing, Tripping loads (taking
simultaneous occurrence as per system)
Continuous Load 3 hours Continuous load associated with PLCs.(when

48V DC speech is not working)
System Momentary Load 15 minute Loads associated with PLCs (when speech is
working)
1.2. Battery
1.2.1. Type

The DC Batteries shall be VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead-Acid) type and shall
be Normal Discharge type. These shall be suitable for a long life under
continuous float operations and occasional discharges. Air-conditioning shall be
provided in Battery room the requirement of which has been specified elsewhere
in the Technical Specification. The 250 V DC system is unearth and 48 V DC
system is + ve earth system.
1.2.2. Constructional Requirements
The design of battery shall be as per field proven practices. Partial plating of cells
is not permitted. Paralleling of cells externally for enhancement of capacity is not
permitted. Protective transparent front covers with each module shall be provided
to prevent accidental contact with live module/electrical connections.
1.2.3. Containers
The container material shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility

and shall be acid resistant. The material shall meet all the requirements of VRLA
batteries and be consistent with the life of battery. The container shall be fire
retardant and shall have an Oxygen Index of at least 28 %. The porosity of the
container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape except from the
regulation valve. The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such
as to handle the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition.
Cell shall not show any deformity or bulge on the sides under all working
conditions. The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of
transport, storage and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray.
1.2.4. Cell Covers
The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container
material and permanently fixed with the container. It shall be capable to withstand
internal pressure without bulging or cracking. It shall also be fire retardant. Fixing
of Pressure Regulation Valve & terminal posts in the cover shall be such that the
seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electro-static spark are prevented.
1.2.5. Separators
The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells, shall be of glass mat or

synthetic material having high acid absorption capability, resistant to sulphuric
acid and good insulating properties. The design of separators shall ensure that
there is no misalignment during normal operation and handling.
1.2.6. Pressure Regulation Valve
Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be
self re-sealable and flame retardant. The valve unit shall be such that it cannot be
opened without a proper tool. The valve shall be capable to withstand the internal
cell pressure specified by the manufacturer.

1.2.7. Terminal Posts
Both the +ve and –ve terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination
and shall ensure its consistency with the life of the battery. The surface of the
terminal post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated
with an acid resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any
other metal part which is in contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same
alloy as that of the plates or of a proven material that does not have any harmful
effect on cell performance. Both +ve and –ve posts shall be clearly and
unambiguously identifiable.
1.2.8. Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves
Where it is not possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery,
separate non-corroding lead or copper connectors of suitable size shall be
provided to enable connection of the cells. Copper connections shall be suitably
lead coated to withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid at a very high rate of
charge or discharge.
Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of copper, brass or stainless
steel. Copper or brass nuts and bolts shall be effectively lead coated to prevent
corrosion. Stainless steel bolts and nuts can be used without lead coating.
All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon sleeves for
reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive environment.
1.2.9. Flame Arrestors
Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas
escaped during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not
affect the performance of the cell.
1.2.10. Battery Bank Stand
All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall
be properly painted with the acid resistant paint. The suitable insulation shall be
provided between stand/frame and floor to avoid the grounding of the
frame/stand.
1.2.11. Capacity Requirements
When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated
capacity, corrected at 27º Celsius) before any of the cells in the battery bank
reaches 1.85V/cell.
The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted
condition (1.75V/cell) within 10 hrs up to 90% state of charge. All the cells in a
battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float
voltage throughout the life.

The capacity (corrected at 27ºCelcius) shall also not be less than C and not more
than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The
battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged
battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate:
(a) After Six minutes of discharge : 1.98V/cell
(b) After Six hours of discharge : 1.92V/cell
(c) After 8 hours of discharge : 1.85V/cell
(d) After 10 hours of discharge : 1.75V/cell
Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35º Celcius

for a period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall
achieve 85% of its rated capacity within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated
capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell
in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the average voltage throughout the
storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt hour
efficiency shall be better than 80%.
1.2.12. Expected Battery Life
The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at

80% Depth of discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27º Celsius. DOD
(Depth of Discharge) is defined as the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in
Ampere-hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to its rated capacity.
The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float operation.
1.2.13. Routine Maintenance of Battery system
For routine maintenance of battery system, the contractor shall supply 1 set of
following tools:
a) Torque wrench.
b) Cell test voltmeter(-3-0-+3) volts with least count of 0.01Volt.
1.2.14. Type Test of Battery
1.2.14.1. Contractor shall submit type test reports of following tests as per IEC 60896-21
& IEC 60896-22, 2004. The type test reports shall be submitted in accordance
with the requirements stipulated in clause no. 9.2 of Technical Specification,
Section: GTR except that the requirement of tests having been conducted within
last five years as mentioned therein shall not be applicable).
S.No. Description of test

1. Gas emission
2. High current tolerance
3. Short circuit current and d.c. internal resistance
4. Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources
5. Protection against ground short propensity

6. Content & durability of required markings
7. Material identification
8. Valve operation
9. Flammability rating of materials
10. Intercell connector performance
11. Discharge Capacity
12. Charge retention during storage
13. Float service with daily discharges for reliable mains power
14. Recharge behavior
15. Service life at an operating temperature of 400 C for brief duration
exposure time.
16. Impact of a stress temperature of 600 C for brief duration exposure time
with 3 h rate discharge test.
17. Abusive over-discharge
18. Thermal runaway sensitivity
19. Low temperature sensitivity
20. Dimensional sensitivity at elevated internal pressure and temperature
21. Stability against mechanical abuse of units during installation
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60896-21 & IEC 60896-22, 2004
1.2.14.2. List of Factory & Site Tests for Battery
Sl. Factory Site

Test
No. Tests Tests
1. Physical Verification √
2. C/10 Capacity test on the cell √
3. 8 Hrs. Charge and 15 minutes discharge test at full √
rated load
1.2.15. Installation and commissioning

1.2.15.1. Manufacturer of Battery shall supervise the installation and commissioning and
perform commissioning tests as recommended in O&M manual / or relevant
standards. All necessary instruments, material, tools and tackles required for
installation, testing at site and commissioning are to be arranged by Battery
manufacturer/ Contractor
1.2.16. Contractor shall be submitted following documents for approval:
a) Data sheet as per Annexure-I

b) GA of cell and layout drawing

c) Discharge Data for 10 Hour, 8 Hour, 3 Hour, 2 Hour, 1 Hour, 15 Minutes
and One Minute indicating capacity factors for end cell voltage of 1.75 V
& 1.85 V.
d) Temperature correction factors
e) Installation and commissioning Instructions
f) O & M Manual
1.3. Battery Charger

The DC system for 250 V DC is unearthed and for 48 V DC is +ve earthed. The
Battery Chargers as well as their automatic regulators shall be of static type and
shall be compatible with offered VRLA batteries. All battery chargers shall be
capable of continuous operation at the respective rated load in float charging
mode, i.e. Float charging the associated Lead-Acid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts
per cell while supplying the DC load. The chargers shall also be capable of Boost
charging the associated DC Battery at 2.28 to 2.32 volts per cell at the desired
rate.
Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature
rise of battery as per manufacturer’s recommendation to avoid thermal runaway.
Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks
and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The
manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger.
1.3.1. All Battery Chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and
manual control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided
for selecting the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or
manual. When on automatic control mode during Float charging, the Charger
output voltage shall remain within +1% of the set value, for AC input voltage
variation of +10%, frequency variation of +5%, a combined voltage and
frequency variation of +10%, and a DC load variation from zero to full load.
1.3.2. All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the
range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
1.3.3. All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristic, which shall
cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the
output voltage when the DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the
Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained
overload or short circuit in DC System shall not damage the Charger, nor shall it
cause blowing of any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload
or external short circuit.
1.3.4. Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and
automatic modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the
entire float charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load-
limiter setting shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current
for Charging mode.

1.3.5. During Boost Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current
mode (when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the
Boost charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated
output current for Boost charging mode.
1.3.6. The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating
on Boost mode, as the Battery charges up. For limiting the output voltage of the
Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it
shall be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output
range specified for Boost Charging mode.
1.3.7. The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting
device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device
for Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as
current setting device in boost charging mode.
1.3.8. Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple
content (Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1%, irrespective of the DC load
level, when they are not connected to a Battery.
1.3.9. MCCB
All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables
from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one
shall be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty.
MCCB’s should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.
1.3.10. Rectifier Transformer
The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) and of
class F insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10%
overload capacity.
1.3.11. Rectifier Assembly
The rectifier assembly shall be full/half controlled bridge type and shall be
designed to meet the duty as required by the respective Charger. The rectifier
shall be provided with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements
with natural air cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type
fast acting HRC fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.
1.3.12. Instruments
One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter alongwith selector switches shall be

provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall
be provided for all Chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and
moisture resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero
adjustment. The instruments shall be of 1.5 accuracy class. In addition to the
above a centre zero voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220
V chargers for testing purpose.

1.3.13. Air Break Switches
One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break
type suitable for 500 volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open
and close with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully
insulated from circuit. ÒN’ and ÒFF’ position on the switch shall be clearly
indicated. Rating of switches shall be suitable for their continuous load.
Alternatively, MCCB’s of suitable ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air
Break Switch.
1.3.14. Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which
are in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on
carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one
insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall
be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the
chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the
failure of any fuse.
.
1.3.15. Blocking Diode
Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each
charger to prevent current flow from the DC Battery into the Charger.
1.3.16. Annunciation System
Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers

for the following abnormalities:
a) AC power failure
b) Rectifier/chargers fuse blown.
c) Over voltage across the battery when boost charging.
d) Abnormal voltage (High/Low)
e) Any other annunciation if required.
Potential free NO Contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided
for common remote indication “CHARGER TROUBLE” in Owner’s Control
Board. Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication
lamps shall be provided for chargers. A potential free contact for float/boost mode
shall be provided for external interlocks.
1.3.17. Name Plates and Marking
The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each
Charger, on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be
provided to identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions
shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various
equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.

1.3.18. Charger Construction
The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed
cubicle type. The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts
and hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet
steel and shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all
cables and lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor. The lugs for
power cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes
shall be advised to the Contractor at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and
drilling of gland plates. The Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof.
Ventilation louvers, if provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and
covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber gaskets. The chargers shall have
hinged double leaf doors provided on front and on backside for adequate access to
the Charger’s internals. All the charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed.
The degree of protection of Charger enclosure shall be at least IP-42 as per IS:
13947 Part I.
1.3.18.1. All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be
mounted on the front side of the Charger.
1.3.18.2. Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and
terminal blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be
carried out with PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wires. Control
terminals shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded
copper conductors. All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and
identification. Each wire shall bear a ferrule or tag on each end for identification.
At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits.
1.3.18.3. The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall
withstand test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten
(10) mm shall be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal
lugs. Whenever this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or
shrouded.
1.3.19. Painting
All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated, in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005.
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed
by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water.
Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate
coating shall be `Class-C’ as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done
after phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior
to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two
coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade-692 (smoke grey) of IS:5 shall
be applied, unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers
shall be glossy white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
properly staved. The paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.
1.3.20. TESTS
1.3.20.1. Battery chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard.
Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on

each Charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type
tests specified in IS : 4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type
tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification requirements:
i) Voltage regulation test
ii) Load limiter characteristics test
iii) Efficiency tests
iv) High voltage tests
v) Temperature rise test
vi) Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained
short-circuit.
vii) Degree of protection test
viii) Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope.
ix) Temperature compensation feature demonstration
1.3.20.2. The Contractor may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the Chargers
conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free
output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as well
as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out :
i) Insulation resistance test
ii) Checking of proper annunciation system operation.
1.3.20.3. If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall replace
the same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule
of the Sub-station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.
1.3.20.4. The Contractor shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates
for the following components whenever required by the OWNER.
(i) Switches.
(ii) Relays/ MCCBs
(iii) Instruments.
(iv) DC fuses.
(v) SCR.
(vi) Diodes.
(vii) Condensers.
(viii) Potentiometers.
(ix) Semiconductor
(x) Annunciator.
(xi) Control wiring
(xii) Push buttons and contactors.
Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owner’s approval.

Annexure-I
BATTERY SYSTEM DATA SHEETS
S.No. Description of Data Unit 220 V/ 110 V 48 V
1 General Data
a) Battery Type:
Grid alloy:
Pure lead(Pb),
lead calcium (Pb-Ca),lead antimony
(Pb-Sb),
or lead selenium (Pb-Se) or other pl.
specify
Cell type:
Absorbed glass mat or gel cell or
other please specify
Seller's type number
Number of positive plates per cell
b) Does each battery and battery [rack]/ [Yes]
[cabinet] meet the seismic [No]
requirements
c) Manufacturer's Designed Life of Yrs
Battery
d) Recommended Battery Charger Data:
Floating voltage range V
Boost charge V
Current rating Amps.
Recharge time Hr
e) Heat Released During:
Discharge duty cycle Watt
Float charge Watt
Boost Charge Watt
f) Maximum Amount of Hydrogen Gas
Evolved
During Battery-Boost Charge (2.33 V (Litre /h)
per cell) at Maximum Battery
Temperature
Hydrogen Gas Evolution at Float (Litre /h)
g) Time Battery may be Stored Without months
a Freshening Charge
h) Temperature Compensation Provided
and its Details

2. Physical Description.
a) Battery Cell:
Size (L x W x H) mm
Weight Kg
Volume of electrolyte gal L
Jar cover material
Jar container material
Separator material
Retainer material
Limiting-oxygen index (LOI)
b) Battery [Rack] [Cabinet]:
Outline or catalog number
Quantity of [racks][cabinets] for the
battery
Description (tier or step type)
c) Total Net Weight of Battery Including kg
[Racks] [Cabinets]
d) Total Shipping Weight of Each kg
Battery Jar and Associated Equipment
e) Connectors:
Intercell:
Type
Material
No. per connection
Inter-[Tier] [Step]:
Type
Material
No. per connection
Terminal Detail:
Type
Material
f) Terminal Lugs for Power Cable:
g) Torque Data: Initial Re- Initial Re-
Torqu torque Torque torque
e Value Value Value
Value
Intercell Connectors
Inter-[Tier] [Step]:

3. Performance Data.
Battery String Designation No. [1] [ ]
Float Voltage Without Boost V/cell
Float Voltage With Boost V/cell
Boost Charge Voltage V/cell
Recommended Frequency of Boost
Charge
Recommended Duration of Boost
Charge
Open-Circuit Voltage V/cell
Short-Circuit Current at Battery
Terminals at Float Voltage at (27°C):
Battery Discharge Characteristics A or A
/positive
plate
Guaranteed Amp-Hour Capacity (at AH
the 10-hr rate) to Specified Final
Voltage
One-minute A/cell
Fifteen-minute A/cell
One-hour A/cell
Two-hour A/cell
Three-hour A/cell
Eight-hour A/cell
Ten-hour A/cell
4. Required operating environment.
Battery Room Ambient (°C to
Temperature Range °C)
Battery Room Ambient Design °C
Temperature
Battery Room Minimum/Maximum (°C to
Design Temperature °C)
Maximum temperature at which °C
battery can be stored

16. SWITCHYARD ERECTION

16. SWITCHYARD ERECTION
1.0 GENERAL
The detailed scope of work includes design, engineering, manufacture, testing at

works, supply on FOR destination site basis, insurance, handling, storage,
erection testing and commissioning of various items and works as detailed herein.
This section covers the description of the following items.
A- Supply of
- String insulators and hardware
- ACSR Moose conductor
- Galvanised Steel Earthwire
- Aluminium Tubular Bus Bars (4” IPS Tube)
- Spacers
- Bus post insulators
- Earthing & Earthing materials
- Lightning protection materials
- Cabling material
- Other items
B. Erection Of all items
1.1 String Insulators & Hardware
The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IEC60383 and
long rod insulators shall conform to IEC-60433. Insulator hardware shall conform
to IS:2486.
1.1.1 Construction Features
1.1.1.1 Suspension and tension insulators shall be wet process porcelain with ball
and socket connection.Insulators shall be interchangeable and shall be
suitable for forming either suspension or tension strings. Each insulator shall have
rated strength markings on porcelain printed and applied before firing.

1.1.1.2 Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and
impervious to moisture.
1.1.1.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs
and other similar defects.
1.1.1.4 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulator which would cause corrosion or injury to
conductors or insulators by the formation of substances due to chemical action.
No radio interference shall be caused when operating at normal rated voltage.
1.1.1.5 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous
parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition of IS: 2629.
The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of grade Zn-99.95 as per IS-209. The zinc
coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and
free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains bulky white deposits and
blisters.
1.1.1.6 Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design including
the method of assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per insulator
string insulators, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through
discs to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona
and thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or
arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions.
1.1.1.7 Clamps for insulator strings and Corona Control rings shall be of aluminium alloy
as stipulated for clamps and connectors.
1.1.1.8 Insulator hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be
accepted except for insulator disc cap. The surface of hardware must be clean,
smooth, without cuts, abrasion or projections. No part shall be subjected to
excessive localized pressure. The metal parts shall not produce any noise
generating corona under operating conditions.
1.1.1.9 The tension Insulator hardware assembly shall be designed for 11500 kg

tensile load. Earth wire tension clamp shall be designed for 1000 kg tensile load
with a factor of safety of two (2).
1.1.1.10 The tension string assemblies shall be supplied along with suitable turn buckle.
Sag compensation springs if required may also be provided.
1.1.1.11 All hardware shall be bolted type.
1.2 Long Rod Porcelain Insulators (upto 400kV voltage level)
1.2.1 As an alternative to disc insulator , Bidder can offer long rod insulators
strings, with suitable hardware. The combination should be suitable for
application specified and should offer the identical / equivalent parameters as
would be available from insulator string comprising disc insulators and hardware
combination.
1.2.2 All constructional features specified at Clause 1.1.1 of this Section shall
also apply to the long rod insulator string.
1.3 Tests
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the suspension and

tension strings, insulator and hardware shall be subjected to the following type
tests, acceptance tests and routine tests:
1.3.1 Type Tests on Insulator Strings : The test reports for following type
tests shall be submitted for approval :
a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control rings under wet
condition as per IEC 60383.
b) Switching surge voltage withstand test [400 kV class only] under wet condition
as per IEC-60383.
c) Lightning Impulse voltage withstand test with corona control rings under dry
condition as per IEC-60383
d) Voltage distribution test (Dry)
The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The
voltage across any disc shall not exceed 9% and 10% for 400KV
suspension string and tension insulator string respectively, 13% for
220KV suspension and tension insulator

strings, 20% and 22% for 132KV suspension and tension insulator strings
respectively.
e) Corona Extinction Voltage test (Dry)
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall

have a corona extinction voltage of not less than 320kV(rms) for 400kV
and 156kV(rms) for 220kV line to ground under dry condition. There shall
be no evidence of Corona on any part of the sample. The atmospheric
condition during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be
accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC
60383.
f) RIV Test (Dry)
Under the conditions as specified under (e) above the insulator string
alongwith complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference
voltage level below 1000 microvolts at 1 MHz when subjected to 50 Hz
AC line to ground voltage of 320kV for 400kV and 156kV for 220kV
string under dry conditions. The test procedure shall be in accordance with
IS 8263/IEC 60437.
g) Mechanical strength test
The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fitting excluding

arcing horn, corona control ring, grading ring, tension/suspension clamps
shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to
67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string
components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible
to dismantle them by hand. Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins
and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall then be reassembled and
loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a steady
rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for one minute. No fracture
should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased
until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
1.3.2 Type Tests on Insulators
Type test report for Thermal Mechanical Performance tests as per

IEC:60575, Clause 3 shall be submitted for approval as per clause

specification.
1.3.3 Acceptance Tests for Insulators:
a) Visual examination as per IEC 60383
b) Verification of Dimensions as per IEC 60383.
c) Temperature cycle test as per IEC 60383.
d) Puncture Test as per IEC 60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators).
e) Galvanizing Test as per IEC 60383.
f) Mechanical performance test as per IEC-60575 Cl. 4.
g) Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling as per IEC-60372(2)
h) Porosity test as per IEC 60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators).
1.3.4 Acceptance Test on Hardware Fitting
a) Visual Examination as per Cl. 5.10 of IS:2486 (Part-I).
b) Verification of Dimensions as per Cl. 5.8 of IS : 2486 (Part-I)
c) Galvanising/Electroplating tests as per Cl. 5.9 of IS : 2486 (Part-I).
d) Slip strength test as per Cl 5.4 of IS-2486 (part-I)
e) Shore hardness test for the Elastometer (if applicable as per the value guaranteed
by the Bidder).
f) Mechanical strength test for each component (including corona control rings and
arcing horns).
The load shall be so applied that the component is stressed in the same
way as it would be in actual service and the procedure as given in 1.2.13.1
(g) above should be followed.
g) Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling as per IEC:60372(2).

1.3.5 Routine Test on Insulator
a) Visual Inspection as per IEC60383
b) Mechanical Routine Test as per IEC60383
c) Electrical Routine Test as per IEC60383
1.3.6 Routine Test on hardware Fittings
a) Visual examination as per Cl 5.10 of IS : 2486 (Part-I).
b) Mechanical strength Test as per Cl. 5.11 of IS : 2486 (Part-I).
1.3.7 Test during manufacture on all Components as applicable on

insulator
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising:
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS :
209. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.
b) Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle

inspection for malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for
malleable casting will be as per the internationally recognized procedures
for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance
Program.
1.3.8 Test during manufacture on all components as applicable on

hardware fittings:
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising:
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS :
209. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%
b) Chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle for

forgings:

forgings will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these
tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment
batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed
to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance Programme.
Chemical analysis and mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle

inspection for fabricated hardware:
c)
fabricated hardware will be as per the internationally recognized
procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and
heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in Quality Assurance
The
programme.
chemic
al
analysi
s,
hardne
ss tests
and
magnet
ic
particl
e
inspect
ion for
forging
s will
be as
per the
interna
tionall
y
recogn
ized
proced
ures
for
these
tests.
The
sampli
ng will
be
based
1.4 Parameters
1.4.1 Disc Insulators 400/220/132 kV
a) Type of insulators : ANTI Fog type
b) Size of insulator units (mm) : 255x145 or 280x145
c) Electro mechanical strength : 120 kN
d) Creepage distance of : 430 mm

individual
insulator units (minimum
and as required to meet
total creepage distance)
e) Markings : Markings on porcelain

shall be printed and
applied before firing
f) Power frequency puncture : 1.3 times the actual wet

withstand voltage flashover voltage.
*Long rod insulators should conform to equivalent electrical and

mechanical parameters.

1.14.2 INSULATOR STRING
400kV 220kV 132kV

a) 680 460 275
Power frequency withstand :
voltage of the complete string
with Corona Control ring (wet) –
kV rms
b)
Lightning impulse withstand : ±1550 +1050 +650
Voltage of string with corona
control rings (dry) – kVp
c)
Switching surge withstand : ±1050 NA NA
voltage of string with corona
control rings (wet) – kVp
d)
Minimum corona extinction : 320 156 NA
voltage level of string with Corona
Control rings (dry) - kV rms
e)
RIV level in micro volts of string: 1000 (Max.) 1000 with NA
Corona Control (Max.) rings at
320 kV (rms) for 400 kV string and 156 kV for 220 kV string
across 300 Ohms resistor at 1 MHz
f)
Total creepage distance of the : 10500 6125 3625
insulator string (mm)
Total no. of discs per strings : 25

g) 15 10
For tension application, double insulator strings and for

suspension purpose single suspension insulator string shall be used for 400 KV,
220 KV and 132KV system.

ACSR ‘MOOSE’ CONDUCTOR
2.0
Details of Conductor
2.1
The Conductor shall conform to IS:398 (Part V) - 1982 except where otherwise
2.1.1 specified herein.
The details of the conductor are tabulated below:

2.1.2
a) Stranding and wire diameter :54/3.53 mm Al+7/3.53mm Steel
b) :
Number of Strands Steel
centre 1st Steel Layer 1st 1
Aluminium Layer 2nd : 6
Aluminium Layer 3rd : 12
Aluminium Layer 18
24
528.5 mm2
c) Sectional area of aluminium
597.00 mm2
d) Total sectional area :
31.77 mm
e) Overall diameter :
2004 kg/km
f) Approximate weight :
0.05552 ohm/km
g) Calculated d.c. resistance at 20oC :
161.2 KN
2.1.3 h) Minimum UTS :
The details of aluminium strand are as follows:
i) Minimum breaking load : m

1.57 kN
of strand before stranding
ii) Minimum breaking load : 1.49 kN

of strand after stranding
iii) Maximum D.C. resitance : 2.921 Ohms/Km

of strand at 20oC.
2.1.4 The details of steel strand are as follows:
i) Minimum breaking load : 12.86 kN

of strand before stranding
ii) Minimum breaking load : 12.22 kN

of strand after stranding
iii) Minimum number of : 18 - before stranding

twist to be with- 16 - after stranding
stood in torsion test when
tested on a gauge length
of 100 times diameter of
wire
2.2 Workmanship
2.2.1 The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all
imperfections including spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks,
kinks (protrusion of wires), dents, press marks, cut marks, wire cross over, over riding,
looseness (wire being dislocated by finger/hand pressure and/or unusual bangle noise on
tapping), material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots (on account of
reaction with trapped rain water etc.), dirt, grit etc.
2.2.2 All the aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all
imperfections, such as spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after
drawing.
2.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc
coating of 260 gm/sq.m. after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating
shall be smooth, continuous and of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall
withstand minimum three dips after stranding in standard Preece test. The finished strands
and the individual wires shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and
characteristics as prescribed in ASTM designation : B 498-74.
2.2.4 The Steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent
spreading of strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to
avoid damage to galvanisation during preforming and post-forming operation.

Joints in Wires
2.3
Aluminium Wires
2.3.1
No joints shall, be permitted in the individual wires in the outermost layer of the
finished conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire and 18 wire inner layers of the
conductor shall be allowed but these joints shall be made by cold pressure butt
welding and shall be such that no such joints are within 15 metres of each other in
the complete stranded conductor. However, Joints in aluminium wires shall be as
per IS:398.
Steel Wires
2.3.2
There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished wire entering into the
manufacture of the strand. There shall also be no strand splices in any length of
the completed stranded steel core of the conductor.
Tolerances
2.4
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be
permitted in the diameter of individual aluminium and steel strands and lay-ratio
of the conductor.
a) Diameter of Aluminium and steel strands:

Standard Maximum Minimum
Aluminium 3.53 mm 3.55 mm 3.51 mm

Steel 3.53 mm 3.60 mm 3.46 mm
b) Lay ratio of Conductor: Maximum Minimum
Steel 6 wire layer 18 12 16

Aluminium wire layer 14 18 12
wire layer 13 24 11
wire layer 12 10
2.5 Materials
2.5.1 Aluminium
The aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic aluminium rods
having purity not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%.

2.5.2 Steel
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods and shall
conform to the following chemical composition:
Element - % Composition
Carbon - 0.50 to 0.85
Manganese - 0.50 to 1.10
Phosphorous - not more than 0.035
Sullphur - not more than 0.045
Silicon - 0.10 to 0.35
2.5.3 Zinc
The Zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95%
purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.
2.6 Standard Length
2.6.1 The Conductor shall be supplied in standard length of 1500 / 1800 metres
as required. No joint shall be allowed within a single span of stringing.
2.7 Tests :
2.7.1 The following type, acceptance & routine tests and tests during
manufacturing shall be carried out on the conductor.
2.7.2 Type Tests
In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports
of the conductor shall be submitted for approval :
a) UTS test on stranded .

conductor.
b) Corona extinction ) As per Annexure-A

voltage test (dry) )

(c) Radio Interference )
voltage test (dry) )
)
(d) DC resistance test )
on stranded conductor )
)
Acceptance Tests
2.7.3
a) Visual check for joints, ) )
scratches etc. and lengths of )
As per Annexure - A
conductor
b) Dimensional check on steel

)
and aluminium strands
)
)
c) Check for lay ratios of
)
various layers
) -do-
d) Galvanising test on steel
)
strands
)
)
e) Torsion and Elongation test
)
on steel strands
f) Breaking load test on steel

and aluminium strands
g) Wrap test on steel and

aluminium strands
)
h) DC resistance test on IS:398 (Part V) 1982
)
aluminium strands Clauses 12.5.2, 12.7 &
)
12.8
)
i) UTS test on welded joint of )
aluminium strands
NOTE: ) As per Annexure - A

)
All the above tests except test ) mentioned at (a)
shall be carried out on aluminium and steel strands
after stranding only.

2.7.4 Routine Tests
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification.
b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
c) All acceptance test as mentioned in Clause 2.7.3 above to be carried out

on each coil.
2.7.5 Tests During Manufacture
a) Chemical analysis of )
zinc used for galvanising )
)
b) Chemical analysis of )
aluminium used for ) As per Annexure - A
making aluminium strands )
)
c) Chemical analysis of )
steel used for making )
steel strands )
2.7.6 Sample Batch for Type Testing
The Contractor shall offer material for selection of samples for type testing, only
after getting quality assurance plans approved from Owner’s Quality Assurance
Department. The sample shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the
Quality Assurance Plan approved by Owner.
3.0 GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
3.1 Details of Earthwire
3.1.1 The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the specification of
ACSR core wire as mentioned in IS : 398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise
specified herein.
3.1.2 The details of the earth wire are tabulated below:
a) Stranding and wire : 7/3.66 mm steel

diameter
b) Number of strands

3.2 Steel core Outer : 1
3.2.1 Steel Layer : 6
c) Total sectional area : 73.65 mm2
3.2.2 d) Overall diameter : 10.98 mm
e) Approximate weight : 583 kg/km

3.2.3
f) Calculated d.c. resis- : 2.5 ohms/km
tance at 20 Co
g) Minimum ultimate tensile

: 68.4 kN
strength
h) Direction of lay of
: Right hand
outer layer
3.2.4 WORKMANSHIP
All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections, such as
spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also
after stranding.
The finished material shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to

appreciable vibration while in use.
The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised (and shall have a minimum zinc
coating of 275 gms/sq.m.) after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc
coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free from
imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after stranding in standard
Preece test. The steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when
drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished
strands shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and
characteristics in ASTM designation B498-74.
The steel strands shall be preformed and postformed in order to prevent spreading
of strands while cutting of composite earthwire. Care shall be taken to avoid
damage to galvanisation during preforming and postforming operation.

3.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the
finished material shall be provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.
3.3 JOINTS IN WIRES
There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into
the manufacture of the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices
in any length of the completed stranded earth wire.
3.4 TOLERANCES
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be
permitted in the Diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the
earth wire:
Standard Maximum Minimum
3.66 mm 3.75 mm 3.57 mm
Diameter
181 mm 198 mm 165 mm
Lay length
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel
3.5 MATERIALS rods and shall conform to the following requirements as to the
chemical composition :
3.5.1 Steel Element % Composition
————————————————-
Carbon Not more than 0.55
Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
Phosphorous Not more than 0.04
Sulphur Not more than 0.04

Silicon 0.15 to 0.35
3.5.2 Zinc
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95%
purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.

STANDARD LENGTH
3.6
The earthwire shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer.
3.6.1
TESTS
3.7
The following type, routine & acceptance tests and tests during manufacturing
3.7.1 shall be carried out on the earthwire.
TYPE TESTS
3.7.2
In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports
of the earthwire shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 of Section -
GTR.
a) UTS test )
As per Annexure - B
b) DC resistance test )
3.7.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
a) Visual check for joints, )

scratches etc. and length )
of Earthwire )
)
b) Dimensional check ) As per Annexure - B
)
c) Galvanising test )
)
d) Lay length check )
)
e) Torsion test )
f) Elongation test )
)
g) Wrap test )
)
h) DC resistance test
) IS:398 (Part-III) 1976
)
i) Breaking load test
)
)
j) Chemical Analysis of
steel

3.7.4 ROUTINE TESTS
a) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
b) Check for correctness of stranding.
3.7.5 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE
a) Chemical analysis of ) As per Annexure - B

zinc used for )
galvanising )
)
b) Chemical analysis of )
steel )
3.7.6 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING
The Contractor shall offer material for sample selection for type testing, only after
getting quality assurance programme approved by the Owner. The samples for
type testing shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality
Assurance Programme approved by the Owner.
4.0 TUBULAR BUS CONDUCTORS
4.1 General
Aluminium used shall be grade 63401 WP(range 2) conforming toIS:5082.
4.2.1 For outside diameter (OD) & thickness of the tube there shall be no minus
tolerance, other requirements being as per IS : 2678 and IS: 2673.
4.2.2 The aluminium tube shall be supplied in suitable cut length to minimize wastage.
4.2.3 The welding of aluminium tube shall be done by the qualified welders duly
approved by the owner.
4.3 Test

In accordance with stipulations of the specification, Routine tests shall be
conducted on tubular bus conductors as per IS: 5082. Also the wall thickness and
ovality of the tube shall be measured by the ultrasonic method. In addition to the
above tests, 0.2% proof tests on both parent metal and Aluminium tube after
welding shall be conducted.
4.4 Parameters
a) Size 4"IPS (EH Type)
b) Outer diameter(mm) 114.2
c) Thickness (mm) 8.51
d) Cross-sectional area 2825.61

(sq.mm)
e) Weight (kg/m) 7.7
5.0 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
5.1 General
All conductors buried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors
above ground level and earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel, except for
cable trench earthing. The minimum sizes of earthing coductor to be used shall be
as per specification.
5.2.1 Galvanised Steel
a) Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to

IS:2629.
b) The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 618 gm/sq. m. and
minimum thickness shall be 85 microns.
c) The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick

coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished
surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like
discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is
loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surfaces,
flaking or peeling off etc. The

presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic
inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
5.3 Tests
In accordance with stipulations of the specifications galvanised steel shall be

subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS : 2633.
6.0 SPACERS
6.1 General
Spacers shall conform to IS: 10162. The spacers are to be located at a suitable
spacing to limit the short circuit forces as per IEC 865. Wherever Owner’s 400
kV & 220 kV standard gantry structures are being used, the spacer span(s) for
different conductor / span configurations and corresponding short circuit forces
shall be as per specification.
Wherever Owner’s 400 kV & 220 kV standard gantry structures are not being
used, necessary spacer span calculation shall be provided by the contractor during
detailed engineering for the approval of Owner.
6.2.1 No magnetic material shall be used in the fabrication of spacers except for GI
bolts and nuts.
6.2.2 Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during
installation and maintenance.
6.2.3 The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in
contact with any sharp edge.
6.3 Tests
Each type of spacers shall be subjected to the following type tests, acceptance
tests and routine tests:
6.3.1 Type Tests: Following type test reports shall be submitted for approval
as per Section - GTR.
a) Clamp slip tests

The sample shall be installed on test span of twin conductor bundle
string or quadruple conductor bundle string (as applicable) at a tension
of 44.2 kN. One of the clamps of the sample when subjected to a
longitudinal pull of 2.5 kN parallel to the axis of the conductor shall
not slip on the conductor. The permanent displacement between the
conductor and the clamp of sample measured after removal of the load
shall not exceed 1.0 mm. Similar tests shall be performed on the other
clamps of the same sample.
b) Fault current test as per Cl 5.14.2 of IS : 10162
c) Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry).
This test shall be performed on 400 kV and 220 kV equipment as per

procedure mentioned at Annexure - C, Minimum Corona Extinction
voltage shall be 320 kV (rms) line to ground and 156 kV (rms) line to
ground for 400 kV and 220 kV spacers respectively.
d) RIV Test (Dry)
This test shall be performed as per procedure mentioned at Annexure -

C, Maximum RIV level at 305 kV (rms) line to ground and 156 kV
(rms) line to ground for 400 kV and 220 kV spacers respectively shall
be 1000 micro volts, across 300 ohm resistor at 1 MHz
e) Resilience test (if applicable)
f) Tension Test
g) Log decremant test (if applicable)
h) Compression test
i) Galvanising test
6.3.2 Acceptance Test (As per IS : 10162 )
a) Visual examination
b) Dimensional verification
c) Movement test

d) Clamp slip test
e) Clamp bolt torque test (if applicable)
f) Assembly torque test
g) Compression test
h) Tension test
i) Galvanising test
j) Hardness test for neoprene (if applicable)
The shore hardness of different points on the elastometer surface of

cushion grip clamp shall be measured by shore hardness meter. It shall be
between 65 to 80.
k) Ultimate Tensile Strength Test
The UTS of the retaining rods shall be measured. It shall not be less than
35 kg/Sq. mm.
6.3.3 Routine test
a) Visual examination
b) Dimensional verification
7.0 BUS POST INSULATORS

The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IS: 2544, IEC-60168, IEC-
60273 and IEC-60815.
7.1.1 Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a
metal base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of
being mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which
they may be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only solid
core insulators will be acceptable.
7.1.2 Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and

other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality
and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
7.1.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown in colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other similar defects.
7.1.4 The insulator shall have alternate long and short sheds with aerodynamic profile,
The shed profile shall also meet the requirements of IEC-815 for the specified
pollution level.
7.1.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulators which would cause corrosion or injury to
conductors or insulators by the formation of substance produced by chemical
action.
7.1.6 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
7.1.7 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the latest edition
of IS: 2633, & IS: 2629. The zinc used for galvanising shall be grade Zn 99.95 as
per IS: 209. The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably
bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux ash, rust stains, bulky
white deposits and blisters. The metal parts shall not produce any noise generating
corona under the operating conditions.
7.1.8 a) Every bolt shall be provided with a steel washer under the nut so
that part of the threaded portion of the bolts is within the thickness of the
parts bolted together.
b) Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of
suitable thickness. Where bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surfaces
they shall be provided with square tapered washers of suitable thickness to
afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt.
c) All bolts and nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads
forged from the solid and shall be hot dip galvanised. The nuts shall be
good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut
when it has been finally tightened up.
7.1.9 Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design

including the method of assembly of shells and metals parts, number of shells per
insulator, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through shells
to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and
thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or
arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions.
7.2 Tests
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the post insulators shall be
subject to type, acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IS : 2544 and IEC-
168.
7.2.1 In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IS : 2544 and IEC-

168, the following tests shall also be carried out.
a) Ultrasonic test as an acceptance test
b) Soundness test, metallurgical tests and magnetic test on MCI caps and
pedestal tests as acceptance test.
c) All hot dip galvanised components shall be subject to check for uniformity
of thickness and weight of zinc coating on sample basis.
d) The bending test shall be carried out at 50% minimum failing load in four
directions as a routine test and at 100% minimum failing load in four
directions as an acceptance test.
e) Acceptance norms for visual defects allowed at site and also at works shall
be agreed in the Quality plan.
7.2.2 In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests
reports of the post insulators shall be submitted for approval :
a) Power frequency withstand test (dry & wet)
b) Lightning impulse test (dry)
c) Switching impulse test (wet) (For 420 kV Insulator only)
d) Measurement of R.I.V (Dry) (As per Annexure – C)
e) Corona extinction voltage test (Dry) (As per Annexure – C)

. f) Test for deflection under load
g) Test for mechanical strength.
Technical Parameters of Bus Post Insulators.

7.3
a) Type Solid Core Solid Core Solid Core
b) Voltage class (kV) 420 245 145

Dry and wet one minute
c) 680 460 275
power frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
Dry lightning impulse

d) ±1425 + 1050 +650 —-
withstand Voltage (kVp)
Wet switching surge

e) ±1050 —-
withstand voltage (kVp)
500
Max. radio interference voltage
f) (in microvolts) at voltage of 305 500 500
kV (rms) and 156 (rms) for 400
kV & 220 kV respectively
between phase to ground.
Corona extinction voltage

(kV rms)
g) 320 (Min.) 156 (Min.) 105 (Min)
Total minimum cantilever
strength (Kg)
h) Minimum torsional 800 800 600
moment
i) Minimum torsional moment ---- As per IEC-60273 ------
---
j) Total height of insulator (mm) 3350 2300

k) P.C.D Top 127 127 127
(mm)
Bottom (mm) 300 254 254
l) No. of bolts 4 4 4
Top
Bottom 8 8 8
m) Diameter of bolt/holes (mm)
Top M16 M16 M16
Bottom dia 18 18 18
n) Pollution level as per Heavy(III) Heavy(III) Heavy(III)

IEC-815
o) Minimum total creepage 10500 6125 3165

distance for Heavy
Pollution (mm)
7.3.1 If corona extinction voltage is to be achieved with the help of corona ring or any
other similar device, the same shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the
Contractor.
8.0 EARTHING
8.1 The earthing shall be done in accordance with requirements given hereunder
and drawing titled ‘Earthing Details’ enclosed with the specification. The
earthmat design shall be done by the Contractor as per IEEE-80. The soil
resistivity measurement shall also be done by the Contractor. The resistivity
measurement of stone (to be used for stone spreading) shall also be done by the
Contractor to confirm the resistivity value of stone considered in earth mat design.
For measurement purpose, one sample of stones from each source (in case stones
are supplied from more than one source) shall be used. The main earthmat shall
be laid in the switchyard area in accordance with the approved design
requirements.
8.2 Neutral points of systems of different voltages, metallic enclosures and
frame works associated with all current carrying equipments and
extraneous metalworks associated with electric system shall be connected.

to a single earthing system unless stipulated otherwise.
Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance

with the latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and
Codes of practice and Regulations existing in the locality where the system is
8.3 installed.
a) Code of practice for Earthing IS:3043
b) Code of practice for the protection of Building and allied structures

against lightning IS:2309.
c) Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments.
d) National Electricity Safety code IEEE-80.
Details of Earthing System
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4
Item Size Material
a)Main Earthing 40mm dia Mild Steel

Conductor to be rod
buried in ground
b)Conductor above 75x12mm Galvanised Steel

ground & earthing leads G.S. flat
(for equipment)
c)Conductor above 75x12mm Galvanised Steel

ground & earthing leads G.S. flat
(for columns & aux.
structures)
d)Earthing of indoor LT 50x6 mm Galvanised Steel

panels, Control panels and G.S. flat
out door marshalling boxes,
MOM boxes, Junction
boxes & Lighting Panels
etc.
e)Rod Earth Electrode 40mm dia, Mild Steel

3000mm long
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

f)Pipe Earth Electrode 40 mm dia Galvanised
(in treated earth pit) 3000 mm long steel
as per IS.
g)Earthing for motors 25x3mm GS flat Galvanised steel
h) Earthing conductor 50x6mm MS Mild steel flat

along outdoor cable
trenches
i) Earthing of Lighting Poles 20 mm dia Mild steel rod

3000 mm long
8.5 The sizes of the earthing conductor indicated above are the minimum sizes.
8.5.1 Earthing Conductor Layout
Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below

8.5.2 finished ground level unless stated otherwise.
Wherever earthing conductor crosses cable trenches, underground service ducts,

pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc., it shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them
and shall be circumvented in case it fouls with equipment/structure foundations.
8.5.3
Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed,
shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment/structure as per
“Earthing Details”.
8.5.4
Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder, walls etc.
shall be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever
it passes through walls, floors etc., galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for
the passage of the conductor and both ends of the sleeve shall be sealed to prevent
the passage of water through the sleeves.
8.5.5 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum
distance of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high
temperature is encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid
minimum 1500 mm away from such location.
8.5.6 Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at
greater depth to suit the site conditions.

8.5.7 Earthing conductors embeded in the concrete shall have approximately 50
mm concrete cover.
8.6 Equipment and Structure Earthing
8.6.1 Earthing pads shall be provided for the apparatus/equipment at accessible

position. The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be
made by two short earthing leads (one direct and another through the support
structure) free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided
on the item to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation with Owner.
8.6.2 Whether specifically shown in drawings or not, steel/RCC columns, metallic

stairs etc. shall be connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by two
earthing leads. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding different
sections of hand-rails and metallic stairs.
8.6.3 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be
bonded to ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at
regular interval. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning points shall
also be connected to earthing system.
8.6.4 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
8.6.5 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as
gas, water, steam conduits, etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be
bonded to the same.
8.6.6 Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands,
lockout switches etc. shall be connected to the earthing conductor running
alongwith the supply cable which inturn shall be connected to earthing grid
conductor at a minimum two points whether specifically shown or not.
8.6.7 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30m and
also at both ends.
8.6.8 Earthing conductor shall be buried 2000 mm outside the switchyard fence. All
the gates and every alternate post of the fence shall be connected to earthing
grid.
The stone spreading shall also be done 2000 mm outside switchyard fence.
The criterian for stone spreading shall be followed in line with requirement
specified elsewhere in the specification

8.6.9 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts.
8.6.10 All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptacles fixtures, conduits etc. shall be
grounded in compliance with the provision of I.E. rules
8.6.11 A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each
conduit run. The conductor shall be connected to each panel ground bus. All
junction boxes, receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures etc. shall be connected to
this 16 SWG ground conductor.
8.6.12 50mm x 6mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and all along the cable trenches and
the same shall be welded to each of the racks. Further this flat shall be earthed at
both ends and at an interval of 30 mtrs. The M.S. flat shall be finally painted with
two coats of Red oxide primer and two coats of Post Office red enamel paint.
8.6.13 A 40 mm dia , 3000 mm long MS earth electrode with test link , CI frame and
cover shall be provided to connect down conductor of lightning mast and towers
with peak.
8.7 Jointing
8.7.1 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact
surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts
shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted connections,
after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti corrosive
paint/compound.
8.7.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and
between main earthing conductors shall be welded type. For rust protections, the
welds should be treated with red lead and afterwards coated with two layers
bitumen compound to prevent corrosion.
8.7.3 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent
moisture ingression.
8.7.4 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent
length of the conductor.
8.7.5 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints
shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature before put-
ting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.

8.7.6 Bending of earthing rod shall be done preferably by gas heating.
8.7.7 All arc welding with large dia. conductors shall be done with low hydrogen
content electrodes.
8.7.8 The 75x12mm GS flat shall be clamped with the equipment support structures
at 1000mm interval.
8.8 Power Cable Earthing
Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at
both equipment and swithgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power
cables shall be earthed at switchgear end only.
8.9 Specific Requirement for Earthing Systems
8.9.1 Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer/Reactor shall be
directly connected to two pipe electrodes in treated earth pit (as per IS) which
in turn, shall be buried in Cement Concrete pit with a cast iron cover hinged to
a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. All accessories associated
with transformer/reactor like cooling banks, radiators etc. shall be connected
to the earthing grid at minimum two points.
8.9.2 Earthing terminal of each lightning arrester & capacitor voltage trasformer
shall be directly connected to rod earth electrode which in turn, shall be
connected to station earthing grid.
8.9.3 Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of 40mm dia M.S. rods closely spaced (300
mm x 300 mm) conductors shall be provided at depth of 300mm from ground
level below the operating handles of the M.O.M. Box of the isolators. M.O.M.
boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary earthing mat.
8.10 INSULATING MATS:
8.10.1 The scope covers supply and laying of insulating mats of “class A”
conforming to
IS: 15652-2006.
8.10.2 These insulating mats shall be laid in front of all floor mounted AC and DC
switchboards and control panels located in control room building.
8.10.3 The insulating mats shall be made of elastomer material free from any
insertions
leading to deterioration of insulating properties. It shall be resistant to acid, oil
and low temperature.
8.10.4 Upper surface of the insulating mats shall have small aberration (rough surface
without edges) to avoid slippery effects while the lower surface shall be plain
or
could be finished slip resistant without affecting adversely the dielectric
property
of the mat.
8.10.5 Insulating mats shall be of pastable type, to be fixed permanently on the front
and rear side of the panels except for the chequred plate area which shall not
be
pasted. The insulating mats shall generally be fixed and joints shall be welded
as
per IS: 15652.
8.10.6 Width of insulating mats shall generally be of 1.5 meters or as per site
requirements. Length shall be supplied as per site requirements.
8.10.7 The insulating mats offered shall conform to all type, routine and acceptance
tests as per IS: 15652-2006.Type test reports of insulating mats shall be
submitted for owner’s acceptance.
9.0 Main Bus Bars
The brief description of the bus switching scheme, bus bar layout and
equipment connection to be adopted are indicated elsewhere in the
specification. The bus bar arrangements are shown in drgs enclosed with the
bid documents.
9.1 The Contractor shall furnish supporting calculations for the bus
bars/conductors to show adequacy of design parameters for:
a) Fibre-stress (applicable for aluminum tube)
b) Cantilever strength of post insulators (applicable for aluminum tube)
c) Aeolain vibrations (applicable for aluminum tube)
d) Vertical deflection of bus bars (applicable for aluminum tube)
e) Short circuit forces in bundle conductor and spacer location for each
span of ACSR conductor stringing as per layout drawings.
9.1.1 The welds in the aluminium tubes shall be kept to the minimum and there
shall not be more than one weld per span. The procedure and details of
welding shall be subject to Owner’s approval. Material for welding sleeve
shall be same as that of Aluminium tube. Welding sleeve shall be of 600mm
length
9.1.2 Corona bells shall be provided wherever the bus extends beyond the clamps
and on free ends, for sealing the ends of the tubular conductor against rain and
moisture and to reduce the electrostatic discharge loss at the end points. There
shall be a small drain hole in the corona bell. The material of Corona bell shall
be Aluminium alloy similar to that of clamps & connectors.
9.1.3 To minimise the vibrations in the aluminium tubes, damping conductor shall
be provided inside the aluminium tubes. For this purpose, the cut pieces of
ACSR conductor which otherwise are considered wastages, shall be used as
damping conductor.
9.1.4 Details of past experience of the persons proposed to be employed for

Aluminium tube welding and the test reports of the welded pieces to prove the
electrical and mechanical characteristics shall also be furnished to Employer.
Welding at site shall be done by adopting a qualified procedure and employing
qualified welders as per ASME-Section IX.

9.1.5 Joints shall be avoided in strung bus to avoid joint failure / hot spots and
hardwares to be designed accordingly.
10.0 BAY EQUIPMENT
10.1 The disposition of various bay equipments shall be as per single line diagrams
and layout drawings.
10.2 Bay Marshalling Kiosk:-
Bay marshalling kiosk shall be fabricated from 304 grade stainless steel of
minimum thickness of 1.6mm. For other constructional details, technical
specification of section-GTR shall be referred. Further, for stainless steel
type bay marshaling kiosk, no painting is envisaged.
One no. of bay marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each bay. In addition to
the requirements specified elsewhere in the specification, the bay marshalling
kiosk shall have three distinct compartments for the following purpose:-
(i) To receive two incoming 415V, 3 phase, 63Amps, AC supply with auto
changeover and MCB unit and distrubute minimum six (four in case of S/S
having highest voltage 132kV) outgoing 415V, 3 phase, 16 Amps AC supplies
controlled by MCB.
(ii) To distribute minimum ten (six in case of S/S having highest voltage
132kV) outgoing 240V, 10 Amps single phase supplies to be
controlled by MCB to be drawn from above 3 phase incomers
(iii) 200 (100 in case of S/S having highest voltage 132kV) nos. terminal
blocks in vertical formation for intertocking facilities.
(iv) Necessary Terminal Blocks for terminating cables from ACDB and
necessary heating circuits.
Further, all Bay Marshalling Kiosks shall be erected such that a minimum
height of 1000mm is maintained between FGL & bottom of the marshalling
box. Size of Marshalling box shall be such that cables are properly terminated
and wires are dressed with provision of loop.
Additional marshalling Kiosk shall be provided incase the existing

marshalling kiosks in a Diametre do not have adequate spare feeders.
10.3 BAY AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION

The name plate for the bays shall be provided by the contractor as per standard
Drawing.
11.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
11.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the EHV
switchyard by lightning masts and shield wires. The layout drawings enclosed
indicate the tentative arrangement. The final arrangement shall be decided
after approval of the DSLP calculations.
11.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with
underground metallic service ducts and cab.
11.3 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with
the conductors of the safety earthing system above ground level.
11.4 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval.
11.5 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made
via test joint (pad type compression clamp) located approximately 1500 mm
above ground level. The rod electrode shall be further joined with the main
earthmat.
11.6 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
11.7 Lightning protection shall also be provided for various buildings like control
building, FFPH etc. as per relevant standard.
12.0 EQUIPMENT ERECTION DETAILS
12.1 All circuit breaker and isolator erection shall be done under the supervision of
equipment manufacturer and erection of all switchyard equipments shall be
done as per approved Field Quality Plan (FQP) and as per provision of
Technical Specification.
12.2 For equipment interconnection, the surfaces of equipment terminal pads,

Aluminium tube, conductor & terminal clamps and connectors shall be
properly cleaned. After cleaning, contact grease shall be applied on the contact
surfaces of equipment terminal pad, Aluminium tube/conductor and terminal
clamps to avoid any air gap in between. Subsequently bolts of the terminal
pad/terminal connectors shall be tightened and the surfaces shall be cleaned
properly after equipment interconnection.
12.3 Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of
hollow insulators .
12.4 All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment
shall preferably be handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling
capacity.
12.5 Bending of Aluminium tube and compressed air piping if any should be done
by a bending machine and through cold bending only. Bending shall be such
that inner diameter of pipe is not reduced.
12.6 Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the
ends. Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not
be used.
12.7 Handling of equipment shall be done strictly as per manufacturer’s/supplier’s

instructions/instruction manual.
12.8 Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before
erection for strength.
12.9 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to
excessive swing, scratching by sling ropes etc.
12.10 All welding done at site for equipment and structures, shall be painted with zinc
rich paint immediately to avoid corrosion.
13.0 STORAGE
13.1 The Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper
storage of equipments, where sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All
equipments during storage shall be protected against damage due to acts of
nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment
manufacturer/Owner shall be strictly adhered to.
14.0 CABLING MATERIAL
14.1 CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS
14.1.1 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the
cable and conduit schedule.
14.1.2 The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely
attached to the cable conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire
conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power
cables and of circular shape for control cables.
14.1.3 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with
cable route marker marker made of galvanised iron plate.
14.1.4 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with
an additional inscription “Cable joints”.
14.1.5 The cable route marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be
spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall
be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
14.1.6 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the
equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each
duct/conduit entry and at each end & turning point in cable tray/trench runs.
Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centres,
control and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable identification, where
a number of cables enter together through a gland plate.
14.2 Cable Supports and Cable Tray Mounting Arrangements

14.2.1 The Contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/walls
to secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel
structures.
14.2.2 The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
14.2.3 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to
be supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all
other places these will be at an interval of 2000 mm.
14.3 Cable Termination and Connections
14.3.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance
with cable and termination kit manufacturer’s instructions, drawing and/or as
directed by the Owner.
14.3.2 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering,
drilling, cutting, taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable
terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.
14.3.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be in the scope of Contractor.
14.3.4 The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for
cables/conduit entry. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland
plates, painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.
14.3.5 Control cable cores entering control panel/switch-gear/MCCB/MCC/

miscellaneous panels shall be neatly bunched, clamped and tied with nylon
strap or PVC perforated strap to keep them in position.
14.3.6 The Contractor shall tag/ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as
instructed by the Owner. In panels where a large number of cables are to be
terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may
include the complete cable number as well.
14.3.7 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
14.3.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof.Unused
openings shall be effectively closed.
14.3.9 Double compression type nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 10
microns) brass cable glands shall be provided by the Contractor for all power
and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.
14.3.10 The cable glands shall conform to BIS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy
duty brass casting, machine finished and nickel plated, to avoid corrosion and
oxidation. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of
tested quality. Cable glands shall be of approved make.
14.3.11 The cable glands shall also be suitable for dust proof and weather proof
termination. The test procedure, if required, has to be discussed and agreed to
between Owner and cable gland manufacturer.
14.3.12 If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found
unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the
Contractor, as directed by the Owner.
14.3.13 Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make.

14.3.14 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solder less crimping type conforming to IS-
8309 & 8394. Bimetallic lugs shall be used depending upon type of cables
used.
14.3.15 Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory

compound. The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided.
14.4 Storage and handling of Cable Drums
14.4.1 Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved

manner and rolling of drums shall be avoided as far as possible. For short
distances, the drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in
proper direction as marked on the drum.
15.0 DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
15.1 The Contractor shall construct the cable trenches requried for directly buried
cables. The scope of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand
bedding, soil cover, supply and installation of brick or concrete protective
covers, back filling and ramming, supply and installation of route markers and
joint markers. The Bidder shall ascertain the soil conditions prevailing at site,
before submitting the bid.
15.2 The cable (power and control) between LT station, control room, DG set
building and fire lighting pump house shall be laid in the buried cable
trenches. In addition to the above, for lighting purpose also, buried cable
trench can be used in outdoor area.
15.3 Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided
wherever required. The voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the
marker.
16.0 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
16.1 Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays while
cabling in switchyard area shall be done on angles in the trench.
16.2 All cables from bay cable trench to equipments including and all interpole
cables (both power and control) for all equipment, shall be laid in PVC pipes
of minimum 50 mm nominal outside diameter of class 4 as per IS 4985 which
shall be buried in the ground at a depth of 250mm below finish formation
level. Separate PVC pipes shall be laid for control and power cables. Cable
pull boxes of adequate size shall be provided if required. For vertical runs on
equipments, perforated cable trays shall be provided for all equipments
under scope of the contract or any equipment to be provided by the owner
(including for owner supplied circuit breakers).

16.3 Cables shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through
the pipe insert embedded in the floor. In the case of equipments located away
from cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the floor connecting
the cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small,
notch/opening on the wall shall be provided. In all these cases necessary
bending radius as recommended by the cable manufacturer shall be
maintained. Embedded pipes shall be dressed properly at the equipment
termination points.
16.4 Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of
metal primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic
medium) followed by two finishing coats of aluminium paint. The red oxide
and zinc chromate shall conform to IS:2074.
16.5 Suitable arrangement should be used between fixed pipe / cable trays and
equipment terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated.
16.6 Power and control cables in the cable trench shall be laid in separate tiers. The
order of laying of various cables shall be as follows, for cables other than
directly buried.
a) Power cables on top tiers.
b) Control instrumentation and other service cables in bottom tiers.
c) For cabling from control room to switchyard in main cable trench,
cable shall be laid such that bottom tiers are preferably filled first and
top tiers are kept for filling future cables as per the instructions of
Engineer-In- Charge.
16.7 Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three
times the diameter of cable between trefoil centre lines. All power cables shall
be laid with a minimum centre to centre distance equal to twice the diameter
of the cable of higher size of cables.
16.8 Trefoil clamps for single core cables shall be of pressure die cast aluminium
(LM-6), Nylon -6 or fibre glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts,
bolts, washer etc. These are required at every 2 metre of cable runs.
16.9 Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self
locking type nylon ties with deinterlocking facility at every 5 metre interval
for horizontal run. Vertical and inclined cable runs shall be secured with 25
mm wide and 2 mm thick aluminium strip clamps at every 2m.
16.10 Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The
permissible limits are as follows :
Table of Cable and Minimum bending radius
Power cable 12 D
Control cable 10 D
D is overall diameter of cable

16.11 Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, these shall be laid in
reinforced spun concrete or steel pipes buried at not less than one metre depth.
The size of hume/steel pipe shall be such that approximately 70% area is only
occupied. For meeting future requirement, additional hume/steel pipe shall be
laid for future bay provision.
16.12 In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable
one (for LT cables)/two (for H.T. cables) straight through joints to be made in
case the cable develop fault at a later date.
16.13 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using
straight through joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called
for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the Owner. If straight
through joints are unavoidable, the Contractor shall use the straight through
joints kit of reputed make.
16.14 Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient
lengths so that changing of termination in terminal blocks can be done without
requiring any splicing.
16.15 Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of
the station, wherever required by the Owner.
16.16 Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two metres while pulling cables.
16.17 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to
avoid damage due to twist, kinks, sharp bends, etc.
16.18 Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage. In cable vault, fire resistant
seal shall be provided underneath the panels.
16.19 Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in

accordance with IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
16.20 Wherever cable pass through floor or through wall openings or other
partitions, GI/PVC wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal
surface so as not to damage the cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly
sealed by the Contractor at no extra charges.
16.21 Contractor shall remove the RCC/Steel trench covers before taking up the
work and shall replace all the trench covers after the erection-work in that
particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be taken up
for some time.
16.22 Contractor shall furnish three copies of the report on work carried out in a
particular week, indicating cable numbers, date on which laid, actual length
and route, testing carried out, terminations carried out, along with the marked
up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection drawing wherever any
modifications are made.
16.23 Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an
interval of 10 m.
16.24 In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the
Contractor shall repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Owner. In
case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced by a
healthy cable at no extra cost to the Owner, i.e. the Contractor shall not be
paid for installation and removal of the damaged cable.
16.25 All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and
reliable connections. The Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable
lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating tape, sleeve or paint.
16.26 Cable trays
i) The cable trays shall be of G.S.sheet and minimum thickness of sheet shall
be 2mm.
ii) The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection to ensure that material
and workmanship are according to the relevant standards. Contractor shall
have to demonstrate all tests as per specification and equipment shall comply
with all requirements of the specification.
a) Test for galvanising (Acceptance Test)

The test shall be done as per approved standards.
b) Deflection Test : (Type Test)
A 2.5 metre straight section of 300mm, 600mm wide cable tray shall be
simply supported at two ends. A uniform distributed load of 76 kg/m shall be
applied along the length of the tray. The maximum deflection at the mid-span
shall not exceed 7mm.
16.27 Conduits, Pipes and Duct Installation
16.27.1 Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes,flexible
conduits, hume pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials such as
tees, elbows, check nuts, bushing, reducers, enlargers, coupling cap, nipples,
gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc as specified and to be shown in detailed
drawing. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be selected on the basis of 40% fill
criterion.
16.27.2 Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the
conduits at site. Cold bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall
be made smooth without leaving any sharp edges. Anticorrosive paint shall be
applied at all field threaded portions.
16.27.3 All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The
fabrication and installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in
the scope of work by Contractor.

16.27.4 Installation of optical cables/ special cables: GI pipe (light grade) of suitable
size (minimum 25 mm) along with required bends, joints etc. shall be used for
special cables such as cables for visual monitoring system (VMS), substation
automation system (SAS). Further, single pipe can be used for laying multiple
cables.
16.27.5 When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running
threads equal to twice the length of coupling shall be provided on each conduit
to facilitate easy dismantling of two conduits.
16.27.6 Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of

special approved type of earthing clamps. GI pull wire of adequate size shall
be laid in all conduits before installation.
16.27.7 Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the
drawings such that it can be identified at each end.
16.27.8 Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm.
16.27.9 Conduit run sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end.
16.27.10 Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for
connection. Flexible conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end with
the help of bushings. Bushings shall have rounded edges so as not to damage
the cables.
16.27.11 Where embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination
dimensions shown on the drawings, if any, shall be taken to represent the
position of the straight extension of the conduit external to and immediately
following the bend. At least one half of the arc length of the bend shall be
embedded.

16.27.11 All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cables are pulled.
After cables are pulled, the ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved
manner to prevent damage to threaded portions and entrance of moisture and
foreign material.
16.27.12 For underground runs, Contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary.
16.27.13 Contractor shall supply, unload, store and install conduits required for the lighting
installation as specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the
installation complete, including but not limited to pull out boxes, ordinary and
inspection tees and elbow, checknuts, male and female bushings (brass or
galvanised steel), caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings
,pull boxes, conduits terminal boxes, gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal
boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the Contractor. The
conduit fittings shall be of the same material as conduits.
16.27.14 All unarmoured cables shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to
lighting fixtures, receptacles etc.
16.27.15 Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected by the Contractor during detailed
engineering.
16.27.16 Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns, beams
and walls. Unnecessary bends and crossings shall be avoided to present a neat
appearance.
16.27.17 Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs
and 1000mm for vertical runs.
16.27.18 Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets
by saddles or U- bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely
fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete or brick work by grouting or
by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonary or concrete for
conduit support is not acceptable.
16.27.19 Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement.
In fixing embedded conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care should be
taken to avoid any injury to the inner surface of the conduit.

16.27.20 Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete
between them.
16.27.21 Where conduits are placed alongwith cable trays, they shall be clamped to
supporting steel at an interval of 600mm.
16.27.22 For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-
base compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary
to support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.
16.27.23 Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from
trapped condensation.
16.27.24 Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300mm away from hot
pipes, heating devices etc. when it is evident that such proximity may reduce
the service life of cables.
16.27.25 Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or
where long run of exposed conduits are installed, so that temperature change
will cause no distortion due to expansion or contraction of conduit run.
16.27.26 For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to
facilitate wiring.
16.27.27 Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a
lock nut inside and outside the box.
16.27.28 Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust
proof by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White
lead issuitable for application on embedded conduit and red lead for exposed
conduit.
16.27.29 Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit
diameter. All bends shall be free of kinks, indentations of flattened surfaces.
Heat shall not be applied in making any conduit bend. Separate bends may be
used for this purpose.
16.27.30 The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be
electrically continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used,
suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to ensure a continuous
ground circuit.

16.27.31 After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air
before pulling in the wire.
16.27.32 Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the
main conduit run.
16.28 Cable Sealing System
Modular multi-diameter cable sealing system consisting of frames, blocks and

accessories shall be installed where the underground and over ground cables enter
or leave concrete bay kiosks/switchyard panel room & control rooms in the
substations. Cable sealing system shall consist of multi-diameter type peel-able or
adjustable blocks of different sizes to suit the various cables. It should be simple,
easy and quick to assemble & re-assemble the cable sealing system. Solid blocks
shall not be used on frame. Frames & stay-plate material shall be of galvanized
steel and for compression, single piece wedge with galvanized steel bolts shall be
used. 30% spare blocks on the frame shall be provided for expansion in future.
Cable sealing system should have been tested for fire/water/smoke tightness.
Cable sealing system having earthing strip can alternately be used in place of
cable gland arrangement for indoor panels such as LCC, C&R, PLCC panels
etc.
17.0 LIGHTING JUNCTION BOX
a) The Contractor shall supply and install junction boxes complete with
terminals as required. The brackets, bolts, nuts, screws etc required for
erection are also included in the scope of the Contractor.
b) Junction boxes having volume less than 1600 cubic centimeters may be
installed without any support other than that resulting from connecting
conduits where two or more rigid metallic conduits enter and accurately
position the box. Boxes shall be installed so that they are level, plumb and
properly aligned to present a pleasing appearance.
c) Boxes with volumes equal to or greater than 1600 cubic cm, and smaller
boxes terminating on less than two rigid metallic conduits or for other
reasons not rigidly held, shall be adequately supported by auxiliary steel of
standard steel shapes or plates to be fabricated and installed. The
Contractor shall perform all drilling, cutting, welding, shimming and
bolting required for attachment of supports.
18.1 An indicative list of tests for testing and commissioning is given below.
Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialities of the items as
per the field Q.P./instructions of the equipment Contractor or Owner without any
extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall arrange all equipments instruments
and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning of equipments alongwith
calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Owner for
approval.
18.2 GENERAL CHECKS
(a) Check for physical damage.
(b) Visual examination of zinc coating/plating.
(c) Check from name plate that all items are as per order/specification.
(d) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals using torque
wrenches.
(e) For oil filled equipment, check for oil leakage, if any. Also check oil level
and top up wherever necessary.
(f) Check ground connections for quality of weld and application of zinc rich
paint over weld joint of galvanised surfaces.
(g) Check cleanliness of insulator and bushings.
(h) All checks and tests specified by the manufacturers in their drawings and
manuals as well as all tests specified in the relevant code of erection.
(i) Check for surface finish of grading rings (Corona control ring).
(j) Pressure test on all pneumatic lines at 18.5 times the rated pressure shall be
conducted.
18.3 STATION EARTHING
a) Check soil resistivity
b) Check continuity of grid wires
c) Check earth resistance of the entire grid as well as various sections of the
same.
d) Check for weld joint and application of zinc rich paint on galvanised
surfaces.
e) Dip test on earth conductor prior to use.

18.4 ‘MOOSE’ ACSR STRINGING WORK, TUBULAR BUS WORK(NOT
APPLICABLE FOR TEHTA) AND POWER CONNECTORS
a) Physical check for finish
b) Electrical clearance check
c) Testing of torque by torque wrenches on all bus bar power connectors and
other accessories.
d) Millivolt drop test on all power connectors.
e) Sag and tension check on conductors.
18.5 ALUMINIUM TUBE WELDING
a) Physical check
b) Millivolt drop test on all joints.
c) Dye penetration test & Radiography test on 10% sample basis on weld
joints.
d) Test check on 5% sample joints after cutting the weld piece to observe
any voids etc.
18.6 INSULATOR
Visual examination for finish, damage, creepage distance etc.
18.7 All pre/commissioning activities and works work for substation equipment
shall be carried out as per specifications.

ANNEXURE “A”
Testing Procedure for ACSR ‘MOOSE’ Conductor
1.0 UTS Test on Stranded Conductor
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two

places on a sample of conductor of minimum 5 m length suitably compressed
with dead end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate
upto 80 kN and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted
due to Relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be increased at
a steady rate to 161.2 kN and held for one minute. The applied load shall then
be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
2.0 Corona Extinction Voltage Test
Two samples of conductor of 5m length shall be strung with a spacing of 450

mm between them at a height not exceeding 8.0 m above ground. This
assembly shall be tested as per Annexure-C, Corona extinction voltage shall
not be less than 320 KV (RMS) Line to ground.
3.0 Radio Interference Voltage Test
The sample assembly similar to that specified under (2.0) above shall be tested
as per Annexure - C . Maximum RIV level (across 300 ohm resistor at 1 MHz)
at 305 KV (RMS) line to ground voltage shall be 1000 micro volts.
4.0 D.C Resistance Test on Stranded Conductor
On a conductor sample of minimum 5 m length two contact clamps shall be

fixed with a pre-determined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a
Kelvin double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero metre and
subsequently one metre apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and
the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value
at 20°C as per clause no. 12.8 of IS:398 (Part V)-1982. The resistance
corrected at 20°C shall conform to the requirements of this specification.
5.0 Chemical Analysis of Zinc

Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically
analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this
specification.
6.0 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Steel
Samples taken from the Aluminium ingots/coils/strands shall be

chemically/spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the
requirements stated in this specification.
7.0 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc.
Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The inspector
shall visually check for scratches, joints, etc. and that the conductor generally
conform to the requirements of this specification. The length of conductor wound
on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter during rewinding.
8.0 Dimensional Check for Steel and Aluminium Strands.
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform
to the requirements of this specification.
9.0 Check for Lay-ratios of various Layers.
The lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked to ensure that they conform to
the requirements of this specification and clause no. 9.4 and 9.5 of IS-398 (Part -
V) 1982.
10.0 Galvanising Test
The test procedure shall be as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall

conform to the requirements of this specification.
11.0 Torsion and Elongation Tests on Steel Strands
The test procedures shall be as per relevant clause of IS:398 (Part V), 1982. In
torsion test, the number of complete twists before fracture shall not be less than
18 on a length equal to 100 times the standard diameter of the strand before
stranding & 16 after stranding. In case test sample length of less or more than 100
times the standard diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twist will be
proportionate to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be
rounded off to next

higher whole number. In elongation test, the elongation of the strand shall not be
less than 4% for a gauge length of 200 mm.
12.0 Breaking load test on welded Aluminium strand:
Two Aluminium wires, shall be welded as per the approved quality plan and shall
be subjected to tensile load. The welded point of the wire shall be able to
withstand the minimum breaking load of the individual strand guaranteed by the
bidder.

ANNEXURE “B”
Testing procedure for Galvanised Steel Earthwire
1. UTS TEST
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earthwire shall be marked at two places on
a sample of earthwire of minimum 5m length suitably compressed with dead end
clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at steady rate upto 34 KN and
held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to relative
movement of strands. Thereafter, the load shall be increased at a steady rate of
68.4 KN and held for one minute. The earthwire sample shall not fail during this
period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached
and value recorded.
2. D.C. RESISTANCE TEST
On an earthwire sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed

with a predetermined Bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin
double-bridge by placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one
meter apart. the test shall be repeated at least five times and the average value
recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20°C shall conform
3. Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of earthwire
Earthwire drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The inspector
shall visually check for joints, scratches etc. and see that the earthwire generally
conforms to the requirements of this specification. The length of earthwire wound
on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter during rewinding.
4. TORSION AND ELONGATION TESTS
The test procedure shall be as per relevant clause of IS:398 (Part-V). The
minimum number of twists which a single steel strand shall withstand during
torsion test shall be eighteen for a length equal to 100 times the standard diameter
of the strand. In case the test sample length is less or more than 100 times the
standard diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be
proportionate to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be
rounded off to next higher whole number. In

elongation test, the elongation of the strand shall not be less than 64% or a gauge
length of 200 mm.
5. DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform
6. LAY LENGTH CHECK
The lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of
this specification.
7. GALVANISING TEST
The test procedure shall as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall conform
8. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ZINC USED FOR GALVANIZING
Samples taken from zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically analysed.

The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification.
9. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL
Samples taken from steel ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/

spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements
stated in this specification.

ANNEXUR
E-C CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST
1. General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated
connectors, where applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by
observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling
power frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage
(RIV).
2. Test Levels:
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction
voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification.
3. Test Methods for RIV:
3.1 RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International
Special-Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1(1993) Part -
1. The measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5
Mhz but other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the
measuring frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication
No. 107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.
3.3 In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be
provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fittings of identical type
supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the
actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure
that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest
ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be
measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, 115% and 130%
of the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The
specified RIV test voltage for 400 kV, 220 KV is listed in the detailed
specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent
device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration

procedure of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the
ratio of voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noisel meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona
The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus,
connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described
above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a
search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test
voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values.The test voltage shall
be raised to 130% of RIV test voltage and maintained there for five minutes. In case
corona inception does not take place at 130%, test shall be stopped, otherwise test
shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until all visible
corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times with corona
inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction voltage
for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of
the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity) disappears.
Photographs with laboratory in complete darkeness shall be taken under test
conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, 115% and 130%. Additional
photographs shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two
views shall lbe photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA
daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or
equivalent. The photographic process shall be such that prints are available for
inspection and comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation.
Photographs shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to
show corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors. The
photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no
cut-off.
In case corona inception does not take place at 130%, voltage shall not be increased
further and corona extinction voltage shall be considered adequate.
4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additonal photograph shall be taken
from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test object
to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.
4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be
taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test
equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points
equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides.
Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations

shall be provided to indicate camera positions and angles. The precise location of
camera shall be approved by Purchaser’s inspector, after determining the best camera
locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona.
4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out
simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels.
4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time
duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the sample
between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction
voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of Purchaser’s inspector if, in his
opinion, it will not prejudice other test.
5. Test Records:
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified
as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report:
a) Background noise before and after test.
b) Detailed procedure of application of test voltage.
c) Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each level.
d) Results and observations with regard to location and type of
interference sources detected at each step.
e) Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100
microvolts in each direction.
f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall
be recorded.

ANNEXURE – D
(A) SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 400kV GANTRY STRUCTURE
(B) SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 220 kV GANTRY STRUCTURE

(C) SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 132 kV GANTRY STRUCTURE
However, the above details shall be finalized during detail engineeineering after order.

17. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.0 GENERAL :
1.1 The instrument transformers and accessories shall conform to the latest version of
the standards specified below except to the extent explicitly modified in the
specification and shall be in accordance with the requirements in specification
and as per following IEC/ISS:
Current Transformers IEC: 61869-1 & 61869-2 or

(CT): IS: 2705 Part-1 to 4
Capacitive Voltage IEC: 61869-1, 61869-5 & IEC-60358 or
Transformers (CVT): IS-3156 Part-1 to 4
Inductive Voltage IEC: 61869-1 & 61869-3 or
Transformers (IVT): IS-3156 Part-1 to 3
1.2 The instrument transformers shall be complete with its terminal box and a
common marshalling box for a set of 3 instrument transformers.
1.3 The instrument transformer tank along with top metallics shall be hot dip
galvanized.
1.4 The impregnation details along with tests/checks to ensure successful completion
of impregnation cycle shall be furnished for approval.
1.5 The instrument transformers shall be designed for use in geographic and
meteorological conditions as given in specification.
2.0 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES :
The features and constructional details of instrument transformers shall be in

accordance with requirements stipulated here under :
2.1 Bushing/Insulators:
a) Instrument transformers shall be of 245kV / 145 kV class, oil filled/SF6 gas

filled, with shedded porcelain/composite bushings/Insulators suitable for
outdoor service and upright mounting on steel structures.
b) Bushings/Insulators shall conform to requirements stipulated in

specification. The bushing/insulator for CT shall be one piece without any
metallic flange joint.
c) Bushings shall be provided with oil filling and drain plugs, oil sight glass of
CT & IVT and for electromagnetic unit of CVT, etc. The bushing/insulator
of instrument transformer shall have a cantilever strength of not less than
350 kg for 245 k V/ 145 kV Instrument transformers or as per the value
obtained vide Chapter-GTR, whichever is higher. Oil filling and drain plugs
are not required with SF6 gas filled CT/IVT.
d) Instruments transformers shall be hermetically sealed units. Bidder/

Manufacturer shall furnish details of the arrangements made for the
sealing of instrument transformers (along with the bid).
Bidder/Manufacturer shall also furnish the details of site tests to check the

effectiveness of hermetic sealing for approval.
e) Polarity marks shall indelibly be marked on each instrument

transformer and at the lead terminals at the associated terminal block.
f) In case of SF6 filled CTs/Inductive VTs, it shall be provided with a suitable

SF6 gas density monitoring device, with NO/NC contacts to facilitate the
remote annunciation and tripping in case of SF6 leakage. Provisions shall
be made for online gas filling. Suitable rupture disc shall be provided to
prevent explosion.
g) The instrument transformers shall be complete with its terminal box and a
common marshalling box for a set of 3 instrument transformers.
h) The external surface of instrument transformer, if made of steel, shall be

hot dip galvanized or painted as per Section-GTR. External surface of
aluminum can have natural finish.
i) The impregnation details alongwith tests/checks to ensure successful

completion of impregnation cycle shall be furnished for approval
2.2 Terminal box/Marshalling box :
Terminal box shall conform to the requirements of specification.
2.3 Insulating Oil :
a) Insulating oil to be used for instrument transformers shall be of EHV grade

and shall conform to IS-335 / IEC - 60296 (required for first filling). Non–
PCB based synthetic insulating oil conforming to IEC 60867 shall also be
used in the capacitor units of CVT.
b) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-60376, 60376A and 60376B and shall
be suitable in all respects for use in the switchgear under operating
conditions.
2.4 Name Plate :
Name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of
manufacture. The rated current, extended current rating in case of current
transformers and rated voltage, voltage factor in case of voltage transformers
shall be clearly indicated on the name plate. The rated thermal current in case of
CT shall also be marked on the name plate.
The intermediate voltage in case of capacitor voltage transformer shall be

indicated on the name plate.
3.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS :
a) Current transformers shall have single primary either ring type, or hair pin type
and suitably designed for bringing out the secondary terminals in a weather
proof (IP 55) terminal box at the bottom. PF (Tan Delta) Terminal for
measurement of tan delta and capacitance of the unit shall be provided. These
secondary terminals shall be terminated to stud type non disconnecting
terminal blocks inside the terminal box. These secondary terminals shall be

terminated to stud type non disconnecting terminal blocks inside the terminal
box. In case “Bar primary” inverted type current transformers are offered the
manufacturer will meet following additional requirements :
(i) The primary conductor shall preferably be of bar type meeting the
desired characteristics.
(ii) The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing

a uniform equipotential surface for even electric field distribution.
(ii) The lowest part of the insulation assembly i.e. insulation at neck shall
be properly secured to avoid any risk of damage due to transportation
stresses.
(iii) The upper part of insulation assembly resting on primary bar shall be
properly secured to avoid any damage during transportation due to
relative movement between insulation assembly & top dome.
(iv) Nitrogen if used for hermetic sealing (in case of live tank design)
should not come in direct contact with oil.
Bellows made of stainless steel shall be used at the top for hermetic
sealing of CT.
(v) Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend whether any special storage

facility is required for spare CT.
b) Different ratios specified shall be achieved by secondary taps only and

primary reconnection shall not be accepted.
c) Core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or other
equivalent alloys. The cores used for protection shall produce undistorted
secondary current under transient conditions at all ratios with specified CT
parameters.
Core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or

other equivalent alloys. μ metal or nano-crystalline core can also
be used for metering cores.
d) The expansion chamber at the top of the porcelain insulators should be

suitable for expansion of oil.
e) Facilities shall be provided at terminal blocks in the marshalling box for star
delta formation, short circuiting and grounding of CT secondary terminals.
f) Current transformer’s guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be

intended as simultaneous for all cores.
g) For 245kV / 145 kV class CTs, the rated extended primary current shall be
120% (or 150% if applicable) on all cores of the CTs as specified in the
specification.
h) For 245kV /145 kV current transformer, characteristics shall be such as

to provide satisfactory performance of burdens ranging from 25% to 100%
of rated burden over a range of 10%/ 5% to 100%/ 120% of rated current in

case of metering CTs and up to the accuracy limit factor/knee point voltage
in case of relaying CTs.
i) The current transformer shall be suitable for horizontal transportation. It

shall be ensured that the CT is able to withstand all the stresses imposed on
it while transporting and there shall be no damage in transit the Contractor
shall submit the details of packing and transportation design to the
Employer for review
j) For 245kV /145 kV CTs the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be
less than five (5) for metering core. If any auxiliary CTs/reactor are used in
the current transformers then all parameters specified shall have to be met
treating auxiliary CTs as an integral part of the current transformer. The
auxiliary CTs/reactor shall preferably be inbuilt construction of the CTs. In
case these are to be mounted separately these shall be mounted in the
central marshalling box suitably wired up to the terminal blocks.
k) The wiring diagram plate for the interconnections of the three single phase
CTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box. The Bidder/Manufacturer
shall strictly adhere to it and deviations, if any, in this regard shall be
brought out with justification for Purchaser’s review.
l) The current transformers should be suitable for mounting on lattice support

structure to be provided by the Contractor in accordance with stipulations
of specification.
m) The CT shall be designed as to achieve the minimum risks of explosion in

service. Bidder/Manufacturer shall bring out in his offer, the measures
taken to achieve this.
n) 245kV /145 kV current transformers shall be suitable for high speed auto
reclosing.
4.0 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS :
a) 245kV /145 kV Voltage transformers shall be capacitor voltage divider

type with electromagnetic units and shall be suitable for carrier coupling.
b) Voltage transformers secondaries shall be protected by HRC cartridge type

fuses or MCBs for all the windings. In addition fuses/MCBs shall be
provided for the protection and metering windings for fuse monitoring
scheme. The secondary terminals of the IVTs/ CVTs shall be terminated to
the stud type non - disconnecting terminal blocks in the individual phase
secondary boxes via the fuse/MCBs. .
c) CVTs shall be suitable for high frequency (HF) coupling required for power
line carrier communication. Carrier signal must be prevented from flowing
into potential transformer (EMU) circuit by means of a RF choke/reactor
suitable for effectively blocking the carrier signals over the entire carrier
frequency range i.e. 40 to 500 KHz. Details of the arrangement shall be
furnished along with the bid. H.F. terminal of the CVT shall be brought out
through a suitable bushing and shall be easily accessible for connection to
the coupling filters of the carrier communication equipment, when utilised.
Further earthing link with fastener to be provided for HF terminal.

d) The electromagnetic unit comprising compensating reactor, intermediate
transformer and protective and damping devices should have separate
terminal box with all the secondary terminals brought out.
e) The damping device which should be permanently connected to one of the

secondary windings, should be capable of suppressing the ferroresonance
oscillations.
f) The accuracy of 0.2 on secondary III should be maintained through out the
entire burden range upto100VA for 245 KV CT’s and upto 50 VA for 145
kV CVTs on all the windings without any adjustments during operation.
g) 245kV /145 kV CVTs/IVTs shall be suitable for mounting on tubular GI

pipe/Lattice structure in accordance with stipulations of specification or
approved by BSPTCL.
h) It should be ensured that access to secondary terminals is without any

danger of access to high voltage circuit.
i) A protective surge arrester shall be provided if required to prevent

breakdown of insulation by incoming surges and to limit abnormal rise of
terminal voltage of shunt capacitor/primary winding, tuning reactor/RF
choke etc. due to short circuit in transformer secondaries. Alternate
arrangement shall also be acceptable.
j) The wiring diagram for the interconnection of the three single phase CVTs
/IVTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box in such a manner that it
does not deteriorate with time. The Bidder/Manufacturer shall strictly
adhere to it and deviations, if any, in this regard shall be brought out with
justification for Purchaser’s review.
5.0 TERMINAL CONNECTORS :
The terminal connectors shall meet the requirements as given in specification.
6.0 TESTS :
6.1 In accordance with the requirements in specification, Current and Voltage

Transformers should have been type tested and shall be subjected to routine tests
in accordance with IEC:44-1/IS:2705 and IEC:186/IS:3156 respectively.
6.2 The test reports of the type tests and the following additional type tests shall also
be submitted for the Purchaser’s review.
The test reports of type tests, as applicable, as per IEC-61869-2 for CT, IEC-
61869-5/IEC-60358 for CVT, and IEC-61869-3 for IVT and following
additional tests shall be submitted for the Employer’s review. The type tests for
which the procedure is under consideration as per above said IEC is not
required to be considered.
a) Current transformers :
i) Radio interference test as per Annexure-A of specification.
Corona test as per GTR and RIV test as per IEC-61869-1.

ii) Seismic withstand test as per Annexure-B of specification.
iii) Thermal stability test, i.e. application of rated voltage and rated
extended thermal current simultaneously by synthetic test circuit. for
145kV and above voltage rating (not applicable for SF6 filled CT).
iv) Thermal co-efficient test i.e. measurement of tan delta as a oo

function of temperature (at ambient and between 80 C & 90 C) and
voltage (at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1 Um/√3) for 145kV and above voltage
rating (not applicable for SF6 filled CT).
v) The current transformer shall be subjected to Fast Transient test by

any one of the following two methods given below to assess the CT
performance in service to withstand the high frequency over voltage
generated due to closing & opening operation of isolators.
Alternatively, method as per IEC:44-1 may be followed:
vii) Transmitted over voltage test for 145kV and above voltage rating
viii) Mechanical test (with minimum Cantilever load as per clause no.
2.1.c) for 145kV and above voltage rating
ix) Internal Arc fault test for 145kV and above voltage rating (not
applicable for CT with Polymer Insulator)
x) Enclosure tightness test at low & high temperature for SF6 filled CT
of 145kV and above voltage rating
xi) Gas dew point test for SF6 filled CT
xii) Corrosion test for 145kV and above voltage rating
Method I: 600 negative polarity lightning impulses chopped on crest will be

applied to current transformer. The opposite polarity amplitude must be limited to
50% of crest value when the wave is chopped. Impulse crest values will be 1000
kVp for 420 kV CTs. One impulse per minute shall be applied and every 50
impulse high frequency currents form the windings and total current to earth will
be recorded and be compared with reference currents recorded applying one or
more (max 20) reduced chopped impulses of 50% of test value.
Oil samples will be taken before and 3 days after the test. Gas analysis must not
show appreciable rate of increase in various gases related with the results of the
analysis performed before test.
Total sum of crest values of current through secondaries must not exceed 5% of
the crest value of total current to earth. CT must withstand dielectric tests after
this test to pass the test.
Method II : 100 negative polarity impulses with a rise and fall time of less than
0.25 microsecond having 950 kV for 420 kV CT corrected to atmospheric
condition shall be applied at one minute interval and total current through
insulation of earth will be recorded. The amplitude of first opposite polarity
should be limited to 50% of the chopped impulse crest value. Voltage and total
current wave shapes shall be recorded after every 10 impulses, and will be
compared with reference wave shapes recorded before test at 50% of test values.

Oil sample shall be taken before and 3 days after the test and CT shall be deemed
to have passed the test if the increase in gas content before and after test is not
appreciable.
The current transformer shall be subjected to Multiple chopped impulse test (not
applicable for SF6 filled CT) to assess the CT performance in service to
withstand the high frequency over voltage generated due to closing & opening
operation of isolators. The method as per IEC: 61869-1 may be followed with
the application of 600 chopped impulses
b) Capacitive Voltage Transformers (CVT):
i) High frequency capacitance and equivalent series resistance measurement

(as per IEC-60358)
ii) Seismic withstand test (as per Annexure-B of Section-GTR) or IEC-62271-

2 (with Seismic acceleration requirement as per Annexure-II of this
specification/Section-Project) for 145kV and above voltage class.
iii) Stray capacitance and stray conductance measurement of the low voltage
terminal (as per IEC-60358)
iv) Corona test as per Annexure-A of Section-GTR for 420kV and above
voltage rating.
v) RIV test as per IEC-61869 or as per Annexure-A of Section-GTR for

145kV and above voltage rating. However, RIV level shall be as specified
at Annexure-II of this specification.
vi) Transmitted over voltage test for 145kV and above voltage rating
vii) Mechanical test (with minimum Cantilever load as per clause no. 2.1.c) for
72.5kV and above voltage rating
viii) Determination of Temperature coefficient for 145kV and above voltage

rating
ix) Tightness design test of capacitor units for 145kV and above voltage rating
x) Corrosion test for 145kV and above voltage rating
xi) The Ferro-resonance type test shall be carried out on the complete CVT
c) Inductive Voltage Transformers (IVT):
i) Seismic withstand test (as per GTR) or IEC-62271-2 (with Seismic

acceleration requirement as per Annexure-II of this specification/Section-
Project) for 145kV and above voltage rating.
ii) Corona test as per GTR for 420kV and above voltage rating.

ii) RIV test as per IEC-61869 or as per Annexure-A of Section-GTR for
145kV and above voltage rating. However, RIV level shall be as specified
at Annexure-II of this specification.
iii) Multiple chopped impulse test with application of 600 chopped impulses
for 145kV and above voltage rating (not applicable for SF6 filled CT).
iv) Transmitted over voltage test for 145kV and above voltage rating
v) Mechanical test (with minimum Cantilever load as per clause no. 2.1.c) for
72.5kV and above voltage rating
vi) Enclosure tightness test at low & high temperature for SF6 filled CT of
145kV and above voltage rating
vii) Gas dew point test for SF6 filled
viii) Corrosion test for 145kV and above voltage rating
ix) Measurement of Capacitance and Dielectric dissipation factor for 145kV

and above voltage rating
6.3 The current and voltage transformer shall be subjected to the following
routine/site tests in addition to routine tests as per relevant IEC/IS.
a) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS :
ROUTINE TESTS:
i) Measurement of Capacitance.
ii) High voltage power frequency withstand test on Secondary Winding.
iii) Over-voltage inter turn test (as per BS:3938).
iv) Oil leakage test.
v) Measurement of tan delta at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1 Um/√3.
vi) Measurement of partial discharge shall be carried out as per IEC.
SITE TESTS:
Dissolved gas analysis to be carried out at the time of commissioning. CTs

must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom of the
CT without exposure to atmosphere. Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend
the frequency at which oil samples should be taken and norms for various
gases in oil after being in operation for different durations.
Bidder/Manufacturer should also indicate the total quantity of oil which can
be withdrawn from CT for gas analysis before refilling or further treatment
of CT becomes necessary.
For SF6 filled CTs:
i) Dew point measurement

ii) SF6 alarm/ lockout check.
iii) SF6 gas leakage test: Gas leakage rate shall be maintained within 0.2% per
annum.

b) VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS:
i) Capacitance and loss angle measurement before and after voltage test (as per
IEC:358).
ii) Partial discharge test on capacitor dividers (as per IEC-358).
iii) Sealing test (as per IEC-358).
Routine tests on CVT/IVT shall be done in line with IEC-61869-3/61869-5.
7.0 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT:
Bidder shall include in his proposal mandatory spares as mentioned in the Bidding
Documents.
8.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :
Major technical parameters for 245kV/ 145kV/ 36kV Instrument Transformers are
enclosed at Annexure-I and Annexure-II to this specification.
9.0 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
9.1 An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional
test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the
equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The
Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests
alongwith calibration certificates at his own cost.
9.2 Current Transformers
(a) Insulation Resistance Test for primary and secondary

(b) Polarity test
(c) Ratio identification test - checking of all ratios on all cores by primary
injection of current
(d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
(e) Magnetizing characteristics test
(f) Tan delta and capacitance measurement
(g) Secondary winding resistance measurement
(h) Contact resistance measurement (wherever possible/accessible)
(i) Test for SF6 (for SF6 filled CTs) – Dew point measurement, SF6 alarm/
lockout check
(j) DGA test of Oil
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) shall be carried out twice within the first year
of service, first within the first month of commissioning/charging and
second between six months to one year from the date of
commissioning/charging.

CTs/IVTs must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom of
the CT/IVT without exposure to atmosphere. Manufacturer shall recommend the
frequency at which oil samples should be taken and norms for various gases in oil
after being in operation for different durations. Bidder/Manufacturer should also
indicate the total quantity of oil which can be withdrawn from CT for gas analysis
before refilling or further treatment of CT becomes necessary.
Bidder shall supply 2 nos. oil sampling device for every 20 nos. oil filled CT
supplied with a minimum of 2 nos. oil sampling device for each substation.
9.3 Inductive Voltage Transformers/Capacitive Voltage Transformers
(a) Insulation Resistance test for primary (if applicable) and secondary winding
(b) Polarity test
(c) Ratio test
(d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
(e) Tan delta and capacitance measurement of individual capacitor stacks and
(i) HV - HF point
(ii) HF Point - Ground point of Intermediate Transformer.
(iii) HV - Ground point of Intermediate Transformer primary winding
(f) Secondary winding resistance measurement
10.0 Defect Liability
The actions required to be taken by contractor in case of defects observed in

CT/CVT of ratings 145kV & above during the warranty period (defect liability
period) shall be as per enclosed Annexure-V of this specification. Further, the
replaced/repaired/refurbished equipment (or part of equipment) shall have
Two (2) years warranty without prejudice to contractual warranty period
(defect liability period).

ANNEXURE - IA
MAJOR TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR CT
S. Description 220kV system 132 kV system 33 kV system
No.
1 System operating voltage(kV) 220 132 33
2 Maximum operating voltage of the system 245 145 36
(kVrms)
3 Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50 50
4 No. of Poles 1 1 1
5 Design ambient temperature (°C) 50 50 50
6 Rated Primary Current (A) 1600 1200/800/600 1200/600
7 Rated extended primary current 120%/150% 120%/150% 120%
8 Rated short time thermal withstand current 40kA/50kA for 1 31.5kA for 1sec 25kA for 3 sec
sec
(as applicable)
9 Rated dynamic current 100kAp/125kAp 80kAp As per IEC
(as applicable)
10 Temperature rise over design ambient As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
temperature
a) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50
microsecond)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) ±1050 ±650 ±170
b) Switching impulse withstand voltage (250/2500
microsecond) (dry and wet)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) -NA- -NA- -NA-
c) One minute power frequency dry withstand
voltage (dry and wet)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) 460 275 70
d) One minute power frequency withstand voltage 5kV 5kV 5kV
between secondary terminals & earth (kVrms)
12 Max. radio interference voltage for frequency 1000 500 -
between0.5 MHz and 2 MHz at (microvolts) at 156kV rms at 92kV rms
13 Minimum Corona extinction voltage (kVrms) -NA- -NA- -NA-
14 Seismic acceleration (Horizontal) 0.3g 0.3g 0.3g
15 Partial Discharge As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
16 Minimum Creepage distance (mm) * 6125 3625 900
17 Number of terminals All terminals of control circuits are to be wired up to
marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly
18 System neutral earthing Effectively Earthed
19 Type of insulation Class-A
* The values indicated are for specific creepage of 25mm/kV. In case of specific creepage of 31mm/kV is
specified, the Minimum Creepage distance values shall be considered proportionately.
For other parameters, refer respective Table for the applicable voltage class of CTs.

ANNEXURE - IB
MAJOR TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR CVT/IVT
S. Description 220kV system 132 kV system 33 kV system
No.
1 Type (CVT/IVT) CVT/IVT CVT/IVT CVT/IVT (PT)
2 Maximum operating voltage of the system 245 145 36
(kVrms)
3 Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50 50
4 No. of Poles 1 1 1
5 Design ambient temperature (°C) 50 50 50
6 System fault level (kA) 40kA/50kA 40kA/ 31.5kA 25kA for 3 sec
for 1 sec for 1sec
(as applicable) (as applicable)
7 Standard reference range of frequencies for 96% to 102% for protection and
which the accuracies are valid 99% to 101% for measurement
8 High frequency capacitance for entire carrier Within 80% to 150% of rated -
frequency range (for CVT only) capacitance
9 Equivalent series resistance over entire carrier Less than 40 Ohms -
frequency range (for CVT)
10 Stray capacitance and stray conductance of HF As per IEC-60358 -
terminal over entire carrier frequency range
(for CVT)
11 Temperature rise over design ambient As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
temperature
a) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50
microsecond)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) ±1050 ±650 ±170
b) Switching impulse withstand voltage
(250/2500 microsecond) (dry and wet)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) -NA- -NA- -NA-
c) One minute power frequency dry withstand
voltage (dry and wet)
i) between line terminals and ground (kVpeak) 460 275 70
d) One minute power frequency withstand
voltage between secondary terminals & earth
(kVrms)
i) between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal 10kVrms for exposed terminals and 4kVrms for
(kVrms) terminals enclosed in a weather proof box
ii) For secondary winding 3kVrms
13 Max. radio interference voltage for frequency 1000 500 -
between0.5 MHz and 2 MHz at (microvolts) at 156kV rms at 92kV rms
14 Minimum Corona extinction voltage (kVrms) -NA- -NA- -NA-
15 Seismic acceleration (Horizontal) 0.3g 0.3g 0.3g
16 Partial Discharge As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
17 Minimum Creepage distance (mm) * 6125 3625 900
18 Rated Total Thermal Burden (VA) 300 VA (100VA/winding) 75 VA
19 Number of terminals All terminals of control circuits are to be wired up to
marshaling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly
20 System neutral earthing Effectively Earthed
* The values indicated are for specific creepage of 25mm/kV. In case of specific creepage of 31mm/kV is
specified, the Minimum Creepage distance values shall be considered proportionately.
For other parameters, refer respective Table for the applicable voltage class of CTs.

ANNEXURE - IC
REQUIREMENTS OF VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
S. No. PARTICULAR 245 KV CVT 145 KV CVT

1. Rated primary 245 145
voltage (kV rms)
2. Type Single phase Electromagnetic or Capacitive VT
3. No. of secondaries 3 Cores
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous
1.5 - 30 seconds
5. Phase angle error ± 10 minutes (For metering core)
6. Capacitance (pf) 4400/ 8800 (As applicable ) 8800
(+ 10% / -5%) (+ 10% / -5%)
7. Core details Core-1 Core-2 Core-3 Core-1 Core-2 Core-3
(secondaries)
a) Voltage Ratio 220/0.11 220/0.11 220/0.1 132/0.11 132/0.1 132/0.1
1 1 1
b) Application Protectio Protectio Metering Protectio Protectio Meterin
n n n n g
c) Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2 3P 3P 0.2
d) Output burden 50 50 50 50 50 50
(VA) (minimum)
ANNEXURE - ID
REQUIREMENTS OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
S. No. PARTICULAR 33 KV PT
1. Rated primary voltage (kV rms) 36
2. Type Single phase PT
3. No. of secondaries 3 Cores

4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous
1.5 - 30 seconds
5. Phase angle error ± 20 minutes (For metering core)
6. Core details (secondaries) Core-1 Core-2 Core-3
a) Voltage Ratio 33/0.11 33/0.11 33/0.11

b) Application Protection Protection Metering
c) Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2
d) Output burden (VA) (minimum) 50 50 50
ANNEXURE - IIA
REQUIREMENTS FOR 245 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER
No. Core Application Current Output Accuracy Minimum Max CT Max.

of No. Ratio Burden Class Knee Pt. Sec. Excitation
Cores (VA) Voltage Winding Current at
(Vk) Resistance Vk (in mA)
(Ohms)
5 1 BUS DIFF 1600- - PX 1600/800 8/4 25 on
CHECK 800/1 1600/1 Tap;
50 on 800/1
Tap
2 BUS DIFF 1600- - PX 1600/800 8/4 25 on
MAIN 800/1 1600/1 Tap;
50 on 800/1
Tap
3 METERING 1600- 20 0.2S - - -
800/1
4 TRANS 1600- - PX 1600/800 8/4 25 on
BACK UP/ 800/1 1600/1 Tap;
LINE 50 on 800/1
PROTN Tap
5 TRANS 1600- - PX 1600/800 8/4 25 on
DIFF/ LINE 800/1 1600/1 Tap;
PROTN 50 on 800/1
Tap
Note: 1. Protection cores shall be of accuracy class PX as per IEC 61869.
2. Metering Core shall be of accuracy class 0.2S as per IEC: 61869
ANNEXURE - IIB
A) REQUIREMENTS FOR 145 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER (600A)
No. of Core Application Current Output Accuracy Minimum Max CT Sec. Max.
Cores No. Ratio Burden Class Knee Pt. Winding Excitation
(VA) Voltage Resistance Current at
(Vk) (Ohms) Vk (in mA)
5 1 BUS DIFF 600- - PX 600/ 6/3/1.5 30 on 600/1
CHECK 300- 300/ 150 Tap; 60 on
150/1- 300/1 Tap
1-1-1-
1

2 BUS DIFF 600- - PX 600/ 6/3/1.5 30 on 600/1
MAIN 300- 300/ 150 Tap; 60 on
150/1- 300/1 Tap
1-1-1-
1
3 METERING 600- 20 0.2S - - -
300-
150/1-
1-1-1-
1
4 TRANS 600- - PX 600/ 6/3/1.5 30 on 600/1
BACK UP/ 300- 300/ 150 Tap; 60 on
LINE 150/1- 300/1 Tap
PROTN 1-1-1-
1
5 TRANS 600- - PX 600/ 6/3/1.5 30 on 600/1
DIFF/ LINE 300- 300/ 150 Tap; 60 on
PROTN 150/1- 300/1 Tap
1-1-1-
1
B) REQUIREMENTS FOR 145 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER (800A)
5 1 BUS DIFF 800- - PX 800/400 8/4 25 on 800/1
CHECK 400/1 Tap; 50 on
400/1 Tap
2 BUS DIFF 800- - PX 800/400 8/4 25 on 800/1
MAIN 400/1 Tap; 50 on
400/1 Tap
3 METERING 800- 20 0.2S - - -
400/1
4 TRANS 800- - PX 800/400 8/4 25 on 800/1
BACK UP/ 400/1 Tap; 50 on
LINE 400/1 Tap
PROTN
5 TRANS 800- - PX 800/400 8/4 25 on 800/1
DIFF/ LINE 400/1 Tap; 50 on
PROTN 400/1 Tap

ANNEXURE - IIC
C) REQUIREMENTS FOR 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER (600A)
3 1 O/C & E/F 600- - PX 600/ 300 4/2 40 on 600/1
300/1 Tap; 80 on
300/1 Tap
2 METERING 600- 20 0.2S - - -
300-
150/1
3 TRANS 600- - PX 600/ 300 4/2 40 on 600/1
DIFF/ LINE 300/1 Tap; 80 on
PROTN 300/1 Tap

D) REQUIREMENTS FOR 145 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER (800A)
3 1 O/C & E/F 1200- - PX 1200/ 12/6 30 on
600- 600 1200/1 Tap;
300/1 60 on 600/1
Tap
2 METERING 1200- 20 0.2S - - -
600-
300/1
3 TRANS 1200- - PX 1200/ 12/6 30 on
DIFF/ LINE 600- 600 1200/1 Tap;
PROTN 300/1 60 on 600/1
Tap

ANNEXURE - III
Actions required in case of defects observed during warrantee period
 Replaced/Repaired/Refurbished Equipment (or part of equipment) shall have 2

years warranty without prejudice to contractual warranty period.

18. Sub-Station Structure

SECTION: STRUCTURE
Table of contents
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES NOT COVERED IN

STANDARDISED LIST
3.0 DESIGN DRAWINGS, BILL OF MATETRIALS AND DOCUMENTS
4.0 FABRICATION, ERECTION, PROTO-ASSEMBLY
5.0 BOLTING
6.0 WELDING
7.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS
8.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURE
9.0 GROUTING
10.0 GALVANISING
11.0 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
12.0 INSPECTION BEFORE DISPATCH
13.0 TEST CERTIFICATE
14.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENT
15.0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SECTION: STRUCTURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The scope of specification covers fabrication, proto-assembly, supply and erection of
galvanised steel structures for towers, girders, lightning masts and equipment support
structures. Towers, girders and lightning masts shall be lattice type structure fabricated from
structural steel conforming to IS 2062 (latest). All equipment support structures shall be
fabricated from GI pipe conforming to YST 22 or of higher grade as per IS 806.
Line diagrams of Towers, girders, Lightning mast, equipment support structures for standard
400kV/220kVstructures are enclosed with the tender document.The fabrication drawings
alongwith BOM shall be provided to the successful bidder after the award. Contractor shall
only use these standard drawings for fabrication. Support structure for circuit breaker is not
standardized and shall be designed by the Contractor and approved by the owner. Any other
structures of 400kV/220kV class necessary to suit the layout for a particular substation to
complete the work in all its requirements shall be designed by the owner at detailed
Engineering stage. Any other structure necessary to suit the layout for a particular substation
to complete the work in all respect shall be designed by the contractor at detailed Engineering
stage and shall be submitted to employer for approval.
It is the intent of the owner to provide structures which allow interchangeability of

equipments at a later stage. Accordingly equipment support structure standardization has
been carried out with the provision of stool. Stools shall be provided by the Contractor
between the equipment and its support structure to match the bus bar height. The top of stool
shall be connected to the equipment and the bottom of the stool shall be connected to the
support structure. Details of the stools shall be submitted to Owner for approval.
The scope shall include supply and erection of all types of structures including bolts, nuts,
washers, hangers, shackles, clamps anticlimbing devices, bird guards, step bolts, inserts in
concrete, gusset plates, equipment mounting bolts, structure earthing bolts, foundation bolts,
spring washers, fixing plates, ground mounted marshalling boxes (AC/DC Marshalling box &
equipment control cabinets), structure mounted marshalling boxes and any other items as
required to complete the job.
The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates and embedded
anchor/foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor/foundation bolts shall be fully
galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 610 gm/sq.m for anchor bolts /
foundation bolts and for structural members. One additional nut shall be provided below the
base plate which may be used for the purpose of leveling.
Suitable modification shall be carried out in the drawings of equipment support structures by
the Contractor in order to suit fixation of accessories such as marshalling boxes, MOM
boxes, Control Cabinets, Junction box, surge counter, etc. in the standard structure fabrication
drawings. Drawings of fixing of such accessories shall be submitted by the Contractor for
approval.
2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES

(To be referred only for structures to be designed by the Contractor)
2.1 For design of steel structures loads such as dead loads, live loads, wind loads etc. shall be
based on IS:875, Parts I to V.

2.2 For materials and permissible stresses IS:802, Part-I, Section-2 shall be followed in
general. However, additional requirements given in following paragraphs shall be also
considered.
2.3 Minimum thickness of galvanized tower member shall be as follows :

Members Minimum thickness
(mm)
Leg members, Ground wire
Peak members/Main members 5
Other members 4
Redundant members 4
2.4 Maximum slenderness ratios for leg members, other stressed members and redundant
members for compression force shall be as per IS-802.
2.5 Minimum distance from hole center to edge shall be 1.5 x bolt diameter. Minimum
distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5 x bolt diameter.
2.6 All bolts shall be M16 or higher as per design requirement.
2.7 Step Bolts

In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided with
climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with M16 step bolts 175mm long spaced
not more than 450mm apart, staggered on faces on one leg extending from about 0.5
meters above plinth level to the top of the tower. The step bolt shall conform to IS: 10238.
2.8 Design Criteria

a) All structures shall be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, live loads,
wind loads as per code IS:875, seismic forces as per code IS:1893 (latest),Importance
factor of 1.5, loads due to deviation of conductor, load due to unbalanced tension in
conductor, torsional load due to unbalanced vertical and horizontal forces, erection
loads, short circuit forces including “snatch” in the case of bundled conductors etc.
Short circuit forces shall be calculated considering a fault level of 40 kA, 50kA, 63kA
or as applicable. IEC-60865 may be followed for evaluation of short circuit forces.
b) Switchyard gantry structures shall be designed for the two conditions i.e. normal
condition and short circuit condition. In both conditions the design of all structures
shall be based on the assumption that stringing is done only on one side i.e. all the
three (phase) conductors broken on the other side. Factor of safety of 2.0 under
normal conditions and 1.5 under short circuit condition shall be considered on all
external loads for the design of switchyard structures.
c) Vertical load of half the span of conductors/string and the earth wires on either side of
the beam shall be taken into account for the purpose of design. Weight of man with
tools shall be considered as 150 kgs. for the design of structures.
d) Terminal/line take off gantries shall be designed for a minimum conductor tension of
4 metric tonnes per phase for 400 kv and 2 metric tonnes per phase for 220 kv, 1

tonne per phase for 132 kV or as per requirements whichever is higher . The distance
between terminal gantry and dead end tower shall be taken as 200 metres. The design
of these terminal gantries shall also be checked considering +/- 30 deg deviation of
conductor in both vertical and horizontal planes. For other gantries the structural
layout requirements shall be adopted in design.
e) The girders shall be connected with lattice columns by bolted joints.
f) All Pipe support used for supporting equipments shall be designed for the worst
combination of dead loads, erection load. Wind load/seismic forces, short circuit
forces and operating forces acting on the equipment and associated bus bars as per
IS:806. The material specification shall be as per IS:1161 read in conjunction with
IS:806.
g) If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/towers, then the proper loading for
the same shall be considered while designing. Also holes for fixing the brackets for
luminaries should be provided wherever required.
h) Foundation bolts shall be designed for the loads for which the structures are designed.
i) Height of Lightning masts shall be as per approved structure layout and designed for
diagonal wind condition. Lightning masts shall be provided with plateforms for
mounting lighting fixtures and a structural steel ladder within its base up to the level
of plateform. The ladder shall be provided with protection rings. The platforms shall
also have protection railing. The details of lighting fixtures would be as per the
approved drawings.
3.0 DESIGN DRAWINGS, BILL OF MATETRIALS AND DOCUMENTS
3.1 FOR STANDARD STRUCTURES

3.1.1 Towers, girders, lightning masts, equipment support structures etc of 400/220kV class
have all been standardized by the owner and fabrication drawings (structure assembly
drawing) alongwith Bill of Material shall be provided by the owner for all these standard
structures to the successful bidder after the letter of award based on which structures shall
be supplied.
Replacing MS section with higher section or replacing MS section with HT section
of same size due to non availability of particular section shall not require employer’s
approval and this can be done without any additional financial implication to the
employer.
3.1.2 Contractor shall however not be relieved of his responsibility for the safety of the structure
and good connections and any loss or damage occurring due to defective fabrication,
erection or workmanship shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.2 FOR STRUCTURES DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish design, drawing and BOMs and shop manufacturing drawings
for every member to the owner after award of the Contract. The design drawing should
indicate not only profile, but section, numbers and sizes of bolts and details of typical
joints. In case owner feels that any design drawing, BOM are to be modified even after its

approval, Contractor shall modify the designs & drawings and resubmit the design
drawing, BOM as required in the specification.
3.2.2 The fabrication drawings to be prepared and furnished by the Contractor shall be based on
the design approved by the owner. These fabrication drawings shall indicate complete
details of fabrication and erection including all erection splicing details and typical
fabrication splicing details, lacing details, weld sizes and lengths. Bolt details and all
customary details in accordance with standard structural engineering practice whether or
not given by the owner. The fabrication drawings shall be submitted to the owner. Proto
shall be made only after approval of fabrication drawings.
3.2.3 Such approval shall, however, not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety
of the structure and good connections and any loss or damage occurring due to defective
fabrication, design or workmanship shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.3 The Mass fabrication work shall start only after the final approval to the proto corrected
Fabrication drawing is accorded by the owner. Protoassembly shall be required to be
carried out only for those structures that have not been proto-assembled by the same
fabricators for this contract or for earlier contracts from BSPTCL. Wherever proto-
assembly is not to be repeated, proto-corrected drawings shall be submitted directly with a
note on the drawing stating that proto-assembly has been carried out under a particular
previous contract.
4.0 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
4.1 The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in accordance with IS
802. A reference however may be made to IS 800 in case of non-stipulation of some
particular provisions in IS 802. All materials shall be completely shop fabricated and
finished with proper connection material and erection marks for ready assembly in the
field.
4.2 The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor
otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specified camber, if any, is provided.
In order to minimize distortion in member the component parts shall be positioned by
using the clamps, clips, dogs, jigs and other suitable means and fasteners (bolts and welds)
shall be placed in a balanced pattern. If the individual components are to be bolted,
paralleled and tapered drifts shall be used to align the part so that the bolts can be
accurately positioned.
4.3 Sample towers, beams, lightning masts and equipment support structures may be trial
assembled in fabrication shop in order to ensure fitment of various members and to avoid
problems during erection. The proto shall be inspected and cleared by Contractor based on
the approved fabrication drawing before mass fabrication. Owner may opt to witness such
trial assembly.
For all structures, B.O.Ms along with proto corrected fabrication drawings shall be
prepared and submitted to owner as document for information. Such BOM, which shall be
duly certified by the Contractor for its conformity to the drawings issued by Owner, shall
be the basis for owner to carry out inspection.
4.4 The Contractor should arrange on his own all plant and equipment, welding set, tools and
tackles, scaffolding, trestles equipments and all other accessories and ancillaries required
for carrying out erection without causing any stresses in the members which may cause

deformation and permanent damage. Minor modification, if any, required during erection
shall be done at site with the approval of Engineer – incharge.
5.0 BOLTING
i) Every bolt shall be provided with a washer under the nut so that no part of the threaded
portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
ii) All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanised.
iii) 2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.
iv) In case of fasteners, the galvanizing shall confirm to IS-1367(Part 13). The spring washer
shall be electro galvanized as per Grade IV of IS-1573.
6.0 WELDING
The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings which shall clearly indicate
various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of weld, whether shop
or site weld etc. Symbols for welding on erection and shop drawings shall be according to
IS:813. Efforts shall be made to reduce site welding so as to avoid improper joints due to
constructional difficulties.
7.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS

7.1 Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and elsewhere shall
be embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is cast. The Contractor shall
ensure the proper alignment of these bolts to match the holes in the base plate.
7.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all steel work
on site to ensure that the towers/structures are plumb.
7.3 All foundation bolts for lattice structure, pipe structure are to be supplied by the
Contractor.
7.4 All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanised so as to achieve 0.61 kg. per Sq.m. of Zinc
Coating as per specifications.
7.5 All foundation bolts shall be provided with two no. standard nuts of class 5 confirming to
IS:1363/1367/6639, one check nut of class 4 confirming to IS:1364, one anchore plate at
the bottom of foundation bolt and one plain washer.
7.6 All foundation bolts shall conform to IS 5624 but the material, however shall be MS
conforming to IS:2062.
8.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURE

The Supplier shall be responsible for the stability of the structure at all stages of its
erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of temporary
bracings and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and also to loads due to erection
equipment and their operations.
9.0 GROUTING
The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of owner and shall
be such as to ensure a complete uniformity of contact over the whole area of the steel base.
The Contractor will be fully responsible for the grouting operations.
10.0 GALVANISING
10.1 All structural steel works and pipe supports shall be galvanised after fabrication. The
galvanization shall be done as per requirement of IS 4579.
10.2 Zinc required for galvanising shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer. Purity of zinc
to be used shall be 99.95% as per IS:209.

10.3 The Contractor shall be required to make arrangement for frequent inspection by the
owner as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of the owner, if so
desired for fabrication work.
11.0 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

The touch up primers and paints shall consist of Red Oxide / Zinc chromate conforming to
the requirements of IS:2074 with a pigment to be specified by the owner.
Minor defects in hot dip galvanized members shall be repaired by applying zinc rich
primer and two coats of enamel paint to the satisfaction the employer before erection.
12.0 INSPECTION BEFORE DISPATCH

Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected as per approved quality plans and
certified by the owner or his authorised representative as satisfactory before it is
dispatched to the erection site. Such certification shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility regarding adequacy and completeness of fabrication.
13.0 TEST CERTIFICATE

Copies of all test certificates relating to material procured by the Contractor for the works
shall be forwarded to the owner.
14.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

The measurement of the standard lattice and pipe structures for towers, beams, equipment
support structure etc. shall be made in numbers for each type of structures. This will
include foundation bolts and nuts and therefore no separate payment shall be made for the
same. The unit rate quoted for each type of structure shall be inclusive of supply,
fabrication, galvanizing, erection, nuts, bolts, wastages etc. complete. Nothing extra shall
be payable for substitution necessitated due to non-availability of sections indicated in the
standard drawing. Nothing extra shall be payable for modifications or steel added to suit
the contractors fixing arrangements for accessories etc.
The measurement of the non-standard lattice and pipe structure of tower structure, beam,
equipment structure etc. shall be measured in MT including the weight of foundation bolt.
. The unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of supply, fabrication, galvanizing, erection, nuts,
bolts, (excluding foundation bolts), washers, wastages etc complete.
15.0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The Contractor shall strictly follow at all stages of fabrication, transportation and erection
of steel structures, raw materials and other tools and tackles, the stipulations contained in
Indian Standard Code for Safety during erection of structural steel work-IS:7205.
18.0 All tests mentioned in standard field quality plans have to be carried out and conformity of
materials and workmanship shall be ascertained.

19. CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS.
1. SCOPE
This section of the specification covers design, manufacture, testing at
manufalcturer's works before despatch followed by supply and delivery of
power connectors, bus bar, clamps etc for 220/132/33 KV or 132/33 KV grid
s/ s complete in all respects.
2. STANDARDS
2.1 The clamps, spacers and connectors covered under this specification shall
conform strictly to the provisions of the following Indian Standard
Specifications as amended up to date except where specified otherwise in
the specification:
a) IS: 5561-1970- Specification for electric power connector.
b) IS:2121-1981- Specification for fitting for Aluminium as amended Part -I &
II and Steel cored Aluminium conductors for over head power lines. up-,to-
date
c) IS:2633-1972- Methods for testing uniformity of coating on Zinc coated
articles.
d) IS:2629-1966- Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising for Iron and
Steel.
e) IS:617-1975- Specification for Aluminium and Alu minium alloy
materials.
I) 1S: 1963-1967- Specification for Steels. g) IS.:1367-1961- Bolts and
Nuts.
3 RATING
3.1 Normal current rating at the specified temperature of 50 degree C shall not be
less than Current rating of moose condicutor
3.2 The minimum rated Short Time Current rating shall be taken as 40 KA for 1 sec
for 220 KV, 31.5 KA for 1 sec for 132 KV and 25 KA for 3 sec for 33 KV
system. The connectors has to withstand the above current successfully for
which test certificates from C.P.R.I, Bangalore or any other testing Laboratory
recognised by Government has to be furnished with the tender. The current
density to be considered in design shall not be more than 1.00 Amp per mm
square.
4. MATERIAL:

4.1 All Aluminium and Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture shall conform
to IS: 617-1975 (as amended upto date).
4.2 All bolts, nuts & washers shall be made from non-magnetic stainless steel and
shall have bright finish: The holes of plain washer shall be reasonably
concentric with outer perphery. All sharp edges shall be removed. Spring
washers shall be supplied in natural finish.
4.3 The materials offered shall be of best quality and workmanship, free of blow holes
and cracks, well finished and of approved design. The materials used in
manufacture of the clamps and connectors should have high current carrying
capacity, high corrosion resi$tar ee. The purity and composition of the materials
shall have to be indicated in the tender. All connectors or its components to be
connected with ACSR conductors shall have Aluminium purity not. less than
99.5% if these are compression type.
All bus bar camp shall be made preferably from forged Aluminium of purity not less than
99.5%. The thickness and-contact surface should be maintained in such way that the
clamp should conform to IS:5561-1970 or any latest revision thereof.
Any terminal connector or its components other than those as mentioned above
shall be manufactured from Aluminium Silicon alloy conforming to designation
A6 of IS:6 17- 1 05O (latest version)
4.4 All ferrous metal parts except those made of stain less steel shall be
protected by hot-dip galvanising in accordance with IS:2629-1966, as
amended uptodate. Spring wsher where used shall be electro galvanised. The
thread in nuts and in tapped holes shall be cut before galvanising and if
required should be re-turned after galvanising.
5 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION:
5.1 The connectors shall be designed and proportioned so that they are capable of
safely with standing' the stresses to which they may be subjected including
those due to short circuits (Dynamic Force upto 300 Kg during short
circuit) and stresses, due to climatic conditions, wind load etc. The effect of
vibration both on the conductor and connectors itself shall be minimum. The
correctors shall be designed, manufactured and finished to avoid sharp radii
of curvature, ridges, exerscences which might lead to localised pressure or
damage to the conductor and connectors in service.

5.2 Supplier should provide Cold Rolled Aluminium Copper, himetalic strip between the
copper and Aluminium portion of the connection. The sheet thickness shall not be less
than 2 mm.
5.3 Sufficient contact pressure should be maintained at the joint by provision of
required number of bolts and nuts and other fixing arrangement. But the
contact pressure should not be so great as to cause relaxation of the joint by
cold flow. The joint should be such that the pressure is maintained within the
range under all conditions of service. To avoid excessive local pressure, the
contact pressure .should be evenly distributed by use of pressure plates,
washers or suitable saddles of adequate area and thickness.
5.4 The current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured such that contact
resistance is reduced to the minimum. The resistance of the joint should be less
than that of an equal length of conductor when measured i11d ivid uwilly. Test
Report showing the mdli volt drop lest and rc sist.irice should be enclosed with the
tender.
5.5 All connectors shall be so designed and manufactured as 10 offer ease of
installation as these are to be used in over head installations. Design of
the connector will be such that full tightening of nuts & bolts should be
possible without the use of double wrench.
The connectors shall be such as to avoid local corona sound or visible
discharge.
6. TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise of power connectors while carrying the rated current shall
not exceed 35 degree C over the ambient temperature of 50 degree C prevailing
in the substation site.
If the ambient temperature exceeds as specified above, the permissible temp rise
shall be reduced by an amount equal to the excess ambient temperature.
7. TEST
Following acceptance tests and routine tests shall be carried out on the clamps
&. connectors as per latest relevant lS in the works of manufacturer/ NABL
accrediated laboratory -. .
a) Routine test: i) Visual Inspection test.
h)Acceptance test: ii) Dimensional check.
a) Tensile test.

b) Resistance test.
c) Dimensional check.
d) Galvanising test.
If the type test from the below mentioned list has already been done & in case
BSPTCL desires to conduct the type test again at any moment of time, the same
has to be done by the vendor/supplier. BSPTCL will pay actual charges subject
to satisfactory test report.
Type Test: i) Tensile test
ii) resistance test
iii) Temperature rise test.
iv) Short time Current test.
v) Salt spray test, .
vi) Galvanising test for Galvanised ferrous items.
vii) Visual Corna discharge test
viii) Dimensional test.
The reports of all the above mentioned tests carried out on each items shall be
submitted for approval.
The Tenderers should have adequate testing facilities at their works to conduct
all acceptance tests and routine tests as required by relevant ISS at their costs.
If the valid type test report of clamp & connectors are not available with the
supplier / vendor, the tenderer have to arrange for type testing of
clamps/connectors before finalisation of the tender at their cost.
Inspection test / Acceptance test in compliance to IS/IEC will have to be
done by the tenderer in NABL/CPRI accredited lab in presence of BSPTCL
authorised representative. These reports will have to be got approved by the
purchaser before supply of materials.
8. DRAWINGS:
8.1 Each tender shall be accompained with six sets of detailed dimensional
drawings of the connectors offered. The drawings should show the elevation,
crossection, longitudinal-section and plan of each item, tendered. The materials
of each part to be manufactured shall be clearly indicated in the drawing.
All dimensions must be in metric units, Schedule of drawings should
accompany the tender.

8.2 The successfull tenderer will have to submit six sets of approved drawings and
manuals for the use of the purchaser.
8.3 Any manufacturing done prior to the approval of the drawings will be at the
suppliers risk. The purchaser shall have the right to request the supplier to
make any change in the design which may be necessary in his opinion to make
the equipments conform to the stated provisions and intent of these
specifications without additional cost to the purchaser.
9. INTERCHANGEABILITY
Corresponding parts of similar clamps & connectors shall be interchangeable
in every respects.
10. INSTRUCTION BOOKS/ CATALOGUES:
Applicable parts list, catalogues, operating and maintenance instructions in
English/Hindi language especially prepared to cover all the equipment
supplied under this specification which many be needed for assembling,
Disassembling, repairs, identification of parts for ordering replacements,
operation and maintenance, shall be collected in a common cover and
submitted in twelve copies for each equipment to the purchaser free of cost.
Such instruction booklelts shall be supplied alongwith despatch of the
equipment.
11. SAMPLES:
BSPTCL on its descretion may request the tenderer to submit sample of each
item before effecting supply and delivery of the ordered quantity of all
items.
12. MARKING:
The equipment shall be eligibly and itidaliably marked with Trade mark of the
manufacturer, country of manufacture and suitable identification mark as
BSPTCL.
All lables to be used on wooden boxes containing the clamp and connectors,
shall be of tin securely bound with wire and shall have the descriptive marking
stamped thereon.

13. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THE CONNECTOR/ P.G.
CLAMPS/ BUS SUPPORT CONNECTORS.
1. Rated current - Equivalent of current rating
of moose conductor.
2. Rated frequency - 50 Hz
3. Rated short time current. Minimum 40 KA for 1 sec
for 220 KV, 31.5 KA for 1
sec for 132 KV and 25 KA
for 3 sec for 33 KV system.
4. Aluminium Alloy to be used must conform to IS617 :1975
(amended up to date)
5. Stainless steel Bolts & NUTs conforming to IS 1363 : 1967 &IS 1367-
1961 (as amended up to
date)
6. Temp. rise of connectors and clamps above 50oC 35oC
ambient temp. shall not exceed
7. Protection against corrosion. All parts shall either be inherently
resistant to atmospheric condition or
suitably protected against corrosion both
during storage and in service.
8. Tensile load Test. A tensile load of 55 kg shall be applied
and the conductor shall be
A) For connector marked in such a way that movement
relative to the connectors shall be tested.
B) For Tension clamps without any subsequent adjustment on the
connector, the load shall be steadily
increased to 110Kg. This load shall be
maintained for one minute. There shall be
no movement of the conductor due to slip
during this one minute period and no
failure of the connector.
9. Material Forged Al. Alloy IS:617-1959 (As
amended upto date)
10. Make of bolts & nuts. Tested Non magnetic stainless steel of

required make.
14. OFFER FOR COMPRESSION TYPE JOINTS/CLAMPS & CONNECTOR
Clamps and connectors may be fixed by means of hydraulic tools with suitable dies. These
dies should be manufactured from heat treated alloy steel. Dies will be supplied in line with
the sizes of the conductors to be used i.e., ACSR "Moose", "Zebra" and "Panther"
conductors. The clamps & connectors should be made of forged Al. alloy suitable to with
stand the load and stresses. Conductivity should not be less than the same conductivity of the
conductor.

20. HARDWARE FITTINGS

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND TERMS & CONDITIONS OF
SUPPLY FOR HARDWARE FITTINGS FOR MOOSE CONDUCTOR
1. SCOPE :
This section of the specification covers the technical specification and other terms &
condition design, manufacture, testing and supply of conductor/Earth wire
accessories and hardware fittings as per details in specification.
2 REQUIREMENTS :
Tenderers should propose only those vendors who are financially sound and have
adequate experience of manufacture and supply of material. They should have their
own manufacturing unit and adequately equipped testing laboratory accredited by
NABL/CPRI .
3 STANDARD :
Design, Manufacture, Galvanized and Testing of conductor/Earth wire Accessories
and hardware fittings shall conform to the following Indian Standard Specification as
amended up to date.
i) IS:2121 – Specification for fittings for Aluminium and Steel cored Aluminium
conductors.
ii) IS:2486 – Specification for insulator fittings for over head power lines.
iii) IS:209 – Specification for Zinc.
iv) IS:2629 - Recommended practice for hot dip galvanized for Iron & Steel.
v) IS:2633 – Method for testing uniformity of zinc coating on hot dip zinc coated
articles.
vi) IS:9708 – Specification for Vibration dampers.
vii) IS:2141 – (Part-II) Mid span compression joint.
viii) IS:2141 – (Part-II) Specification for vibration damper.
4. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
(A) GENRAL REQUIREMENTS
Material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. All casting shall be free
from blow-holes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth, close grained and
of true forms and dimensions. All machined surfaces shall be true, smooth and well
finished. Metal fittings or drop forged steel or heat treated malleable cast iron for
insulator string hardware shall have excellent mechanical and electrical properties,
such as strength, toughness and high corrosion resistance and free from corona
formation. The material employed in the manufacture of accessories, viz aluminum,
aluminum alloys, malleable iron, forged steel and stainless steel depending on the
types of application, shall be corrosion resistant and machinable.Fittings and
accessories shall be supplied complete in all respects, suitable for the proposed
attachment and for the size of conductor and Earth wire for which they are to be
used.All bolts, nuts, screw heads shall be of the whit worth standard thread. Bolt heads
and nuts shall be hexagonal. If required the nuts and tapped holes shall be cut out after
galvanizing and shall be well lubricated/greased. All other threads shall be cut out
before galvanizing. The bolt threads shall be under cut to take care increase in
diameter due to galvanizing. Washers shall be electro galvanized. Bolts, nuts,
washers split pins, security clip etc. shall be supplied as per actual requirement plus
2.5% extra.The general design of hardware shall be such as to ensure uniformity,
high strength, free from corona formation. All hooks, eyes, pins, bolts, suspension
clamps and other fittings for attaching insulators to the towers or to the line

conductors shall be so designed as to reduce to minimum the damage to conductors,
insulators or the fittings arising from the conductor vibrations. Adequate bearing area
between fittings shall be provided and point or line contact shall not be there.All
fittings shall be resistant to atmospheric corrosion and shall be suitably protected
against corrosion both in storage and service.The accessories shall be such as to avoid
local corona formation or discharge likely to cause interference to either sound or
vision transmission. Visible corona voltage of conductor accessories shall be greater
than 11% or maximum line to neutral voltage of the line.
B) CONDUCTOR FITTINGS:
I) Compression type Mid span Joints.
Compression type mid span straight joints offered shall conform to technical
particulars.
II) REPAIR SLEEVES :
Compression type repair sleeves shall be made of extruded aluminium and
shall be suitable to provide reinforcement for conductor with broken or
damaged aluminium strands. The repair sleeves shall be designed to make
good conductor of which not more than 1/6 of the strands in the outer most
layer are damaged/severed. The repair sleeves after compression should
present smooth surface. The repair sleeves shall be so designed that
conductivity of the joint shall not be less that 100% of that of conductor.
Other details will be as per drawings and of technical particulars.
III) PREFORMED ARMOUR RODS:
Helically twisted formed armour rods offered shall be suitable for ACSR
Moose/Panther conductors to provide rigidity an protection to the conductor at
all the suspension points due to vibrations. Armour rods shall be made of
99.6% pure electrolytic Aluminium or Aluminium alloy depending on the type
of construction. The armour rods shall be marked in the centre suitable to
indicate the commencement point of applying armour rods. No joint shall be
permitted in the rods except those made in base rods before drawing. The armour
rods shall be capable or being fixed by hand on the conductor without the aid of
any tools or implements. The direction of spiral shall be the same as that of the
conductor. The wires of the outer most layer of aluminium strands of the
conductor shall have right hand lay. The loading stress of armour rods on the
conductor shall be evenly distributed over the entire length and there shall be no
tendency of loosening at the ends. Preformed armour rods shall not loose their
resilience even after two or three applications. The rods should be capable of
providing high self retaining strength and protection against vibration damage
and fatigue failure of conductor. The ends should be properly ball ended. So that
the danger of corona formation is avoided.
The surface of the armour rods when filled on the conductor, shall be smooth
and free from protection cuts and abrasions etc.
IV) STOCK BRIDGE VIBRATION DAMPERS.

Calculation and complete details of design, weight etc. of the damper shall be
furnished with the tender together with the damping characteristics and energy
dissipation curves of the dampers and guaranteed of their effectiveness for the
specified conductor. For the purpose of these calculations, the design data shall
be given in this specification. The offer is liable to be rejected in absence of the
above details.The vibration damper shall be of approved design. The clamp of
the vibration damper shall be made of aluminium alloy, so designed as to prevent
any damage to or chaffing of the conductor during erection or continued

operation. If there is any chance of the clamp chaffing, the conductor while in
service suitable aluminium liners, shall be provided. The messenger cable shall
be made of high tensile strength steel strands and preformed in order to prevent
subsequent drop of weights in service. The damper weight made of cast iron
shall be attached to messenger cable by approved methods, clamping bolt shall
be provided with self locking nuts. All ferrous parts including the messenger
cable, shall be hot dip galvanized. The ends of the messenger cable shall be
effectively sealed to prevent corrosion. The vibration damper and its attachments
shall have smooth surface, to avoid corona formation. The clamp of the stock
bridge vibration damper shall be so designed that in case of loosening of the bolt
or changing free part of the clamp it does not allow damper to disengage from
the conductor.
C) INSULATOR HARDWARE FITTINGS :
The insulator hardware fittings for suspension and tension towers shall generally
constitute of following components :-
i) Anchor shackle for ball hook for attachment or the suspension strings to tower
hanger and tension strings to tower strain plates.
ii) Suitable yoke assembly for double suspension and double tension fittings.
iii) Suitable arching horns and fittings.
iv) Suspension/tension clamps.
v) Sag adjustment plates for dead end assembly.
vi) Other fittings i.e. eye links, chain link, ball clevises, socket clevis, eye
clavicle, clevises etc.
vii) Bolts and nuts, washers split pins etc
CLAMPS
SUSPENSION CLAMPS
Suspension clamps offered shall be made of high strength aluminium alloy suitable
for use with conductor with armour rod. The design shall be such as to avoid hot
spot, Kicks cuts, Grooves projectors etc. Which are likely to damage conductor or
lead to localized pressure, Clamps shall have satisfactory corona performance, no
sharp radius or curvatures, ridge and excrescence etc, cotter pins, cotter bolts, U.
Bolts, nuts, washers, etc. shall be made of galvanized steel. Split pins of suitable size
and strength shall be made of brass. The clamps shall permit the conductor to slip
before failure of the conductor and shall have sufficient slipping strength to resist
conductor tension under broken wire conditions. It shall have sufficient contact
surface to minimize damage due to fault current.
TENSION CLAMPS :
Tension clamps shall be made of aluminium alloy and shall be of proper type. The
clamps shall not permit, slip of any damage to or failure of the conductor at a load of
less than 95% of the ultimate strength of conductor. Mechanical efficiency of the
clamp shall not be affected by method of erection involved. Come along or similar
clamp during stringing operations.
ARCHING HORN :
The Insulator hardware assembly shall have provision for fixing a set of arcing horns
on the Insulator hardware fittings.
VIBRATION DAMPERS :

Vibration damper shall be of stock bridge type having an aluminium alloy clamp
compressed on the steel messenger strand between counter weights made of cast iron
and shall be suitable for use on the overhead ground wire.
5. RAW MATERIALS :
Procurement of all raw materials for execution of this contract shall be done by the
supplier at their own cost.
6. DRAWINGS :
The tenderer shall submit fully dimensioned drawings to scale indicating the
materials of each part for dimension all under supply. The complete string drawing,
both suspension and tension, shall indicate the over all length with its variations
when subjected to tension as also the sparkover distance. The following arrangement
of complete insulator strings and their component parts shall be clearly indicated.
i) Attachment to the tower hanger or strain plate.
ii) Arcing Horn attachments.
iii) Suitable ball and socket type fittings for interconnecting insulator units to the top
and bottom clamps.
iv) Detailed drawings of suspension and tension clamps indicating design adopted
for preventing damage to the conductor & earthwire.
The material offered shall be in conformity with the purchaser’s drawings attached
with this specification. Any deviation from those drawings conforming to any other
standard quoted by the tenderer will be subject to technical scrutiny by the Purchaser
who shall have every right to accept or reject the same without assigning any reason
thereof.
7. GALVANISING :
All ferrous metal parts except those made of stainless steel shall be galvanized in
accordance with latest issue of IS:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative
standard. The weight of zinc coating shall conform to latest issue of IS:2633. The
zinc used for galvanization shall conform to grade Zn-98 as per latest issue of
IS:209. Spring washers, where used, shall be electro galvanized.
8. INTER CHANGEABILITY :
All hardware fitting and conductor accessories shall be of standard design and made
to gauge of jig and shall be interchangeable in all respects with similar items.
9. TESTS/REPORTS :
Conductor accessories and hardware fittings will be subjected to all tests as per
relevant Indian Standard Specification. The tests will be categorized in three grades,
normally (i) Type Tests (ii) Acceptance Tests and (iii) Routine Tests.
TYPE TESTS :
Type Tests are normally carried out once and is not required to be carried out against
all orders. Tenderers are, therefore to submit along with their offer reports in respect
of Type Tests carried out as per provision of Indian Standard Specification by
NABL/CPRI testing laboratory.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS :
These are such tests which are carried out for acceptance of material. This will
constitute all tests as prescribed in the relevant Indian Standard Specification.
ROUTINE TESTS :
These are such tests which will apply to all fittings.
Reports in respect of all tests carried out during manufacture as per Indian Standard
specification will be submitted to department for approval at the time material is

offered for inspection. Tenderers shall clearly state in their tender about testing
facilities available in the laboratories at their works to confirm their ability to carry
out all tests as per Indian Standard Specification.
Costs in carrying out any/all tests as above will be borne by the tenderer and will be
included in their quoted price.
TECHNICAL PARTICULAR FOR HARDWARE FITTINGS:

1. Technical particular of ACSR Moose/Panther/Zebra conductor and Earthwire for which
accessories and hardware fittings are required.
a) ACSR CONDUCTOR FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
ACSR Moose/Panther/Zebra conductor
b) EARTHWIRE
+ 7/3.00 st conforming in all respect to IS 398
+7/9 SWGGSS Earthwire of 110Kgf/mm2 quality conforming in all respect to
IS:2141
2. Conductor accessories and hardware fitting for ACSR Conductor :-

a) M.S. comp. Joint.
i) Physical Dimension - As per approved drawing
ii) Material specification - -do-
iii) Minimum Failing strength - 100% of UTS of ACSR
conductor.
iv) Slipping strength - 95% of UTS of
conductor.
v) Electrical resistance
Expressed as percentage
Of measured resistance of
Equivalent length of
Conductor. - 75%
b) REPAIR SLEEVE:
i) Physical dimension - As per approved
drawing/type test reports
ii) Material a specification - -do-
iii) Electrical Resistance
Expressed as percentage
of measured resistance of
equivalent length of
conductor - 75%
iv) Minimum failing strength - 95% of U.T.S
of ACSR conductor
c) VIBRATION DAMPER
i) Physical Dimension - As per type test reports
ii) Material – a) Clamp - Aluminium alloy
a) Messenger cable - High strength steel wire.
b) Weight - Cast Iron
iii) Galvaniastion.
a) Spring washers etc. - Electro galvanized.
b) Other ferrous parts - Hot dip galvanised.

iv) SLIP STRENGTH OF DAMPER CLAMP.
a) Before fatigue test - Not less than 250 Kg
b) After fatigue test - Not less than 200 Kg
v) Maximum permissible dynamic
strain on conductor with damper 150 Micro strain
vi) Minimum no. of cycles for
fatigue performance. - Ten Million
vii) Amplitude for fatigue
+1 MM at the highest
resonance frequency.
viii) With velocity range for
effectiveness of the damper - Upto 30 KV
ix) Claimpul torque - Approx 6 Kg meter
x) Normal span - 350 Mtrs
d) Preformed armour rod
i) Physical dimension - as per approved drawing
ii) Reference - -do-
iii) Material - 99.6% Pure electrolytic
Al or A1 alloy.
iv) Tensile strength - 50,000 PSI
v) Conductivity - 39% of inter national
annealed copper strands.
e) Insulator hardware fittings
i) Specification of disc insulator for which Hardware fittings should match
Suspension Tension
i) Type Ball and socket Ball and socket
ii) Ball size 16 mm 16 mm
iii) Disc Size 255 x 145 mm 255 x 145 mm
iv) E.R. Strength 70 KN 90 KN
2. Insulator string Arrangment.
i) Material - As per approved drawing
ii) Dimension - As per approved drawing
iii) String arrangement - As per approved drawing
iv) Mechanical Strength
(E.M Strength) - As per a approved drawing
v) Reference Drawing -
i) Single suspension - As per approved drawing
ii) Double suspension - -do-
iii) Single tension - -do-
iv) Double Tension - -do-
3. CLAMPS.
i) Material - As per approved drawing
ii) Dimension - -do-
iii) Mechanical strength - -do-
iv) Slipping strength
a) Suspension - 25% of UTS of Conductor
b) Tension - 95% of UTS of Conductor
v) Angle of Inclination of
Jumper terminal - 300
3.Accessories and fitting for 7/9 SWG Earthwire.
a) M.S. compression joint.

i) Physical Dimension As per approved drawing
ii) Material As per approved drawing
iii) Minimum Failing strength UTS of 7/9 SWG earth wire of 110 kgf/mm2
quality.
iv) Reference drawing As per approved drawing
b) Vibration dumper.
i) Physical dimension material. As per approved drawing
c) Suspension/Tension clamps with Flexible copper bond for 7/9 SWG earth wire.
i) Physical dimension As per approved drawing
ii) Material -do-
iii) Slipping strength
a) Suspension 25% UTS of E/W
b) Tension 95% UTS of E/W
iv) Minimum Failing load
a) Suspension UTS of E/W
b) Tension UTS of E/W
v) Reference Draiwn.
Suspension clamp - As per approved drawing
Tension clamp -do-

21. POST INSULATOR

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR POST INSULATORS.
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the design manufacture. Testing at manufacturers
works, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of POST INSULATORS for
use in outdoor Grid substations of BSPTCL.
2. STANDARDS :
The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IS: 2544, IEC-60168,
IEC 60273 and IEC-60815 except where specified otherwise in the
specification.
2.1 The minimum rated Short Time Current rating shall be taken as 40 KA for 1 sec
for 220 KV, 31.5 KA for 1 sec for 132 KV and 25 KA for 3 sec for 33 KV
system. The post insulators has to withstand the above current successfully for
which test certificates from C.P.R.I, Bangalore or any other testing Laboratory
recognised by Government has to be furnished with the tender.
3.1. DRAWINGS :
Drawings in quadruplicate incorporating the following particulars shall be
submitted by each tenderer with the tender for the purpose of preliminary
study.
i) General outline drawing showing al dimension, net weights, shipping
weights etc.
ii) A copy of catalogue giving full details for the insulators.
iii) Sectional views showing the general constructional features.
3.2 Within 15 days of the receipt of the order the tenderer shall submit the
following drawings in quadruplicate for approval of the purchaser:
a) Drawing showing details of insulators with dimensions.
b) Assembly drawing showing the complete stacks/erected as desired for
220 KV, 132 kV & 33 KV systems with full dimensions and
accessories.
3.3 Tenderer may furnish any other drawing found necessary in addition to those
stated above.
4. DESIGN AND GENERAL REQUIREMENT:
4.1 The post insulator unit shall have two metal parts, a cap partially embracing
and insulating component and pedestal cemented into a recess in the
insulating component. The cap shall have holes for retaining attachment
bolts may pass.The post insulator one unit or a number of units bolted
together shall be designed to support and insulate high voltage busbars and
isolators. These shall be designed to with stand tensile, torsional cantilever
and compressive loads as specified in this specification.Normally theses
insulators shall be mounted uprist but in some cases other mounting
arrangements may also be required for which the insulator shall also be
designed.
4.2 The insulators shall be fabricated by the wet process. The insulating porcelain
and the metal parts shall be assembled together with such materials and in
such manner that any thermal expansion of the meal and the porcelain part
through out the range of prating temperature shall not lesson the parts or
create under stress adversely effecting the electrical and mechanical strength
specified in the specification.

4.3 The post insulators shall be designed and manufactured in such a
manner that the following are avoided:
a) Stresses due to expansion and contraction which may lead to
deterioration in use.
b) Stress concentration due to direct engagement of the porcelain with
metal fitting.
c) Shapes which do not facilitate easy cleaning by normal methods.
4.4 PORCELAIN:
The porcelain shall be sound, free from defects thoroughly vitrified and
smoothly glazed. The glaze shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover
all the exposed porcelain parts except those areas which serve as supports
during firing or are required to be left unglazed. The unglazed part shall not
have a total area exceeding.
5. MARKING :
Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly market to show the following:
a) Name of trademark of the manufacturer.
b) Month and year of manufacture.
c) Country of manufacture.
Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before
firing. In case in the insulators posses any ISI mark, the same shall also
be printed.
6. CREEPAGE DISTANCE:
The tenderer shall specify in tender the creepage distance of the
insulators.The minimum distance, for insulators is specified in specification.
7. MECHANICAL LOADS:
The insulator shall be suitable for minimum failing loads specified in
specification. Load shall be applied axially to the insulator stanch.
8. TEST:
8.1 TYPE TEST:
Type test are intended to demonstrate compliance of the design of the
insulator with the requirements of specification. An insulator subjected to
type tests may be unsuitable for subsequent use in service. Type tests shall
be made on an insulator that has passed the routine test.
8.2. VISIBLE DISCHARGE TEST (POWER FREQUENCY VOLTAGE)
The test room shall be darkened and a period of five minutes shall be
allowed for the observer to become accustomed to darkness. A power
frequency test voltage specified in specification, shall be applied and
maintained at this value for five minutes. During this test observation shall
be made and there shall be no sign of visible corona.
8.3. IMPULSE VOLTAGE WITH STAND TEST:
The post insulator or post insulator units shall be tested dry with both
positive and negative polarity unless it is known which polarity gives the
lowest withstand value, in which case it is sufficient to test with that polarity.
The value of impulse voltage shall be as specified in specification and shall
be corrected for the atmospheric conditions given at section-III. Five
consecutive impulse voltage waves shall be applied. If flash over or puncture
does not occur, the insulator shall be considered to have passed the test. If
during these five waves puncture occur or if two of the applied waves cause
flashover through air, the insulator shall be considered to have failed. If only
one of applied waves causes flash over through air, ten additional test waves

should be applied. The insulator shall be considered to have passed this test
only if flashover through air/or puncture does not occur for any of these
additional 10 waves.
8.4. IMPULSE VOLTAGE FLASH OVER TEST:
The impulse generator shall be adjusted to deliver the require impulse wave.
The 50 per cent impulse flash over voltage shall then be determined. At least
20 application near the required value shall be made to determine it with
reasonable accuracy. The polarity shall then the reversed and 50 per cent
flashover voltage for the opposite polarity measured in a similar manner.
The insulator shall not be damaged by these tests but slight marking on the
surface of the insulating parts or obippug of the cement used for assembly
shall be permitted.
The impulse flashover voltage to be recorded shall be the positive and
negative 50 per cent impulse flashover voltage measured in accordance with
and corrected in accordance with reference atmospheric condition.
8.5. DRY ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITH STAND TEST:
The post insulator or post insulator units shall be tested at the value of test
voltage specified in section-III. Suitable correction shall be done taking into
account the atmospheric condition. The test voltage shall be applied for one
minute. The insulator shall not flashover or puncture during the test.
8.6 WET ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND TEST:
The test object shall be subjected to a spray of water of prescribed resistivity
given in the characteristics of the spray indicated below. The spray
consisting of small drops shall fall on the test object at an angle of
approximately 450 to the vertical as determined by visual observations, or by
measurements of the vertical and horizontal components of the spray. These
components shall be measured with a collecting vessel having a horizontal
opening of area 100 to 750 Sq. cm. when both vertical and horizontal
components are required, the horizontal components shall be measured with
a collecting vessels having a similar vertical opening, located on the side of
the test object facing the spraying nozzles and as close to the test object as is
possible without collecting splases from it. The test object should be sprayed
for at least one minute before the application of the voltage.
The characteristics of the spray shall be as given below:
Precipitation rate.
(mm/min/vertical component) 3 10%
Resistivity of water
(Ohm. Cm.) 10,000 10%
Temperature of water (0C) Ambient 15
The value of test voltage to be applied has been specified in section-III.
Taking into account the atmospheric conditions, the test voltage shall be
applied for one mounte. The insulator shall not flashover or puncture during
the test.
The test voltaged shall then be gradually increased from about to per cent of
the net one minute withstand voltage value to reach the flashover voltage in
not less than 5 seconds.
8.7 POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE WITHSTAND TEST:
The insulators, after having been cleanded and dried, shall be completely
immersed in a tank containing a suitable insulating medium to prevent
surface discharges on them. If the tank be made of metal, its dimensions
shall be such that the shortest distance between any part of the insulator and
side of the tank is not less than 13 times the diameter of the largest insulator

shed.The test voltage shall be applied between those parts which normally
have the operating voltage between them. During immersion in the insulation
medium precautions shall be taken to avoid air pockets under the sheds of
the insulator. The voltage shall be increased rapidly to the specified dry one
minute power frequency test voltage and then rapidly increased at a rate of
about 100 volts per second until the puncture withstand voltage is reached.
No puncture shall occur at this voltage for the minimum time necessary to
measure it.
8.8 MECHANICAL STRENGTH TEST:
Test post insulator or post insulator units shall be attached to the mounting
face of the testing machine by its normal method of mounting. The
mechanical strength test of the post insulator or post insulator units shall in
general consists of the test given in specification unless otherwise specified
the test given shall be made.
8.9 BENDING TEST:
The load shall be applied to the free end of the post insulator or post
insulator units. The direction of loading shall pass through the axis of the
insulator and shall be at right angles to it. The load shall be applied gradually
starting from a value not greater than half the specified minimum failing load
and shall be increased until the specified minimum failing load is reached.
The insulator shall pass the test if there is no failure it this load.
8.10 TORSION TEST:
The post insulator or post insulator unit shall be subjected to a tensional load
avoiding all bending moment. The torsion test and load shall be applied
gradually starting from a value not greater than half the specified minimum
failing load and failure shall not take place below the specified minimum
failing load. The load may then be increased to the failing load, which may
be noted for information.
8.11 TENSILE OR COMPRESSION TEST:
The post insulator or post insulator units shall be subjected to a tensional or
compression load along its axis. The tensile or compression load shall be
applied gradually starting from a value not greater than half the specified
minimum failing load. The load may then be incensed to the failing load
which may be noted for information.
9. SAMPLE TEST:
Suitable number of individual post insulators and complete units or one unit
solid core shall be subjected to tests as per IS-2544-1973 or any other
equivalent authoritative standard.
The insulators after having withstand the routine test shall be subjected to the
following tests in order as indicated below:
10. VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS:
It shall be verified that the post insulator or post insulator units in accordance
with the relevant drawings tolerance of (0.3d 0.3) mm shall be allowed
for all dimension and the dimension should be in millimeters.
11. TEMPERNTURE CYCLE TEST:
The insulator shall be completely an quickly immersed in a water bath
maintained at a temperature of the degree centigrade given in the table above
that of the cold water and left submerged for T minutes where T (15 0.7M)
M being the mass of the insulator in Kg. It shall then be withdrawn and
quickly and completely immersed without being placed in an intermediate
container in a bath of cold water or the same period to T minutes.

Table Temp, difference in degree.
Volume Temperature Difference T deg. For Thickness Over 40
over 26 up Over 32 up Over 36 up
D2L Up to over 23 to 32 to 36 to 43
23 Up to 26
Up to 0.164 over 60 55 50 45 45 35
0.410/0.164 up to 55 55 55 50 45 40 35
over
0.655/0.410 up to 50 50 50 50 45 35 35
over
0.900/0.655 up to 45 45 45 45 40 35
over
1.105/0.900 up to 40 40 40 40 40 35
over
Over 1.150 35 35 35 35 35 35
L = The greatest external diameter of the insulators.
L = The height of the insulator.
Notes :- The thickness shall be the greatest thickness of the insulator as defind as
the diameter of the biggest section through the axis of the insulator.
12. The completes test shall comprise five transfer cold to hot, hot to cold,
cold to hot, hot to cold, cold to hot. The time taken to transfer the insulator
from one bath to the other shall be as short as possible and shall not
exceed 30 second. The quantity of water in the test tank shall be large
enough not to cause a temperature variation of more than 50 in the water
when the insulator is immersed.
After the completion of immersion, the insulator shall be examined to
verify that the immolating parts have not cracked nor the fittings are
loosened and that the glass is undamaged.
13. POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE WITHSTAND TEST:
The test given in 8.7 shall be carried out. If one or more samples fail to
comply with the requirement of this test, a test in accordance with 16 shall
be made.
14. POROSITY TEST:
Porcelain fragments from the insulator or by agreement from representative
pieces of porcelain fired adjacent to them, shall be immersed in one per
cent alcoholic solutions of funchumim (ig funchsin in 100g of methylated
spirit) under a pressure of notless than 150 Kg/Cm2 for a period such that
the product of test duration in hour and the test pressure in Kg/Cm 2 is not
less than 1800.
The fragments shall then be removed from the solution, washed, grid and
broken, Examination with naked eye of the fresh broken surface shall not
reveal any dye penetration. Ponetration in small cracks formed during the
intial breaking shall be neglected.
15. GALVANISATION TEST:
The galvanized metal fittings of the insulator shall comply with the test
given in IS 728-1956 method of determination of weight thickness and

uniformity of coating on galvanized articles other than wire and sheets. If
one or more samples fail to.
If one or more samples fail to comply with the requirement of this test a
retest in accordance with 2.21.16 shall be made.
16. RETEST AND REJECTION:
If only one insulator or meta part fails to comply with anyone of the tests
given in specification a new quantity equal to twice the first quantity shall
be subjected to retesting. The retesting shall comprise the test in which
failure occurred preceded by those tests which may be considered to have
influenced the result of the original tests. If no failure occurs, the lot shall
be O.K.
If two or more insulators or metal parts fail to comply with any of the tests
given in specification or if any failure occurs on insulators or metal parts
subjected to retesting as in specification, complete lot shall be with drawn
for the further examination by the manufacturer after which the lot or may
part thereof may be resubmitted for tests. The number then selected shall be
three times the first quantity chosen for test. This retesting shall comprise
the test in which the failure occurred preceded by those test which may be
considered to have influenced. There sults or the original tests.
17. ROUTINE TEST:
Routine tests shall be conducted on every insulator as per the order given
below:
18. VISUAL EXAMINATION:
A visual examination of the insulator shall be made. The insulator shall be
free from physical distortion of shape and the vitrified glaze shall be hard
and smooth and free from cracks or any other defect likely to be prejudicial
to satisfactory performance in service, with exception of area serving as
supports during firing are left unglazed for the purpose of assembly the
unglazed face shall not come a total area exceeding.
DL
1+ Cm. Square.
1000
Where D = greatest external diameter.
L = Height of the insulator.
Also the area of any single defect shall not exceed:
DL
0.5 + Cm. Square.
1000
Such unglazed area shall be already shown in the drawing submitted by the
manufacturer.
19. MECHANICAL TEST:
Every post insulator unit shall be subjected to a mechanical test at a load
not less than 10 per cent of the specified tensile failing load of the unit. The
load shall be maintained for at least 3 Sec. minimum without damage to the
insulator or loosening of fitting. Insulators with broker whose metal parts
are fractured or become detached during the test shall be rejected. If it
exceeds 5 per cent of the lot, the lot shall be rejected.
20. ELECTRICAL TEST:

Post insulator unit shall be subjected to the power frequency. The test
voltage shall be such as to produce frequent flashover (every few secs). The
voltage shall be maintained for a minimum period of five minutes or if
failures occur for five minute after the last punctured piece has been
removed. Insulators which
are damaged during the test shall be rejected stream or pattern formed
during electrical tests may be observable, but it shall not disqualify the
insulator for acceptance.
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POST INSULATORS

21. SCOPE :
The section covers the specific technical particulars, system particular suiting to which
the post insulators shall be offered as per the General Technical Specifications given
in Section-II of this specification and schedule of requirements specified herein
22. TYPE AND RATING :
22.1 The insulators offered shall be stacking type post insulator with cap and pedestal
suitable for 220KV, 132KV, 33 KV system.
22.2 The insulators offered shall fulfil the following technical requirements :-
1. Type Stacking type post insulator with cap and

pedestal.
2. System Earthing Effectively Earthed.
3. Rated system frequency 50 CPS
4. Nominal system voltage in KV
(RMS) 33 22
5.Highest system voltage in KV (RMS)

36 24
6. Basic insulation level in KVP 200 170
7. Minium creepage distance in mm
(i) Total 850 430
(ii) Protected 425 215
Cantilever strength in Kg.
(i) Up right 3200 920
(ii) Inverted 1820 680
8. Tensile strength in Kg 9100 4500
9. Torsional strength in Kgfm 520 92
10. Height of each insulator (minimum) 368 254
in mm
11. Bolt circle diameter in mm 127 76
12. Visible discharge test voltage
(Power frequency) in KV (RMS) 27 18
13. One minute power frequency with stand test voltage in KV (RMS)
(i) Dry 130 90
(ii) Wet 85 56
14. Impulse voltage with stand test
voltage in KVP 210 125

3.19.3 Technical Particulars of 33KV Post Insulator's to be used in 132 KV system
Stacking Type
1. Dimensions For 132 KV System
(i) Height of mm for each insulator 368
(ii) Height of insulator stack in mm. (Solid dore) 1472
(iii) Bolt Circle Diameter in mm 127
(iv) Creepage distance in mm
(i) Total 3400
(ii) Protected 1700
(v) Cantilever strangth in kg.
(i) Upright 550
(ii) Inverted 400
(iii) Tensile strength in kg 9100
(iv) Torsional strength 520
(v) Power Frequency flashover Dry 275
Voltage in KV (RMS) Wet 275
(vi) Impulse flash over in KV (peak) 750
(vii) Visible discharge Test Voltage power frequency in
KV (rms) 105
(viii) Number of Insulators to 4 Unit
Be used for stacking type. Stack

Voltage Profile

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Voltage Profile

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Voltage Profile

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIHAR STATE POWER TRANSMISSION COMPANY LTD.

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 1

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 2

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 3

2.1 1 132/33kV New sub-station, Palasi (District Araria)

(g) Fire protection system.

(q) Complete Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) for complete

6.0 Specific exclusions.

8.0 PHYSICAL AND OTHER PARAMETERS

9.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 6

11.0 DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 7

15.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT

Surface Primer coat Intermediate Finish Total dry Colour shade

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 8

Sub Station Automation:

CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

5. Under Frequency relay (with df/dt feature – Separate relay) 1 No.

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL

BREAKER RELAY PANEL

1. DC supply supervision relay 2 no.

Technical Parameters for 50 MVA and 20 MVA, 132/33 kV,3-Phase Two-winding

1.2 Cooling ONAN/ONAF ONAN/ONAF

1.4 Type of transformer Two winding Two winding

1.7 Phases Three Three

- Principal Tap 12.5% 10%

1.9 Service Outdoor Outdoor

1.10 Duty Continuous Continuous

1.13 Temperature rise over

1.17 Tank type Conventional Conventional

1.19 Noise level As per NEMA TR-1 As per NEMA TR-1

Core-1 400/1 400/1 1000/1 1000/1

Core-2 300/1 - 1000/1 -

b) Min. knee point

Core-1 800V 800V 1000V 1000V

Core-2 0.5 Class - 0.5 Class -

Core-1 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms 1.5 ohms

Core-1 REF REF REF REF

Core-2 Metering - Metering -

Core-1 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA

B) 20 MVA,132 /33 kV Two –winding Transformer :

HV Side HV Neutral LV Side LV Neutral

Core-1 200/1 200/1 600/1 600/1

Core-2 150/1 - 400/1 -

b) Min. knee point

Core-1 300V 300V 600V 600V

Core-2 0.5 Class - 0.5 Class -

1.0 AUTOTRANSFORMER / REACTOR FOUNDATION, RAIL TRACK/ ROAD

respective Transformer integrated with the Autotransformer / Reactor foundation to enable

with I.R.C. standard / relevant IS.

Complete foundation shall be made of reinforced cement concrete and shall be

2.0 FIRE PROTECTION WALLS

Fire protection walls shall be provided, if required, in accordance to the Standards

2.2 FIRE RESISTANCE

Technical Specifications for Construction of New Grid Sub-Stations Page | 18

A. Points counts for the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

Sl. No. Type of Telemetry point Qty. Remarks